Professional Documents
Culture Documents
High Pressure Spring Return PDF
High Pressure Spring Return PDF
OLGAS-H-MHP
HIGH PRESSURE SPRING RETURN
HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR
WITH HYDRAULIC MANUAL OVERRIDE
M9899
Acknowledgement 15/1981
Issue
0 13/10/2016
document Belletti A Secchi G
Rev. Date Description Prepared Approved
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
INDEX
1. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SUMMARY TABLE
2. INSTRUCTION AND OPERATING MANUAL
2.1. Actuator
3. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIFFI ELECTRIC
COMPONENTS ENCLOSURE
3.1. Limit Switch Box
4. TECHNICAL DATA SHEET
5. DIAGRAMS
5.1. Operating diagrams
5.2. Wiring diagrams
6. OVERALL DIMENSION
7. ASSEMBLY TABLE AND PARTS LIST
7.1. Table 0A
8. CONTROL SYSTEM
8.1. ECU 1000
8.2. Instruction and operating manual
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
NOTES:
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
Overall dimensions
Operating Diagram
Actuator model
Wiring diagram
Tag number
Item
Q.ty
LV-0301C
OLGAS-H
01 3 LV-0301F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQB007PF
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D OLGAS-H
02 6 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPB029PF
LV-0300E 0.9C-0400-70-CL-MHP
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
OLGAS-H
03 1 LV-0006A SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPE014P0
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
04 1 LV-0006B SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPE014P0
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
05 1 PV-0206 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPA009PF
0.3C-0100-40-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
06 1 PV-0205 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPA008PF
0.3S-008C-35-CL-MHP
PV-0201C
OLGAS-H
07 3 PV-0201F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQC004PF
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0201J
OLGAS-H
08 1 FV-0306 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPB030PF
0.9C-0700-85-CL-MHP
PV-0508C
OLGAS-H
09 3 PV-0508F SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DPD007P0
3C-2000-110-CL-MHP
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
OLGAS-H
10 3 PV-0504F SLASE006 SEAKM006 DQC005PF
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0504J
CFI-001 DW406400_1
11 2 CENTRALE COMUNE CFI SLAPZ030 SEANA018
CFI-002 DW406400_2
OLGAS-H
12 1 LV-0310C SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQB007PF
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
13 1 LV-0310F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQB007PF
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
14 1 LV-0310J SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQB007PF
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
15 1 FV-0311C SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQA001PF
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
16 1 FV-0311F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQA001PF
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
17 1 FV-0311J SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQA001PF
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
18 1 LV-0016 SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQC004PF
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
19 1 FV-0005 SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DQC003PF
1.5C-1200-110-OP-MHP
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
Overall dimensions
Operating Diagram
Actuator model
Wiring diagram
Tag number
Item
Q.ty
LV-0301C
CONTROL CABINET
20 3 LV-0301F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 01
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D CONTROL CABINET
21 6 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
LV-0300E FOR ITEM 02
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
CONTROL CABINET
22 1 LV-0006A SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3474C0
FOR ITEM 03
CONTROL CABINET
23 1 LV-0006B SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3474C0
FOR ITEM 04
CONTROL CABINET
24 1 PV-0206 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 05
CONTROL CABINET
25 1 PV-0205 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 06
PV-0201C
CONTROL CABINET
26 3 PV-0201F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 07
PV-0201J
CONTROL CABINET
27 1 FV-0306 SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 08
PV-0508C
CONTROL CABINET
28 3 PV-0508F SLAHB005 SEAKM004 DW3474C0
FOR ITEM 09
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
29 3 PV-0504F HPU FOR ITEM 10 SLASE006 SEAKM006 DW406500
PV-0504J
CONTROL CABINET
30 1 LV-0310C SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 12
CONTROL CABINET
31 1 LV-0310F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 13
CONTROL CABINET
32 1 LV-0310J SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 14
CONTROL CABINET
33 1 FV-0311C SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 15
CONTROL CABINET
34 1 FV-0311F SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 16
CONTROL CABINET
35 1 FV-0311J SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 17
CONTROL CABINET
36 1 LV-0016 SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3473C0
FOR ITEM 18
CONTROL CABINET
37 1 FV-0005 SLAHE002 SEAKM004 DW3474C0
FOR ITEM 19
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
2.1. Actuator
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
OLGAS
OLGAS-H
SPRING RETURN HIGH
PRESSURE HYDRAULIC
ACTUATOR
MAN 609
Updated applicable
4 18/04/16 regulation (chapter 1.1.1) Ermanni Orefici Vigliano
Added lifting procedure for
3 07/08/13 valve with horizontal axis Ermanni Stoto Vigliano
2 31/07/12 General update Ermanni Stoto Vigliano
1 08/02/10 General update Ermanni Stoto Vigliano
0 05/05/99 Document release Lazzarini Aliani Ziveri
Rev. Date Description Prepared Checked Approved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 General warnings ................................................................ 4
1.1 GENERALITIES .......................................................................... 4
1.1.1 Applicable regulation ............................................................... 4
1.1.2 Terms and conditions .............................................................. 4
1.2 IDENTIFICATION PLATE ........................................................... 5
1.3 INTRODUCING THE ACTUATOR .............................................. 5
1.4 DATA SHEET .............................................................................. 6
2 Installation ........................................................................... 6
2.1 CHECKS UPON ACTUATOR RECEIPT ..................................... 6
2.2 STORAGE ................................................................................... 7
2.3 ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ON THE VALVE ................................. 7
2.3.1 Types of assembly .................................................................. 7
2.3.2 ACTUATOR HANDLING (VALVE STEM WITH VERTICAL
AXIS) ..................................................................................... 12
2.3.3 VALVE STEM WITH HORIZONTAL AXIS ............................ 15
2.4 hydraulic CONNECTIONS ........................................................ 18
2.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS (IF ANY) .................................. 19
2.6 COMMISSIONING .................................................................... 19
3 Operation and use ............................................................. 20
3.1 OPERATION DESCRIPTION .................................................... 20
3.2 RESIDUAL RISKS..................................................................... 21
3.3 OPERATIONS ........................................................................... 21
( refer to specific document: operating diagram furnished ) ............. 21
3.3.1 Emergency manual operation ............................................... 21
3.3.2 Remote control operations .................................................... 23
3.4 CALIBRATION OF THE ANGULAR STROKE .......................... 25
3.5 CALIBRATION OF MICROSWITCHES (biffi limit switch box) ... 29
3.6 CALIBRATION OF THE OPERATION TIME (if required) .......... 31
4 Operational tests and inspections...................................... 32
5 Maintenance ...................................................................... 33
5.1 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 33
5.1.1 Check and restore oil level in the hydraulic control unit ( refer
to chapt. 7.2 table 5 ) ............................................................ 34
5.2 EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE ........................................ 36
5.3 LUBRICATION OF MECHANISM 41
5.4 DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION........................................... 42
6 Troubleshooting ................................................................ 43
6.1 FAILURE OR BREAKDOWN RESEARCH ............................... 43
7 Layouts .............................................................................. 44
7.1 SPARE PARTS ORDER ........................................................... 44
7.2 PARTS-LIST FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPLACING
PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 45
8 Date report for maintenance operations ............................ 52
NOTE:
BIFFI Italia S.r.l pays the highest attention to collecting and verifying the
documentation contained in this user manual. However BIFFI Italia S.r.l. is not
liable for any mistakes contained in this manual, for damage or accidents due to
the use of the latter. The information contained is of exclusive reserved ownership
of BIFFI Italia S.r.l and may be modified without prior notice. All rights reserved.
1 General warnings
The manual is an integral part of the machine, it should
be carefully read before carrying out any operation and
it should be kept for future references.
1.1 GENERALITIES
BIFFI Italia S.r.l actuators are conceived, manufactured and
controlled according to the Quality Control System in compliance with
EN-ISO 9001 international regulation.
1.1.1 Applicable regulation
Biffi Italia srl guarantees that all the items produced are free of
defects in workmanship and manufacturing materials and meet
relevant current specifications, provided they are installed, used and
serviced according to the instructions contained in the present
manual. The warranty can last either one year from the date of
installation by the initial user of the product, or eighteen months from
the date of shipment to the initial user, depending on which event
occurs first. All detailed warranty conditions are specified in the
documentation forwarded together with the product. This warranty
does not cover special products or components not warranted by
subcontractors, or materials that were used or installed improperly or
Scotch-yoke
mechanism
Valve coupling
Hydraulic cylinder
Figure 2 – Identification of actuator parts
2 Installation
2.1 CHECKS UPON ACTUATOR RECEIPT
Check that the model, the serial number of the actuator and the
technical data reported on the identification plate correspond with
those of order confirmation (Sect. 1.2).
Check that the actuator is equipped with the fittings as provided for
by order confirmation.
Check that the actuator was not damaged during transportation: if
necessary renovate the painting according to the specification
reported on the order confirmation.
If the actuator is received already assembled with the valve, its
settings have already been made at the factory.
If the actuator is delivered separately from the valve, it is
necessary to check, and, if required, to adjust, the settings of the
mechanical stops (Sect. 3.4) and of micro-switches (if any) (Sect.
3.5).
2.2 STORAGE
(for handling and lifting procedure, please refer to following
paragraphs : 2.3.2 and 2.3.3)
For coupling to the valve, the housing is provided with a flange with
threaded holes according to Biffi standard tables (SCN6200
SCN6201). The number, dimensions and diameter of the holes are
made in accordance with ISO 5211, but for actuator models 0.3 to 6
the holes are drilled on the centreline in order to allow an easier
assembly of an intermediate flange, when required. This intermediate
flange ( or spool-piece ) can be supplied when the valve flange can
not directly match the actuator flange in its “standard” configuration.
For the biggest actuator models, the actuator flange can be
machined in accordance with the valve flange dimensions.
The yoke has bored with keyways for coupling to the valve stem, the
dimensions of which are according to Biffi standard tables SCN6200
and SCN6201.
If required, for the standard models size 0.3 to 6, Biffi can supply an
insert bush with un-machined bore in accordance with Biffi standard
table SCN6202 enclosed ( see following pages ). On request the
insert bush bore can be machined by Biffi to couple the valve stem,.
The particular execution of the flange and bushing allow the actuator
to be rotated by 90° in 4 different positions accor ding to the following
figure:
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia. All right reserved. Pag. 10
attached on the MHP body); remove the blind plug and restore the
dipstick before operate the actuator with MHP.
The actuator can also be lifted to assemble directly onto the valve
with stem with horizontal axis. To make a correct lifting procedure
proceed as follow:
1) Connect properly the actuator lifting points 1 with chains, and
connect by suitable slings the support brackets 2 and 3
2) Balance the weight and lift the actuator until to make possible the
rotation of actuator in its final mounting position, with cylinder on
top, or spring container placed on top, as showed in the following
images:
4) Lift the actuator near to the valve in such a way that the insert
bush, assembled on the valve stem, enters the actuator drive
sleeve without forcing the coupling . When the insert bush has
entered the actuator drive sleeve, check the holes of the valve
flange. If they do not meet with the holes of the actuator flange or
the stud bolts screwed into them, the actuator drive sleeve must
be rotated; feed the actuator cylinder with air at proper pressure,
indicated on data-sheet for actuator.
5) Tighten the nuts of the connecting stud bolts evenly with the
torque prescribed in the table. The stud bolts must be made of
ASTM A320 L7 steel; the nuts must be made of ASTM A194
grade 2 steel.
6) If possible, operate the actuator to check that it moves the valve
smoothly.
2.4 HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS
Check that the values of hydraulic supply available are
compatible with those reported on the identification
plate of the actuator.
Connect the actuator to the hydraulic feed line with fittings and pipes
in accordance to the plant specifications. They must be sized
correctly in order to guarantee the necessary oil flow for the
operation of the actuator, with pressure drops not exceeding the
maximum allowable value. The shape of the connecting piping must
not cause excessive stress to the inlets of the actuator. The piping
must be suitably fastened so as not to cause excessive stress or
loosening of threaded connections, if the system undergoes strong
vibrations. Every precaution must be taken to ensure that any solid or
liquid contaminants, which may be present in the hydraulic pipe-work
to the actuator, are removed to avoid possible damages to the unit or
loss of performance. The inside of the pipes used for the connections
must be well-cleaned before use: wash them with suitable
substances and blow through them with oil or nitrogen. The ends of
the tubes must be well debarred and cleaned. Once the connections
are completed, operate the actuator and check that it functions
correctly, that the operation times meet the plant requirements and
that there are no leakages in the hydraulic connections.
2.6 COMMISSIONING
Installation, commissioning and maintenance and repair
works should be made by qualified staff.
Any calibration relative to functional aspects of the
actuator are preset at the factory.
Before any modifications please contact BIFFI Italia S.r.l.
Upon actuator commissioning please carry out the following checks:
Check that the values of hydraulic supply available in the system are
compatible with those reported on the identification plate of the
actuator (Figure 2) and on the documentation supplied.
Check the power voltage of electrical components complies with the
one reported on the documentation supplied.
Check the absence of leakages in the cylinder and in hydraulic
connections.
Check that paint is intact and in case renovate it according to the
specification on order confirmation.
Carry out all kinds of operations and check their proper execution
(Sect. 3.3).
Make a complete functional test in order to verify all the operations
are executed according to operating schematic diagram supplied.
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia. All right reserved. Pag. 19
3 Operation
Operation and use
3.3 OPERATIONS
( refer to specific document: operating diagram furnished )
- relief valve to prevent the oil pressure delivered by the hand pump
from exceeding the maximum allowable value
- oil tank.
On request the emergency manual override can be included in the
power pack
materials and protection treatment. The energy supply for the power
pack operation can be electric (direct current or alternate current)
and/or pneumatic (low pressure or high pressure). Hand pump
manual override available on request for oil supply to the actuator in
case of energy supply failure.
The power pack components can be supplied panel mounted or
enclosed into a weatherproof cabinet. Sunshade is also available on
request. Power pack can be supplied separate or assembled onto
the actuator (if the dimensions and the weight allow so).
figures “B”
0200 17 60
0350 17 60
0400 17 60
0700 17 60
1100 17 80
1200 17 80
2000 17 80
2500 17 100
3800 17 100
5100 17 100
5400 17 100
8300 17 100
9600 17 100
9800 17 100
11000 17 100
15000 17 130
15600 17 130
If the index (Picture 12), does not signal the proper position of the
valve but is turned by 90°:
Remove the roll pin placed on the position indicator (index).
Turn the indicator until reaching its proper positioning.
Put the roll pin back in its position.
Position pin
indicator
(index)
5 Maintenance
Before carrying out any maintenance operation, it is
necessary to close the hydraulic feed line and exhaust
the pressure from the actuator cylinder and from the
control unit, to ensure safety of maintenance staff
Installation, commissioning and maintenance and
repair works should be carried out by qualified staff.
5.1.1 Check and restore oil level in the hydraulic control unit (
refer to chapt. 7.2 table 5 )
Bring the adjustment screw back to the maximum (20) to let the
spring loosen.
Seals replacement
2) Clean the groove carefully and lubricate it with a protective oil film.
3) Assemble the new O-ring into its groove and lubricate it with a
protective oil film.
4) Assemble the new Teflon seal ring (51) into the flange groove,
inside its rubber O-ring, by bending it : take care that the bending
radius is as large as possible to avoid damaged the seal. Then
enlarge the seal ring with your fingers so as to restore its round
shape: pay attention not to utilise any tools, which can damage the
seal ring.
Reassemble :
1) Assemble the new gasket (46-48) after cleaning the surfaces of
housing (8), the flange (47) and head flange (34) which are in
contact.
2) Assemble the head flange (34), replace the washers if damaged,
tighten the screws (17) to the recommended torque.
3) Lubricate the piston rod (18) surface, with a protective oil film and
introduce it into the head flange hole, taking care not to damage
the O-ring (48). Carefully clean the threaded end of the piston rod
(18) and the threaded hole of the adaptor bush (33) of guide block
(14). Spread some sealant Loctite 452, or equivalent, on the rod
threaded end and tighten.
4) Carefully clean the inside of the tube (22) and check that the entire
surface, particularly that of the bevels, is not damaged. Lubricate
with a protective oil film the tube internal surface and the bevels at
the ends. Slide the tube onto the piston taking care not to
damaged the Teflon seal ring (53): the tube bevel has to smoothly
compress the seal ring; take care also not to damage the head
flange O-ring (50).
6 Troubleshooting
6.1 FAILURE OR BREAKDOWN RESEARCH
7 Layouts
7.1 SPARE PARTS ORDER
For spare parts order to the relevant BIFFI office please make
reference to BIFFI order confirmation concerning all the supply, and
serial number of the actuator (Sect. 1.2) for any specific spare part
for a specific actuator model.
Please send every spare-parts request to :
Tel. : 0523-944523__________
please specify :
1. actuator model;
2. BIFFI acknowledgement ;
3. spare parts code;
4. quantity;
5. transport condition;
6. involved people.
( on plant ) .…………………….
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
MAN 673
Safety Instruction and Operating Manual
Enclosures Type:
34285-79
34286-79
Updated applicable
4 18/04/2016 regulation (chapter 1.1.1)
Ermanni Orefici
3 12/04/2011 Revision Montagna Alfieri
2 22/11/2007 Revision Montagna Alfieri
1 25/09/2006 Revision Masini Alfieri
0 18/09/2006 Issue document Masini Alfieri
Rev. Date Description Prepared Approved
BIFFI ITALIA has taken every care in collecting and verifying the documentation
contained in this Instruction and Operating Manual.
The informations herein contained are reserved property of BIFFI ITALIA.
INDEX
4 INSTALLATION 5
5 MAINTENANCE 12
5.2 Repairs 13
The devices to which this Instruction and Operating Manual (IOM) applies
are Limit Switch Enclosures Series 34285-79 and Series 34286-79, which
are designed for use on actuators for industrial valves suitable to be installed
on heavy industrial, chemical, petrochemical, plants.
The LSWE are produced by BIFFI ITALIA and identified by Product
designation: LSWE type 34xxxxx
The LSWE leaves the factory in perfect condition. When mounted on the
actuator they are guaranteed by the actuator test certificate. In order to
maintain these characteristics until the LSWE is installed on site, proper
procedures must be taken for preservation during the storage period.
BIFFI LSWEs are weatherproof to IP66/68. IPX8 is rated for a submersion
at a depth of 50 metres for 96 hours. This condition can only be maintained
if the units are correctly installed/connected on site and if they have been
correctly stored. The standard plastic plugs used to close the cable entries
are not weatherproof, they just prevent the entry of undesired objects during
transport.
STORAGE for a BRIEF PERIOD (less than one year):
- if the LSWE are supplied with standard plastic plugs, remove them from
the cable entries and replace them with weatherproof plugs.
STORAGE for a LONG PERIOD (more than one year):
- if the LSWE are supplied with standard plastic plugs, replace them with
weatherproof plugs.
4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Working condition
The LSWE Series 34285-79 are suitable for the following ambient
temperatures:
from -60°C/-40°C/-30°C up to +70°C (*)
The LSWE Series 34286-79 are suitable for the following ambient
temperatures:
from -60°C/-40°C/-30°C up to +65°C (*)
Standard Alternatives
Entry Size
NPT NPT Metric ISO 965
A ¾” 1” ½” M25x1,5
M25x1,5 M32x1,5
B ¾” 1” M25x1,5 M32x1,5
C ¾” 1” M25x1,5 M32x1,5
D ¾” 1” M25x1,5 M32x1,5
Unused entries:
• for explosionproof construction:
unused entries must be plugged with metal explosionproof plugs and blocked
with a thread sealant;
• for weatherproof construction:
replace the plastic standard protection plugs supplied with the LSWE with
metal plugs.
Terminate the ground connections to the ground stud marked. One internal and
one external ground studs are provided. Check the wiring diagram (always
enclosed with the LSWE), to ensure a correct electrical connection. All
terminations should be made with insulated ring or spade connectors using the
appropriate crimping tool. This operation will ensure easy and correct electrical
connection.
The internal terminals of the LSWE are also numbered according to the wiring
diagram. To set the limit switches proceed as follows (see wiring diagram):
Unscrew the clamp screw of the cover. Remove the cover taking care not to
damage the cylindrical and flat coupling surfaces, the O-ring or the gasket.
Bring the valve to the fully open position. Loosen the screw related to the cam,
which actuates the "OPEN VALVE" microswitch.
Set the cam position so as to cause the microswitch operation: after tripping,
turn the operating cam once more and tighten the screw. Bring the valve to the
fully closed position and proceed with the setting of operating cam related to
the "CLOSED VALVE" microswitch with a similar procedure as for "OPEN
VALVE" limit switch setting.
Reassemble the cover and tighten the screws. The limit switches enclosure is
equipped with the indicator, which locates the position of the valve with
reference to the inscriptions "open" and "closed" written on the cover. If
necessary, for a correct indication of the valve position, the indicator can be
turned by 90° with reference to the upper shaft, by removing the pin and
reassembling it in the position at 90°; the cover can also be rotated by 90° with
reference to the box, so that the inscriptions are in the right position, by moving
the position of the reference pin by 90°.
• Replace the weatherproof seals that may have been removed (O-Ring for
the cover, O-Rings for the transmission shaft).
5 MAINTENANCE
5.2 Repairs
When needed, repair must only be carried out with Manufacturer’s original
spare parts.
When needed, repair must only be carried out with Manufacturer’s original
spare parts.
ITEM NUMBER 01 02 03 04 05
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0301C
LV-0300D
Tag number LV-0301F LV-0006A LV-0006B PV-0206
LV-0300E
LV-0301J
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H
Actuator model
0.9S-0400-70-OP 0.9C-0400-70-CL 6C-2500-125-CL 6C-2500-125-CL 0.3C-0100-40-CL
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) 98 98 98 98 98
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) 5 5 5 5 5
To close: (Sec.) 5 5 5 5 5
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Supply type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Power consumption: (W) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Microswitches
Type: SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI
Manufacturer - Model:
Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT
Settings
Relief valve (item 395) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Electric pressure switch (item 519) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ITEM NUMBER 06 07 08 09 10
PV-0201C PV-0508C PV-0504C
Tag number PV-0205 PV-0201F FV-0306 PV-0508F PV-0504F
PV-0201J PV-0508J PV-0504J
OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H
Actuator model
0.3S-008C-35-CL 1.5C-1100-95-OP 0.9C-0700-85-CL 3C-2000-110-CL 1.5C-1100-95-OP
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) 98 98 98 98 97
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) 5 5 5 5 5
To close: (Sec.) 5 5 5 5 5
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Supply type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Power consumption: (W) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Microswitches
Type: SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI
Manufacturer - Model:
Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT
Settings
Relief valve (item 395) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Electric pressure switch (item 519) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
ITEM NUMBER 11 12 13 14 15
CFI-001
Tag number LV-0310C LV-0310F LV-0310J FV-0311C
CFI-002
CENTRALE OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H
Actuator model
COMUNE CFI 0.9S-0400-70-OP 0.9S-0400-70-OP 0.9S-0400-70-OP 0.3C-0150-45-OP
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) 98 98 98 87
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) N/A 5 5 5 5
To close: (Sec.) N/A 5 5 5 5
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Supply type N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Power consumption: (W) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Microswitches
Type: N/A SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI
Manufacturer - Model: N/A
Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT
Settings
Relief valve (item 395) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Electric pressure switch (item 519) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ITEM NUMBER 16 17 18 19 20
LV-0301C
Tag number FV-0311F FV-0311J LV-0016 FV-0005 LV-0301F
LV-0301J
OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H OLGAS-H CONTROL CABINET
Actuator model
0.3C-0150-45-OP 0.3C-0150-45-OP 1.5C-1100-95-OP 1.5C-1200-110-OP FOR ITEM 01
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) 87 87 98 98 N/A
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) 5 5 5 5 N/A
To close: (Sec.) 5 5 5 5 N/A
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) N/A N/A N/A N/A 125
Supply type N/A N/A N/A N/A DC
Power consumption: (W) N/A N/A N/A N/A 30
Microswitches
Type: SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI BIFFI
Manufacturer - Model: N/A
Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT Magnum XT-90 SPDT
Settings
Relief valve (item 395) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A 110
Electric pressure switch (item 519) : (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A 40
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
ITEM NUMBER 21 22 23 24 25
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D
Tag number LV-0006A LV-0006B PV-0206 PV-0205
LV-0300E
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET
Actuator model
FOR ITEM 02 FOR ITEM 03 FOR ITEM 04 FOR ITEM 05 FOR ITEM 06
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
To close: (Sec.) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) 125 125 125 125 125
Supply type DC DC DC DC DC
Power consumption: (W) 30 30 30 30 30
Microswitches
Type: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Manufacturer - Model: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Settings
Relief valve (item 395) : (Bar g) 110 110 110 110 110
Electric pressure switch (item 519) : (Bar g) 40 40 40 40 40
ITEM NUMBER 26 27 28 29 30
PV-0201C PV-0508C PV-0504C
Tag number PV-0201F FV-0306 PV-0508F PV-0504F LV-0310C
PV-0201J PV-0508J PV-0504J
CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET
Actuator model HPU FOR ITEM 10
FOR ITEM 07 FOR ITEM 08 FOR ITEM 09 FOR ITEM 12
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
To close: (Sec.) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) 125 125 125 125/24 125
Supply type DC DC DC DC DC
Power consumption: (W) 30 30 30 30 30
Microswitches
Type: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Manufacturer - Model: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Settings
Relief valve (item 35): (Bar g) 110 110 110 110 110
Electric pressure switch : (Bar g) 40 40 40 40 40
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
ITEM NUMBER 31 32 33 34 35
Tag number LV-0310F LV-0310J FV-0311C FV-0311F FV-0311J
CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET
Actuator model
FOR ITEM 13 FOR ITEM 14 FOR ITEM 15 FOR ITEM 16 FOR ITEM 17
Ambient temperature (°C) From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C From -35 To +35 °C
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil Oil Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
To close: (Sec.) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) 125 125 125 125 125
Supply type DC DC DC DC DC
Power consumption: (W) 30 30 30 30 30
Microswitches
Type: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Manufacturer - Model: N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Settings
Relief valve (item 35): (Bar g) 110 110 100 100 100
Electric pressure switch : (Bar g) 40 40 40 40 40
ITEM NUMBER 36 37
Tag number LV-0016 FV-0005
CONTROL CABINET CONTROL CABINET
Actuator model
FOR ITEM 18 FOR ITEM 19
Medium data
Medium type: Oil Oil
Medium name and manufacturer: Aeroshell Fluid 41 Aeroshell Fluid 41
Minimum supply pressure (Bar g) N/A N/A
Operating times
To open: (Sec.) N/A N/A
To close: (Sec.) N/A N/A
Solenoid valve
Supply voltage: (V) 125 125
Supply type DC DC
Power consumption: (W) 30 30
Microswitches
Type: N/A N/A
Manufacturer - Model: N/A N/A
Settings
Relief valve (item 35): (Bar g) 110 110
Electric pressure switch : (Bar g) 40 40
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
5. DIAGRAMS
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
6. OVERALL DIMENSION
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
7.1. Table 0A
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
Hydraulic cylinder
Spring cartridge
Manual override
Actuator model
Assembly kit
Scotch yoke
Tag number
mechanism
Item
Q.ty
5
1
4
LV-0301C
OLGAS-H
01 3 LV-0301F 22FG01S018 B2280702680 227A040000 212A009291 8920380006
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D OLGAS-H
02 6 22FG01C028 B2280702680 227A040000 212A009291 8920380006
LV-0300E 0.9C-0400-70-CL-MHP
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
OLGAS-H
03 1 LV-0006A 229A06C040 B2281255080 227A250000 212A060291 8920380006
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
04 1 LV-0006B 229A06C040 B2281255080 227A250000 212A060291 8920380006
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
05 1 PV-0206 22FG00C004 B228A040208 227A010000 212A003293 8920380009
0.3C-0100-40-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
06 1 PV-0205 22FG00S010 B228A035208 227A008C00 212A003297 8920380009
0.3S-008C-35-CL-MHP
PV-0201C
OLGAS-H
07 3 PV-0201F 22FG02C014 B2280952680 227A110000 212A015294 8920380006
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0201J
OLGAS-H
08 1 FV-0306 22FG01C029 B228A08526Z8 227A070000 212A009290 8920380006
0.9C-0700-85-CL-MHP
PV-0508C
OLGAS-H
09 3 PV-0508F 229A03C020 B2281104680 227A200000 212A030290 8920380006
3C-2000-110-CL-MHP
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
OLGAS-H
10 3 PV-0504F 22FG02C014 B2280952680 227A110000 212A015294 N/A
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0504J
CFI-001
11 2 CENTRALE COMUNE CFI N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
CFI-002
OLGAS-H
12 1 LV-0310C 22FG01S018 B2280702680 227A040000 212A009291 8920380006
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
13 1 LV-0310F 22FG01S018 B2280702680 227A040000 212A009291 8920380006
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
14 1 LV-0310J 22FG01S018 B2280702680 227A040000 212A009291 8920380006
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
15 1 FV-0311C 22FG00C004 B228A045228 227A015000 212A003292 8920380006
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
16 1 FV-0311F 22FG00C004 B228A045228 227A015000 212A003292 8920380006
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
17 1 FV-0311J 22FG00C004 B228A045228 227A015000 212A003292 8920380006
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
18 1 LV-0016 22FG02C014 B2280952680 227A110000 212A015294 8920380006
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
19 1 FV-0005 22FG02C015 B2281102680 227A120000 212A015290 8920380006
1.5C-1200-110-OP-MHP
LV-0301C
CONTROL CABINET
20 3 LV-0301F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 01
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D CONTROL CABINET
21 6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
LV-0300E FOR ITEM 02
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
CONTROL CABINET
22 1 LV-0006A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 03
CONTROL CABINET
23 1 LV-0006B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 04
CONTROL CABINET
24 1 PV-0206 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 05
CONTROL CABINET
25 1 PV-0205 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 06
PV-0201C
CONTROL CABINET
26 3 PV-0201F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 07
PV-0201J
CONTROL CABINET
27 1 FV-0306 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 08
PV-0508C
CONTROL CABINET
28 3 PV-0508F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 09
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
29 3 PV-0504F HPU FOR ITEM 10 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
PV-0504J
CONTROL CABINET
30 1 LV-0310C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 12
CONTROL CABINET
31 1 LV-0310F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 13
CONTROL CABINET
32 1 LV-0310J N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 14
CONTROL CABINET
33 1 FV-0311C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 15
CONTROL CABINET
34 1 FV-0311F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 16
CONTROL CABINET
35 1 FV-0311J N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 17
CONTROL CABINET
36 1 LV-0016 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 18
CONTROL CABINET
37 1 FV-0005 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 19
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
box/positioner
limit switches
Tag number
Microswitch
transmitter
+ position
Signalling
Tank
valve
Item
Q.ty
10
6
9
LV-0301C
OLGAS-H
01 3 LV-0301F 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A009M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D OLGAS-H
02 6 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A009M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
LV-0300E 0.9C-0400-70-CL-MHP
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
OLGAS-H
03 1 LV-0006A 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A060M0Y 8943071711 8920380107
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
04 1 LV-0006B 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A060M0Y 8943071711 8920380107
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
05 1 PV-0206 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A003M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.3C-0100-40-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
06 1 PV-0205 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A003M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.3S-008C-35-CL-MHP
PV-0201C
OLGAS-H
07 3 PV-0201F 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A015M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0201J
OLGAS-H
08 1 FV-0306 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A009M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.9C-0700-85-CL-MHP
PV-0508C
OLGAS-H
09 3 PV-0508F 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A030M0Y 8943071711 8920380107
3C-2000-110-CL-MHP
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
OLGAS-H
10 3 PV-0504F 2P041XK461 N/A 212A015M0Y N/A N/A
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0504J
CFI-001
11 2 CENTRALE COMUNE CFI N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
CFI-002
OLGAS-H
12 1 LV-0310C 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A009M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
13 1 LV-0310F 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A009M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
14 1 LV-0310J 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A009M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
15 1 FV-0311C 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A003M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
16 1 FV-0311F 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A003M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
17 1 FV-0311J 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A003M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
18 1 LV-0016 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A015M0Y 8943071611 8920380106
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
19 1 FV-0005 2P041XK460 8890010511 212A015M0Y 8943071711 8920380106
1.5C-1200-110-OP-MHP
LV-0301C
CONTROL CABINET
20 3 LV-0301F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 01
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D CONTROL CABINET
21 6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
LV-0300E FOR ITEM 02
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
CONTROL CABINET
22 1 LV-0006A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 03
CONTROL CABINET
23 1 LV-0006B N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 04
CONTROL CABINET
24 1 PV-0206 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 05
CONTROL CABINET
25 1 PV-0205 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 06
PV-0201C
CONTROL CABINET
26 3 PV-0201F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 07
PV-0201J
CONTROL CABINET
27 1 FV-0306 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 08
PV-0508C
CONTROL CABINET
28 3 PV-0508F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 09
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
29 3 PV-0504F HPU FOR ITEM 10 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
PV-0504J
CONTROL CABINET
30 1 LV-0310C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 12
CONTROL CABINET
31 1 LV-0310F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 13
CONTROL CABINET
32 1 LV-0310J N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 14
CONTROL CABINET
33 1 FV-0311C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 15
CONTROL CABINET
34 1 FV-0311F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 16
CONTROL CABINET
35 1 FV-0311J N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 17
CONTROL CABINET
36 1 LV-0016 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 18
CONTROL CABINET
37 1 FV-0005 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FOR ITEM 19
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
Control Cabinet
Actuator model
Tag number
H. P.U.
Lever
Item
Q.ty
11
12
13
LV-0301C
OLGAS-H
01 3 LV-0301F 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D OLGAS-H
02 6 8920369931 N/A N/A
LV-0300E 0.9C-0400-70-CL-MHP
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
OLGAS-H
03 1 LV-0006A 8920369931 N/A N/A
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
04 1 LV-0006B 8920369931 N/A N/A
6C-2500-125-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
05 1 PV-0206 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.3C-0100-40-CL-MHP
OLGAS-H
06 1 PV-0205 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.3S-008C-35-CL-MHP
PV-0201C
OLGAS-H
07 3 PV-0201F 8920369931 N/A N/A
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0201J
OLGAS-H
08 1 FV-0306 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.9C-0700-85-CL-MHP
PV-0508C
OLGAS-H
09 3 PV-0508F 8920369931 N/A N/A
3C-2000-110-CL-MHP
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
OLGAS-H
10 3 PV-0504F N/A N/A N/A
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
PV-0504J
CFI-001
11 2 CENTRALE COMUNE CFI N/A 2112750000 N/A
CFI-002
OLGAS-H
12 1 LV-0310C 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
13 1 LV-0310F 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
14 1 LV-0310J 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.9S-0400-70-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
15 1 FV-0311C 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
16 1 FV-0311F 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
17 1 FV-0311J 8920369931 N/A N/A
0.3C-0150-45-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
18 1 LV-0016 8920369931 N/A N/A
1.5C-1100-95-OP-MHP
OLGAS-H
19 1 FV-0005 8920369931 N/A N/A
1.5C-1200-110-OP-MHP
LV-0301C
CONTROL CABINET
20 3 LV-0301F N/A N/A 2112750060
FOR ITEM 01
LV-0301J
LV-0300A
LV-0300B
LV-0300D CONTROL CABINET
21 6 N/A N/A 2112750060
LV-0300E FOR ITEM 02
LV-0300G
LV-0300H
CONTROL CABINET
22 1 LV-0006A N/A N/A 2112750040
FOR ITEM 03
CONTROL CABINET
23 1 LV-0006B N/A N/A 2112750040
FOR ITEM 04
CONTROL CABINET
24 1 PV-0206 N/A N/A 2112750050
FOR ITEM 05
CONTROL CABINET
25 1 PV-0205 N/A N/A 2112750050
FOR ITEM 06
PV-0201C
CONTROL CABINET
26 3 PV-0201F N/A N/A 2112750020
FOR ITEM 07
PV-0201J
CONTROL CABINET
27 1 FV-0306 N/A N/A 2112750060
FOR ITEM 08
PV-0508C
CONTROL CABINET
28 3 PV-0508F N/A N/A 2112750030
FOR ITEM 09
PV-0508J
PV-0504C
29 3 PV-0504F HPU FOR ITEM 10 N/A 2112750010 N/A
PV-0504J
CONTROL CABINET
30 1 LV-0310C N/A N/A 2112750060
FOR ITEM 12
CONTROL CABINET
31 1 LV-0310F N/A N/A 2112750060
FOR ITEM 13
CONTROL CABINET
32 1 LV-0310J N/A N/A 2112750060
FOR ITEM 14
CONTROL CABINET
33 1 FV-0311C N/A N/A 2112750070
FOR ITEM 15
CONTROL CABINET
34 1 FV-0311F N/A N/A 2112750070
FOR ITEM 16
CONTROL CABINET
35 1 FV-0311J N/A N/A 2112750070
FOR ITEM 17
CONTROL CABINET
36 1 LV-0016 N/A N/A 2112750020
FOR ITEM 18
CONTROL CABINET
37 1 FV-0005 N/A N/A 2112750030
FOR ITEM 19
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary (fixing by the body)
(switches supplied for actuation from left AND right)
2
Type of operator Metal end plunger Steel roller Thermoplastic Steel roller Variable length Round
plunger roller lever (2) lever (2) thermoplastic thermoplastic
roller lever (2) rod lever, Ø 6 mm
(2) (4)
snap action
2 3.2(A) 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
11-12 11-12
12
14
5 References of complete switches with 1 entry for 1/2" NPT conduit (3)
For complete switches with entry for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit, replace H29 at the end of the reference by H7.
Example: XCK J1161H29 becomes XCK J1161H7.
Characteristics
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam By any moving part
Type of actuation
6
Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1 m/s 1.5 m/s
Mechanical durability 30 25 30
(in millions of operating cycles)
Minimum tripping force or torque 20 N 16 N 0.25 N.m
7 Cable entry 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland
Clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
(1) Form conforming to EN 50041, see page 1/177.
(2) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
(3) Switches with gold contacts: please consult our Customer Care Centre.
(4) Value taken with actuation by moving part at 100 mm from the fixing.
10
1/104
Dimensions Limit switches
OsiSense XC Standard, industrial format EN 50041
Metal, conforming to CENELEC EN 50041, type XCK J
Complete switches, plug-in body
With 1 cable entry
57 1
17 5 41
5
17
41
63
50
37
140
127
114
60
60
60
. . .
25 (1)
25
36 =
(1)
30 =
25
36 =
(1)
30 = 62 = 30 = 3
42.5 42.5 42.5
XCK J110541H29 XCK J110559H29
5.5
52
44
48 26.2
4
(2)
40…85
62…107
(4)
(5)
5
139…184
(3)
60
60
. .
25 (1) 25 (1) 6
60 = 30 = 60 = 30 =
42.5 42.5
(1) 1 tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or for 1/2" NPT conduit.
(2) Ø 6 rod, length 200 mm.
(3) 289 max.
(4) 190 max.
(5) 212 max.
7
10
1/105
ITEM 9 (MOD.: 3KH-DN13-1/2"NPT-4428-SB01 -40°C ) (CODE: 8943071611)
Mehrwegekugelhahn, 3KH
Multi-way ball valve, 3KH
ITEM 9 (3KH-DN20-3/4"NPT-4428-SB01 -40°C) (CODE: 894071711)
140
Stahl
Steel
Griff Gewkg PN Best.Nr. Kat. PN Best.Nr. Kat. PN Best.Nr. Kat. PN Best.Nr. Kat.
Lever Weightkg [MPa] Order no. [MPa] Order no. [MPa] Order no. [MPa] Order no.
141
Mehrwegekugelhahn, 3KH
Multi-way ball valve, 3KH
142
Stahl
Steel
143
Mehrwegekugelhahn, 3KH
Multi-way ball valve, 3KH
144
Edelstahl
Stainless Steel
Griff Gewkg PN Best.Nr. Kat. PN Best.Nr. Kat. PN Best.Nr. Kat. PN Best.Nr. Kat.
Lever Weightkg [MPa] Order no. [MPa] Order no. [MPa] Order no. [MPa] Order no.
145
Mehrwegekugelhahn, 3KH
Multi-way ball valve, 3KH
146
Edelstahl
Stainless Steel
147
ITEM 5 (MOD.:GRI PM SS-25+VS(-54°+72°C)10690310127) (CODE : 8920380006)
ITEM 5 (MOD.: GRI PM SS-12+VS(-54°+72°C)10690319137) (CODE: 8920380009)
CODICE FAMIGLIA
FAMILY CODE 106
POMPE A MANO
CON VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA SERIE PMS+VS
SERIES
HAND PUMPS WITH SAFETY VALVE 12-25-45
Pompe a mano con azionamento a doppio effetto per impianti a semplice
Rev: AD
Con serbatoi
Ingombro
Overall Dimension
A A1 B C D1 D2 E
mm mm mm mm ° ° mm
Schema Idraulico
Hydraulic layout
P1 P
pag.5
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
SCHEMA RICAMBIO POMPE A MANO FULCRO SERIE PMS+VS 106
FULCRO HAND PUMP PMS+VS SERIES SPARE PARTS
Rev: AD
Codice foglio:997-106-01010
Codice fascicolo: 997-400-10610 Rev:AG
kit ricambi / kit’s
N° FULCRO Codice Gruppo
N° 12 25 45 P. Number Assembly
Kit valvola aspirazione Suction valve kit
39
• • 500-002-00016
• 500-002-00025
40
• 500-012-00032
• 500-012-00014
• 500-012-00023
Kit portaleva Hand lever holder kit
41
• • • 500-009-00135
Data: Lunedì 27 luglio 2009
42
• • • 500-007-00048
43
• • • 106-906-00037
pag.6
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
106 SCHEMA RICAMBIO POMPE A MANO FULCRO SERIE PMS+VS
FULCRO HAND PUMP PMS+VS SERIES SPARE PARTS
N° FULCRO Codice Descrizione Quantità
N° 12 25 45 P. Number Description Quantity
1 • • • 506-000-00392 Guarnizione portafiltro Suction cap 1
2 • • • 550-001-00012 Filtro acciaio rotondo Steel strainer 1
• • 540-005-00019
3 Corpo valvola di aspirazione Suction valve casing 1
• 540-005-00037
• • 506-002-00201
4 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
• 506-003-00095
Rev: AD
• 537-002-00037
9 • 537-002-00019 Cilindro acciaio Steel stem 1
• 537-002-00028
• • 116-009-01255
10 Rondella tenuta cilindro Washer 1
• 116-009-01308
11a • 506-000-00516 Guarnizione speciale Special gasket 2
• 506-000-00258
11 Guarnizione speciale Special gasket 1
• 506-000-00267
• 532-002-00082
12 • 532-002-00028 Pistone Piston 1
• 532-002-00037
13a • 550-004-00046 Anello antiestrusore Locking ring 2
• 506-002-00158
13 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
• 506-002-00229
• 535-001-00121
14 • 535-001-00069 Stelo Piston rod 1
• 535-001-00078
• 501-011-00086
15 • 501-011-00111 Anello elastico Circlip 1
• 501-011-00148
Codice fascicolo: 997-400-10610 Rev:AG
• 517-001-00567
16 • 517-001-00585 Corpo pompa a mano Hand pump housing 1
• 517-001-00601
17 • • • 116-009-00158 Rondella utilizzi Washer 2
18 • • • 116-006-00259 Nipplo utilizzi Pressure nipple 1
19 • • • 526-001-00095 Spinotto lunghezza 26mm Gudgeon Pin 26mm 2
20 • • • 501-015-00028 Anello elastico Circlip 6
• 506-000-01640
21 • 506-000-01659 Guarnizione a labbro Lip seal 1
• 506-000-01668
• 506-000-01613
22 • 506-000-01622 Guarnizione raschiapolvere Wiper seal 1
• 506-000-01631
23 • • • 526-001-00086 Spinotto Gudgeon Pin 1
24 • • • 538-001-00081 Biella Brackets 2
25 • • • 502-002-00012 Vite blocco leva Locking lever screw 1
26 • • • 539-001-00212 Portaleva Lever holder 1
27 • • • 115-006-00117 Tappo utilizzo Pressure port plug 1
28 • • • 543-004-00023 Spillo tenuta Pin 1
29 • • • 506-000-00589 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
30 • • • 506-002-00014 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
31 • • • 500-001-00357 Volantino Lowering wheel 1
32 • • • 510-009-00045 Sfera tenuta valvola di sicurezza Safety valve sealing ball 1
33 • • • 542-001-00073 Guidamolla Spring-guide 1
34 • • • 512-005-01428 Molla valvola di massima Spring 1
Data: Lunedì 27 luglio 2009
pag.7
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
ITEM 11 (MOD.: PMS/PMI L=590 (10600000078)) (CODE: 8920369931)
POMPE A MANO FULCRO SERIE PMS+VS
106
FULCRO HAND PUMP PM+VS SERIES
Dati Tecnici
Technical data
Tipo pompa Taratura standard Taratura massima Cilindrata Peso
Pump type Standard pressure setting Max. pressure setting Displacement Weight
Completa / Full Tiro / Pull Spinta / Push
bar bar cm3 cm3 cm3 Kg
Rev: AD
FULCRO 12 160 300 12 6,1 5,9 2,8
FULCRO 25 160 300 25 13,4 11,6 2,9
Codice foglio:997-106-01010
FULCRO 45 160 270 45 23,7 21,3 3,2
Fluido idraulico
Minerale o sintetico compatibile con guarnizioni:
Mineral or synthetic compatible with the following Sforzo in fase di pompaggio
Fluid seals:
NBR, FKM, FPM, Nylon con leva standard
Viscosità cinematica T media ambiente (°C) < -10 -10÷10 10÷35 > 35 Load while pumping with standard lever
consigliata Average ambient temp. (°C)
Kinematic viscosity
suggested VG (cSt = mm2/s) 22 32 46 68 F Kg
FULCRO 12
160
Pres. di aspirazione -0,3 ÷ 2 bar
Inlet pressure 140
120
Seal kit 80
0
bar
0
100
150
250
350
200
300
400
450
50
F Kg
FULCRO 25
PIA.APP.GRP.PMP. PMS-PMI
106-000-00032 MOUNTING PLATE FOR TANK PMS-PMI
160
140
120
100
80
TIRO
PULL
60
SPINTA
40
AST. CON IMP.PMS/PMI L.600 MM 35x15 PUSH
0
bar
200
300
450
400
100
150
250
350
0
50
FULCRO 45
Data: Lunedì 27 luglio 2009
F Kg
160
MAGGIORAZIONE RITORNO A MOLLA X PMS
106-000-00247 SPRING RETURN FOR PMS 140
120
TIRO
100
PULL
80
SPINTA
PUSH
60
40
20
450
50
100
150
250
300
350
400
0
pag.8
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
SERB. 3LT. (COD. : 106-800-00034)
CODICE FAMIGLIA
5LT. (COD. : 106-800-00043) FAMILY CODE 106-800
GRUPPO SERBATOI COMPLETI
CON VASCA IN PLASTICA O ALLUMINIO
PLASTIC OR ALUMINIUM TANK ASSEMBLY
MATERIALE CODICE DI
CAPACITÀ DESCRIZIONE PESO
SERBATOIO ORDINAZIONE CAPACITY DESCRIPTION WEIGHT
TANK’S MATERIAL ORDER CODE
106-800-00025 2 SRB. CMP.PM S/2/ TANK 2 LT 1,8
106-800-00034 3 SRB. CMP.PM S/3/ TANK 3 LT 1,9
Data: Martedì 15 gennaio 2008
Rev: AA
• 506-000-01435 1
5a 514-003-00070 1 09 3
• 514-008-00020 1 2
• 514-008-00039 1
5b
Codice foglio:997-106-80010
• 514-008-00057 1 3
• 514-008-00075 1
5c • 514-008-00100 1 4
6a • • • • 502-002-10207 8 10
6b • 502-002-00478 8 5b
7 • 538-000-00331 2 6a
8 • 501-024-00063 8
KIT RICAMBIO / KIT’S
9 • • • • • 106-800-01015 4
• 106-800-01024
• 106-800-01033 5c
10
• 106-800-01051
• 106-800-01060 7
11
11 • 106-800-01097
8
6b
Lt 2
Lt 5
Lt 10
Lt 7
Data: Martedì 15 gennaio 2008
pag.20
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
SCHEMA RICAMBIO SERBATOI ALLUMINIO
106
ALUMINIUM TANKS SPARE PARTS
5 • 509-000-00912 1
6 • 506-000-02158 1 6
7 • • • • • 507-003-00182 1
8a • 514-003-00105 1
Codice foglio:997-106-80010
• 514-005-00069 1
• 514-005-00078 1
8b
• 514-005-00087 1 1
• 514-005-00041 1
8c • 514-005-00050 1 11 3
9 • • • • • 502-002-00441 8 2
KIT RICAMBIO / KIT’S 3
10 • 106-800-00105
11 • • • • • 106-800-01015 7
• 106-800-02023 12 8b
• 106-800-02032
12
• 106-800-02050 9
• 106-800-02078
13 • 106-800-02103
7
8c
13
9
Lt 2
Codice fascicolo: 997-400-10610 Rev:AD
Lt 3
Lt 5
Lt 10
Lt 1
Lt 7
Data: Martedì 15 gennaio 2008
pag.21
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
“OLGAS-H-MHP + CONTROL CABINET”
M9899 Technical documentation
8. CONTROL SYSTEM
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
DTDE 326
ECU 1000
INSTALLATION
and
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
ECU1000 cabinets
INDEX
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 1
4 STORAGE 3
5 DEVICE DESCRIPTION 4
5.1 Block diagram 4
5.2 General features 4
5.3 Inputs and Outputs 5
5.3.1 Digital inputs up to 110Vdc 6
5.3.2 Extension connector 6
5.3.3 Service voltages 6
5.4 Bus interface 6
5.5 ECU1000 power supply module 6
5.6 ECU1000 Electronic cards 7
5.7 ECU1000 cabinet block diagram 8
5.8 ECU1000 cabinet 9
5.9 Installation 10
5.9.1 Installation in hazardous area 11
5.10 Checks to be performed before installation 11
5.11 Cables and Electrical Connections 11
5.11.1 Cables connection 11
5.11.2 Earth connection 12
5.11.3 Cables requirements – EMC protection 13
5.11.4 Wire dimension and type 13
5.11.5 Unused entries 13
5.12 Start-up Procedure 13
6 DECOMMISSIONING 15
7 TROUBLE SHOOTING 16
7.1 Local Operator Interface of ECU1000 off 16
7.2 Local Operator Interface of ECU1000 available 16
7.2.1 Trouble-shooting by Local Operator Interface 16
7.2.1.1 Failure, Alarm and Maintenance Request 16
7.2.1.2 I/O check 17
7.2.2 Trouble-shooting by BIFFI-Assistant SW tool 17
1 Introduction
The documents DTDE326, DTDE327 and DTDE328 are the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manuals of the
ECU1000, Electronic Control Unit for electro-hydraulic actuators.
The DTDE326 “Installation and Maintenance”, provides the instructions for the installation and maintenance of cabinet
with ECU1000. The DTDE327 “Control functions and Local Operator Interface” provides the instructions to use the
Local Operator Interface, the Positioner and the additional functions to control and monitor the actuator. The
DTDE328 “Functions description, Input characterization-Recorder-Graph-Logger-PST-HPU-On/Off control-Optional
local lamps-PWM module” provides detailed instructions relevant to further ECU1000 functions as Input
characterization, Recorder, Graph, Logger, PST, HPU, On/Off control and Optional local lamps. The manuals
DTDE326, DTE327 and DTDE328 provide the instructions relevant to the complete set of ECU1000 functions. Only
functions requested by the application and needed to allow the correct actuator control and operation will be activated in
the factory setting. The warnings reported in this manual consider the risk analysis of the document DTDE331.
2 Reference documents
Warning: • It is assumed that the installation, the setting, the commissioning, the
maintenance and repair works are carried out by qualified personnel and
checked by responsible Specialists.
• The door of cabinet must be kept “closed” by the key (or equivalent tool).
Operating the unit or working on the Electronics with the cabinet door “open”
could cause personal injury and damage the equipment
Warning: The ECU1000 controls the actuator, it could control the HPU, it could drive
generic electric, mechanic, pneumatic and hydraulic devices. To avoid unwanted
movement of mechanic parts or leakage of pressurized fluids and risk injury of
people and damage of equipment and ambient, any mechanic, electric, hydraulic
and pneumatic device controlled by the ECU1000 device should be placed in safe
condition before executing any installation, commissioning or maintenance
operation (see relevant instruction manuals of actuator, HPU, etc.)
Warning: The end user shall provide circuit-breakers and fuses in the marshalling cabinet of
control room, to switch off the Mains and any other voltage applied to ECU1000
cabinet. Before opening the door of the ECU1000 cabinet it is mandatory to check
that any voltage (Mains or Control voltage) is off.
Breakers, fuses, differential breakers, in general any disconnecting device
• shall be in accordance with the local national standards and plant rules.
• shall be sized to be in accordance to the power required by the ECU1000
cabinet and the connected electrical loads with a maximum of 10A.
• shall be suitable located and easily reached
• shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment
• shall not interrupt the protective earth conductor
Warning: Any repair work other than the operations outlines in the mentioned IOM’s will be
strictly reserved to qualified BIFFI ITALIA personnel or to personnel directly
authorised by the Company itself.
Warning: The electronic parts of the ECU1000 and all the options can be damaged by a
discharge of static electricity. Before you start, touch a grounded metal surface to
discharge any static electricity.
Warning: If the device is located in hazardous area a ‘’hot permit’’ must be obtained before
opening the explosion proof enclosures. Moreover the area must be cleaned from
explosive mixture since time keeper battery and residual capacitor charge could
generate electrical spark and cause explosion. The installation must be carried out
in accordance to the applicable Ex-d Standards regarding the electrical
installations in hazardous areas and any other applicable national standard and
rule.
ECU1000 devices are designed in accordance with the applicable International Rules and Specifications, but the
following Regulations must be observed in any case:
• the general and safety regulations
• the plant specific regulations and requirements
• the proper use of personal and protective devices (glasses, clothing, gloves, etc)
• the proper use of tools, lifting and transport equipment.
4 Storage
Important:
Not performing the following instructions will invalidate the product guarantee.
All ECU1000 cabinets leave the factory in perfect condition. When mounted together with the actuator they are
guaranteed by the actuator test certificate; in other cases they are guaranteed by an individual certificate. In order to
maintain these characteristics until the ECU1000 is installed on site, proper attention must be observed for preservation
during the storage period.
The standard plastic plugs used to protect the cable entries during the transport are not waterproof; they just prevent the
entry of undesired objects during transport: during the storage it is recommended to replace them with waterproof
version.
In any case storage is recommended in close ambient without excessive humidity.
5 Device Description
This paragraph summarizes only the main important functions of cabinet with ECU1000. Detailed description of
functions is available in the manuals DTDE327 and DTDE328.
12Vdc I/O’s to
Main power 24Vdc Base card Control card control room
supply HA, HCU,
I/O HPU
• Control of any BIFFI hydraulic actuator (OLGA-H, OLGAS-H, HLA, HLA-S, single acting spring return or
double acting, modulating and on-off service)
• Standard functions:
1. Positioning of modulating actuator (heavy duty, low drain-heavy duty, stepping)
2. Control of integral HPU with single or dual pump. Automatic switch of electrical pumps
3. Control of on-off actuator
4. Partial Stroke Test
5. Input characterization
6. Failsafe function
7. ESD function
8. Interlock function
9. Stay in position by dedicated SOV
10. Outputs to control Servovalves, Proportional Valves, on-off Solenoid Operated Valves (SOV’s),
contactors of Electrical Motor of hydraulic pumps
11. Inputs to read 4-20mA transmitters and switches
12. Optional module to drive proportional valves by PWM signals
• Hardwired and BUS remote control
• Local control
• Local Operator Interface with graphic OLED display and pushbuttons, visible from -40°C
• User friendly navigation in the menu. English language menu.
• Diagnostic function
• Full local parameterization.
• Access to parameter protected by four levels of password
• Configuration data saved in 3 separated permanent memories
• 2 Watch-dog timer working in parallel
• Real Time Clock and battery to maintain date and time
• CRC function to validate communication messages and memory content
• Bluetooth wireless communication
• Temperature, humidity and acceleration sensors of electronic cards
• Electronic NAME PLATE of electronic cards
• Failure, Alarm, Event, Connection loggers, graph and recorder
• BIFFI-Assistant, SW tool for PC for connection to actuator via Bluetooth or RS232
Each input and output is configurable and can be associated either to signals to/from control room and HA, HCU, HPU.
• Analogue inputs
4 x 4-20mA analogue inputs, insulating amplifiers and surge arresters. Max voltage drop at 20mA=9V
1 x 4-20mA analogue input, insulating amplifier and surge arresters. Jumper (J6) to select High/Low impedance mode.
Impedance in High impedance mode >100Kohm. Impedance in Low impedance mode <250ohm.
• Analogue output
1 x 4-20mA analogue output, insulating amplifier and surge arresters. Max resistive load 250 ohm, active or passive
current loop, max voltage 24V.
• Digital inputs
10 x digital inputs, optocoupled, max voltage 30Vdc, surge arresters. Max absorbed current 7mA. Logical_0 < 5V,
Logical_1 >15V
• Digital output
1 x digital outputs, optocoupled, surge arresters, max 24V
The contacts of the output relays are available on the connectors CN39, CN40 and
Important: CN41 (see par.5.7, RL0 to RL10). If the voltages through the contacts are different
(e.g. 230Vac and 24Vdc), it is suggested to group the contacts with the same voltage
in the same connector. Each contact should be protected by 1AT fuse, not provided
in the ECU1000 cabinet. If the contacts work as control of an external load, the
fuse should be provided in the cabinet containing the electrical load. If the contacts
work as signalling to control room, the fuse should be installed in the marshalling
cabinets of the control room at customer care. Reinforced insulation is provided
between each group of relays connected to connectors CN39, CN40, CN41; basic
insulation is provided between each relay connected to the same connector; the end
user shall provide the same insulation in the external load.
Upon request the ECU1000 can be provided with HART bus (mode actuator) and Modbus RTU buses
The following power supply modules can be provided in the ECU1000 cabinet:
• Vin=24 Vdc , Vout=24Vdc/max 10A
• Vin=110Vdc, Vout=24Vdc/max 10A
• Vin=110Vac/50 or 60 Hz, Vout=24Vdc/max 10A
• Vin=230Vac/50 or 60 Hz, Vout=24Vdc/max 10A
The power supply module depends on the type of main supply provided by the end user, and is protected by fuses (or
magnetothermal switch), line filter, surge arresters, and reversed polarity (only in case of DC supply).
CONTROL CARD
DISPLAY CARD
Mounted on the
cabinet door
Aluminium plate
4A T fuse
Cables to connectors
CN_xx Optional
Heater Fuse 24Vdc
Surge arresters
DIN rail terminals 24V/15W 4A T Optional driver
and bus card
Fuse Power supply Cables to connectors
1A T PE CN_xx Surge arresters
Vout 24Vdc
Cables to Cables to
actuator control room Line filter and DIN rail terminals
Surge arresters
Fuses1A T are requested in the
marshalling cabinet of control Chassis IE
Remove J1 to
room to limit the max current Magnetothermal separate PE and IE
of output relay contacts
switch or fuses
J1 ECU1000
Fuses or breaker are requested in the Main Cables to Cables to cabinet
marshalling cabinet of control room to DIN rail PE bar IE bar actuator
Supply control room
switch the main supply of cabinet terminals
PE PE: Protection Earth
IE: Instrumentation Earth
The ECU1000 cabinet is suitable to be used outdoor. The cabinet is provided with glass windows to allow viewing the display and 3 pushbuttons to move in menu of ECU1000
or for local command.
Two types of cabinet are available:
• Cabinet AISI 316, IP65 to be used in standard environment. The cabinet door needs a tool to be open. (type CP456025, manufacturer MP Gamma, or equivalent)
• Cabinet Ex-d IIB T5 to be used in hazardous area. The cabinet door needs an appropriate key to be open. (type EJB 51, manufacturer Nuova ASP, or equivalent)
Cable entry
Cabinet for standard outdoor Cabinet for hazardous
environment environment
Warning: • The door of cabinet must be kept always closed by key (or tool), to avoid damage of
Electronics due to wet or pollution or personal injury of people. The key to open the
door (or the alternative tool) must be kept by authorized and qualified personnel
• The cabinet must be connected to “earth”
5.9 Installation
The standard ECU1000 is suitable to work in the temperature range -40°C +75°C. Special version can be done in case
of different temperature range.
The ECU1000 cabinet can be supplied as part of the actuator or separately. If ordered as part of an actuator, the factory
mounts the ECU1000 cabinet together with the actuator, makes the connections (pneumatic, hydraulic and electrical) to
the actuator, sets up and calibrates the instrument. In both cases the mounting bracket shall withstand a force of four
times the weight of the ECU1000 cabinet. The following general instructions should be observed.
Important:
Check that the working temperature range is correct. If the temperature is higher
than the rated values it needs to add a sunshine shield to the ECU1000 cabinet
Warning: The ECU1000 cabinet is not provided with specific means for lifting and
transporting. Manually move the cabinet according to the effective rules of health
and safety of the installation country.
Warning: It is assumed that the installation, the setting, the commissioning, the maintenance
and repair works are carried out by qualified personnel and checked by
responsible Specialists.
Warning: Avoid personal injury or property damage due to handling of mechanical parts.
Before proceeding with any installation operation, the following precautions
should be used
• Always wear protective clothing, gloves, and protection glasses to prevent
personal injury.
• If installation is in hazardous area, personal injury or property damage
may result from fire or explosion. Preventive measures may include:
remote venting of the unit, re-evaluating the hazardous area classification,
ensuring adequate ventilation, and the removal of any ignition sources.
Require hot permit before any operation.
• Check with process or safety engineer for any additional measures that
must be taken to protect against process media.
Important: If the installation is in hazardous area, it must be carried out in accordance to the
applicable standards IEC/EN 60079-14 and IEC/EN 60079-17 regarding the
electrical installations in Hazardous Areas (other than mines) classified as Zones 1,
2 (gas) and Zones 21, 22 (dust) following IEC/EN 60079-10-1 and IEC/EN 60079-
10-2 and any other applicable national standards and rules.
Warning: Before the installation it is mandatory to check if the nameplate associated to the
extension for additional entry specifies the appropriate degree of protection and
ambient temperature limits as requested by the Rules applicable to the
plant/location where units are installed.
1) The electrical supply cables must be suitable for the power rating
2) Gather the necessary tools for the assembly and setting of the ECU1000 controls;
3) Verify that the fixing elements (screws, nuts etc.) used for fastening the ECU1000 cabinet can sustain at least four
times the weight of the ECU1000
4) If a long storage period has occurred, before installing the ECU1000:
• Check the installation of the plugs or cable glands on the cable entries.
• Check whether the enclosure covers of the ECU1000 cabinet are cracked or broken.
The sealing of cables and/or conduit entries must be carried out in accordance with National Standards or the
Regulatory Authorities. Method of sealing and cable glands must be approved and separately certified for use in
hazardous areas.
Warning: The end user shall provide circuit-breakers and fuses in the marshalling cabinet of
control room, to switch off the Mains and any other voltage applied to ECU1000
cabinet. Before opening the door of the ECU1000 cabinet it is mandatory to check
that any voltage (Mains or Control voltage) is off.
Breakers, fuses, differential breakers, in general any disconnecting device
• shall be in accordance with the local national standards and plant rules.
• shall be sized to be in accordance to the power required by the ECU1000
cabinet and the connected electrical loads with a maximum of 10A.
• shall be suitable located and easily reached
• shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment
• shall not interrupt the protective earth conductor
Important: To prevent any water infiltration through the line cable conduits, be sure the cable
glands have the minimum degree of protection required by the plant. The cable
glands shall be selected in accordance to the cables section
If rigid conduits make the connection, place a flexible pipe connection between the
conduit and the terminal board.
To guarantee weatherproof and explosion-proof fit, screw the cable glands tightly (at least 5 turns) and block them with
a thread sealant. The use of a thread sealant is necessary in case of explosion-proof capability.
If some parts of the cable glands have been removed during work on the cable entries put them back into place now to
avoid losing the dismantled parts.
Cables should be connected to DIN RAIL terminals provided inside the ECU1000 cabinet.
Important: The avoid malfunction and electromagnetic interferences due to cables coupling, it
is recommended to use separated cables for power and signals and if it is possible
also separated conduits. Use of shielded cables for analogue or data signals is
requested.
The ECU1000 cabinet must be connected to EARTH trough the External EARTH stud. The wire section shall be at
least equal to the section of power supply wires.
For the earth connection of the cables dedicated DIN RAIL terminals or EARTH bar are provided.
The chassis is connected to PE (Protection Earth). Power supply module, line filter and surge arresters are connected to
PE. The electronics of ECU1000 and shield of cable for signals are connected to IE (Instrumentation Earth). PE and IE
are isolated. According to plant requirement the end user should use case A or B. The ECU1000 cabinet is supplied
according to case A.
Case A Surge arresters, line filter, ECU1000 cabinet ECU1000 electronic
power supply module boards
Chassis
earth stud PE IE
J1
PE bar IE bar
PE cable
If the end user uses the case B the jumper J1 should be removed
Chassis
earth stud PE IE
PE bar IE bar
PE cable IE cable
Warning: Replace the plastic plugs with new plugs that guarantee the protection IP degree
required.
If the cabinet is in hazardous area use only certified explosion-proof plugs and
block with a thread sealant to guarantee the tightening. Not performing the above
prescription will invalidate the safety protection in case of presence of hazardous
atmospheres.
Warning: If the device is located in hazardous area a ‘’hot permit’’ must be obtained before
opening the explosion proof enclosures. Moreover the area must be cleaned from
explosive mixture since time keeper battery and residual capacitor charge could
generate electrical spark and cause explosion.
Warning: Electrical start-up should be done when the mechanical setting of the actuator
which is connected to ECU1000 is completed. Refers to instruction manuals of
Hydraulic Actuator, Hydraulic Power Unit, Hydraulic Control Unit.
Warning: Check that the breaker of the main electrical power in the marshalling cabinet of
control room is off
Check that any control voltage applied to cabinet is off
• Check that the cables coming from control room and actuator are connected to the cabinet terminals according
to electrical diagram. Check that the screws of terminals are correctly tighten
• Check that earth connections are reliable and according to the instructions in the previous paragraphs
• Switch on the main switch inside the ECU1000 cabinet
• Close the door of the ECU1000 cabinet
• Check that the actuator is in safe position and no mechanical damage or undesired movement of actuator can
occur. Check that no leakage or dangerous pressure (oil or air) is present in the mechanics and hydraulic
controlled by the ECU1000. Check that hydraulic piping is correctly connected.
• Switch on the breaker of the main electrical power in the marshalling cabinet of control room is off. In general
the ECU1000 is supplied already with the configuration requested by the application. No special configuration
operations are required except the setting of travel limits and tuning of positioner function.
.
• Check the Failure and Alarm. Remove the conditions that cause Failure and Alarm. Refer to manuals DTDE
327 and DTDE328 to see the Failure and Alarm description and conditions.
• Apply the control signals to the ECU1000 cabinet. If the actuator is for modulating service, it starts in
AUTOMATIC mode. Apply a control signal (4-20mA) that keeps the actuator in safe position (closed or open)
• When hydraulic pressure is correct set the actuator travel limits (see DTDE 327 and DTDE328)
• Switch to local control mode and move the actuator by pushbuttons the Up/Open and Down/Close.
• Check that output and input signals to control room and actuator are correct
• Tune the actuator response by means of the Local Operator Interface facilities
• Check the variables as follows:
o From HOME VIEW
o Press Up/Open to wake up the display
o Press Up/Open to scroll the list of variables
o Press Enter and see the value
POSITION%: it shows the % of opening of the valve. Check that the value is according to
real valve position
POSITION DEMAND%: if the positioning function is on, this variable shows the valve
requested position.
POSITION ERROR%: if the positioning function is on, this variable shows the difference
between POSITION DEMAND% and POSITION%. It is used to calculate the output signal
(by the parameters GAIN K1 and K2), visible in AO1 OUT %
IN-POS DEMAND%: if the positioning function is on, this variable shows the input signal
of the valve requested position. The values of IN-POS DEMAND% and POSITION
DEMAND% are equals if the Input Characterization function is off
TEMPERATURE °C: it shows the temperature inside the ECU1000 cabinet
HUMIDITY %: it shows the humidity inside the ECU1000 cabinet
ACCELERATION-g: it shows the acceleration level
AO1 OUT %: if the positioning function is on and the hydraulic valve is analogue, this
variable shows the output control signal %
OIL PRESSURE bar: if the actuator is provided with integral HPU controlled by the
ECU1000, this variable shows the HPU oil pressure
NEXT PST: if PST function is on, this variable shows the date of the next PST cycle
PUMPS SWITCH: if the actuator is provided with integral HPU, dual pump, controlled by
the ECU1000, this variable shows the time before the next pump switch
• Return to HOME VIEW
6 DECOMMISSIONING
Warning: Do not re-use parts or components which appear to be in good condition after they
have been checked or replaced by qualified personnel and declared unsuitable for
use.
Important:
In all cases check local authority regulation before disposal
7 TROUBLE SHOOTING
7.1 Local Operator Interface of ECU1000 off
Warning: • Switch off the main power from ECU1000 cabinet by the breaker in the
marshalling cabinet of control room
• Switch off any control voltage from ECU1000 cabinet
Warning: If the device is located in hazardous area a ‘’hot permit’’ must be obtained before
opening the explosion proof enclosures. Moreover the area must be cleaned from
explosive mixture since time keeper battery and residual capacitor charge could
generate electrical spark and cause explosion.
The manuals DTDE327 and DTDE328 provide detailed instructions on the Local Operator Interface of ECU1000 and
on the Actuator malfunctions. Here below is described only the procedure to see the list of alarm and failure.
The manuals DTDE330, DTDE327 and DTDE328 provide detailed instructions on the BIFFI-Assistant SW tool of
ECU1000.
Here below is described only the procedure to see the list of alarm and failure.
• Connect BIFFI-Assistant to actuator
• Select DEVICE COMMANDS
See the manual DTDE327, Actuator Malfunction
• Select LOG and GRAPH
tables to find the description and the reset condition.
• Select LOGGER
Remove Failures and Alarms.
• Select FAILURE and see the list of failure
• Select ALARM and see the list of alarms
DTDE 327
ECU 1000
Control functions
and
Local Operator Interface
ECU1000 cards
ECU1000 cabinets
INDEX
1 INTRODUCTION 1
ECU1000 FEATURES 1
1.1 Main characteristics of ECU1000 2
1.2 Inputs and Outputs of ECU1000 3
1.3 Status signalling 3
1.4 ECU1000 Electronic cards 4
1.5 ECU1000 terminals 5
4 SPEED SOV’S 10
5 ESD FUNCTION 11
6 FAILSAFE 12
7 INTERLOCK 12
9 PRIORITY OF COMMANDS 13
10 OUTPUT 4-20MA 13
11 DATE 14
12 MISCELLANEOUS 14
13 OUTPUT RELAY 14
13.1 Status relay table 15
16 LOGGERS 25
Warning: • It is assumed that the installation, the setting, the commissioning, the
maintenance and repair works are carried out by qualified personnel and
checked by responsible Specialists.
• The door of cabinet must be kept “closed” by the key (or equivalent tool).
Operating the unit or working on the Electronics with the cabinet door “open”
could cause personal injury and damage the equipment
Warning: The ECU1000 controls the actuator, it could control the HPU, it could drive
generic electric, mechanic, pneumatic and hydraulic devices. To avoid unwanted
movement of mechanic parts or leakage of pressurized fluids and risk injury of
people and damage of equipment and ambient, any mechanic, electric, hydraulic
and pneumatic device controlled by the ECU1000 device should be placed in safe
condition before executing any installation, commissioning or maintenance
operation (see relevant instruction manuals of actuator, HPU, etc.)
Warning: If the device is located in hazardous area a ‘’hot permit’’ must be obtained before
opening the explosion proof enclosures. Moreover the area must be cleaned from
explosive mixture since time keeper battery and residual capacitor charge could
generate electrical spark and cause explosion. The installation must be carried out
in accordance to the applicable Ex-d Standards regarding the electrical
installations in hazardous areas and any other applicable national standard and
rule.
Warning:
Refer to DTDE326 for the installation and maintenance instruction manual of the
ECU1000 cabinet
1 Introduction
The documents DTDE326, DTDE327 and DTDE328 are the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manuals of the
ECU1000, Electronic Control Unit for electro-hydraulic actuators.
The DTDE326 “Installation and Maintenance” provides the instructions for the installation and maintenance of cabinet
with ECU1000. The DTDE327 Control functions and Local Operator Interface”, in the paragraphs 1 and 2 provides the
general characteristics of ECU1000, in the paragraphs 3,…,17 provides the instructions to use the Positioner and the
additional functions to control and monitor the actuator, in the paragraphs 19 and 20 provides the instructions of the
Local Operator Interface. The DTDE328 “Input characterization-Recorder-Graph-Logger-PST-HPU-On/Off control-
Optional local lamps” provides detailed instructions relevant to further ECU1000 functions (Input characterization-
Recorder-Graph-Logger-PST-HPU-On/Off control-Optional local lamps). The manuals DTDE 326, DTE327 and
DTDE328 provide the instructions relevant to complete set of ECU1000 functions. Only functions requested by the
application and needed to allow the correct actuator control and operation will be activated in the factory setting.
ECU1000 features
The ECU1000 is a new electronic unit to control an electro-hydraulic actuator for process valves. The main functions
are:
• To acquire the feedbacks from sensors of HA (Hydraulic Actuator), HCU (Hydraulic Control Unit), HPU
(Hydraulic Power Unit)
• To acquire the setpoints from control room
• To process the acquired data and send operational commands to HA, HCU and integral HPU
• To monitor the HA, HCU and HPU complete system
• To send to control room signals relevant to status and alarms of complete system
• To log events, alarms and failures
The next figures show the block diagram of the electro-hydraulic actuator with ECU1000.
Separated Hydraulic
Power
Process Valve
12Vdc I/O’s to
Main power 24Vdc Base card Control card control room
supply HA, HCU,
I/O HPU
The base version of the ECU1000 consists in 3 electronic boards, Base card, Control card and Display card. Optional
cards can be added to drive proportional valves by PWM signals or for bus control. The ECU1000 electronics is
supplied at 24VDC power supply. A power supply module should be provided in the cabinet to generate the requested
24VDC.
• Control of any BIFFI hydraulic actuator (OLGA-H, OLGAS-H, HLA, HLA-S, single acting spring return and
double acting, modulating and on-off service)
• Standard control functions:
o Positioning of modulating actuator (heavy duty, low drain-heavy duty, stepping)
o Control of integral HPU with single or dual pump. Automatic switch of electrical pumps
o Control of on-off actuator
o Partial Stroke Test
o Input characterization
o Failsafe function
o ESD function
o Interlock function
o Stay in position by dedicated SOV
o Outputs to control Servovalves, Proportional Valves, on-off Solenoid Operated Valves (SOV’s),
Electrical Motor of hydraulic pumps
o Inputs to read 4-20mA transmitters and switches
o Optional module to drive proportional valves by PWM signals
• Hardwired and BUS remote control
• Local control
• Local Operator Interface with graphic OLED display and pushbuttons, visible at very low temperature (-40°C)
• User friendly navigation in the menu. English language menu.
• Diagnostic function
• Full local parameterization.
• Access to parameters protected by four levels of password
• Configuration data saved in 3 separated permanent memories
• 2 Watch-dog timer working in parallel
• Real Time Clock and battery to maintain date and time
• CRC function to validate communication messages and memory content
• Bluetooth wireless communication
• Temperature, humidity and acceleration sensors of electronic cards
• Electronic NAME PLATE of electronic cards
• Failure, Alarm, Event, Connection loggers
• Graph, Recorder and Signatures
• BIFFI-Assistant, SW tool for PC for connection to actuator via Bluetooth or RS232
• Operating temperature from -40 °C to +75 °C
• Electronics suitable to “On-field” operation inside an IP65 or Ex-d cabinet containing:
o ECU1000 electronic cards
o Power supply module
o Line filter, fuses, surge arrester, optional magnetothermal switch
o DIN RAIL terminals for connection with control room, HA, HPU and HCU
o Optional Heater
Even if the ECU1000 can work without LOCAL OPERATOR INTERFACE (it means without Display card), it is
suggested to use the ECU1000 with its Local Operator Interface. The LOCAL OPERATOR INTERFACE is useful for
the following reasons:
• In the commissioning of actuator it allows executing calibration, setting and local control
• In operation it allows viewing maintenance and diagnostic data
• The display works and is visible also at very low temperature (from -40°C)
• No additional tools are required
• On request it can be placed in a separate cabinet
• It provides the wireless Bluetooth option for downloading curves, signatures, logger by PC and BIFFI-
Assistant from ECU1000 memory
The DTDE326 gives more detailed information relevant to the ECU1000 I/O’s.
• Analogue inputs
4 x 4-20mA isolated analogue inputs, max voltage drop at 20mA = 9V
1 x 4-20mA isolated analogue input, max input resistance 250 ohm
• Analogue output
1 x 4-20mA isolated analogue output, max load resistance 250ohm
• Digital inputs
10 x digital inputs, optocoupled, max voltage 30Vdc
• Digital output
1 x digital outputs, optocoupled
• Output relays
4 x single side stable, SPDT contact, voltage free
5 x single side stable, SPST NO contact, voltage free
2 x single side stable, SPST NO contact, voltage free (on request latching relays can be provided)
Each input and output is configurable and can be associated either to signals to/from control room or to signals to/from
HA, HCU, HPU.
The above statuses are available to the control room by output relays and locally by the ECU1000 Local Operator
Interface. By the configuration options the conditions associated to the output relays can be changed.
CONTROL CARD
and
BASE CARD
DISPLAY CARD
Output relays Output relays Output relays Actuator Analogue Digital Digital Digital Service Actuator Analog Proportional valve
position inputs I/O’s inputs inputs voltage position inputs or servovalve
retransmission output input control
Power
Surge Supply
arresters and 230Vac/
Main switch
line filter 24Vdc
PE Protection PE Protection
230Vac Earth Earth
The figure below shows the block diagram of positioning function of ECU1000.
The ECU1000 sets different operating modes on the base of the input signals and actuator status. Below it is the
description of the operating modes.
• Regular operation
It is the normal operating mode of positioning function. In AUTOMATIC mode the Position Demand signal is
continuously compared with the Position transmission signal. The ECU1000 calculates the difference between
Position Demand and Position Transmission (called Position error) and drives the actuator in open or close direction
until the demanded position is achieved. In MANUAL mode the actuator moves in opening or closing according to
command Manual OP and Manual CL and when the command stops the actuator maintains the last position. In LOCAL
the local controls UP/OPEN and DOWN/CLOSE drive the valve in opening and closing.
• Stay in position
It is automatically set by the ECU1000. The conditions to have “stay in position” mode are shown in the paragraph
“Actuator malfunction” tables. In the above mode the ECU1000 maintains the actuator in the last position,
memorized before switching from “regular operation” to “stay in position” mode.
• Tracking
It is automatically set by the ECU1000. The conditions to have “tracking” mode are listed in the paragraph “Actuator
malfunction” tables. In the above mode the positioning function sets its output to 0, and no output is generated to drive
the actuator. The actuator stays in position or moves depending on the drain of the hydraulic valves (servovalve,
proportional valve, solenoid valve).
• Open loop control
The Local Operator Interface, by the function “Open Loop cmd” in “ECU cmd, Travel limit setting” menu, allows
moving the actuator without any constraint due to position signal (for instance during calibration of analogue inputs /
outputs, travel limit setting, etc.). The positioning function works in tracking mode and the actuator can be moved by
the local pushbuttons UP/OPEN and DOWN/CLOSE.
The following figure shows the relationship between the above parameters and the actuator speed.
Band with gain K1CL Speed Band with gain K1OP
max. speed CL
max. speed OP
0
position error %
Band of large error Band of small Dead Band of small Band of large error
in CL with gain error in CL band error in OP in OP with gain
K2CL K2OP
Position Demand %
%
Switch to AUTOMATIC
time
t1 t2
If Position Demand signal is not constant, the time to switch t1: configurable time to switch to AUTOMATIC mode
to AUTO is the time requested by the Position signal to
t2: normal operation in AUTOMATIC
cross the Position Demand.
The figure below shows the block diagram of positioning function of ECU 1000.
The ECU1000 sets different operating modes of positioning function on the base of the input signals and actuator status.
Below it is the description of the operating modes.
• Regular operation
It is the normal operating mode of positioning function. In AUTOMATIC mode the Position Demand signal is
continuously compared with the Position transmission signal. The ECU1000 calculates the difference between
Position Demand and Position Transmission (called Position error) and drives the actuator in open or close direction
until it reaches the demanded position. If the actuator is provided with “Speed SOV”, when the position error is smaller
than the “Speed SOV %”, the “Speed SOV” reduces the actuator speed to improve the accuracy in the positioning. In
MANUAL mode the actuator moves in opening or closing according to command Manual OP and Manual CL and
when the command stops the actuator maintains the last position. In LOCAL the local controls UP/OPEN and
DOWN/CLOSE drive the valve in opening and closing.
• Stay in position
It is automatically set by the ECU1000. The conditions to have “stay in position” mode are shown in the paragraph
“Actuator malfunction” tables. In the above mode the positioning function maintains the actuator in last position,
memorized before switching from “regular operation” to “stay in position” mode.
• Tracking
It is automatically set by the ECU1000. The conditions to have “tracking” mode are shown in the paragraph “Actuator
malfunction” tables. In the above mode the positioning function sets its output to 0, it updates the position value but
no output is generated to control the actuator. The actuator is free to move depending on the drain of the hydraulic
valves of HCU.
• Open loop control
The Local Operator Interface, by the function “Open Loop cmd” in the “ECU cmd, Travel limit setting” menu,
allows moving the actuator without any constraint due to position signal (for instance during calibration of analogue
inputs / outputs, travel limit setting, etc.). The positioning function works in tracking mode and the actuator can be
moved by the local pushbuttons UP/OPEN and DOWN/CLOSE.
The following figure shows the relationship between the above parameters and the actuator speed. The figure is relevant
to an actuator provided with SPEED SOV (see paragraph Speed SOV)
speed
High speed SOV
High speed SOV
Low speed
Low speed
position error %
SpeedSOV % SpeedSOV %
Dead
(see Speed SOV’s) (see Speed SOV’s)
band
The function works as in the actuator for continuous modulating service. The paragraph 2.5 describes the characteristics
of the function
4 Speed SOV’s
This function allows increasing/decreasing the speed of the actuator when the following conditions occur:
• position error % is greater than the configurable reference value “Speed SOV %”
• the position is > 10%
• the position is < 90%
Two options are available:
• 1 output relay of ECU1000 to drive 1 only SOV
• 2 output relays of ECU1000 to drive 2 SOV’s, one for each direction OP and CL
As further option, 1 SOV can be controlled by a solid state switch on the optional PWM driver card (see DTDE328
instruction manual). The Speed SOV’s are used when the actuator is requested to be precise in the positioning but also
to have a high travelling speed. The function can be activated only by the manufacturer and depends on the hydraulics
of actuator and end user request. It can be activated both in “Positioning function for continuous modulating actuators“
and “Positioning function for stepping modulating actuators”. The Speed SOV’s are always off in Local control,
Manual control, PST, Failsafe, Configuration and Stay in position by SOV.
Outputs to SOV features:
• relay: voltage free contact, max 30Vdc/230Vac/1A (110Vdc/0.15A)
• solid state driver: 24Vdc /1A, present on the PWM module
Parameter of “Speed SOV:
• Speed SOV %: position error % to energize/de-energize the Speed SOV’s (hysteresis 1%, min1%, max 50%)
The parameter is available in the POSITIONER menu with username “OPERATOR”.
5 ESD function
The ESD command overrides any other command and allows executing an emergency action. The ESD action is
active until the command is present. The end user can set the ESD action to be active when the signal is present or
absent. ESD function is off in LOCAL control mode. More ESD inputs can be configured, according to the end user
request. Both inputs can be set to work as wired OR or AND. The local display shows the message “ESD” if the
ESD” is on”. The following parameters can be used to modify the response to ESD command:
ESD action:
• Off : ESD command not used
• Tracking: the ESD command is executed by a dedicated SOV. The positioning function does not generates
any output to control the actuator
• Stay in position: the positioner maintains the last position
• Go to position%: in presence of an ESD command the positioning function drives the actuator to the
configured position
ESD position: position % if the option selected is “go to position %”
ESD logical operator: the available options are OR and AND. The parameter is used in case of multiple ESD input
signals.
ESD delay: duration of signal before initiating ESD action (see “t1” in the drawing below)
Min ESD duration: min duration of ESD action even if the ESD command is a pulse
ESD signal type: it selects the type of ESD command signal (present, absent)
t1 t2 t3 time
Regular operation ESD active Regular operation
t1: configurable time before than ESD action takes place t2: configurable minimum duration of ESD action t3: normal operation
The time “t1” is the minimum duration of the ESD signal to initiate the ESD action. It is obtained by the sum of
“ESD delay” + “min ESD cmd (>0.7 sec).
The maximum speed in ESD is configured by the customer.
Note: the ESD command can be executed by the modulating hydraulic control valve (proportional valve /
servovalve, etc.), but in general, the HCU has a dedicated SOV to execute ESD action. The ESD command must be
connected to the ECU1000 according to the below figure and the ESD action should be “Tracking”.
HCU (hydraulic HA
ECU1000 control unit) Hydraulic
Actuator
ESD SOV
ESD cmd
ESD ESD
Cmd1 Cmd2
6 Failsafe
The FAILSAFE function allows the actuator performing a configured action if one of FAILSAFE conditions occurs.
The configurable conditions to initiate the FAILSAFE are
• Position Demand: failure of 4-20mA Position Demand if the actuator is controlled by an analogue signal
• BUS control: failure of bus signal if the actuator is controlled by bus
• Fail to position: alarm due to position error >4% (see Alarm table par 15.2)
• HPU failure: failure due to HPU. The failure exits only if
o The actuator is provided with integral HPU
o HPU is configured to generate a failure (see Failure table par 15.1 and manual DTDE 328)
The paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables” reports the Failure and Alarm conditions. To control the actuator by
local pushbuttons UP/OPEN, DOWN/CLOSE is available. The configurable actuator actions are: off, tracking,
stayput, go to position. The following options can be set:
Action delay: delay in second before executing the configured action. The actuator stays in position in the delay
time.
Action of actuator: action of actuator
• Off : function not active
• Tracking: The positioner does not generates any output to control the actuator (positioner out=0)
• Stay in position : the positioner maintains the last position
• Go to position%: the positioner drives the actuator to the configured position
• Position %: position % if the option selected is “go to position %”
t1 t2 time
Regular operation “Failsafe” active
Regular operation
t1: configurable time in “Stay in position” mode before than “Failsafe” action takes place t2: normal operation
The “Failsafe” function is activated by the manufacturer on the base of actuator type and user request. The
manufacturer also sets the maximum speed in “Failsafe”. When “Failsafe” is on , the local display shows the
message “Failsafe”
7 Interlock
The Interlock function is used to inhibit the actuator controls in one or both directions according to the setting done
by the manufacturer. The Interlock control can be generated by
1. digital inputs: an electrical signal connected to the ECU1000 digital inputs and coming from control room
or from on-off sensors (pressure, temperature, level, etc.) can be configured to inhibit open or close or both
open/close commands from remote or local. Interlock action can be configured to be active when digital
signal is on or off.
2. 4-20mA analog input: an electrical 4-20mA signal connected to the ECU1000 analogue inputs and coming
from control room or from 4-20mA transmitter (pressure, temperature, level, etc.) can be configured to
inhibit open or close or both open/close commands from remote or local if the value of 4-20mA input is
greater or less than the reference “AI-Ref.” Interlock action can be configured to be active when the
analogue signal is “greater than” or “less than” the configurable reference “AI-Ref.”
3. digital commands from BUS: the Interlock commands from bus can inhibit open or close or both
open/close commands from remote or local. See the relevant instruction manual of bus.
4. 4-20mA oil pressure transmitter of HPU: if the actuator is provided with integral HPU and 4-20mA to
control the HPU pressure, the Interlock function can be used to inhibit both open and close commands
from remote or local when the HPU pressure is “less than“ the configurable reference “Int-HPU-Pres”
The alarm “Fail to position” is not active in the direction of Interlock. Configuration of Interlock function can be
done only with username “Specialist” or “Guest2”. Change of reference values can be done also with username
“Service”. When “Interlock” is on, the local display shows the message “Interl”
The output to SOV is cleared only if the condition that causes the SOV to be active disappears. When the function is
active the positioner switches in “Tracking” mode.
The conditions of the “HPU failure” are described in the paragraph 15 “Actuator malfunction tables” and DTDE328.
The following additional parameters can be set only by the manufacturer: Optional SOV1 conditions, Optional SOV1
relay logic operator (default OR), optional SOV1 start delay (default 0 sec), Optional SOV1 stop delay (default 6 sec),
Optional SOV1 relay coil (default energized).
When “Stay in position by SOV” is on, the ECU1000 signals “FAILURE” (due to “STAYPUT by SOV”) and the
local display shows the message “SOV1”
9 Priority of commands
The following diagram shows the priority of commands when actuator works in remote control mode. The “Stay in
position by optional SOV” has the highest priority and overrides any existing commands (if enabled). Automatic and
manual remote controls have the lowest priority.
Stay in position by optional SOV In Local control mode only local controls by pushbuttons UP/OPEN and
DOWN/CLOSE are available.
ESD In configuration mode the actuator stays in position. It can be moved only by
the commands of the menu “ECU commands, Travel limit setting” (and
Interlock
“PWM control” if PWM card is present).
Failsafe
The hydraulic connection in HCU could modify the priority of “ESD” and
“Stay in position” commands
Automatic and manual remote control
10 Output 4-20mA
The output 4-20mA can be configured by the user according to the following options:
• Out. 4-20mA: position retransmission or position demand
• Polarity 4-20mA out: it allows reversing the polarity of output 4-20mA signal.
11 Date
The function is used to set the following parameters
Date and Time: it sets the present date and time.
Start-up date: it is a maintenance parameter. The user can set the working start date of the actuator in the plant
Maintenance request date: it is a maintenance parameter. The user can set the date of the next planned maintenance. It
generates the “maintenance required” information (see paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables, Maintenance required
table”).
12 Miscellaneous
The function includes various types of parameters.
Time to reach posit: it is used to generate the alarm “Fail to position” (described in the paragraph “Actuator
malfunction tables”, “Alarm table”) if the position error complies with the following conditions
• In automatic mode : the maximum time with position error > 4% is greater than “Time to position” in
seconds
• In manual mode : actuator is not moving
User password: it allows changing the password level 1 (corresponding to username USER)
Service password: it allows changing the password level 2 (corresponding to username OPERATOR)
Bluetooth name: it selects the Bluetotooth name (cabinet serial number, actuator serial number, valve tag)
DL1 close colour: it selects the colour of DL1 LED CLOSE of Local Operator Interface (green or red)
DL2 alarm colour: it selects the colour of DL2 LED ALARM of Local Operator Interface (yellow or red)
DL3 open colour: it selects the colour of DL3 LED OPEN of Local Operator Interface (green or red)
13 Output relay
The standard configuration provides 4 output relays to signal “FAILURE, ALARM, REMOTE NOT AVAILABLE,
FAIL to POSITION” to control room. The configuration of each relay can be changed by the end user. The
manufacturer can change the number of available relays on request of end user.
The list of options available for each relay is shown in the below “Status relay table”.
The following parameters are available:
RLx condition: it allows selecting one or more conditions of “Status relay table” to trip the relay contacts
RLx pos<%: it allows to set the position% if the condition is “Position < xx%”
RLx pos>%: it allows to set the position% if the condition is “Position > xx%”
RLx logic operator: in case of selection of more conditions it allows to put them in OR or AND
RLx coil: it allow selecting to energize the coil when conditions occur and viceversa
Example: to set the relay RLx to switch when the actuator position is <10% or >90% by the ECU1000 local operator
interface.
In the menu “Actuator setup, Out relay”, select the relay RLx. Select “RLx condition”, enable the 2 conditions
“Position<xx” and “Position>xx”. The enabled status is shown by the symbol “>”. Select “RLx POS<% and enter the
value “10%”. Select “RLx POS>%” and enter “90%”. Select “RLx Logical Operator” and set “OR”. Select “RLx coil”
and set “Energized or de-energized”.
Pump2 mot. Sup. (electrical power supply) Failure of electrical power supply of pump2 motor
Pump2 mot. TH (motor temperature) High temperature of pump2 motor
Pump2 filter Clogged filter of pump2
Gener. sens. pump2 General sensor of pump2
Max time pump2 Time to reach the working pressure > reference time “Max time to pressure”
If mechanical stops are not present or not used only calibration of 4-20mA position transmitter is required.
+24Vdc Actuator
ECU 1000 Position
transmitter
Before executing the procedure relevant to “setting of travel limits”, it is mandatory to set the mechanical stop of
actuator and the calibration of 4-20mA position transmitter
Close Open
Limit (0%) Limit (100%)
The procedure to set travel limits by position is the following:
Open limit:
• Enter in the menu “View param ”.
• In “Restricted, Travel limit” check that “open limit mode” is “position”.
• Exit and return to HOME VIEW.
• Enter in the menu “ECU cmd, Travel limit setting”.
• Set a low operation speed, by the parameter SPEED (10-70%)
• Select the option “Op limit manual set”. By UP/OPEN and DOWN/CLOSE move the actuator to the desired
open position. By ENTER save the open position limit.
• Exit and return to HOME VIEW.
Close limit:
• Enter in the menu “View param”.
• In “Restricted, Travel limit” check that “close limit mode” is “position”.
• Exit and return to HOME VIEW.
• Enter in the menu “ECU cmd, Travel limit setting”.
• Set a low operation speed, by the parameter SPEED (10-70%)
• Select the option “Cl limit manual set”. By UP/OPEN and DOWN/CLOSE move the actuator to the desired
close position. By ENTER save the close position limit.
• Exit and return to HOME VIEW
The option “Open and Close limit autocalibration” CANNOT BE USED.
Close Open
Limit (0%) Limit (100%)
The options “continuous”, “position change” and “cycle” allow changing the actuator control while it is on the travel
limit. The most used option is “continuous”.
Continuous: when the actuator is close the end of travel (in general few %), the output of positioning function is set to
a constant value. If the position is stable, the ECU1000 assumes the reached position as “end of travel” but the output is
maintained on and the actuator constantly pushes against the mechanical stop. Local LED’s and relays signal
“open/closed end of travel”. Command in opposite direction is generated only if Position Demand is > 2% (<98%) or by
manual command.
Position change: when the actuator is close the end of travel (in general few %), the output of positioning function is
set to a constant value. If the position is stable, the ECU1000 assumes the reached position as “end of travel” and the
output of positioning function goes to zero. Local LED’s and relays signal “open/closed end of travel”. If the actuator
moves few% from the end of travel position”, it is driven to return to previous position with constant speed and duration
of command. Command in opposite direction is generated only if Position Demand is > 2% (<98%) or by manual
command.
Cycle: when the actuator is close the end of travel (in general few %), the output of positioning function is set to a
constant value. If the position is stable, the ECU1000 assumes the reached position as “end of travel” and the output of
positioning function goes to zero. Local LED’s and relays signal “open/closed end of travel”. Cyclically an output
command is generated to maintain the actuator in the end of travel position. Maximum speed, time between pulses and
duration of command are constant. Command in opposite direction is generated only if Position Demand is > 2% (98%)
or by manual command.
time
Before executing the procedure “Setting of travel limits on reaching the mechanical stop”, it is mandatory to set
the mechanical stop of actuator.
If the actuator is not provided of mechanical stops the above option CANNOT BE USED.
BIAS adjustement
The adjustment of BIAS of ATOS driver card is performed in factory in the test
operation. If the ATOS driver card must be replaced, it is necessary to adjust the
BIAS of the new card. The procedure is the following:
• Enter in the menu “ECU cmd, Travel limit setting”.
• Select the option SPEED. The default value is 10%. Press ENTER if it is
OK or change the value by UP and DOWN
• Select the option “Open loop cmd”. By UP and DOWN move the valve to
about 50%.
• By a screwdriver rotate the screw of BIAS until the actuator position in bit
on the ECU1000 display is stable
• Exit and return to HOME VIEW
Purge
The purge operation is used to exhaust the air that could be present into the hydraulic circuit, immediately after the
hydraulic supply connection, or after proportional valve re-installation. (See the documentation relevant to ATOS
Proportional Valve).
• Enter in the menu “ECU cmd, Travel limit setting”. Select the option SPEED. The default value is 10%.
Press ENTER if it is OK or change the value by UP and DOWN.
• Select the option “Open loop cmd”. By UP and DOWN move the valve to about 50%.
• Unloose carefully the purge screw (see ATOS documentation) and then press alternatively the OPEN / CLOSE
push-buttons until the oil flows out without air.
• Re-tight the purge screws and cleans the proportional valve from the oil.
• Exit and return to HOME VIEW
(1) Position Demand: local control, configuration and manual operations are available. The failure is not generated in the on-off actuator
(2) Proportional valve: available only if the ECU1000
• controls the “driver card” of the proportional valve and this driver card has the FAULT output signal connected to an ECU1000 digital input (Atos proportional valve type)
• controls a “proportional valve with integrated electronic driver” and the valve has a monitoring 4-20mA output signal connected to an ECU1000 analogue input (Moog proportional valve type)
• controls the optional “Biffi PWM driver card” and the power supply is out of range (18-30Vdc) (see DTDE328) (in case of standard proportional valves without transducer, 1 or 2 coil)
• controls the optional “Biffi PWM driver card”, the power supply is out of range (18-30Vdc) (see DTDE328) or the position of PSOV’s cursor is 0 (in case of Biffi PSOV’s proportional valves)
• the failure is not generated in the actuators with servovalves controlled by current (+-10,…,+-100mA) without feedback signal and in the on-off actuators
(3) Tracking: electrical signal to drive the proportional valve/servovalve/SOV is set to 0 (output of positioning function = 0).
(4) HPU failure: in the default configuration the HPU malfunctions generate only alarms (see ADDITIONAL ALARM TABLE) and only if the actuator is with integral HPU. On request the ECU1000 can be set to
generate an HPU failure
(5) Stayput by SOV: it exits only if the “Stay in position by optional SOV” function is on
(6) Failsafe: it exits only if Failsafe function was configured “on"
(7) In the default configuration the “HPU failure” does not change the actuator operating mode. On request ECU1000 can be set to initiate the Failsafe or the “Stay in position by optional SOV” functions
(8) In the default configuration the “Position Demand” and “Bus control” failures initiate the configured Failsafe action. On request the ECU1000 can be set to “No change actuator operation” or “Stay in position by
optional SOV”
(9) Bus control: the Failure exits only if the actuator is controlled by Bus
(10) In general if the function “Stay in position by optional SOV” is enabled the “Failsafe” function is disabled and viceversa
(1) Stroke limit: the Alarm exits if the Actuator Position % is % < “-STOP ZONE%” or > “100+STOP ZONE%”. The actuator moves according to “position demand”, it does not indicates “end of travel” and when
position % is within the “STOP ZONE%” or “100+STOP ZONE%” the alarm disappears.
(2) Fail to position: the Alarm exits if:
• The ECU1000 works in remote control (auto or manual) or in ESD
• The position error is > 4% for a time greater than parameter “time to position”
• The actuator is not closed and the command is “close” or the actuator is not open and the command is “open”.
• Reset of alarm “Fail to position”:
in remote auto : position error < 4%
in remote manual by a new open/close manual command or if position % is less than 4% from open and close limit
in ESD by removing ESD command or position % within 4% of ESD position
The maximum out of positioning function is 50%
The alarm is not generated in local control and configuration mode.
(3) On request ECU1000 can be set to initiate the Failsafe action or to activate the “Stay in position by optional SOV” function in case of “Fail to position”
(4) Hyd. Valve Leak: The alarm is available only in the “on-off actuator”.
(5) PWM Utilization %: the alarm exits only if the ECU1000 is provided with PWM driver and the actuator is controlled by PSOV’s or modulating proportional valve without spool feedback. When alarm is active the
maximum duty of PWM signal is lowered until the alarm disappears. It is a protection of proportional valve /PSOV from over-heating in case of heavy service (see description of alarm in the DTDE328)
Alarm of PST
PST T-PST T-PST time % greater than T-PST of signature Regular operation x New PST or Clear Failure/Alarm
PST OV-TR OV-TR % greater than configured value Regular operation x New PST or Clear Failure/Alarm
PST T-RET T-RET time % greater that T-RET of signature Regular operation x New PST or Clear Failure/Alarm
PST Reset PST cycle aborted Regular operation x New PST or Clear Failure/Alarm
The HPU and pump alarms exit only if the pump is provided with the relevant sensors (for instance if the HPU is without oil level sensor, the “Oil level” alarm cannot exit)
(1) In the default configuration the ECU1000 signals ALARM. On request ECU1000 can be set to signal “FAILURE” due to “HPU failure” (see “Failure table” in DTDE327 and “HPU control” in DTDE328).
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
The HPU and pump alarms exit only if the pump is provided with the relevant sensors (for instance if the HPU is without oil level sensor, the “Oil level” alarm cannot exit)
(1) In the default configuration the ECU1000 signals ALARM. On request ECU1000 can be set to signal “FAILURE” due to “HPU failure” (see “Failure table” in DTDE327 and “HPU control” in DTDE328).
(2) The pump control can be configured to “the motor stops” or “the motor runs” when the alarm occurs.
16 Loggers
The manual DTDE328 provides the instructions to use the Logger feature. The present paragraph gives only a brief
description of the main features of logger function. The ECU1000 has the following separated logger:
• Event logger: it contains the list of the last 256 events. Each event is described by type, date and action
• Failure logger: it contains the list of the last 256 failures. Each failure is described by type and date
• Alarm logger: it contains the list of the last 256 alarms. Each alarm is described by type and date
• Statistic log: it contains statistic data and counters
The tables with the list of Failures and Alarms are reported in the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables”. The
following tables show the list of Event and Statistic logger:
ECU1000
18.2 Actuator for heavy modulating service and low oil drain
ECU1000
ECU1000
When ECU 1000 is powered, the microcontroller executes the initialization routine to check the memory, set I/O’s, read
data, etc. The display shows the message “ > Connection…”. When the initialization procedure ends the display
switches to the HOME VIEW.
DISPLAY of ECU 1000 -Opening, closing, no-out
FAILURE
Position %
ALARM Status
-Auto-rem, Manual-rem, Auto-bus,
MAINT. REQUEST Manual-bus, Local, Local-auto
<c> Demand %
-Control, Configuration, Tracking,
<c> is present only if
the Input Control mode Stay in posit, Switch to auto
Characterization
function is on
Actuator closing
CLOSING, ESD, <R> ESD active
Recorder active
Position 100.0%
FAILURE
ALARM 100.0% Position Demand 90.0% (no Input Characterization)
FAILURE
ALARM
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
MAINT. REQ. 90.0% Automatic remote control
Switch to Auto function active
AUTO-REM, SWITCH TO AUTO
The ECU 1000 automatically returns to HOME VIEW if no local pushbutton is used in 10 min.
If the actuator is for on-off service the “Demand%” is not present on the local display.
The figure below shows the menu chart. To enter in LOCAL control mode, press UP and then ENTER, maintaining UP
pressed. Then enter the password (at least level 1, User). In local control mode the navigation in the menu is not
allowed since UP and DOWN pushbuttons work as OPEN and CLOSE commands to open and close the valve. The
LOCAL control status is saved in the permanent memory of the Electronics. If the actuator is switched off, it will restart
in LOCAL. To exit from LOCAL it needs to press ENTER.
HOME VIEW
closing
Enter = exit from local control
Local control of actuator
100.0%
100.0%
Up and Enter + PSW = enter in local control by Up=Open and
Down=Close
REMOTE
Enter Enter
.. ..
View ……………
Up /
Setup Enter …………… Down
..
Up /
ECU cmd Down + Funct.block ……………
Enter Up /
PSW …………… …………… Down
Funct. TAB Name of parameter
View parameters …………… Enter
Enter
Value
Enter Enter
.. ..
View ……………
Enter Up /
Setup …………… Down
..
Up / +
ECU cmd Down
Funct.block ……………
Enter Up /
PSW …………… …………… Down
Funct. TAB Name of parameter
…………… Enter
Set parameters
Value Up / Enter
Down
Enter Enter
.. ..
View ……………
Enter Up /
Setup …………… Down
..
ECU cmd Up / + Funct.block ……………
Enter Up /
Down PSW …………… …………… Down
3322 Funct. TAB Name of command
…………… Enter
Commands of ECU1000 Enter
Value Up /
Down
In menu operation the UP/DOWN/ENTER pushbuttons allow moving in the menu.
In View mode the working parameters of ECU1000 can be viewed but not changed
In Setup mode the working parameters of actuator can be viewed and changed
In ECU cmd mode it is possible to activate commands to calibrate analogue inputs and outputs, set travel limits, set
memory, save configuration data, view variables, etc.
Note: it needs to press one time UP or DOWN or ENTER to wake up the display before initiating menu operation. This
is due to the display function “auto or save”.
On demand the local operator interface can be provided with a local two-position selector LOCAL, REMOTE
o Switch from LOCAL to REMOTE control mode is done by selector, password is not required
o Navigation in the menu is not allowed if selector is in LOCAL
o In LOCAL the actuator can be moved by means of pushbuttons UP/OPEN, DOWN/CLOSE.
o In REMOTE the actuator is under control of signals of control room
HOME VIEW
Remote Local
closing
Local control of actuator
100.0%
xxx.x% LOCAL
by Up=Open and
Down=Close
REMOTE SELECTOR
Enter
.. ..
View …………… Enter
Up /
Setup Enter …………… Down
..
Up /
ECU cmd Down + Funct.block ……………
Up /
PSW …………… Enter …………… Down
Funct. TAB Name of parameter
View parameters …………… Enter Enter
Value
Enter
.. ..
View …………… Enter
Enter Up /
Setup …………… Down
..
Up / +
ECU cmd Down
Funct.block ……………
Enter Up /
PSW …………… …………… Down
Funct. TAB Name of parameter
…………… Enter
Set parameters
Value Up / Enter
Down
Enter
.. ..
View …………… Enter
Enter Up /
Setup …………… Down
..
ECU cmd Up / + Funct.block ……………
Up /
Down PSW …………… Enter …………… Down
Funct. TAB Name of command
…………… Enter
Commands of ECU1000 Enter
Value Up /
Down
In menu operation the UP/DOWN/ENTER pushbuttons allow moving in the menu.
In View mode the working parameters of ECU1000 can be viewed but not changed
In Setup mode the working parameters of actuator can be viewed and changed
In ECU cmd mode it is possible to activate commands to calibrate analogue inputs and outputs, set travel limits, set
memory, save configuration data, view variables, etc.
Note: it needs to press one time UP or DOWN or ENTER to wake up the display before initiating menu operation. This
is due to the display function “auto or save”.
To view/modify a parameter or send an ECU command from the HOME VIEW it needs: to select the username, to select the mode, to enter the password, to select the Function Block, to select the
Function TAB, to select the parameter or ECU command.
HOME VIEW
USERNAME MODE PASSWORD
ENTER
HOME VIEW
FAILURE FAILURE LIST Press DOWN/ CLOSE
and UP/OPEN to
move up and down the
cursor of display.
Press ENTER to
select the line. Press
ALARM ALARM LIST ENTER on “..” to
switch back to
DOWN/ previous screen
CLOSE
LIST of VIEW DATA
ACTUAT. VARIABLES LIST ACTUAT. VAR. OIL PRESSURE POSITION ERROR TEMPERATURE
In View mode the working parameters of ECU1000 can be viewed but not changed. In Setup mode the working
parameters of actuator can be viewed and changed. In ECU cmd mode it is possible to send commands to ECU1000
(to calibrate analogue inputs and outputs, set travel limits, set memory, save configuration data, view variables, etc.).
The access to View, Setup and ECU cmd menus depends on the username and password level. 4 password levels are
available; each password is 6 char long (number or capital letters). Three additional passwords allow special operations.
Username and password work as described below:
• Username USER: only parameters of active functions with password level 1 can be viewed and modified; only ECU
cmd’s of active functions with password level 1 can be executed. The default password is “100000”. It is
configurable and allows modifying few parameters (Dead band, Recorder, output relay, etc.). Disabled functions and
ECU cmd’s cannot be viewed.
• Username OPERATOR: only parameters of active functions with password levels 1 and 2 can be viewed and
modified; only ECU cmd’s of active functions with password level 1 and 2 can be executed. The default password is
“200000”. It is configurable and allows commissioning the actuator (positioner, ESD, status relay, travel limit
calibration, etc.). Disabled functions and ECU cmd’s cannot be viewed.
• Username SERVICE: only parameters of active functions with password levels 1, 2 and 3 can be viewed and
modified; only ECU cmd?s of active functions with password level 1, 2 and 3 can be executed. Disabled functions
and ECU cmd’s cannot be viewed.
• Username SPECIALIST: this password (level 4) allows viewing/modifying any parameter of active functions and
executing any ECU cmd of active functions. Disabled functions and ECU cmd’s cannot be viewed.
• Username GUEST0: it allows viewing the full set of parameters and ECU commands, including the parameters
and ECU commands of the non-active functions. No write operation is allowed. The GUEST0 password is “10000A”.
• Username GUEST1: it allows only viewing the NAME PLATE function block. No write operation is allowed. The
GUEST0 password is “A0000A”.
• Username GUEST2: it has the same permits of the SPECIALIST, but the number of access to ECU1000 menu is
limited to 10. After 10 accesses the password is no longer valid.
The menu is organized in “Function block”, “Function TAB”, “Parameter and Command”.
Each “Function TAB” collects a group of “Parameters or ECU Commands”, each “Function block” collects a group
of “Function TAB’s”. Only the parameters and commands with username levels lower or equal to entered username
level can be viewed and modified. Parameters and functions not enabled will not be shown (except username GUEST0)
The paragraph “Parameter table” shows the table of the FUNCTION BLOCKS, FUNCTION TAB’s and
PARAMETERS, the description of each PARAMETER and the PSW level required.
The paragraph “ECU cmd table” shows the table of the FUNCTION BLOCKS, the FUNCTION TAB’s and
COMMANDS, the description of each “ECU command” and the PSW level required.
The paragraph “Status and variables table” shows the list of the status and variables visible on the display and useful
for commissioning and diagnostic operations.
To access to parameters and ECU cmd’s the following steps are required:
• Verify the PSW level required in the “Parameter and ECU cmd” tables
• Enter username and password
• Select the Function Block
• Select the Function TAB
• Select the parameter or ECU cmd
• View / change the parameter or execute the ECU cmd
• Exit from menu
On request the
Rl3 condition (see Status relay table) 2
manufacturer can
activate additional Rl3 pos <% (1-100 %) 1
relays, from Rl4 to Rl3 pos >% (0-99 %) 1
Rl10. Rl3 logic operator (OR-AND) 2
Rl3 coil (de-energized, energized) 2
Recorder
Recorder time (2,4,10,20,50,…,1000) (used to calculate sampling time) 1
Stop condition (failure, alarm, position <5%, position >95%) 1
Y-axis (position demand, position, HPU pressure, position error,etc.) 1
Recorder mode (off, record, pst, op-curve, cl-curve) 1
Input characterization
Input characteristic (off, linear 100-0, custom increase, custom decrease) 2
Function visible only Custom point (from 2 to 21) 2
if activated in the Input #0 2
Restricted menu, Output #0 2
Function selector. Input #1 2
Only a number of Output #1 2
points equal to Input #2 2
“Custom point” is Output #2 2
shown on the local Input #3 2
display.
Output #3 2
Input #4 2
Output #4 2
Input #5 2
Output #5 2
Input #6 2
Output #6 2
Input #7 2
Output #7 2
Input #8 2
Output #8 2
Input #9 2
Output #9 2
Input #10 2
Output #10 2
Input #11 2
Output #11 2
Input #12 2
Output #12 2
Input #13 2
Output #13 2
Input #14 2
Output #14 2
Name Plate
ECU1000 cabinet data
In characteriz (on/off) 2
Optional SOV1
Function activated by Optional-SOV1 relay condition 2
the manufacturer
Travel limit
Open limit mode (position, continuous, position change, cycle) 2
Close limit mode (position, continuous, position change, cycle) 2
Use UP and DOWN to select the line of display or to change the value of parameter. Use ENTER to confirm the value
of parameter and to move to next menu. Select the line “..” and press ENTER to return to previous menu. The selected
line of display is shown in reversed mode.
Press UP or DOWN or ENTER to wake up the ECU1000 display before initiating menu operation.
HOME VIEW
closing
Note: press one time UP or DOWN or ENTER to wake up
100.0%
100.0%
the display before initiating menu operation.
REMOTE
Enter Enter
.. ..
List of data ……………
Down …………… Up / Enter Name of variable
………….. Enter Enter
Down
………….. Up / Data……....
Down
………….. …………… Value
Alternatively the switch to previous level of menu can be done by pressing simultaneously UP and DOWN
The following examples show the procedure to view “HPU oil pressure”, “Failure”, “Alarm”, and “Function summary”
The procedure allows viewing the value of the variable “HPU oil pressure”. The variable is measured only if the
actuator is provided with HPU.
• Press DOWN
• By UP and DOWN select “ACTUATOR VARIABLES”
• Press ENTER
• By UP and DOWN move the cursor to select “”OIL PRESSURE bar”.
• Press ENTER to view the value
• Press ENTER to return to the previous level of menu.
• By UP and DOWN move the cursor of display to the line “..”. Press ENTER to return to the previous level of
menu.
• By UP and DOWN move the cursor of display to the line “..”. Press ENTER to return to HOME VIEW
The procedure allows viewing the list of function enabled to work in the ECU1000 and their main parameters
• Press ENTER
• By UP and DOWN select “Function summary”
• Press ENTER to view the list of function. Use UP and DOWN to scroll the list.
• Press Enter to view if the function is enabled.
• Press Enter to return to the list of functions
• By UP and DOWN move the cursor of display to the line “..”. Press ENTER to return to the previous level of
menu.
The procedure allows clearing the Failures and Alarms present in the ECU1000. If a Failure or Alarm is still detected by
the ECU1000 it will appear again.
• Press ENTER
• By UP and DOWN select “Clear Fail-Alarm”
• Press ENTER. Use DOWN to select “Clear Fail-Alarm”.
• Press Enter. By UP and DOWN set the value “1”.
• Press Enter. The cursor of display return on “..”
• Press ENTER to return to the previous level of menu.
• By UP and DOWN move the cursor of display on the line “..”
• Press Enter to return to HOME VIEW
DTDE 328
ECU 1000
Input Characterization,Recorder,
Graph, Logger,PST, HPU control,
On-off control, Optional local lamps,
PWM driver, RS485 Modbus RTU
Display card
ECU1000 with
PWM driver card
INDEX
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 INPUT CHARACTERIZATION 1
2.1 Option: Off 2
2.2 Option: Linear 100-0 2
2.3 Configuration of 2 valves in Split range 3
2.4 Option: Custom increase 3
2.5 Option: Custom decrease 4
2.6 Control of 3 valves by 1 only 4-20mA signal 4
2.7 Input characterization parameters 5
2.8 Status and variables table 6
2.9 ESD and Failsafe 6
2.10 Configuration by Local Operator Interface 6
2.11 Configuration by BIFFI-Assistant 7
3 RECORDER 8
3.1 Recorder mode 8
3.2 Start condition 8
3.3 Stop condition 8
3.4 Recording duration 9
3.5 Max recording time 9
3.6 Y-axis: 9
3.7 OP-stroke curve 9
3.7.1 OP-stroke signature 10
3.8 CL-stroke curve 10
3.8.1 CL-stroke signature 10
3.9 PST curve 10
3.9.1 PST signature 10
3.10 Record curve 10
3.10.1 Record signature 10
3.11 Parameters and ECU cmd of Recorder 11
3.12 Configuration of Recorder 11
3.13 Configuration by Local Operator Interface 11
3.13.1 Recorder function 11
3.13.2 Curve signature 12
3.14 Configuration by BIFFI-Assistant 12
4 GRAPH 13
4.1 Curves 14
5 LOGGER 17
5.1 Event, Failure and Alarm logger 17
5.2 Short Event, Failure and Alarm logger 18
6 PST PARTIAL STROKE TEST 19
6.1 General features 19
6.2 Parameters of Partial Stroke Test 20
6.3 Command to initiate the PST cycle 20
6.4 Reset of PST cycle 21
6.5 PST reports 21
Warning: • It is assumed that the installation, the setting, the commissioning, the
maintenance and repair works are carried out by qualified personnel and
checked by responsible Specialists.
• The door of cabinet must be kept “closed” by the key (or equivalent tool).
Operating the unit or working on the Electronics with the cabinet door “open”
could cause personal injury and damage the equipment
Warning: The ECU1000 controls the actuator, it could control the HPU, it could drive
generic electric, mechanic, pneumatic and hydraulic devices. To avoid unwanted
movement of mechanic parts or leakage of pressurized fluids and risk injury of
people and damage of equipment and ambient, any mechanic, electric, hydraulic
and pneumatic device controlled by the ECU1000 device should be placed in safe
condition before executing any installation, commissioning or maintenance
operation (see relevant instruction manuals of actuator, HPU, etc.)
Warning: If the device is located in hazardous area a ‘’hot permit’’ must be obtained before
opening the explosion proof enclosures. Moreover the area must be cleaned from
explosive mixture since time keeper battery and residual capacitor charge could
generate electrical spark and cause explosion. The installation must be carried out
in accordance to the applicable Ex-d Standards regarding the electrical
installations in hazardous areas and any other applicable national standard and
rule.
Warning:
Refer to DTDE326 for the installation and maintenance instruction manual of the
ECU1000 cabinet.
1 Introduction
The documents DTDE326, DTDE327 and DTDE328 are the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manuals of the
ECU1000, Electronic Control Unit for electro-hydraulic actuators.
The DTDE326 “Installation and Maintenance” provides the instructions for the installation and maintenance of cabinet
with ECU1000. The DTDE327 “Control functions and Local Operator Interface” provides the instructions to use the
Local Operator Interface, the Positioner and the additional functions to control and monitor the actuator. The manual
DTDE328 “Functions description” provides the instructions relevant to the following ECU1000 functions:
• Input Characterization
• Recorder, Graph and Logger
• PST Partial Stroke Test
• HPU (Hydraulic Power Unit) control
• On-Off actuator control
• Optional local lamps
• PWM module
• RS485 Modbus RTU interface
The manuals DTDE 326, DTE327 and DTDE328 provide the instructions relevant to complete set of ECU1000
functions. Only functions requested by the application and needed to allow the correct actuator control and operation
will be activated in the factory setting.
Warning: It is assumed that the installation, the setting, the commissioning, the maintenance
and repair works are carried out by qualified personnel and checked by
responsible Specialists. Operating the unit or working on the Electronics with the
cabinet door open could cause personal injury.
2 Input characterization
The Input Characterization function allows modifying the profile of the 4-20mA input signal “Position Demand” in a
custom defined curve. The function is active only if the parameter “In. Characteriz., on-off” in the menu “Restricted,
Function Selector” is set to ON.
If the above parameter is OFF the input 4mA = corresponds to Position Demand 0% and 20mA = corresponds to
Position Demand 100%.
If the above parameter is ON, 4 options are available: off, linear 100-0, custom increase and custom decrease.
• off: the input signal 4mA corresponds to Position Demand 0% and 20mA corresponds to 100%.
• Linear 100-0: the input signal 4mA corresponds to Position Demand out 100% and 20mA corresponds to 0%.
No additional parameters are required.
• Custom increase: the user sets the relationship between the 4-20mA Position Demand input signal and the
Position Demand out %. The user should enter from 2 to 21 X-Y points according to the configurable
parameter “Custom point number” in the menu “Actuator setup, Input Characterization”. The entered
data should be X>X-1, Y>=Y-1. If number of data is not according to “Custom point number” or their value is
not according to the above constraints, the ECU1000 issues the ALARM “Characterization” and works in
“off” mode.
• Custom decrease: the user sets the relationship between the 4-20mA Position Demand input signal and the
Position Demand out %. The user should enter from 2 to 21 X-Y points according to the configurable
parameter “Custom point number” in the menu “Actuator setup, Input Characterization”. The entered
data should be X>X-1, Y<=Y-1. If number of data is not according to “Custom point number” or their value is
not according to the above constraints, the ECU1000 issues the ALARM “Characterization” and works in
“off” mode.
Position Demand out %
Position Demand in 4-20mA Input characterization Positioning function
If the Input Characterization function is on, the display of the Local Operator Interface shows the letter <c>before the
value of the Position Demand %. The <c> indicates that the value shown on the display is the Position Demand out %.
The local display of ECU1000 does not show the X,Y points that exceed the “Custom point number”. The BIFFI-
Assistant shows all 21 points even if “Custom point number” is less than 21.
The figures below shows the relationship between the Position Demand 4-20mA input and Position Demand out %
Actuator #2
50%
0%
The ECU1000 controls one only actuator. Two valves in split range can be controlled by 2 ECU1000 and one only 4-
20mA input demand signal (see paragraph 2.6, Control of more valves by one only 4-20mA signal).
0%
24V
Example of separator:
PHOENIX type
MINI –MCR-SL-I-I
Additional 4- ECU1000
4-20mA
20mA separator
24V
Additional 4- ECU1000
4-20mA
4-20mA - 20mA separator
24V
Input characterization
Input characteristic (off, linear 100-0, custom increase, custom decrease) 2
Custom points (from 2 to 21) 2
Input #0 2
Output #0 2
Input #1 2
Output #1 2
Input #2 2
Output #2 2
Input #3 2
Output #3 2
Input #4 2
Output #4 2
Input #5 2
Output #5 2
Input #6 2
Output #6 2
Input #7 2
Output #7 2
Input #8 2
Output #8 2
Input #9 2
Output #9 2
Input #10 2
Output #10 2
Input #11 2
Output #11 2
Input #12 2
Output #12 2
Input #13 2
Output #13 2
Input #14 2
Output #14 2
Input #15 2
Output #15 2
Input #16 2
Output #16 2
Input #17 2
Output #17 2
Input #18 2
Output #18 2
Input #19 2
Output #19 2
Input #20 2
Output #20 2
Restricted
General
Function selector
In characteriz (on/off) 2
The following table shows the data visible from the HOME VIEW of local display by pressing DOWN and relevant to
Input Characterization function. No PSW is requested.
Note: it needs to press one time one of the Local Operator Interface pushbuttons to wake up the display before
initiating the menu operations.
Actuator status:
Actuator variables: -
Position demand % (Position Demand out % to positioning function)
Position error %
In-pos demand % (Position Demand input %)
-
-
Next PST
Next pump switch
Failure:
Alarm: See list of alarms (Characterization, in case of wrong data)
Input Characterization function works only on the 4-20mA Position Demand input. ESD function and Failsafe functions
are not affected by the Input Characterization.
Note: it needs to press one time UP or DOWN or ENTER to wake up the display before initiating the menu operations
(due to display function “auto or save”).
Use UP and DOWN to select the line of display or to change the value of parameter. Use ENTER to confirm the value
of parameter and to move to next menu. Select the line “..” and press ENTER to return to previous menu. The access to
“Actuator setup, Input Characterization” menu and to “Restricted, Function selector, In characteriz” parameter
requires at least password level 2 and username “Operator”. The procedure to set the parameter of the function is the
following:
• Press ENTER
• By UP and DOWN select the username, then press ENTER
• By UP and DOWN select View or Setup, then press ENTER.
Enter the password. By UP and DOWN select each character and then press ENTER to confirm.
If the function Input Characterization is disabled it need to enable it by the instruction below. If the function is
already enabled the next step is not required.
• By UP and DOWN select “Restricted”, then press ENTER
• By UP and DOWN select “Function selector”, then press ENTER. By UP, DOWN select the parameter “In
characteriz” , and then press ENTER.
• By UP, DOWN set it to “ON” and then press ENTER.
• By UP, DOWN select “..” and then press ENTER, to return to previous menu.
• Repeat the procedure until the menu is “.., Actuator setup, …. , Restricted” appears.
3 Recorder
The Recorder function allows sampling the variables selected by “Y-axis” in function of the time “t” and saving them
in the permanent memory of the ECU1000. The data can be recovered, viewed and exported as Y/t graphs by the
BIFFI-Assistant SW tool. The data cannot be viewed by the Local Operator Interface of ECU1000. Up to 5 curves of
each “Recorder mode” option can be saved in the memory. When the memory is full and a new curve is saved, the
oldest one is deleted. Each curve can have up to 4 Y-axis variables. One of the curves can be saved in a separate
memory and used as “Signature”. It can be compared with the last saved curves to obtain data relevant to the behavior
of the actuator and process valve.
Sampling of data starts 5 sec. after the selection of Recorder mode. When it is on, the HOME VIEW of the local
display shows <R>. If Recorder mode is changed while “sampling” of data is on, the collected data will be lost.
Collected data are saved in the permanent memory of ECU1000 only if one of the “STOP condition” described below
occurs.
The below tables show the parameters to set the Recorder function.
Only one Recorder mode at a time is active. In Record / Op-stroke / Cl-stroke modes the recorder switches off when
the stop condition occurs. It can restart by a new setting of the “Recorder mode”. In “PST mode” the recorder switches
off when the stop condition occurs, but it restarts automatically when a new PST initiates.
3.6 Y-axis:
Y-Axis variable Descritption
Position demand Position Demand %
Actuator Position Actuator Position % The parameter “Y-axis” allows
HPU oil pressure Available only if the HPU control is active selecting the variables of Y-Axis to
Position error Position Error % sample. Up to 4 variables can be
AO1 % Analogue Output of positioner % selected. Each saved curve is made
Interlock Interlock variable of 200 samples of each variable
Pressure cylinder1 Available only if the transmitter is present
Pressure cylinder2 Available only if the transmitter is present
PST trigger Start and stop marker of PST
The above option can be used to record the full opening stroke of actuator. If the Position Demand is 0% and 5 sec. after
“OP-stroke” mode selection, the recorder enters in the “wait for trigger” status. When Position Demand signal
becomes >1% the sampling of data starts and ends when the “Recording duration” time has passed.
This option can be used also to record a partial actuator travel in both directions for the “Recording duration” time.
The above options can be used to record the full closing stroke of actuator.
If the Position Demand is100% and 5 sec. after “CL-stroke” mode selection, the recorder enters in the “wait for
trigger” status. When Position Demand signal becomes <99% the sampling of data starts and ends when the
“Recording duration” time has passed.
This option can be used also to record a partial actuator travel in both directions for the “Recording duration” time.
The paragraph “PST Partial Stroke test” describes the PST Partial Stroke test and provides the detailed information
relevant to PST function. Here are reported only the information to set the Recorder in the PST function
This option can be used to sample the selected variables and save the last 200 samples in the ECU1000 memory when
the condition to stop occurs. The record operation ends if the stop condition does not occur in “Max recording time”.
Recorder
Recording duration (from 2 to 1000 sec) 1
Stop condition (in Record mode, Failure, Alarm, Position<5%, Position >95%) 1
Y-axis (Position%, Position Demand%, AO1, etc) 1
Recorder mode (off, OP-stroke, CL-stroke, PST, Record) 1
The following table shows the ECU cmd necessary to set the “Signature” in the Recorder function.
Curves
Select OP-stroke signature 1
Select CL-stroke signature 1
Select PST signature 1
Select Record signature 1
Before initiating menu operations, it needs to press one time UP or DOWN or ENTER to wake up the display.
Use UP and DOWN to select the line of display or to change the value of parameter. Use ENTER to confirm the value
of parameter and to move to the next menu. Select the line “..” and press ENTER to return to previous menu. The
manual DTDE327 “Actuator control and Local Operator Interface” provides detailed instructions to use the Local
Operator Interface. Here are reported only the information to set the Recorder by the Local Operator Interface.
• By UP and DOWN select “Stop condition” and then press ENTER. By UP and DOWN select the desired stop
condition and then press ENTER. Configure this parameter only if the Recorder mode will be “Record”.
• By UP and DOWN select “Y-Axis, then press ENTER. By UP and DOWN set the variable to sample and then press
ENTER.
• By UP and DOWN select the parameter “Recorder mode” and then press ENTER. By UP and DOWN select the
desired option (“OP-stroke, CL-stroke, PST, Record”) and then press ENTER.
• By UP and DOWN select the line “..” and then press ENTER. Repeat the procedure to return to HOME VIEW.
Now the Recorder is active. The sampling of data starts when the trigger condition occurs. To modify the setting it
needs to set again the Recorder mode in OFF.
4 Graph
The function is available only by BIFFI-Assistant. The Recorder function saves the curves and the signatures in the
ECU1000 permanent memory according to instructions of previous paragraphs. The saved data can be viewed as graph
or table and exported only by BIFFI-Assistant SW tool. The Graphs are not visible on the local Operator Interface due
to small visible area of the display. This paragraph reports only the instructions of BIFFI-Assistant relevant to the
Graph. Detailed instructions about the installation and operation of the BIFFI-Assistant are reported in the “BIFFI-
Assistant Instruction Manual”. Use the left key of mouse to select the line, use right key of mouse to read / write the
selected BLOCK, TAB, data. Each graph can be individually or with other data exported and saved in the PC memory.
4.1 Curves
Only 2 curves at a
time can be viewed.
Each curve can have
maximum 4
variables.
The figure shows the
“Opening “ curve 0
(signature) and
curve 2, 2 variables
for each curve
5 Logger
The function is available only by BIFFI-Assistant. The ECU1000 saves the Event logger, the Failure logger and the
Alarm logger in the ECU1000 permanent memory. The saved data can be viewed as tables and exported only by
BIFFI-Assistant SW tool. The loggers are not visible on the local Operator Interface due to small visible area of the
display. This paragraph reports only the instruction of BIFFI-Assistant relevant to the Logger. Detailed instructions
about the installation and operation of the BIFFI-Assistant are reported in the “BIFFI-Assistant Instruction Manual”.
Use the left key of mouse to select the line, use the right key of mouse to read / write the selected BLOCK, TAB, data.
Each logger can be individually or with other data exported and saved in the PC memory. The list of Events, Failure and
Alarms is reported in the manual DTDE327 “Actuator control and Local Operator Interface”. The figures in the
previous paragraph show how to use the BIFFI-Assistant SW tool.
The following figures show the actuator position% versus time in case of PST in closing and opening direction.
Max PST duration
100 100
Position %
PST travel%
Overtravel % (OV-TR)
PST in closing
T-RET direction
T-PST Stay in
Command position
to initiate (PAUSE)
PST Time sec
0
The following parameters are available in the menu options “ACTUATOR SETUP, PST SETUP” of ECU1000 to set
PST function:
a. PST START mode: OFF, MANUAL, AUTO, AUTO-MANUAL
• OFF: the PST function is disabled
• MANUAL: the PST cycle starts if one of the conditions 1 and 2 occurs
1. ECU1000 receives a remote hardwired PST command (min duration 1 sec)
2. ECU1000 receives the PST command from the Local Operator Interface in the menu option
“ECU cmd, Device command”
• AUTO: the PST cycle starts automatically if both the conditions 3 and 4 occur
3. The time from the last PST cycle is equal to the parameter PST PERIOD
4. The time of the day is equal to the parameter PST TIME (hh:mm:ss)
• MAN-AUTO: the PST cycle starts if one of the condition 5 and 6 occurs
5. Conditions 1. and 2. of MANUAL mode are satisfied
6. Conditions 3. and 4. of AUTO mode are satisfied
b. PST PERIOD: time interval between PST’s in days, configurable from 1 to 1000, in PST START=“AUTO”
c. PST TIME: hour, minute and second to start the PST, in PST START=“AUTO”.
d. PST TRAVEL: position travel during PST cycle, in % of position, configurable from 1 to 40. If actuator is
fully open it moves from 100% to “100-PST TRAVEL %”, if actuator is fully closed it moves from 0% to
“PST TRAVEL %”
e. MAX T-PST: max time to carry out the PST TRAVEL, measured in % of T-PST time of SIGNATURE,
configurable from 0 to 1000%.
f. MAX PST T-RET: max time allowed to return to initial position, measured in % of T-RET time of
SIGNATURE, configurable from 0 to 1000%
g. PAUSE: time of staying in position of actuator, in sec, configurable from 0 to 60 sec.
h. MAX PST OV-TR: max position over-travel during PST cycle, in percentage of position, configurable from 0
to 100.
i. MAX PST DURATION: max time to complete the PST cycle, configurable from 2 to 1000 sec.
PST setup
PST start (off, manual, auto, auto-manual) 2
PST period (only in auto or auto-manual) 2
PST time (only in auto or auto-manual) 2
PST travel 2
PST pause 2
Max T-PST (% of signature) 2
Max T-RET (% of signature) 2
Max OV-TRAV (% of position) 2
Max PST duration (sec) 2
When the PST cycle is in progress the display of the Local Operator Interface shows the message “PST”. The start of
the PST cycle is saved in the Event logger as “PST”
When PST cycle ends, the ECU1000 compares the collected data with the configured setpoints “MAX T-PST, MAX
PST T-RET, MAX PST, OV-TR. The following alarms are available:
The Alarm can be viewed by the Local Operator Interface of ECU1000 or by a PC connected via Bluetooth interface.
The Alarms are also recorded in the Alarm log.
The following conditions can be individually configured to switch the output relays.
• PST: PST cycle in progress
• PST failed: it summarizes T-PST, T-RET, OV-TR and Reset. The status of relay “PST failed” can be reset by a
new PST command or by a manual reset of alarm via actuator Local Operator Interface (see manual DTDE327,
paragraphs 19 and 20).
The manual DTDE327 in the paragraphs “Local Operator Interface” and “Output relay” provides the instructions to set
the ECU1000 output relays.
The Recorder function can save the profile of the PST cycle in the ECU1000 memory. It needs to configure Recorder
mode “PST”. The Recording duration should be greater than the estimated duration of PST cycle. The paragraph
“Recorder”, supplies the information to set the Recorder function.
During the PST cycle the ECU1000 samples and saves the Actuator Position%, the Time and the PST trigger. If the
actuator is provided with transmitters of cylinder pressure (P1 and P2), the recorder saves also the profiles of the above
pressures. The ECU1000 memory contains up to 5 PST profiles. When the memory is full and a new set of data is
available the oldest profile is deleted and the new one is stored.
By the command “SELECT PST SIGNATURE”, in the local operator interface, one “PST curve” can be copied in the
“PST SIGNATURE” memory. The “PST SIGNATURE” cannot be modified; it can be updated only by a new
“SELECT PST SIGNATURE” command.
By the comparison between the PST SIGNATURE and the PST curves, the ECU1000 can produce status and warning
useful in maintenance operation.
By PC and BIFFI-Assistant software tool, the curves can be read from ECU1000 and then viewed and compared in a
graph.
Example of PST in
opening (Y-t)
Example of PST in
opening (Y-X),
“Pressure in bar”
versus “Actuator
Position in %”
PST command
PST start (off-on) 2
7 HPU control
7.1 General features
Input to control the HPU:
• 4-20mA HPU oil pressure input signal
• Digital inputs,to set optocoupled, max 30Vdc, available for optional HPU on-off sensors
Output to HPU Hydraulic Power Unit:
• Output by relay: SPST voltage free contacts, max 30Vdc/230Vac/1A (110Vdc/0.15A) to drive the contactor of
pump1 motor
• Output by relay: SPST voltage free contacts, max 30Vdc/230Vac/1A (110Vdc/0.15A) to drive the contactor of
pump2 motor (in case of dual pump)
• Output by relay: SPST voltage free contacts, max 30Vdc/230Vac/1A (110Vdc/0.15A) to drive the discharge
SOV ( in case of modulating actuator)
HPU type:
• HPU with 1 or 1 electrical pumps, Discharge SOV, 4-20mA pressure transmitter, optional pressure switch
• HPU with 1 or 2 electrical pumps and 4-20mA pressure transmitter, optional pressure switch
• HPU with 1 electrical pump and pressure switch
• HPU with 1 or 2 electrical pump, 4-20mA pressure transmitter, optional pressure switch, unloading relief valve
Depending on the HPU hydraulics, the ECU1000 can control the HPU pressure
• By a 4-20mA analogue pressure transmitter or
• By a pressure switch or
• By 4-20mA analogue pressure transmitter and pressure switch
o in case of failure of 4-20mA transmitter the ECU1000 works with the pressure switch
If redundancy of pumps is requested the ECU1000 can control two electrical pumps in two modes:
o cyclic: one pump at a time works, the ECU1000 switches from the running pump to the other one in
case of malfunction or at the end of the configured cycle time
o master-slave: one pump at a time works, the ECU1000 switches from the master pump to the slave
one in case of malfunction. A selector switch is needed to choose the master pump.
The Discharge D-SOV is present only in the HPU’s in heavy working service with low drain proportional/PSOV
valves and allows to by-pass the pump when the oil pressure reaches the working pressure. The SOV is released when
the pressure is lower than the preset low limit to allow the pump charging the accumulator. The minimum on time of the
pump is 2 sec. Optional on-off sensors can be added to monitor the HPU status and generate “alarm (out of spec)”
conditions. The list of the optional on-off sensors is below
• Oil Level • High motor temperature
• High oil temperature • General on-off sensors
• Oil filter • Hand-pump
• Loss of main power supply
The max number of sensors, transmitters and commands is limited by the hardware characteristics of ECU1000,
described in the document DTDE326 and DTDE 327 (11 digital inputs, 11 output relays, 5 analogue inputs, etc.).
Configuration and diagnostic operations of HPU are available by the Local Operator Interface of ECU1000. Upon
request, the ECU1000 cabinet can be provided with 8 additional LED’s to show HPU status. The complete list of the
available conditions is in the paragraph “Output relay, Status Relay table” of manual DTDE327. The table below lists
only the conditions related to HPU.
Pump2 mot. Sup. (electrical power supply) Failure of electrical power supply of pump2 motor
Pump2 mot. TH (motor temperature) High temperature of pump2 motor
Pump2 filter Clogged filter of pump2
Gener. sens. pump2 General sensor of pump2
Max time pump2 Time to reach the working pressure > reference time “Max time to pressure”
The next paragraphs describe the operation of the available HPU controls.
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Other not used parameters
The following figure shows the working cycle of the HPU pump, in AUTO mode. The motor pump starts by pressure
and command. The max pressure of HPU should be limited by a hydraulic safety valve limiting the HPU pressure
below the “Max allowable Pressure”.
Pump stop Pressure increase
4-20mA Pressure transmitter delay check Protection by
Max allowable Pressure hydraulic safety
Max time to pressure High pressure limit valve
0 Time
When HPU pressure is equal to “Max working pressure” the Discharge SOV is activated. The pump still runs, but the
pressure stops increasing. The Discharge SOV is released when the HPU pressure becomes lower than “D-SOV low
pressure limit” and pressure can increase again up to “Max working pressure”. The pump stops if
• The Position error signal is less than 3% for the time “Pump stop delay”
• No command is sent to ECU100 (ESD, PST, etc.) for the time “Pump stop delay”
The pump restarts if
• The HPU pressure is lower than “Motor start pressure”
• The position error is>3% or a new command is sent to ECU1000 (ESD, PST, etc.) and the pressure is lower
than “Max working pressure”
If the HPU pressure rises over the “High pressure limit” the ECU1000 stops the motor of pump and generates an Alarm
If the HPU pressure gets down the “Low pressure limit” the ECU1000 generates an Alarm.
The following tables show the HPU/Pump malfunctions detected by the ECU1000.
The “HPU/Pump malfunctions” are listed in the “Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327
(paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables”) and can exit only if the HPU control is on. The column “Signalling relay”
shows the conditions that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Pressure transmitter of HPU signal out of range Pump1 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level sensor = on Pump1 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
Max start D-SOV Starts of Discharge SOV (D-SOV) > reference Regular operation x NO
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pump
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor of pump1=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off or run (2) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Regular operation x NO
(1) Max time pump1: it exits if one of the following conditions occurs:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%), the pump is on and D-SOV off
(2) The pump control can be configured to “the motor stops” or “the motor runs” when the alarm occurs.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in DTDE327).
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1 power sup, pump1 mot. TH, Gener. Sens. Pump1”. The
alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On the contrary it is
not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
One pump at a time works. The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control”.
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump1
• Off: the pump1 does not work
• Auto: the pump1 works
Pump stop delay: it is the interval of time without any command or with actuator position error < 3%. After the above
time the pump is stopped. It can be configured from 0 to 255 sec, but the value should be great enough to avoid frequent
restarts of pump (for instance 20 sec). The parameter works only if the Pump1 mode is “Auto”.
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1 and Max time pump2”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear
Failure / Alarm”. If the parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode:
• Off: the pump2 does not work
• Auto: the pump2 works
Pump cycle: it sets the working time of each pump, from 1 to 10000 h. If both pumps are in AUTO, after the “Pump
cycle” the running pump stops and after 4 sec the second pump starts.
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Pump2 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump cycle (1-10000 h) 1
Each pump works as described in the paragraph 7.3.1. The ECU1000 controls the D-SOV and two pumps instead of
only one. The 4-20mA pressure transmitter, oil level sensor, oil temperature sensor are common in both pumps.
The following tables show the HPU/Pumps malfunctions detected by the ECU1000. They are also listed in the
“Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327 (paragraph Actuator malfunction tables). The column
“Signalling relay” shows the conditions that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of
the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Oil pressure transmitter out of range Pump1 and 2 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 and 2 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level switch = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
Max start D-SOV Starts of Discharge SOV > reference Regular operation x NO
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pumps
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (2) x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (2) x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off, switch to pump2 (2) x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off, switch to pump2 (3) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (4) x NO
Pump2 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump2 motor Pump2 off , switch to pump1 (2) x x
Pump2 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump2=on Pump2 off , switch to pump1 (2) x x
Pump2 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump2 General on-off sensor of pump2=on Pump2 off, switch to pump1 (2) x x
Max time pump2 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump2) Pump2 off, switch to pump1 (3) x x
Max start pump2 Starts of motor of pump2 > reference Pump2 off , switch to pump2 (4) x NO
(1) Max time pump1 and 2: they are due to one of the following conditions:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%), the pump is on and D-SOV off.
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor
stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in the DTDE327. The above tables and notes describe the condition to switch the pumps due to
alarm
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1/2 power sup, pump1/2 mot. TH, Gener. Sens.
Pump1/2”. The alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On
the contrary it is not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
One pump at a time works. A 3-position “PUMP1/OFF/PUMP2” selector is requested to set the pump master.
In “OFF” both pumps are off.
In “PUMP1” the pump1 works. The pump2 starts in case of alarm of pump1. A further switch to pump1 is not allowed.
In “PUMP2” the pump2 works. The pump1 starts in case of alarm of pump2. A further switch to pump2 is not allowed.
The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control” of ECU1000.
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump1
• Off: the pump1 does not work
• Auto: the pump1 works
Pump stop delay: it is the interval of time without any command or with actuator position error < 3%. After the above
time the pump is stopped. It can be configured from 0 to 255 sec, but the value should be great enough to avoid frequent
restarts of pump (for instance 20 sec). The parameter works only if the Pump1 mode is “Auto”.
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1and Max time pump2”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear
Failure / Alarm”. If the parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode:
• Off: the pump2 does not work
• Auto: the pump2 works
Pump cycle: not used
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Pump2 mode (auto, off) 2
Malfunctions of HPU
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Oil pressure transmitter out of range Pump1 and 2 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 and 2 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level switch = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
Max start D-SOV Starts of Discharge SOV > reference Regular operation x NO
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Pump2 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump2 motor Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump2 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump2=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump2 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump2 General on-off sensor of pump2=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Max time pump2 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump2) Pump2 off (3) x x
Max start pump2 Starts of motor of pump2 > reference Pump2 off (4) x NO
Pump1 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Max time pump1 Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump2 off (3) x x
Max start pump1 (1) Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Pump2 off (4) x NO
(1) Max time pump1 and 2: they are due to one of the following conditions:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%), the pump is on and D-SOV off.
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor
stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in the DTDE327. The above tables and notes describe the condition to switch the pumps due to
alarm.
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1/2 power sup, pump1/2 mot. TH, Gener. Sens.
Pump1/2”. The alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On
the contrary it is not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Not used Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Other not used parameters
The following figure shows the working cycle of the HPU pump, in AUTO mode. The motor pump starts as it is
powered. The max pressure of HPU should be limited by a hydraulic safety valve limiting the HPU pressure below the
“Max allowable Pressure”.
4-20mA Pressure transmitter
Protection by
Max allowable Pressure hydraulic safety
High pressure limit valve
Pressure increase
check
Low pressure limit
When the HPU pressure is equal to “Max working pressure” the Discharge D-SOV is activated. The pump still runs,
but the pressure stops increasing. The Discharge D-SOV is released when the HPU pressure becomes lower than “D-
SOV low pressure limit”. The pump does not stop.
If the HPU pressure rises over the “High pressure limit” the ECU1000 stops the motor of pump and generates an Alarm
If the HPU pressure gets down the “Low pressure limit” the ECU1000 generates an Alarm.
The following tables show the HPU/Pump malfunctions detected by the ECU1000.
The “HPU/Pump malfunctions” are listed in the “Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327
(paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables”) and can exit only if the HPU control is on. The column “Signalling relay”
shows the conditions that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Pressure transmitter of HPU signal out of range Pump1 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level sensor = on Pump1 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
Max start D-SOV Starts of Discharge SOV (D-SOV) > reference Regular operation x NO
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pump
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor of pump1=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off or run (2) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Regular operation x NO
(1) Max time pump1: it exits if one of the following conditions occurs:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%), the pump is on and D-SOV is
off.
(2) The pump control can be configured to “the motor stops” or “the motor runs” when the alarm occurs.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in DTDE327).
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1 power sup, pump1 mot. TH, Gener. Sens. Pump1”. The
alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On the contrary it is
not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
One pump at a time works. The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control”.
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump1
• Off: the pump1 does not work
• Auto: the pump1 works
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1and 2”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear Failure / Alarm”. If
the parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode:
• Off: the pump2 does not work
• Auto: the pump2 works
Pump cycle: it sets the working time of each pump, from 1 to 10000 h. If both pumps are in AUTO, after the “Pump
cycle” the running pump stops and after 4 sec the second pump starts.
Pump stop delay: not used
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Pump2 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump cycle (1-10000 h) 1
Each pump works as described in the paragraph 7.3.4. The ECU1000 controls the D-SOV and two pumps instead of
only one. The 4-20mA pressure transmitter, oil level sensor, oil temperature sensor are common in both pumps.
The following tables show the HPU/Pumps malfunctions detected by the ECU1000. They are also listed in the
“Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327 (paragraph Actuator malfunction tables). The column
“Signalling relay” shows the conditions that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of
the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Oil pressure transmitter out of range Pump1 and 2 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 and 2 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level switch = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
Max start D-SOV Starts of Discharge SOV > reference Regular operation x NO
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pumps
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (2) x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (2) x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off, switch to pump2 (2) x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off, switch to pump2 (3) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (4) x NO
Pump2 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump2 motor Pump2 off , switch to pump1 (2) x x
Pump2 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump2=on Pump2 off , switch to pump1 (2) x x
Pump2 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump2 General on-off sensor of pump2=on Pump2 off, switch to pump1 (2) x x
Max time pump2 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump2) Pump2 off, switch to pump1 (3) x x
Max start pump2 Starts of motor of pump2 > reference Pump2 off , switch to pump2 (4) x NO
(1) Max time pump1 and 2: they are due to one of the following conditions:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%), the pump is on and D-SOV off.
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor
stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in the DTDE327. The above tables and notes describe the condition to switch the pumps due to
alarm
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1/2 power sup, pump1/2 mot. TH, Gener. Sens.
Pump1/2”. The alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On
the contrary it is not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
One pump at a time works. A 3-position “PUMP1/OFF/PUMP2” selector is requested to set the pump master.
In “OFF” both pumps are off.
In “PUMP1” the pump1 works. The pump2 starts in case of alarm of pump1. A further switch to pump1 is not allowed.
In “PUMP2” the pump2 works. The pump1 starts in case of alarm of pump2. A further switch to pump2 is not allowed.
The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control” of ECU1000.
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump1
• Off: the pump1 does not work
• Auto: the pump1 works
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1 and Max time pump2”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear
Failure / Alarm”. If the parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode:
• Off: the pump2 does not work
• Auto: the pump2 works
Pump cycle and Pump stop delay: not used
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Pump2 mode (auto, off) 2
Malfunctions of HPU
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Oil pressure transmitter out of range Pump1 and 2 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 and 2 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level switch = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
Max start D-SOV Starts of Discharge SOV > reference Regular operation x NO
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Pump2 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump2 motor Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump2 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump2=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump2 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump2 General on-off sensor of pump2=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Max time pump2 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump2) Pump2 off (3) x x
Max start pump2 Starts of motor of pump2 > reference Pump2 off (4) x NO
Pump1 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off (2) x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off (2) x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off (2) x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off (3) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Pump1 off (4) x NO
(1) Max time pump1 and 2: they are due to one of the following conditions:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%), the pump is on and D-SOV off.
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor
stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in the DTDE327. The above tables and notes describe the condition to switch the pumps due to
alarm.
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1/2 power sup, pump1/2 mot. TH, Gener. Sens.
Pump1/2”. The alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On
the contrary it is not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control”
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump
• Off: the pump does not work
• Auto: the pump works
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear Failure / Alarm”. If the
parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode, Pump stop delay and Pump cycle are not used.
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Other not used parameters
The following figure shows the working cycle of the HPU pump, in AUTO mode. The motor pump starts when it is
powered. The max pressure of HPU should be limited by a hydraulic safety valve limiting the HPU pressure below the
“Max allowable Pressure”.
When the HPU pressure is equal to “Max working pressure” the pump stops and the pressure stops increasing. The
pump restarts when the HPU pressure is lower than “Motor start pressure”.
If the HPU pressure rises over the “High pressure limit” the ECU1000 stops the motor of pump and generates an Alarm
If the HPU pressure gets down the “Low pressure limit” the ECU1000 generates an Alarm.
Time
0
The following tables show the HPU/Pump malfunctions detected by the ECU1000.
The “HPU/Pump malfunctions” are listed in the “Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327
(paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables”) and can exit only if the HPU control is on. The column “Signalling relay”
shows the condition that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Pressure transmitter of HPU signal out of range Pump1 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level sensor = on Pump1 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pump
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor of pump1=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off or run (2) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Regular operation x NO
(1) Max time pump1: it exits if one of the following conditions occurs:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%) and the pump is on.
(2) The pump control can be configured to “the motor stops” or “the motor runs” when the alarm occurs.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in DTDE327).
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1 power sup, pump1 mot. TH, Gener. Sens. Pump1”. The
alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On the contrary it is
not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
One pump at a time works. The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control”.
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump1
• Off: the pump1 does not work
• Auto: the pump1 works
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1and 2”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear Failure / Alarm”. If
the parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode:
• Off: the pump2 does not work
• Auto: the pump2 works
Pump cycle: it sets the working time of each pump, from 1 to 10000 h. If both pumps are in AUTO, after the “Pump
cycle” the running pump stops and after 4 sec the second pump starts.
Pump stop delay: not used
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Pump2 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump cycle (1-10000 h) 1
Each pump works as described in the paragraph 7.4.1. The ECU1000 controls two pumps instead of only one. The 4-
20mA pressure transmitter, oil level sensor, oil temperature sensor are common in both pumps.
The following tables show the HPU/Pumps malfunctions detected by the ECU1000. They are also listed in the
“Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327 (paragraph Actuator malfunction tables). The column
“Signalling relay” shows the conditions that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of
the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Oil pressure transmitter out of range Pump1 and 2 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 and 2 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level switch = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pumps
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (2) x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (2) x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off, switch to pump2 (2) x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off, switch to pump2 (3) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Pump1 off , switch to pump2 (4) x NO
Pump2 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump2 motor Pump2 off , switch to pump1 (2) x x
Pump2 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump2=on Pump2 off , switch to pump1 (2) x x
Pump2 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump2 General on-off sensor of pump2=on Pump2 off, switch to pump1 (2) x x
Max time pump2 Max time to reach the pressure (pump2) Pump2 off, switch to pump1 (3) x x
Max start pump2 (1) Starts of motor of pump2 > reference Pump2 off , switch to pump2 (4) x NO
(1) Max time pump1 and 2: they are due to one of the following conditions:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%) and the pump is on
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor
stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in the DTDE327. The above tables and notes describe the condition to switch the pumps due to
alarm
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1/2 power sup, pump1/2 mot. TH, Gener. Sens.
Pump1/2”. The alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On
the contrary it is not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
One pump at a time works. A 3-position “PUMP1/OFF/PUMP2” selector is requested to set the pump master.
In “OFF” both pumps are off.
In “PUMP1” the pump1 works. The pump2 starts in case of alarm of pump1. A further switch to pump1 is not allowed.
In “PUMP2” the pump2 works. The pump1 starts in case of alarm of pump2. A further switch to pump2 is not allowed.
The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control” of ECU1000.
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump1
• Off: the pump1 does not work
• Auto: the pump1 works
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1and 2”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear Failure / Alarm”. If
the parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode:
• Off: the pump2 does not work
• Auto: the pump2 works
Pump cycle and Pump stop delay: not used
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Pump2 mode (auto, off) 2
Malfunctions of HPU
Name Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
HPU pres. transm. Oil pressure transmitter out of range Pump1 and 2 off x x
High oil pressure Oil pressure > high pressure limit Pump1 and 2 off x x
Low oil pressure Oil pressure < low pressure limit Regular operation x x
Oil level (low) Oil level switch = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 and 2 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Pump2 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump2 motor Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump2 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump2=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Pump2 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. pump2 General on-off sensor of pump2=on Pump2 off (2) x x
Max time pump2 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump2) Pump2 off (3) x x
Max start pump2 Starts of motor of pump2 > reference Pump2 off (4) x NO
Pump1 power sup. (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off (2) x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off (2) x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off (2) x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off (3) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Pump1 off (4) x NO
(1) Max time pump1 and 2: they are due to one of the following conditions:
• the oil pressure is lower than the “Max working pressure” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the user)
• the “pressure increase” (bar/min) is less than the parameter “Min pressure increase” (set by the manufacturer). The function “pressure
increase” measures the pressure change only if the actuator is in stable position (position error within 3%) and the pump is on.
(2) If both pumps are in Alarm both Pumps are off.
(3) If the alarm occurs the running pump switches to off and the second pump starts. If the alarm occurs also with the second pump, “the motor
stops” or “the motor runs” according to the configuration of the ECU1000.
(4) If both pumps are in “Max start alarm” the running pump continues to work.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in the DTDE327. The above tables and notes describe the condition to switch the pumps due to
alarm.
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “HPU pres. transm.”, “high oil pressure”, “low oil pressure”, “oil level”,
“oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”, “pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1/2 power sup, pump1/2 mot. TH, Gener. Sens.
Pump1/2”. The alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On
the contrary it is not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
The control of HPU pressure is based on a pressure switch. Start and stop of motor pump depend on the pressure switch
hysteresis.
The following parameters are available in the menu “Actuator setup, Pump control”
Pump1 mode: it allows selecting the operating mode of Pump
• Off: the pump does not work
• Auto: the pump works
Actuator control delay: delay to initiate the actuator control after the ECU1000 power on. It can be set from 0 to 255
sec.
Max time to pressure: it is the maximum allowed time to reach the working pressure. The parameter can be set from 0
to 255 min. If the working pressure is not reached in the above time the ECU1000 generates the alarm “Max time
pump1”. The alarm is cleared when the pressure is correct or by the ECU commands “Clear Failure / Alarm”. If the
parameter is set to 0 the alarm is not generated.
Pump2 mode, Pump stop delay and Pump cycle are not used.
Pump control
Pump1 mode (auto, off) 2
Pump stop delay (0-255 sec) 1
Actuator ctrl delay (0-255 sec) 2
Max time to pressure (0-255 min) 2
Other not used parameters
The following figure shows the working cycle of the HPU pump, in AUTO mode. The max pressure of HPU should be
limited by a hydraulic safety valve limiting the HPU pressure below the “Max allowable Pressure”.
When the pressure switch is off (open contact) the pump stops and the pressure stops increasing. The pump restarts
when the pressure switch is on (contact closed). The two limits “pressure to stop the pump” and “pressure to start
the pump” are set by the hysteresis of the pressure switch.
HPU oil pressure (bar) Protection by
Max allowable pressure hydraulic safety
valve
Max time to pressure Pressure switch off
Pressure to stop the pump
Pressure switch hysteresis Working area
of pump
Pressure to start the pump
Pressure switch on
Time
0
The logic of pressure switch can be reversed on request: pressure switch off (closed contact)= the pump stops and
pressure switch on (open contact)= the pump starts.
The following tables show the HPU/Pump malfunctions detected by the ECU1000.
The “HPU/Pump malfunctions” are listed in the “Additional Alarm table” of the instruction manual DTDE327
(paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables”) and can exit only if the HPU control is on. The column “Signalling relay”
shows the condition that can be individually linked to the output relays of the ECU1000 by means of the menu options.
Malfunctions of HPU
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Oil level (low) Oil level sensor = on Pump1 off x x
Oil temper. (high temperature) Oil thermostat = on Pump1 off x x
HPU gener. sens. General on-off sensor of HPU = on Pump1 off x x
Hand-pump Hand-pump engaged Regular operation x x
HPU sign sw HPU signalling on-off sensor Regular operation x x
Malfunctions of pump
Name of malfunction Description Pump control Pump Signalling
Alarm relay
Pump1 power sup (electrical power) Loss of power supply of pump1 motor Pump1 off x x
Pump1 mot. TH Motor thermostat of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Pump1 filter Oil filter sensor of pump1=on Regular operation x x
Gener. sens. Pump1 General on-off sensor of pump1=on Pump1 off x x
Max time pump1 (1) Max time to reach the pressure (pump1) Pump1 off or run (2) x x
Max start pump1 Starts of motor of pump1 > reference Regular operation x NO
(1) Max time pump1: it exits if the HPU pressure is lower than the “Pressure to stop the pump” after the time “Max time to pressure” (set by the
user)
(2) The pump control can be configured to “the motor stops” or “the motor runs” when the alarm occurs.
In case of “HPU/Pump alarm” the actuator works regularly (see the paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables,
Additional alarm table” in DTDE327).
On request, the ECU1000 can be set (by the manufacturer) to signal “Failure” due to “HPU failure”. In case of “HPU
failure” the ECU1000 can be configured either to “regular actuator operation” or “failsafe” or “optional SOV1”
actions. The manual DTDE327 describes the functions “Failsafe” and “optional SOV1”.
The malfunctions to set in “HPU failure” are: “oil level”, “oil temperature”, “HPU general sensor”, “hand-pump”,
“pump blocked”.
“Pump blocked” summarizes the following alarms “pump1 power sup, pump1 mot. TH, Gener. Sens. Pump1”. The
alarm “Max time pump1 is included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor stops”. On the contrary it is
not included in the “Pump blocked” if it is configured “the motor runs”.
The options with 2pumps, master-slave or cycle, are available and each pump works as described above. The conditions
to switch from one pump to the other are described in the paragraphs 7.4.2 and 7.4.3.
7.6 HPU with 4-20mA pressure transmitter and hot-backup pressure switch
The option is available in the HPU configurations described in the previous paragraphs 7.3. and 7.4. It provides
redundancy in the pressure measure. Normal control is done by the 4-20mA pressure transmitter. In case of failure of 4-
20mA pressure transmitter, the ECU1000 switches to pressure switch mode, described in the paragraph 7.5. In the
above mode the start/stop of pumps depends only on the pressure switch hysteresis. When 4-20mA restores, the
pressure control returns to pressure transmitter. The switch from 4-20mA transmitter to pressure switch is done in 5 sec,
the restoration in > 30 sec.
If the ECU1000 controls an HPU provided with unloading relief valve all options described in the previous paragraphs
are still available. The Discharge D-SOV is not necessary since the unloading relief valve performs in automatic the
same function. In fact the unloading relief valve allows automatic pump by-pass as the pressure reaches the setting
value. The valve closes when the pressure drops at 88% and pump can charge again the accumulator.
7.8 HPU with D-SOV to reduce the start current of motor pump
If it needs to reduce the start current of the electric motor it is possible to add a Discharge D-SOV in the HPU to allow
pump by-pass. The D-SOV is activated at each start of motor and after 5 sec is released to let the pump to charge the
accumulator. The D-SOV can be used with the options described in the previous paragraphs. In the HPU described in
the paragraph 7.3 the D-SOV is activated at the start of the pump and as the pressure reaches the “Max working
pressure”.
HCU
and Electronic
HA Control
Unit D-SOV control
Hydraulic
Control Unit ECU
and 1000
Hydraulic
Actuator
HCU Electronic
and Control
HA Unit
Hydraulic ECU
Control Unit 1000
and
Hydraulic
Actuator
8.1.1 2 inputs/2outputs
V+
SOV to
open
Control options:
Open Optocoupled • Open: push to run
Output
digital input V+
relay • Close: push to run
V- SOV to Travel limit options:
Close Optocoupled close • position
digital input
Control unit • Continuous
ESD Output ESD options:
Optocoupled relay
digital input V- • Off
Actuator position • Go to position 100%
PST Optocoupled
• Go to position 0%
digital input Optional cylinder • Tracking
4-20mA
ECU1000 pressure P1
Optional cylinder
Position retransmission pressure P1
8.1.2 1 inputs/1outputs
V+
SOV to
open/close
8.1.3 1 inputs/2outputs
V+
SOV to
open Control option 1:
Open/Close Optocoupled Output
• Signal=on: opens
digital input relay V+ • Signal=off: closes
V- SOV to
Control option 2:
close • Signal=on: closes
Control unit • Signal=off: opens
ESD Output Travel limit options:
Optocoupled relay
digital input
• Continuous
V-
• Position
Actuator position ESD options:
PST Optocoupled
Optional cylinder • Off
digital input pressure P1
ECU1000 • Go to position 100%
4-20mA
Position retransmission Optional cylinder • Go to position 0%
pressure P2
• Tracking
8.4 Alarms
• Max time to position
• Hyd. Valve leak
See Alarm table in the manual DTDE 327, paragraph “Actuator malfunction tables”.
9 PWM driver
The optional card “ECU1000 PWM driver” is mounted above the control card of the ECU1000 assembly. It is
supplied at 24 VDC and it is connected to ECU1000 control card by a flat cable. It can drive standard proportional
valves without spool feedback with 1 or 2 solenoids or 2BIFFI Proportional SOlenoid Valves (PSOV’s) with spool
feedback. It has the following inputs/outputs
• Two PWM output channels (24V, max 5A)
• One optocoupled digital input (max input 30Vdc)
• One digital output (24V, max 2A)
• One digital output (24V, max 0.5A)
• Two analogue input channels
The parameters of PWM module are stored in the ECU1000 memory and can be set only by the manufacturer. They can
be modified with username “Service”, “Specialist” and “Guest2”.
The Biffi Proportional SOlenoid Valves (Biffi PSOV) are used to control an hydraulic modulating actuator when a very
low drain is requested. Each actuator is controlled by 2 PSOV’s, one PSOV to open and the other one to close. Each
PSOV is provided with contactless sensor of cursor position. The following diagram shows the operating principle.
EV1 PWM
ECU1000 Hydraulic
Solenoid 1
PSOV1
power
PWM driver Cursor1 position
card Cursor1
Manifold
position sensor Cylinders,
scotch yoke,
EV2 PWM spring,
Solenoid 2
PSOV2
ECU1000 cards Cursor2 position
Cursor2
position sensor Actuator
4-20mA Actuator position position
transmitter
ECU1000 controls
PWM utilization function: it calculates the average in the configurable “Max PWM time” of PWM duty of each
PSOV and allows to evaluate their utilization rate and to avoid overheating and damage of system. The value of the
“PWM utilization %” is visible in the display of the Local Operator Interface in the menu “Status and variables”,
“EV1-2 MONITOR” and “EV1-2 RATE” (see DTDE 327, paragraph Local Operator Interface, Status and variables
table).
Failures: the PWM driver generates the failure “Proportional valve” in the following conditions:
• Power supply voltage of card <18Vdc or > 30Vdc
• Cursor1 position or cursor2 position = 0V
Alarms: the PWM driver generates the alarm “PWM utilization” if the PWM utilization is higher than the
configurable reference “MAX PWM UTILIZATION%”. The ECU1000 restricts the maximum PWM duty to the
“MAX PWM UTILIZATION” until the alarm disappears.
See the instruction manual DTDE327 par. “Actuator malfunction tables” to view the complete list of ECU1000 Failure
and Alarm.
ECU1000 commands: the following table shows the list of commands available in the Local Operator Interface in the
menu “ECU command”
PWM control
PSOV’s autocalibration (off, on) 2
Manual PWM (0-100 %) 2
Drive Hyd-Valve 2
The command “Manual PWM” allows setting the level of PWM for a manual drive of the PSOV. The command
“Drive Hyd-Valve” allows moving the actuator in opening or closing by the local Open and Close pushbuttons with the
PWM level set in “Manual PWM”. The command “PSOV’s autocalibration” allows initiating the calibration cycle of
PSOV’s. By this command the ECU1000 reads and memorizes the minimum and maximum cursor position of each
PSOV, to be used in the control operation. The above commands are available with username “OPERATOR”.
The following parameters are available in the Local Operator Interface with username “SERVICE” for the PSOV’s
position loop tuning:
Function block Function TAB Parameter Psw
Restricted level
PWM module
Kp EV1 3
Ti EV1 3
Td EV1 3
Min PWM EV1 3
Max PWM EV1 3
AI5 bit at 2.5V 3
AI5 bit at 4.5V 3
AI5 signal filter 3
Kp EV2 3
Ti EV2 3
Td EV2 3
Min PWM EV2 3
Max PWM EV2 3
AI6 bit at 2.5V 3
AI6 bit at 4.5V 3
AI6 signal filter 3
PWM Frequency (200,400, 1000Hz) 3
Max PWM Utilization % 3
Max PWM time 3
Test of the PSOV’s drain: On request the Local Operator Interface can be provided with an additional self-maintained
pushbutton on the cabinet door to test the drain of the PSOV’s. The option is available only if the Local Selector
(Local, Remote) is not requested (see DTDE327 par. Local Operator Interface, par. 19.2 and 19.3).
The procedure is the following:
• Switch ECU1000 to LOCAL control mode by the instruction in par. 19.2 and 19.3 of DTDE327
• Push the pushbutton “PSOV test” on the ECU1000 cabinet door
• Take note of the actuator position% and of HPU pressure
• Wait few hours
• Take note of the actuator position% change
• Release the “PSOV test”
• Switch to REMOTE control mode by the instruction in par. 19.2 and 19.3 of DTDE327
The following diagram shows the block diagram of ECU1000 e PWM driver card with
• 1 bidirectional proportional valve without spool feedback and with 2 solenoids
• 2 unidirectional proportional valves without spool feedback and with 1 solenoid for each valve
• 1 bidirectional proportional valve valves without spool feedback and with 1 solenoid
EV1 PWM
ECU1000 Hydraulic
Solenoid 1
Manifold
power
PWM driver
card EV2 PWM
Solenoid 2 Cylinders,
scotch yoke,
Proportional valve spring,
with 2 solenoids Actuator
ECU1000 cards 4-20mA Actuator position position
transmitter
ECU1000 controls
Unidirectional
Proportional valve
EV1 PWM
ECU1000 Hydraulic
Solenoid 1
Manifold
power
PWM driver
card EV2 PWM
Cylinders,
Solenoid 2
scotch yoke,
Unidirectional spring,
Proportional valve
Actuator
ECU1000 cards 4-20mA Actuator position position
transmitter
ECU1000 controls
EV1 PWM
ECU1000 Hydraulic
Manifold
power
PWM driver Solenoid
card
Cylinders,
scotch yoke,
Proportional valve spring,
with 1 solenoid Actuator
ECU1000 cards 4-20mA Actuator position position
transmitter
ECU1000 controls
PWM utilization function: it calculates the average in the configurable “Max PWM time” of PWM duty of
proportional valve and allows to evaluate their utilization rates and to avoid overheating and damage of system. The
value of the “PWM utilization %” is visible in the display of the Local Operator Interface in the menu “Status and
variables”, “EV1-2 MONITOR” and “EV1-2 RATE” (see DTDE 327, paragraph Local Operator Interface, Status and
variables table).
Failures: the PWM driver generates the failure “Proportional valve” in the following conditions:
• Power supply voltage of card <18Vdc or > 30Vdc
Alarms: the PWM driver generates the alarm “PWM utilization” if the PWM utilization is higher than the
configurable reference “MAX PWM UTILIZATION%”. The ECU1000 restricts the maximum PWM duty to the
“MAX PWM UTILIZATION” until the alarm disappears.
ECU1000 commands: the following table shows the list of commands available in the Local Operator Interface in the
menu “ECU command”
PWM control
Manual PWM (0-100 %) 2
Drive Hyd-Valve 2
The command “Manual PWM” allows setting the level of PWM for a manual drive of the proportional valve. The
command “Drive Hyd-Valve” allows moving the actuator in opening or closing by the local Open and Close
pushbuttons with the PWM level set in “Manual PWM”. The above commands are available with username
“OPERATOR”.
The following parameters are available in the Local Operator Interface with username “SERVICE” for the proportional
valve tuning.
Case of bidirectional proportional valve with 2 solenoid or 2 unidirectional proportional valves with 1 solenoid
Function block Function TAB Parameter Psw
Restricted level
PWM module
Min PWM EV1 3
Max PWM EV1 3
Min PWM EV2 3
Max PWM EV2 3
PWM Frequency (200,400, 1000Hz) 3
Max PWM Utilization % 3
Max PWM time 3
PWM module
Min PWM EV1 3
Max PWM EV1 3
PWM Frequency (200,400, 1000Hz) 3
PWM OFFSET (MO-PVAL-1C only) 3
Reverse polarity (MO-PVAL-1C only) 3
Max PWM Utilization % 3
Max PWM time 3
Modbus RTU
Node address (from 1 to 247) 2
Baud rate (1200, 9600, 19200) 2
Parity (Odd, Even, No parity) 2
Line termination (On, Off) 2
Logic card
Base card
RS485 Modbus RTU connector
DTDE 330
ECU 1000
BIFFI-Assistant
USER MANUAL
INDEX
1 INTRODUCTION 2
2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 2
3 PC REQUIREMENTS 3
7 WORK ONLINE 5
7.1 Connection to ECU1000 5
7.2 Channel selection 6
7.3 RS232 connection 7
7.4 Bluetooth connection 8
8 LOGIN 9
8.1 User Levels 9
13 WORK OFFLINE 52
13.1 Change of value of a parameter and save it in a new file 53
13.2 Change of Work Offline password 56
13.3 View of loggers 56
13.4 View of short logger 58
13.5 View of graphs 58
Warning: For any information regarding actuator parameters or settings please refer to the
relevant ECU1000 and Actuator documentation.
Wrong parameter settings may cause actuator malfunctions.
Warning:
All parameters changes not saved into the internal application database or sent to
the actuator will be lost once the application is closed.
Warning: It is assumed that the installation, setting, commissioning, maintenance and repair
works are carried out by qualified personnel and checked by responsible
Specialists. Operating the actuator and the ECU1000 could damage the actuator
and cause personal injury
Warning: Any repair work other than the operations outlined in this manual will be strictly
reserved to qualified BIFFI ITALIA personnel or to personnel directly authorised
by the Company itself.
1 Introduction
BIFFI-Assistant is a PC SW tool to be used with ECU1000 and ELBS20. It provides the ability to configure, diagnose
and collect data from the above devices and a PC with Windows platform. The document DTDE330 provides the
instruction for installation and use of BIFFI-Assistant with reference to ECU1000.
Even if the ECU1000 is provided with a powerful Local Operator Interface, the BIFFI-Assistant is a very a useful tool.
In fact it allows the operator performing the complete set of operation available by the ECU1000 Local Operator
Interface (except Local Control) and in addition it allows easy navigation in the ECU1000 menu by using the PC
facilities and in particular
• Viewing of maintenance data collected by the ECU1000 in the loggers and graphs function blocks and saving
them in files on the PC (Failure, alarm and statistic loggers, Opening, Closing, PST and Recorder graphs)
• Graph comparison
• Saving of ECU1000 configuration parameters in files on the PC
• Saving and printing of ECU1000 data in text files on the PC
• Downloading of configuration file from PC to ECU1000
• Wireless connection to ECU1000 by Bluetooth interface
• Online and Offline operation
o Work Online: ECU1000 is connected to PC and BIFFI-Assistant
o Work Offline: BIFFI-Assistant works on files previously saved, without any connection to ECU1000
Import
Files Export
BIFFI-Assistant
Bluetooth or
RS232
ECU1000
cabinets
2 Reference Documents
DTDE326 “Installation and Maintenance” of ECU1000
DTDE 327 “Control functions and Local Operator Interface”
DTDE328 “Functions description”
DTDE300 “Product description”
3 PC requirements
Biffi Assistant is tested for working with the following OS:
• Windows XP - 32bit service pack 2 or 3 and .NET Framework >= 4.0
• Windows 7 - 32bit Enterprise
• Windows 7 - 64bit Enterprise
The connection to the ECU1000 requires an USB Bluetooth Dongle or an RS232 port and RS232 cable.
In the below table is the list of the tested Bluetooth Dongles.
Here below is the list of USB/Bluetooth Dongle tested with BIFFI-Assistant. They do not require the installation of the
driver
* The Bluetooth adapters indicated with “no” can work only after installation of the appropriate driver.
The figures below show the RS232 cable and the position of RS232 connector on the ECU1000 card.
RS232cable ECU1000
USB/RS232
converter
Warning:
Installation can be done only by the administrator of PC
Before initiating the installation procedure of a new version of BIFFI-Assistant remove any previously installed version.
The installation process starts by a double click of the left key of mouse on “setup.exe”.
A simple wizard will guide through the installation process:
Right click of mouse on Biffi Assistant. Left click on “Uninstall” and then “YES”. BIFFI-Assistant will be removed
and PC is ready to re-install a new version.
7 Work Online
7.1 Connection to ECU1000
User PC’s may be directly connected to an ECU1000 device by Biffi-Assistant SW tool, through Bluetooth or RS232.
A direct connection with Biffi Assistant is convenient for users that need to configure or diagnose many ECU1000
devices or users who require immediate detailed analysis on a large screen on-site. Note that Biffi Assistant may save
"transfer files" to review them at a later time.
Warning:
It is recommended to use only one Serial Communication Interface (RS232 or
Bluetooth) at a time to avoid configuration errors.
According to the selected “Channel Type”, set the parameters as follows (*):
RS232 Bluetooth
set the used COM - The table shows the typical value
COM port
of the parameters. In some cases
Baud Rate (bps) 115200 (fixed) 115200 (fixed) (PC with low performance) it
Channel Timeout (ms) 2000 2000 could be necessary to increase
Read timeout, dynamic length (ms) 40000 40000 the value of the following
COM parity 0 (fixed) 0 (fixed) parameters: “Channel Timeout”,
“Read timeout, dynamic length”
COM databits 8 (fixed) 8 (fixed) and “Bluetooth connection
COM stopbits 1 (fixed) 1 (fixed) timeout”.
Bluetooth connection timeout (ms) - 2500
Language en (fixed) en (fixed)
Check that the RS232 cable is correctly connected. Click the left key of mouse on “Work Online“, to connect the PC
with the ECU1000.
Enter username and password. Username and password are the same of the ECU1000 Local Operator Interface.
The manual DTDE327, Local Operator Interface, provides the description of password and username.
Click the left key of the mouse on “Login” (or press ENTER) to go ahead. To cancel the Login, click the left key of the
mouse on the left arrow near to “Work Online”.
If password and username are correct the communication between ECU1000 and PC starts. The following screen will
appear.
After having read the menu structure, the BIFFI-Assistant reads the full set of parameters of ECU1000, but the PC
shows only the data of the functions enabled to work in the connected ECU1000 device and having password less or
equal to the entered username.
Click the left key of the mouse on “Start”, to search the Bluetooth devices.
The above screenshot shows all the Bluettoth devices found. Only ECU1000 and ELBS20 devices can be connected. By
a double left click on the desired ECU1000 start the connection.
Enter username and password. Username and password are the same of the ECU1000 Local Operator Interface.
The manual DTDE327, Local Operator Interface, provides the description of passwords and usernames.
8 Login
8.1 User Levels
In Work Online mode the BIFFI-Assistant use the same passwords and usernames of the ECU1000 Local Operator
Interface.
According to the instruction in DTDE327, Local operator Interface, the following “Username” are available: User (in
Actuator’s users), Operator (in Actuator’s users), Service (in Actuator’s users), Specialist (in Actuator’s users), and
Guest0 (in Special users), Guest1 (in Special users), Guest2 (in Special users). Each username requires a 6 character
(numbers or capital letters) password to connect the BIFFI-Assistant to ECU1000. Each username is associated to a
password level, as indicated in the instruction manuals DTDE326, DTDE327, DTDE328.
Warning: Any change or write operation of parameter, TAB or Block should be done after a
read operation of the same parameter, TAB or Block.
It is suggested that any write operation is checked by a read operation of the
changed data.
As described in the manuals DTDE327 and DTDE328 the ECU1000 menu is organized in “Function block”,
“Function TAB”, “Parameters and ECU Commands”. Each “Function TAB” collects a group of “Parameters or
ECU Commands”, each “Function block” collects a group of “Function TAB”. The parameters are in the TAB’s of
function blocks “ACTUATOR SETUP”, “NAME PLATE”, “VALVE DATA” and “RESTRICTED”; the ECU
Commands (or ECU-cmd) are in the TAB’s of function blocks “DEVICE COMMANDS” and “LOG AND GRAPH”.
The “parameters” allow changing the behavior of the working functions in the ECU1000; the “ECU commands” allow
executing operations with the ECU1000 as “analogue I/O calibration”, “up-loading of logger and curves”, “travel limit
configuration”, “data memory setting”, etc.
• DEVICE NAME
The structure of the BIFFI-Assistant menu repeats
o FUNCTION BLOCK 1 the menu structure of the ECU1000 Local Operator
TAB 1_1 Interface (see manual DTDE 327)
o Parameter/Command 1_1_1
o …
o Parameter/Command 1_1_y
… The PC screen is divided in two sections: the left
TAB 1_x
o …
side shows Device Name, Function Blocks and
o … function TAB’s, the right side shows the
o FUNCTION BLOCK N
TAB N_1 Parameters, the ECU Commands, the Help, etc.
… Each parameter/ECU command is defined: by Name,
TAB N_z
o Parameter/Command N_z_1 Value, UM (Unit Measure), Min (Minimum value),
…
o
o Parameter/Command N_z_r Max (Maximum value) and the Flags (R, W, S).
Minimize or maximize
the menu:
• Single left-click of
mouse on the arrow on the
left of the Menu Name
• Double left-click of the
mouse on the Menu Name
Each parameter/command
line contains ID number,
Name, Value,
Engineering Unit, Min
value, max value and
Status (flag R=Readable,
W=Writable, S=Special).
The Help window is
shown as the parameter
line is selected.
If ECU1000 is in LOCAL control by Local Operator Interface the switch to “SETTING” mode is not allowed
Warning: In SETTING mode the operator can change parameters, enable functions, send
ECU-commands, etc. The ECU1000 controls the actuator, it could control the
ECU, it could drive generic electric, pneumatic, mechanic and hydraulic devices, it
is mandatory to place the above devices in their safe condition to avoid injury of
people and damage of equipment and ambient (see installation and maintenance
manual)
Description Command
Read/write a single parameter By ” Read/Write object_x”
Read/write all parameters of the selected TAB By ” Read/Write TAB_x”
Read/write all parameters of the selected Block By ” Read/Write Block_x”
Read/write all parameters of the functions enabled to work in the ECU1000 device By ” Read/Write active objects”
Write the full set of ECU1000 parameters (including the disabled functions) By ” Full copy”
Send an ECU command (only function blocks “Device Commands” and “Log and Graph”) By “Send command_x”
The command “Full copy” is not available to username “USER” and “OPERATOR”.
The value will be written in the ECU1000 memory. By the “Read object x” procedure verify the value
Click YES. If the TAB does not contain any parameter with flag “S”, the complete set of
parameters of the TAB will be written in the ECU1000 memory. The only readable
parameters (flag “R”) will not be written. If the TAB contains parameters with flag “S”
a new screen-shoot appears with the list of Special objects to select
Select “Write block_x”. Click on YES. If the Block does not contain any parameter with flag “S”, the complete set of
parameters of the Block will be written in the ECU1000 memory. The only readable parameters (flag “R”) will not be
written. If the Block contains parameters with flag “S” a new screen-shoot appears with the list of Special objects.
If no parameter with flag “S” is present, the complete set of parameters will be written in the ECU1000 memory. The
only readable parameters (flag “R”) will not be written. If some parameter with flag “S” is present, a new screen-shoot
appears with the list of the Special objects.
Select the Special objects to write and then click
“Write”.
The complete set of active parameters will be written
(except the only readable parameters (flag “R”) and
the parameters with flag “S” not selected). In the
example the Blocks “Name Plate”, “Valve data” and
“Restricted” have parameters with flag “S”. Only the
Block “Name Plate” and the parameter “Valve
manufacturer” will be written to ECU1000.
If no parameter with flag “S” is present, the complete set of parameters will be written in the ECU1000 memory. The
only readable parameters (flag “R”) will not be written. If some parameter with flag “S” is present, a new screen-shoot
appears with the list of the Special objects.
The paragraph “IMPORT and EXPORT” shows how to use the function.
Left click of mouse on the button SETTING. Maximize the function block “Actuator setup”. Click the left key of
mouse on the TAB “Miscellaneous”. Enter the new password (USER or OPERATOR). The value is not visible, it is
indicated by “*”. Right click of mouse on the name of the parameter. Left click of mouse on “Write object_x”.
Passwords cannot be written by the commands “write TAB, write Block, write all active objects and full copy”.
When the new password is enterd the old one is no longer valid, both for Local Operator Interface and BIFFI-Assistant.
The “Refresh Structure” function allows updating the BIFFI-Assistant menu if a new function has been enabled in the
ECU1000 device.
In fact the BIFFI-Assistant read the menu structure from ECU1000 at the connection time. The parameters and
commands shown are according to the user level and the ECU1000 functions not active are not viewed.
If a function is enabled to work it need to re-read the menu structure as follows:
• after having enabled the function by the instruction in the previous paragraphs perform a logout and then a new
login
• after having enabled the function by the instruction in the previous paragraphs click on the “Refresh Structure”
option (available by clicking the right key of mouse on the DEVICE NAME)
Example : Input Characterization function disabled
The TAB “Input Characterization” is not present in the function block ACTUATOR SETUP
By the instructions of the previous paragraphs the function can be enabled in the function block RESTRICTED, TAB
FUNCTION SELECTOR, parameter INP CHARACTERIZ (OFF/ON).
After having enabled the function, it is still not present in the ACTUATOR SETUP block
In the above figure all the ECU1000 data (according to user level) will be exported in the BIFFI-Assistant data base.
The figures below show examples of setting:
1) Export of parameters and loggers (no graphs) in the BIFFI-Assistant data base
2) Export of parameters, logger, opening curve 1, closing curves, PST curves in the BIFFI-Assistant data base
3) Export of parameters and loggers as text file
Use the BIFFI-Assistant with username GUEST0 and password “10000A”. Connect the BIFFI-Assistant to the
ECU1000 card with the parameters to be read. Export the ECU1000 parameters in the BIFFI-Assistant data base, as file
*.biffia. Export only the parameters. The name of saved file contains date,time and username (GUEST0).
10.2 Import
The Import function allows copying the previously saved file (with extension .biffia) in the PC memory. If the PC is
connected with the ECU1000 and the PC memory already contains data (read from ECU1000), the new data are
overwritten, but only in the PC memory. The data are not sent to ECU1000. The imported file contains data according
to the username level and the number of enabled functions. It is suggested to import files with the same password level
used in the connection to ECU1000. The functions described in the previous paragraphs “write object_x”, “write
Tab_x”, “write Block_x”, “write active parameters” “full copy” should be used to send all data or a part of them to
the ECU1000. Graphs, Logger, in general any “only readable” data (flag “R”) cannot be written to ECU1000.
Scroll bar
The commands “Write all active objects, Full copy, Write Block_x, Write Tab_x, and Write object_x” decribed in
the previous paragraphs allow to send the parameter to the ECU1000 memory.
By the left key of mouse click VIEW to exit from setting mode.
The procedure allows exporting the full set of parameters from an ECU1000 card and copy it in a new ECU1000 card.
By BIFFI-Assistant and the procedures described in the prevoius paragraphs export the full set of data and save them in
a file (use username GUEST0 and password “10000A”).
Exit from BIFFI-Assistant and disconnect the previous ECU1000 card.
Connect the new ECU1000 card. Run the BIFFI-Assistant with username SPECIALIST or GUEST2. Import the file
saved prevoiusly with username GUEST0.
Send the full set of data to the new ECU1000 card by the BIFFI-Assistant command “full copy”, as decribed in the
prevoius paragraphs. The command is not active with password USER and OPERATOR.
BIFFI-Assistant
10.3.2 Copy all parameters except calibration, name plate and valve data
This procedure allow copying in a new card all parameters except the data relevant to calibration of analog input and
outputs, name plate and valve data. The above data will not be changed.
10.3.3 Copy all parameters except calibration and electronic card info
This procedure allow copying in a new card all parameters except the data relevant to calibration of analog input and
outputs and the electronic card info TAB. The above data will not be changed.
This procedure allows saving in a file all parameters and restore them in the ECU1000 memory after a FW upgrade and
a “Full default” command (see paragraph “Full default “ command).
11.2 Curves
By the Recorder function the ECU1000 can save different types of curves, (opening, closing, record, PST). The
instruction manuals DTDE326, DTDE327, DTDE328 describe the features of the Recorder function. The data saved in
the ECU1000 memory can be read in the function block “LOG and GRAPH” and viewed as tables or Y-t or Y-X graphs
on the PC screen.
The graphs can also be exported as *.png files. In the TAB “CURVES” are also available the commands to set the
signature of each type of curve.
The following procedure describes the operation available on the OPENING CURVE. The same procedure can be used
for CLOSING CURVE, RECORD CURVE and PST CURVE.
Important:
All command of TAB’s of Device Commands block (except the TAB Operation)
can be carried out only if the BIFFI-Assistant is in SETTING mode
12.1 Operation
The option “Start cyclical reading” allows updating the read value about every 2 sec.
12.1.2 Failure
Maximize the function
block DEVICE
COMMANDS.
Left click of mouse on
OPERATION.
Left click of mouse on
FAILURE.
Left click of mouse on
“Start cyclical reading”.
12.1.3 Alarm
Warning: Before executing the command it is mandatory to check that the calibration of 4-
20mA Position feedback and the mechanical stops are OK, according to
instructions in DTDE327”Travel Limit Setting”. It is also mandatory to check that
the configuration of parameters in the function Block “Restricted”, TAB “Travel
Limit” is OK.
Important:
The procedure described below is valid also for the command “CL Limit
Autocalib”
Warning: Before executing the command it is mandatory to check that the calibration of 4-
20mA Position feedback and the mechanical stops are OK, according to
instructions in DTDE327”Travel Limit Setting”. It is also mandatory to check that
the configuration of parameters in the function Block “Restricted”, TAB “Travel
Limit” is OK.
Important:
The procedure described below is valid also for the command “Change Open
Limit”
Warning: Before executing the command it is mandatory to check that the calibration of 4-
20mA Position feedback and the mechanical stops are OK, according to
instructions in DTDE327”Travel Limit Setting”. It is also mandatory to check that
the configuration of parameters in the function Block “Restricted”, TAB “Travel
Limit” is OK.
Important:
The procedure described below can be used only if the actuator is fully closed
Important:
The procedure described below is valid also for the command “OP Limit Manual
Set”. The procedure can be used only if the actuator is fully open
The above ECU command is available only if the parameter “positioner mode” is configured “MO-2PSOV” and the
actuator is controlled by BIFFI Proportional SOlenoid Valves (PSOV). It used to set the minimum and maximum PWM
signal to control the PSOV’s.
The command clears the EVENT, FAILURE and ALARM logger. It is available with password “SERVICE”,
“SPECIALIST” and “GUEST2”.
The command is available only with username level “service”, “specialist” and “guest2”. The command sets each
parameter of ECU1000 to the default value. The command is used after an ECU1000 firmware upgrade (see paragraph
“Copy all parameters after a FW upgrade”).
Warning: By the above command each parameter of the ECU1000 is configured with its
default value and the previous configuration is lost. It is mandatory to save the
configuration of the ECU1000 in a file before executing the command and restore
the configuration by the command “full copy” after having performed the
command, as described in the paragraphs “Import and Export”.
The ECU1000 controls the actuator, it could control the ECU, it could drive
generic electric, pneumatic, mechanic and hydraulic devices, it is mandatory to
place the above devices in their safe condition to avoid injury of people and
damage of equipment and ambient (see installation and maintenance manual)
The command is available only with username level “service”, “specialist” and “guest2”. The commands clears the
counters “n° of start of pump1”, “n° of starts of pump2”, “number of starts of D-SOV”. Each counter can be cleared
individually with options “Pump1, PUMP2, D-SOV START” or all counters can be cleared with the option “ALL”.
The command is available only with username level “specialist” and “guest2”. The command sets some typical
parameters of the HPU. Below are listed the HPU parameters set by the command
"A": hpu type=dual m-s, pressure discharge SOV=energized, oil pressure sensor=pres transm, DSOV mode=both, pump
duty=continuous,max-time alarm=pump stop, mec-unloader=absent
"B": hpu type=single, pressure discharge SOV=absent, oil pressure sensor=pres tr-sw, DSOV mode=start-pump, pump
duty=intermit, max-time alarm=pump run, mec-unloader=absent
"C": hpu type=single, pressure discharge SOV=energized, oil pressure sensor=pres transm, DSOV mode=both, pump
duty=intermit, max-time alarm=pump stop, mec-unloader=absent
"D": hpu type=single, pressure discharge SOV=absent, oil pressure sensor=pres switch, DSOV mode=start pump, pump
duty=intermit, max-time alarm=pump stop, mec-unloader=absent
"E" : hpu type=dual cycle, pressure discharge SOV=energized, oil pressure sensor=pres transm, DSOV mode=both,
pump duty=intermit,max-time alarm=pump stop, mec-unloader=absent
13 Work Offline
The prevoius paragraphs describe the features of the BIFFI-Asssistant when it is connected to ECU1000 and works
Online.
The next paragraph describes the features available when the BIFFI-Assistant works Offline, not connected to
ECU1000. In such mode BIFFI-Assistant can handle only files previously saved with extension *. biffia. The Offline
mode allows
• Change the value of parameters and save them in a new file
• View the loggers
• View the graphs
As described in the work Online mode use the left and right button of mouse and the PC keyboard to enter data.
By the facilities described in the previous paragraphs minimize / maximize the menu and use the scroll bar to view
function blocks, function TAB’s, parameters / command lines, loggers and graphs. The commands “Write Object_x,
Write Block_x, Write Tab_x” are active and are used to modify the value of parameters in the PC memory. The options
available on the high right corner are:
• Import: to read a file from PC memory
• Export: to save the file in the PC memory
• Change password: to modify the existing password in Work Offline mode
• Logout : to exit
Import the file to be modified by the procedure described in the prevoius paragraph. Maximize the function block and
the TAB contaning the parameters. Modify the parameters. By the commands “write Object_x, write TAB_x, write
Block_x, write all Objects” set the changes in the PC memory. Export the modified file in a new file.
Example 1: to change 2 parameters in different TAB’s and save them in a new file
Important: It is important that the new password is not forgot. It is suggested to save it in a
safe location. Contact Biffi Service if the password is lost
The procedure to view the loggers is the same described in the previous paragraphs for the Work Online mode. The
loggers previously saved can only be viewed, they cannot be modified.
The procedure to view the short logger is the same described for viewing the LOGGER.
The procedure to view the curves is the same described in the previous paragraphs in Work Online mode. The graphs
previously saved can only be viewed, they cannot be modified. Here below is described the procedure to work on the
“Opening curve”, but the procedure is the same for the “Closing, Recorder and PST curves”.
Curve 0 = signature
Graph of 2 curves, 2
variables each curve.
Comparison between
“signature” (curve 0) and
curve 3
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
4 INSTALLAZIONE ........................................................................................................................... 16
5 AVVIAMENTO.............................................................................................................................. 23
5.4 REGOLAZIONI/CONTROLLI................................................................................................... 25
5.7 RIPRISTINO........................................................................................................................... 26
6 MANUTENZIONE ......................................................................................................................... 27
7 RICAMBI ...................................................................................................................................... 32
8 DEMOLIZIONE ............................................................................................................................. 33
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
1.1 COSTRUTTORE
OLEODINAMICA REVA s.r.l.
Via Isacchi, 3 – 42124
Reggio Emilia (Italy)
Tel. (0522) 305902 – 381830
Fax (0522) 381831
e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE “OCIALE € .9 , i.v.
R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE
CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
1.2 CERTIFICAZIONE
La Oleodinamica REVA s.r.l. dichiara che il prodotto è conforme alle seguenti normative (la dichiarazione
oi volge sola e te i ate iali all’i te o dello s opo di fo itu a di OLEODINAMICA REVA:
2004/108/CE Direttiva compatibilità elettromagnetica
2006/95/CE Direttiva bassa tensione
2006/42/CE Direttiva macchine
97/23/CE Direttiva apparecchi a pressione
UNI EN ISO 4413:2012 (Regole generali e requisiti di sicurezza per i sistemi oleodinamici e i loro
componenti).
Il a uale i oggetto ivolto sia all’ope ato e he ai te i i a ilitati alla a ute zio e della e t ale, ed
ha lo scopo di fornire tutte le informazioni necessarie affinché, oltre ad un adeguato utilizzo della
apparecchiatura il Cliente sia in grado di operare nel modo più autonomo e sicuro possibile. E’ e essario
prima di effettuare qualsiasi operazione sulla apparecchiatura oleodinamica, che gli operatori ed i
manutentori leggano attentamente le istruzioni contenute nel presente manuale di istruzioni.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Il manuale di istruzioni è parte integrante della centrale pertanto deve essere conservato nelle
immediate vicinanze della stessa, dentro un apposito contenitore e, soprattutto, al riparo da liquidi e
ua t’alt o e possa o p o ette e lo stato di leggi ilità.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
ELETTROPOMPA
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PARETI DI CHIUSURA
SERBATOIO
STRUTTURA PORTANTE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
TETTOIE
QUADRO ELETTRICO
FINESTRE AERAZIONE
ACCUMULATORI
La centrale viene fornita con le tettoie separate per esigenze di ingombri spedizione.
Movimentare la centrale SENZA le tettoie , montarle dopo installazione.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’illu i azio e della centrale è prevista attraverso un neon centrale , l’ ute te può attiva e
l'illu i azio e age do sull’i te utto e posto a si ist a all’i g esso della e t ale,
Nel caso di interventi straordinari di manutenzione non diurna, prima di operare, il personale deve accertarsi
di operare con sufficiente visibilità.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Gli operatori ed i manutentori devono leggere con molta attenzione le informazioni riportate nel
presente manuale, con particolare riguardo alle opportune precauzioni per sicurezza elencate in questo
capitolo.
E’ i dispe sa ile, i olt e, he ve ga o seguite le avve te ze di seguito ele ate:
Mantenere le apparecchiature e la zona di lavoro in ordine e pulita.
Non rimuovere od alterare le targhe apposte dal costruttore
Non rimuovere od eludere i sistemi di sicurezza della centralina
Non variare la taratura delle valvole senza apposita autorizzazione
“eg ala e e ip isti a e eve tuali pe dite d’olio
Co t olla e pe iodi a e te la ta atu a e l’effi ie za delle valvole di massima posti sulla
centrale.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
4.1 PREMESSA
La centrale prima della messa in funzione è stata sottoposta a collaudo per verificare il corretto
funzionamento in accordo allo schema idraulico.
A fine collaudo vie e svuotato l’olio, è a carico cliente sia il primo riempimento che i successivi cambi olio; la
centrale è idonea per funzionare con olio idraulico AEROSHELL FLUID 41.
4.2 MOVIMENTAZIONE
La movimentazione della centrale deve essere effettuata da personale professionalmente qualificato in
modo da evitare qualsiasi danno accidentale.
La centrale è movimentabile attraverso 4 golfari posti sulla struttura. I golfari sono stati forniti insieme alla
e t ale id auli a, il solleva e to di uest’ultima è approvato solo con i golfari forniti.
Questo è il solo modo consentito per poterla movimentare.
NON UTILIZZARE ALTRI FORI FILETTATI PRESENTI O FASCE AVVOLGENTI LA CENTRALE O CARRELLI ELEVATORI
CON FORCHE.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
1 Leg:
4000 kg 4000 kg
2 Leg:3/4 Leg:*
*Please note: The values mentioned for 3/4 legs are only achieved when it is guaranteed that the load is evenly spread
over more than 2 legs. Otherwise please use the values of 2 legs. See BGR 500/DGUV Regel 100-500
(regulation for the prevention of industrial accidents), chapter 2.8 paragraph 3.5.3
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
MANDATE
RITORNI
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
VITE DI REGOLAZIONE
COMPENSATORE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
5.7 RIPRISTINO
Vedere manuale quadro elettrico (non fornito da OLEDINAMICA REVA)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
È espo sa ilità dell’utilizzato e della e t alina assi u a e he l’attività di a ute zio e sia o dotta da
personale qualificato (vedi paragrafo 5.1) con modalità conformi alle leggi sanitarie e sulla sicurezza
includendo la valutazione dei rischi.
Le operazioni di manutenzione devono essere effettuate con la centrale oleodinamica nelle stato
indicato nella scheda di manutenzione programmata 6.7.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E’ e e p ovvede e saltua ia e te alla pulizia este a della e t ale e dei suoi componenti idraulici così da
poter permettere una facile localizzazione di eventuali perdite.
Durante il cambio dei filtri è consigliato pulire il fondo del serbatoio dove si possono essere depositati residui
di vario genere. Prima di richiudere l’o lò prestare particolare attenzione che o sia o las iati all’i te o
della e t ale ate iali est a ei fluidi, o te ito i, st a i o ua t’alt o sia stato utilizzato pe la pulizia e la
manutenzione).
Un impianto oleodinamico, ben installato e curato nella fase di montaggio e messa in servizio, assicura una
lunga durata senza inconvenienti e non necessita di particolari manutenzioni. È assolutamente necessario
controllare periodicamente la qualità e la pulizia del fluido che trasmette potenza per garantire l’affida ilità
di qualsiasi centrale oleodinamica. Si raccomandano le operazioni periodiche descritte sulla scheda 6.7.
Queste operazioni vanno eseguite nelle tempistiche indicate, il mancato rispetto di quanto richiesto esonera
il costruttore da qualunque responsabilità agli effetti della garanzia.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Non potendo stabilire a priori il tempo di vita di un componente idraulico, si consiglia l’utilizzato e della
centrale di avere a disposizione un kit minimo di ricambi dei componenti la cui rottura può causare un fermo
impianto.
Kit ricambi completi consigliati di scopo fornitura OLEODINAMICA REVA
QTY Descrizione Pos. schema
1 ASSIEME MOTORE-POMPA 965+545+35+36
4 CARTUCCIA FILTRO MANDATA 356
2 FILTRO COMPLETO MANDATA 356
1 FILTRO COMPLETO RAFFREDDAMENTO 359
4 MANOMETRI 621
1 TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER 565
1 ELECTRIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 562
1 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITCH 523
1 3/2 HAND ACTUATED VALVE 460
1 RELIEF VALVE 395 A-B-C
1 RELIEF VALVE (PED) 395 G-H-L
1 CHECK VALVE 379 F
1 CHECK VALVE 379 D
1 CHECK VALVE 379 A-B-C
4 STOP VALVE 351 R-M
Si consiglia di re-i teg a e la s o ta dopo l’uso dei componenti dopo una manutenzione o sostituzione.
Si rammenta che solo un tecnico qualificato può effettuare riparazioni sulla macchina.
E’ ui di o sigliato l’i te ve to del centro assistenza tecnica del costruttore, che è disponibile con personale
qualifi ato, att ezzatu e ido ee, o h o pa ti di i a io o igi ali. Pe effettua e l’o di e di i a i
sopra-elencati, seguire le istruzioni elencate al paragrafo 1.2 .
Si precisa che il costruttore non ha alcun dovere di predisporre ricambi per interventi in
urgenza anche durante il periodo di garanzia della centrale; pertanto si suggerisce di
approvvigionare per tempo il necessario per ogni emergenza
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
“i p e isa he il fluido id auli o dell’i pia to deve esse e s altito i a o do alla Direttiva 2008/98/CE e
alle leggi vigenti.
All’atto della de olizio e e essa io sepa a e le pa ti i ate iale plasti o e componentistica elettrica,
che devono essere inviati a raccolte differenziate nel rispetto della normativa vigente. Per quanto concerne
la massa metallica della macchina, è sufficiente la suddivisione tra le parti in acciaio e quelle di altri metalli o
leghe, per il corretto invio al riciclaggio per fusione.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
tj] 9~A
950A
~
953A
- -
621A
- 267C
p
2678
i p
267A
i p
l
'"'" B -
C -
BY-PASS CHECK VALVE
CLOGGING VISUAL INOICATOR
352G 27A 379 CHECK VALVE
LOC-REM EMERGENCY 395 RELIEF VALVE
EMERGENCY RESET 352F '~ 352P 352N 352E'~ 460 3/2 HANO ACTUATED VALVE
RESET
~ [2:1 - - r-- --1] 523 OIFFERENTIAL ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITCH (AOJUST. SETIING)
tj]
950G
953C
351H
542
545
555
559
HYORAULIC ROTATING PUMP
VARIABLE OISPLACEMENT PUMP WITH PRESSURE CONTROL
OIL TANK
LEVEL GAUGE
A B c 460~\ITY l
561
562
OIL POURING PLUG WITH FILTER
ELECTRIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
tj] tj] tj] l
l
352H 27B
565
570
TEMPERATURE TRANSOUCER
COOLER
9508 950C 9500 3 5 6 A 0 3568
Vos
Y L.,l,<(~
1 621 PRESSURE GAUGE
395~
MAl N COOLER l
624 CHECK VALVE
PUMP PUMP 352A ..... 3528 l
950 HAND OPERATED ELECTRIC SWITCH
A-B-C AUTO-MAN ON-OFF
rn
l l l 351L 951 HANO OPERATED ELECTRIC SWITCH (3 POSITIONS)
® ® ® ® l
9600 9605
PUMP FAILURE
960T 960U
959 l
i
L _ 395i1:'-J
_
~i
A B c - HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT WORKING PRINCIPLE
395A -180 THE MAIN UNIT (MOTOR 956 + PUMP 545) IS SELECTED BY THE SWITCH 951 ANO
®
9608
®
960C
®
9600 ""'- CONTINUOUSLY RUN TO MAINTAIN THE PRESSURE INSIOE ACCUMULATORS 33 WITHIN
A RANGE SET BY THE PUMPS 545 PRESSURE CONTROL OEVICE.
3958
l
MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION MANAGEMENT OF BACKUP ANO EMERGENCY MOTOR/PUMP UNITS
A B c L IN CASE OF OIL LOW PRESSURE THE BACKUP MOTOR/PUMP UNIT IS STARTED TO
HELP THE MAIN ONE. THE MAIN PUMP FAILURE ALARM IS ACTIVATED ANO THE
® ® ® f---- RELEVANT LAMP 960A/B/C SWITCHES ON.
960E 960F 960G
c::: f - - - - 20 IF THE PRESSURE RETURNS TO NORMAL VALUES THE BACKUP MOTOR/PUMP UNIT
IS STOPPED ANO THE FAILURE ALARM IS OEACTIVATED, THE LAMP STAYS SWITCHED
OIL OIL ON UP TO THE RESET PUSHBUTTON 9538 IS PRESSED.
CLOGGED HIGH LOW-LOW IF THE OIL PRESSURE REMAINS LOW THE EMERGENCY MOTOR/PUMP UNIT IS
FILTER TEMPERATURE LEVE L STARTED TO HELP THE MAIN ANO BACKUP ONES. THE BACKUP PUMP FAILURE
®
960H
®
960L
®
960M
ALARM IS ACTIVATED ANO THE RELEVANT LAMP 960A/B/C SWITCHES ON.
IF THE PRESSURE RETURNS TO NORMAL VALUES THE BACKUP ANO EMERGENCY
MOTOR/PUMP UNITS ARE STOPPED ANO THE FAILURE ALARMS ARE OEACTIVATED,
THE LAMPS STAY SWITCHED ON UP TO THE RESET PUSHBUTTON 9538 IS PRESSED.
IF THE PRESSURE REMAINS LOW ALL THE MOTOR/PUMP UNITS ARE STOPPED. THE
EMERGENCY PUMP FAILURE ALARM IS ACTIVATED ANO THE RELEVANT LAMP
960A/B/C SWITCHES ON.
AN OPERATOR LOCAL INTERVENTION IS REQUIRED TO VERIFY THE STATUS OF
ELECTRO HYORAULIC POWER UNIT ANO ALLOW ITS START BY PRESSING THE RESET
PUSHBUTTON 9538.
-
- OIL LOW-LOW LEVEL. THE RELEVANT ALARM IS ACTIVATED ANO THE LAMP 960M
SWITCHES ON.
~B 31 ( - OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE. THE RELEVANT ALARM IS ACTIVATED ANO THE LAMP 960L
29c(
~
SWITCHES ON.
MAIN ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
400 VAC 3ph 50 Hz
AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
110 VOC
ANALOGUE SIGNALS 4-20 mA:
- OIL PRESSURE L ~~ - - - ~~ -
JOB
____.......
- ~~
---
9560
542
-- J
M
l
- MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION INTERVENTION. THE RELEVANT ALARM IS ACTIVATED
ANO ONE OF THE LAMPS 960E/F /G SWITCHES ON.
AN OPERATOR LOCAL INTERVENTION IS REQUIRED TO VERIFY THE STATUS OF
ELECTRO HYORAULIC POWER UNIT ANO ALLOW ITS START BY PRESSING THE RESET
PUSHBUTION 9538.
IN CASE OF MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION INTERVENTION THE RESET OPERATION
- OIL TEMPERATURE L-----------------------------------~ MUST BE PERFORMED INSIDE THE ELECTRIC CONTROL PANEL 954.
- OIL LEVEL
OIGITAL SIGNALS
- PSL: OIL LOW PRESSURE
- PSLL' OIL LOW-LOW PRESSURE
SET 565 TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER Rev. Dote Approved
- PSH A/B/C: MOTOR/PUMP RUNNING 5(Rml 31/08/16 By EM Description AS BUILT AFTER FINAL TEST
- POSH: CLOGGED FILTER
- LSLL: OIL LOW-LOW LEVEL 33"C! START 956D Rev. 4(REVA) Dote 10/DB/16 By NV Approved Description AS BUILT
- CUMULATIVE ALARM INCLUOING' 30"C j STOP 956D
- 400 VAC SUPPLY FAILURE Rev. 3(REVA) Dote 16/03/16 By NV Approved Description UPDATE OIAGRAM ANO ADDED PART LIST
- MANUAL CONTROL ENABLED
55"C! ALARM HIGH TEMPERATURE (STOP PUMP)
-
-
PUMPS FAILURE
MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION TRIPPED SET 562 LEVEL TRANSMITIER
TAG Rev. 2 Dote DS/03/16 By Approved Description AOOED ITEMS 2678, 352N, 267C, 352P, 950H, 960R,
959, 110 VDC AUXILIARY SUPPLY.
- CLOGGED FILTER CFI-001 Rev. Dote By Approved GUO Oescription AOOED ITEMS 953C, 950F G, 395G H L, 3790, TAG,
- OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE MAX VISUAL OIL LEVE L ~ 100% 1 16/02/16 GF PUMP ORAIN ANO ELECTRICAL HEATER CONNECTIONS
- OIL LOW LEVEL MIN VISUAL OIL LEVEL ~ 4%
CFI-002
- OIL LOW PRESSURE Drowing Number
- OIL LOW-LOW PRESSURE MIN VISUAL OIL LEVEL +50mm ~ 14% (STOP PUMP)
ELECTRO HYDRAULIC SLAPZ030
j0
ONE PUMP: 601t/1' WITH 155BAR
POWER UNIT File SLAPZ030
TWO PUMP: 12Dit/1' WITH 155BAR
THREE PUMP: 1801t/1' WITH 155BAR BIFFI OPERATING DIAGRAM By GF
Dote 1 7/12/1 5
Approved GUD
(REVA DWG. 19.011.262 PAG.2/2)
(SET PRESSURE COMPENSATOR 170BAR) 29 A-B-C 3 FLEXIBLE PIPES PUMP SUCTION SAE100R4/811-24/DN40 L~2300 PARKER
542 - 1 HYDRAULIC ROTATING PUMP INCLUDED IN POS.570 WITH CLAMP ò51 INOX
523 - 1 DIFFERENTIAL ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITCH 162P48C6 +BOX (SET 11BAR!) ITT -NEODYN 28 A-B-C 3 FLEXIBLE PIPES PUMP DEUVERY SAE100R2/462-12/DN20 PARKER
460 A-B 2 3/2 HAND ACTUATED VALVE PK3-DN20-4424-SB58 (-40) MHA FD 3/ 4" IN OX - F90 3/ 4" INOX L~l450
395 G-H-L 3 RELIEF VALVE (PED) MVPX4C (SET 207BAR) (TUV /CE) HAWE 27 A-B-C 3 FIXED FLOW REGULATOR 1/16"NPT WITH HOLE 01.2 REVA
395 A-B-C 3 RELIEF VALVE LPIJ0/0-N (SET 180BAR l) EXTERNAL IN OX FLUCOM 26 -
1 ACCUMULATOR MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.750 REVA
379 F 1 CHECK VALVE CAE50/Z (SET 8BAR) FLUCOM 25 - 1 LEVER FOR BALL VALVE DWG. 19.102.829 REVA
379 D 1 CHECK VALVE FT2257 /6 1OONPT (SET 0,35BAR) TOGNELLA 24 - 1 FILTER MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.749 REVA
379 A-B-C 3 CHECK VALVE CAE50/P FLUCOM 23 A-B 2 OUTLET MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.748 REVA
359 - 1 HYDRAULIC FILTER FRI250-BFF1 A06NP01 +V6XF MP FILTRI 22 - 1 BY-PASS MANIFOlD FOR HEART EXCHANGE DWG. 19.145.751 REVA
356 A-B 2 HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB320-2-S-F-F-1A-10H+PLUG T2F MFO MP FILTRI 21 -
1 PRESSURE GAUGE MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.761 REVA
352 M 1 NEEDLE VALVE INCLUDED IN POS.559 20 - 1 PRESSURE MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.760 REVA
352 l 1 NEEDLE VALVE FT2290-14 TOGNELLA 18 - 1 TOP DRAIN MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.763 REVA
352 G-H-L 3 NEEDLE VALVE DWG. 49.020.247 REVA 17 - 1 SIDE DRAIN MANIFOLD DWG. 19.145.762 REVA
Pos. Code N. Denominotìon Description Firm Pos. Code N. Denominotion Description Firm
Rev. 5(REVA) Dote 31/08/16 By EM Approved Description AS BUILT AFTER FINAL TEST
Rev. J(REVA) Dote 16/03/16 By NV Approved Description UPDATE DIAGRAM ANO ADDED PART LIST
Rev. Dote DS/03/16 By Approved Oescription ADDED ITEMS 2678, 352N, 267C, 352P, 950H, 960R,
2 959, 110 VDC AUXILIARY SUPPLY.
Rev. By Approved GUD Oescription ADDED ITEMS 953C, 950F G, 395G H L, 3790, TAG,
1 Dote 16/02/16 GF PUMP DRAIN AND ELECTRICAL HEATER CONNECTIONS
m Drowing Number
o Poth T'\SCH
o
o
N ELECTRO HYDRAULIC SLAPZ030
D
u
o
POWER UNIT File SLAPZ030 Dote l 7/12/ l 5
2
"
<(
BIFFI -OPERATING DIAGRAM- By GF Approved GUD
Commessa 16/00129/C : 1 & 2 Data 29/8/16
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
2639
2030
1030
20
PRESSURE LINE CONNECTION RETURN LINE CONNECTION
CUSTOMER ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY (N 6 x 1 1/4" SAE3000)
(N 6 x 1 1/4" SAE3000)
(N 16 x 1" SAE3000) (N 16 x 1" SAE3000)
ELECTRIC CABLE PASSAGE
3950
A
INSTRUCTION FOR SUN SHADE ROOF ASSEMBLING:
B
A1-REMOVE SCREW M12 FROM THE TOP OFCABINET
(SEE PAGE 2)(14 PIECES)
A2-INSTALL SUN SHADE ROOF "B" AS IN DRAWING
WITH 4 BOLTS M12x20
C
A3-INSTALL SUN SHADE ROOF "A" AND HIS
5 BOLTS M12x20
A4-INSTALL SUN SHADE ROOF "C" AND HIS
2840
5 BOLTS M12x20
A5-INSTALL SCREW M8(x4) BETWEEN 3 SUN SHADE
ROOF TO OBTEIN ONE ROOF CONTINUOS
A6-TIGHTEN 12 BOLT M10x25
A B C
2548
559
545C 35C 36C 959C
ACCUMULATOR
MANIFOLD 352M
SEE PAG.3/3
545B 35B 36B 956B
351D
1700
INTERNAL SECTION:G-G
950H
959
(REVA DWG.19.021.262 PAG.2/3)
3 10.08.16 NV AS BUILT REVISED CAD ONLY
2 14.06.16 NV ADDED PART NUMBER MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
FILTER MANIFOLD
460A 460B 523
352C
352D
395C (REVA DWG.19.021.262 PAG.3/3)
379C
3 10.08.16 NV AS BUILT REVISED CAD ONLY
356A 356B
395B 2 14.06.16 NV ADDED PART NUMBER MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
379B 1 29.04.16 NV REVISED LAY-OUT
352B Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
395A 352A Drawing Number
379A
ELECTRO HYDRAULIC 2112750000
scale date
POWER UNIT 1:7 16.03.16
drm chkd
ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- Nardone
9.3 DICHIARAZIONE CONFORMITA’ CABLAGGI
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Il sottoscritto MONTI PAOLO, responsabile tecnico della ditta Project Group s.r. l. , con sede in San Polo d'Enza (RE), Via Galilei Nr.l ,
partita iva Nr.00281040352, iscritta nel registro delle i mprese al Nr.125411 della C.C.LA.A. di Reggio Emilia, iscritta nel registro delle
imprese al Nr.8233 del tribunale di Reggio Emilia, esecutrice dell'impianto elettrico:
DICHIARA
In quanto per la realizzazione dell'impianto elettrico sopra citato sono st at e seguite le Norme:
• EN 60204-1:2006-06 (Sicurezza del macchinario- Equipaggiamento elettrico delle macchine parte 1: Regole generali ).
• EN 60204-1/A1:2009-02 (Sicurezza del macchinario- Equipaggiamento elettrico delle macchine parte 1: Regole genera li).
Allegati:
Il Dichiarante
PROJECT GROUP s.r.l.
Via G. Galilei. 1
42020 SAN POLO D'ENZA (RE)
Tel. 0522.873376 Fax 0522.873098
Cod. Fisc. o P IVA 00281040352
9.4 MANUALE MOTORE ELETTRICO ABB
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Customer Reference:
Low voltage motors
Installation, operation, maintenance and safety manual
More languages – see web site www.abb.com/motors&generators > Motors > Document library
Low voltage motors
Installation, operation, maintenance and safety manual
Contents
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Declaration of Conformity ....................................................................................................5
1.2 Validity .................................................................................................................................5
2. Safety considerations .................................................................................................................5
3. Handling .......................................................................................................................................6
3.1 Reception check..................................................................................................................6
3.2 Transportation and storage ..................................................................................................6
3.3 Lifting ..................................................................................................................................6
3.4 Motor weight .......................................................................................................................6
4. Installation and commissioning.................................................................................................7
4.1 General................................................................................................................................7
4.2 Motors with other than ball bearings ....................................................................................7
4.3 Insulation resistance check ..................................................................................................7
4.4 Foundation ..........................................................................................................................7
4.5 Balancing and fitting coupling halves and pulleys .................................................................7
4.6 Mounting and alignment of the motor ..................................................................................8
4.7 Radial forces and belt drives ................................................................................................8
4.8 Motors with drain plugs for condensation ............................................................................8
4.9 Cabling and electrical connections.......................................................................................8
4.9.1 Connections for different starting methods ...........................................................9
4.9.2 Connections of auxiliaries .....................................................................................9
4.10 Terminals and direction of rotation .......................................................................................9
5. Operation ..................................................................................................................................10
5.1 General..............................................................................................................................10
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 3
6. Low voltage motors in variable speed operation .................................................................11
6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................11
6.2 Winding insulation..............................................................................................................11
6.2.1 Selection of winding insulation for ABB converters..............................................11
6.2.2 Selection of winding insulation with all other converters .....................................11
6.3 Thermal protection ............................................................................................................11
6.4 Bearing currents ................................................................................................................11
6.4.1 Elimination of bearing currents with ABB converters ...........................................11
6.4.2 Elimination of bearing currents with all other converters ......................................12
6.5 Cabling, grounding and EMC .............................................................................................12
6.6 Operating speed ................................................................................................................12
6.7 Motors in variable speed applications ................................................................................12
6.7.1 General ..............................................................................................................12
6.7.2 Motor loadability with AC_8_ _ – series of converters with DTC control...............12
6.7.3 Motor loadability with AC_5_ _ – series of converter ...........................................12
6.7.4 Motor loadability with other voltage source PWM-type converters ......................12
6.7.5 Short time overloads...........................................................................................13
6.8 Rating plates .....................................................................................................................13
6.9 Commissioning the variable speed application ...................................................................13
7. Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................14
7.1 General inspection .............................................................................................................14
7.1.1 Standby motors .......................................................................................................14
7.2 Lubrication ........................................................................................................................14
7.2.1 Motors with permanently greased bearings ........................................................14
7.2.2 Motors with regreasable bearings .......................................................................15
7.2.3 Lubrication intervals and amounts ......................................................................15
7.2.4 Lubricants ..........................................................................................................17
8. After Sales Support...................................................................................................................18
8.1 Spare parts........................................................................................................................18
8.2 Dismantling, re-assembly and rewinding ............................................................................18
8.3 Bearings ............................................................................................................................18
9. Environmental requirements ....................................................................................................18
10. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................19
4 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Introduction 2. Safety considerations
The motor is intended for installation and use by qualified
NOTE!
personnel, familiar with health and safety requirements and
These instructions must be followed to ensure
national legislation.
safe and proper installation, operation and
maintenance of the motor. They should be brought Safety equipment necessary for the prevention of accidents
to the attention of anyone who installs, operates at the installation and operating site must be provided in
or maintains the motor or associated equipment. accordance with local regulations.
The motor is intended for installation and use by
qualified personnel, familiar with health and safety
requirements and national legislation. Ignoring these WARNING!
instructions may invalidate all applicable warranties. Emergency stop controls must be equipped with
restart lockouts. After emergency stop a new start
command can take effect only after the restart
1.1 Declaration of Conformity lockout has been intentionally reset.
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 5
3. Handling Lifting eyebolts must be tightened before lifting. If needed,
the position of the eyebolt can be adjusted using suitable
washers as spacers.
3.1 Reception check
Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that the
Immediately upon receipt, check the motor for external sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lifting lugs.
damage (e.g. shaft-ends, flanges and painted surfaces)
and, if found, inform the forwarding agent without delay. Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment and
cables connected to the motor.
Check all rating plate data, especially voltage and winding
connections (star or delta). The type of bearing is specified Remove eventual transport jigs fixing the motor to the
on the rating plate of all motors except the smallest frame pallet.
sizes.
Specific lifting instructions are available from ABB.
In the case of a variable speed drive application check
the maximum loadability allowed according to frequency
stamped on the motor’s second rating plate. WARNING!
During lifting, mounting or maintenance work, all
necessary safety considerations shall be in place
3.2 Transportation and storage and special attention to be taken that nobody will be
The motor should always be stored indoors (above subject to lifted load.
–20 °C), in dry, vibration-free and dust-free conditions.
During transportation, shocks, falls and humidity should
be avoided. In other conditions, please contact ABB. 3.4 Motor weight
Unprotected machined surfaces (shaft-ends and flanges) The total motor weight can vary within the same frame size
should be treated against corrosion. (center height) depending on different output, mounting
arrangement and auxiliaries.
It is recommended that shafts are rotated periodically by
hand to prevent grease migration. The following table shows estimated maximum weights
for machines in their basic versions as a function of frame
Anti-condensation heaters, if fitted, are recommended to material.
be used to avoid water condensing in the motor.
The actual weight of all ABB’s motors, except the smallest
The motor must not be subject to any external vibrations at frame sizes (56 and 63), is shown on the rating plate
standstill so as to avoid causing damage to the bearings.
Frame size Aluminum Cast iron Add.
Motors fitted with cylindrical-roller and/or angular contact for brake
bearings must be fitted with locking devices during Weight kg Weight kg
transport. 56 4.5 - -
63 6 - -
3.3 Lifting 71 8 13 5
80 14 20 8
All ABB motors above 25 kg are equipped with lifting lugs 90 20 30 10
or eyebolts. 100 32 40 16
112 36 50 20
Only the main lifting lugs or eyebolts of the motor should be
132 93 90 30
used for lifting the motor. They must not be used to lift the
160 149 130 30
motor when it is attached to other equipment.
180 162 190 45
Lifting lugs for auxiliaries (e.g. brakes, separate cooling 200 245 275 55
fans) or terminal boxes must not be used for lifting the 225 300 360 75
motor. Because of different output, mounting arrangements 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 -
and auxiliary equipment, motors with the same frame may
315 - 1700 -
have a different center of gravity.
355 - 2700 -
Damaged lifting lugs must not be used. Check that 400 - 3500 -
eyebolts or integrated lifting lugs are undamaged before 450 - 4500 -
lifting.
If the motor is equipped with a separate fan, contact ABB
for the weight.
6 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4. Installation and commissioning
WARNING! WARNING!
Disconnect and lock out before working on the To avoid risk of electrical shock, the motor frame
motor or the driven equipment. must be grounded and the windings should be
discharged against the frame immediately after each
measurement.
4.1 General
All rating plate values must be carefully checked to ensure If the reference resistance value is not attained, the
that the motor protection and connection will be properly winding is too damp and must be oven dried. The oven
done. temperature should be 90 °C for 12-16 hours followed by
105 °C for 6-8 hours.
4.2 Motors with other than If fitted drain hole plugs must be removed and closing
ball bearings valves must be opened during heating. After heating, make
sure the plugs are refitted. Even if the drain plugs are fitted,
Remove transport locking if employed. Turn the shaft of the it is recommended to disassemble the end shields and
motor by hand to check free rotation, if possible. terminal box covers for the drying process.
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 7
Coupling halves and pulleys must be fitted on the shaft by 4.8 Motors with drain plugs
using suitable equipment and tools which do not damage
the bearings and seals. for condensation
Never fit a coupling half or pulley by hammering or Check that drain holes and plugs face downwards. In
removing it by using a lever pressed against the body of the vertical position mounted motors, the drain plugs may be in
motor. horizontal position.
Correct alignment is essential to avoid bearing, vibration In addition to the main winding and earthing terminals, the
and possible shaft failures. terminal box can also contain connections for thermistors,
heating elements or other auxiliary devices.
Mount the motor on the foundation using the appropriate
bolts or studs and place shim plates between the Suitable cable lugs must be used for the connection of all
foundation and the feet. main cables. Cables for auxiliaries can be connected into
their terminal blocks as such.
Align the motor using appropriate methods.
Motors are intended for fixed installation only. Unless
If applicable, drill locating holes and fix the locating pins into otherwise specified, cable entry threads are metric. The IP
position. class of the cable gland must be at least the same as those
of the terminal boxes.
Mounting accuracy of coupling half: check that clearance
b is less than 0.05 mm and that the difference a1 to a2 is Certified conduit hub or cable connector has to be used at
also less than 0.05 mm. See figure 2. the time of installation.
8 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Minimum cross-sectional area of protective Direct-on-line starting (DOL):
conductors Y or D winding connections may be used.
Cross-sectional area of phase Minimum cross-sectional area For example, 690 VY, 400 VD indicates Y-connection for
conductors of the installation, of the corresponding protective 690 V and D-connection for 400 V.
S, [mm2] conductor, SP, [mm2]
4 4 Star/Delta (Wye/Delta) starting (Y/D):
6 6
10 10
The supply voltage must be equal to the rated voltage of
16 16
the motor when using a D-connection.
25 25
Remove all connection links from the terminal block.
35 25
50 25 Other starting methods and severe starting
70 35 conditions:
95 50 In cases where other starting methods e.g. converter or
120 70 soft starter will be used in the duty types of S1 and S2, it
150 70 is considered that the device is “isolated from the power
185 95 system when the electrical machine is running” as in the
240 120 standard IEC 60079-0 and thermal protection is optional.
300 150
400 185
4.9.2 Connections of auxiliaries
In addition, earthing or bonding connection facilities on
the outside of electrical apparatus must provide effective If a motor is equipped with thermistors or other RTDs
connection of a conductor with a cross-sectional area of at (Pt100, thermal relays, etc.) and auxiliary devices, it is
least 4 mm2. recommended they be used and connected by appropriate
means. For certain applications, it is mandatory to use
The cable connection between the network and motor thermal protection. More detailed information can be found
terminals must meet the requirements stated in the in the documents delivered with the motor. Connection
national standards for installation or in the standard diagrams for auxiliary elements and connection parts can
IEC/EN 60204-1 according to the rated current indicated be found inside the terminal box.
on the rating plate.
The maximum measuring voltage for the thermistors is
2.5 V. The maximum measuring current for Pt100 is 5 mA.
NOTE!
Using a higher measuring voltage or current may cause
When the ambient temperature exceeds +50 °C,
errors in readings or a damaged temperature detector.
cables having permissible operating temperature
of +90 °C as minimum shall be used. Also all other The insulation of thermal sensors fulfills the requirements of
conversion factors depending on the installation basic insulation.
conditions shall be taken into account while sizing
the cables.
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 9
5. Operation
5.1 General
The motors are designed for the following conditions unless
otherwise stated on the rating plate:
WARNING!
Ignoring any instructions or maintenance of the
apparatus may jeopardize safety and thus prevent
the use of the motor.
10 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6. Low voltage motors in variable speed operation
6.1 Introduction 6.2.2 Selection of winding insulation with
all other converters
This part of the manual provides additional instructions for
motors used in frequency converter supplies. The motor The voltage stresses must be limited below accepted limits.
is intended to operate from a single frequency converter Please contact the system supplier to ensure the safety of
supply and not motors running in parallel from one the application. The influence of possible filters must be
frequency converter. Instructions given by the converter taken into account while dimensioning the motor.
manufacturer shall be followed.
Please contact ABB for more information on resistor braking and converters with controlled supply units.
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 11
NOTE!
6.7 Motors in variable speed
Insulated bearings which have aluminum oxide applications
coated inner and/or outer bores or ceramic rolling
elements are recommended. Aluminum oxide
6.7.1 General
coatings shall also be treated with a sealant to
prevent dirt and humidity penetrating into the porous With ABB’s frequency converters, the motors can be
coating. For the exact type of bearing insulation, see dimensioned by using ABB’s DriveSize dimensioning
the motor’s rating plate. Changing the bearing type program. The tool is downloadable from the ABB website
or insulation method without ABB’s permission is (www.abb.com/motors&generators).
prohibited. For application supplied by other converters, the motors
must be dimensioned manually. For more information,
6.4.2 Elimination of bearing currents with please contact ABB.
all other converters The loadability curves (or load capacity curves) are based
The user is responsible for protecting the motor and driven on nominal supply voltage. Operation in under or over
equipment from harmful bearing currents. Instructions voltage conditions may influence on the performance of the
described in chapter 6.4.1 can be used as guideline, but application.
their effectiveness cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
6.7.2 Motor loadability with AC_8_ _ – series
6.5 Cabling, grounding and EMC of converters with DTC control
The loadability curves presented in Figures 5a - 5d are
To provide proper grounding and to ensure compliance
valid for ABB AC_8_ _-series converters with uncontrolled
with any applicable EMC requirements, motors above
DC-voltage and DTC-control. The figures show the
30 kW shall be cabled by shielded symmetrical cables and
approximate maximum continuous output torque of the
EMC glands, i.e. cable glands providing 360° bonding.
motors as a function of supply frequency. The output
Symmetrical and shielded cables are highly recommended torque is given as a percentage of the nominal torque of
also for smaller motors. Make the 360° grounding the motor. The values are indicative and exact values are
arrangement at all the cable entries as described in the available on request.
instructions for the glands. Twist the cable shields into
bundles and connect to the nearest ground terminal/bus
NOTE!
bar inside the terminal box, converter cabinet, etc.
The maximum speed of the motor and application
may not be exceeded!
NOTE!
Proper cable glands providing 360° bonding must 6.7.3 Motor loadability with AC_5_ _ – series
be used at all termination points such as motor,
of converter
converter, possible safety switch, etc.
The loadability curves presented in Figures 6a - 6d are
valid for AC_5_ _ -series converters. The figures show
For motors of frame size IEC 280 and above, additional the approximate maximum continuous output torque of
potential equalization between the motor frame and the the motors as a function of supply frequency. The output
driven equipment is needed, unless both are mounted on torque is given as a percentage of the nominal torque of
a common steel base. In this case, the high frequency the motor. The values are indicative and exact values are
conductivity of the connection provided by the steel available on request.
base should be checked by, for example, measuring the
potential difference between the components.
NOTE!
More information about grounding and cabling of variable The maximum speed of the motor and application
speed drives can be found in the manual “Grounding and may not be exceeded!
cabling of the drive system” (Code: 3AFY 61201998).
6.7.4 Motor loadability with other voltage
source PWM-type converters
6.6 Operating speed For other converters, with uncontrolled DC voltage and
For speeds higher than the nominal speed stated on the minimum switching frequency of 3 kHz (200…500 V), the
motor’s rating plate or in the respective product catalog, dimensioning instructions as mentioned in chapter 6.7.3
ensure that either the highest permissible rotational speed can be used as guidelines. However, it shall be noted that
of the motor or the critical speed of the whole application is the actual thermal loadability can also be lower. Please
not exceeded. contact the manufacturer of the converter or the system
supplier.
12 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
NOTE!
6.9 Commissioning the variable
The actual thermal loadability of a motor may be speed application
lower than shown by guideline curves.
The commissioning of the variable speed application must
6.7.5 Short time overloads be done according to the instructions of the frequency
converter and local laws and regulations. The requirements
ABB motors can usually be temporarily overloaded as well and limitations set by the application must also be taken
as used in intermittent duties. The most convenient method into account.
to dimension such applications is to use the DriveSize tool.
All parameters needed for setting the converter must be
6.8 Rating plates taken from the motor rating plates. The most often needed
parameters are:
The usage of ABB’s motors in variable speed applications
do not usually require additional rating plates. The - nominal voltage
parameters required for commissioning the converter - nominal current
can be found from the main rating plate. In some special - nominal frequency
applications, however, the motors can be equipped with - nominal speed
additional rating plates for variable speed applications. - nominal power
Those include the following information:
- minimum speed
- maximum speed
- acceleration and deceleration times
- maximum current
- maximum torque
- stall protection
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 13
7. Maintenance 2. The bearing must be greased while rotating the shaft
every year (to be reported). If the motor has been
provided with roller bearing at the driven end, the
WARNING! transport lock must be removed before rotating the
Voltage may be connected at standstill inside the shaft. The transport locking must be remounted in case
terminal box for heating elements or direct winding of transportation.
heating. 3. All vibrations must be avoided to prevent a bearing from
failing. All instructions in the motor instruction manual for
commissioning and maintenance have to be followed.
The warranty will not cover the winding and bearing
7.1 General inspection damages if these instructions have not been followed.
1. Inspect the motor at regular intervals, at least once a
year. The frequency of checks depends on, for example,
the humidity level of the ambient air and on the local 7.2 Lubrication
weather conditions. This can initially be determined
experimentally and must then be strictly adhered to.
2. Keep the motor clean and ensure free ventilation WARNING!
airflow. If the motor is used in a dusty environment, Beware of all rotating parts!
the ventilation system must be regularly checked and
cleaned.
3. Check the condition of shaft seals (e.g. V-ring or radial WARNING!
seal) and replace if necessary. Grease can cause skin irritation and eye
inflammation. Follow all safety precautions specified
4. Check the condition of connections and mounting and
by the manufacturer of the grease.
assembly bolts.
5. Check the bearing condition by listening for any unusual
noise, vibration measurement, bearing temperature, Bearing types are specified in the respective product
inspection of spent grease or SPM bearing monitoring. catalogs and on the rating plate of all motors, except
Pay special attention to bearings when their calculated smaller frame sizes.
rated life time is coming to an end.
Reliability is a vital issue for bearing lubrication intervals.
When signs of wear are noticed, dismantle the motor, ABB uses mainly the L1 -principle (i.e. that 99 % of the
check the parts and replace if necessary. When bearings motors are certain to make the life time) for lubrication.
are changed, replacement bearings must be of the same
type as those originally fitted. The shaft seals have to be
replaced with seals of the same quality and characteristics 7.2.1 Motors with permanently greased
as the originals when changing bearings. bearings
Bearings are usually permanently greased bearings of 1Z,
In the case of the IP 55 motor and when the motor
2Z, 2RS or equivalent.
has been delivered with a plug closed, it is advisable to
periodically open the drain plugs in order to ensure that As a guide, adequate lubrication for sizes up to 250 can
the way out for condensation is not blocked and allows be achieved for the following duration, according to L1. For
condensation to escape from the motor. This operation duties with higher ambient temperatures, please contact
must be done when the motor is at a standstill and has ABB. The informative formula to change the L1 values
been made safe to work on. roughly to L10 values: L10 = 2.0 x L1.
14 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Duty hours for permanently greased bearings at ambient Regreasing while the motor is at a standstill
temperatures of 25 °C and 40 °C are: If it is not possible to re-grease the bearings while the
motors are running, lubrication can be carried out while the
Duty hours Duty hours motor is at a standstill.
Frame size Poles at 25° C at 40° C – In this case, use only half the amount of grease and then
56 2 52 000 33 000 run the motor for a few minutes at full speed.
56 4-8 65 000 41 000 – When the motor has stopped, apply the rest of the
63 2 49 000 31 000 specified amount of grease to the bearing.
63 4-8 63 000 40 000 – After 1-2 running hours, close the grease outlet plug or
71 2 67 000 42 000 closing valve, if fitted.
71 4-8 100 000 56 000 B. Automatic lubrication
80-90 2 100 000 65 000
80-90 4-8 100 000 96 000 The grease outlet plug must be removed permanently with
100-112 2 89 000 56 000 automatic lubrication or open closing valve, if fitted.
100-112 4-8 100 000 89 000
ABB recommends only the use of electromechanical
132 2 67 000 42 000
systems.
132 4-8 100 000 77 000
160 2 60 000 38 000 The amount of grease per lubrication interval stated in the
160 4-8 100 000 74 000 table should be multiplied by three if a central lubrication
180 2 55 000 34 000 system is used. When using a smaller automatic re-grease
180 4-8 100 000 70 000 unit (one or two cartridges per motor) the normal amount of
200 2 41 000 25 000 grease can be used.
200 4-8 95 000 60 000 When 2-pole motors are automatically re-greased, the note
225 2 36 000 23 000 concerning lubricant recommendations for 2-pole motors in
225 4-8 88 000 56 000 the Lubricants chapter should be followed.
250 2 31 000 20 000
250 4-8 80 000 50 000 The used grease should be suitable for automatic
lubrication. The automatic lubrication system deliverer and
Data is valid up to 60 Hz. the grease manufacturer’s recommendations should check.
7.2.2 Motors with regreasable bearings Calculation example of amount of grease for
automatic lubrication system
Lubrication information plate and general lubrication Central lubrication system: Motor IEC M3_P 315_ 4-pole in
advice 50 Hz network, re-lubrication interval according to Table is
If the motor is equipped with a lubrication information plate, 7600 h/55 g (DE) and 7600 h/40g (NDE):
follow the given values.
(DE) RLI = 55 g/7600h*3*24 = 0,52 g/day
Greasing intervals regarding mounting, ambient
temperature and rotational speed are defined on the (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7600*3*24 = 038 g/day
lubrication information plate.
Calculation example of amount of grease for single
During the first start or after a bearing lubrication a automation lubrication unit (cartridge)
temporary temperature rise may appear, approximately 10 (DE) RLI = 55 g/7600h*24 = 0,17 g/day
to 20 hours.
(NDE) RLI = 40 g/7600*24 = 0,13 g/day
Some motors may be equipped with a collector for old
grease. Follow the special instructions given for the RLI = Re-lubricaion interval, DE = Drive end, NDE = Non drive end
equipment.
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 15
Higher speed operation, e.g. in frequency converter
NOTE!
applications, or lower speed with heavy load will require
An increase in the ambient temperature raises the
shorter lubrication intervals.
temperature of the bearings correspondingly. The
interval values should be halved for a 15 °C increase
in bearing temperature and may be doubled for a WARNING!
15 °C decrease in bearing temperature. The maximum operating temperature of the grease
and bearings, +110 °C, must not be exceeded.
The designed maximum speed of the motor must
not be exceeded.
Amount
Frame 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
of grease kW kW kW kW
size r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/bearing
Ball bearings, lubrication intervals in duty hours
112 10 all 10 000 13 000 all 18 000 21 000 all 2 5 000 all 28 000
132 15 all 9 000 11 000 all 17 000 19 000 all 23 000 all 26 500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9 000 12000 ≤ 15 18 000 21 500 ≤ 11 24 000 all 24 000
160 25 > 18,5 7 500 1 0000 > 15 15 000 18 000 > 11 22 500 all 24 000
180 30 ≤ 22 7 000 9 000 ≤ 22 15 500 18 500 ≤ 15 24 000 all 24 000
180 30 > 22 6 000 8 500 > 22 14 000 17 000 > 15 21 000 all 24 000
200 40 ≤ 37 5 500 8 000 ≤ 30 14 500 17 500 ≤ 22 23 000 all 24 000
200 40 > 37 3 000 5 500 > 30 10 000 12 000 > 22 16 000 all 20 000
225 50 ≤ 45 4 000 6 500 ≤ 45 13 000 16 500 ≤ 30 22 000 all 24 000
225 50 > 45 1 500 2 500 > 45 5 000 6 000 > 30 8 000 all 10 000
250 60 ≤ 55 2 500 4 000 ≤ 55 9 000 11 500 ≤ 37 15 000 all 18 000
250 60 > 55 1 000 1 500 > 55 3 500 4 500 > 37 6 000 all 7 000
2801) 60 all 2 000 3 500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - all 8 000 10 500 all 14 000 all 17 000
280 35 all 1 900 3 200 - - - -
280 40 - - all 7 800 9 600 all 13 900 all 15 000
315 35 all 1 900 3 200 - - - -
315 55 - - all 5 900 7 600 all 11 800 all 12 900
355 35 all 1 900 3 200 - - - -
355 70 - - all 4 000 5 600 all 9 600 all 10 700
400 40 all 1 500 2 700 - - - -
400 85 - - all 3 200 4 700 all 8 600 all 9 700
450 40 all 1 500 2 700 - - - -
450 95 - - all 2 500 3 900 all 7 700 all 8 700
16 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7.2.4 Lubricants The following greases can be used for high speed cast iron
motors but not mixed with lithium complex greases:
WARNING!
Lubricants containing EP admixtures are not
recommended in high bearing temperatures in frame
sizes 280 to 450.
NOTE!
Always use high speed grease for high speed 2-pole
motors where the speed factor is higher than
480,000 (calculated as Dm x n where Dm = average
bearing diameter, mm; n = rotational speed, r/min).
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 17
8. After Sales Support 9. Environmental
requirements
8.1 Spare parts
Most of ABB’s motors have a sound pressure level not
Unless otherwise stated, spare parts must be original parts
exceeding 82 dB (A) (± 3 dB) at 50 Hz.
or approved by ABB.
Values for specific motors can be found in the relevant
When ordering spare parts, the motor serial number, full
product catalogs. At 60 Hz sinusoidal supply, the values are
type designation and product code, as stated on the rating
approximately 4 dB(A) higher compared to 50 Hz values
plate, must be specified.
stated in the product catalogs.
8.2 Dismantling, re-assembly For sound pressure levels at frequency converter supplies,
please contact ABB.
and rewinding When motor(s) need to be scrapped or recycled,
Rewinding should always be carried out by qualified repair appropriate means, local regulations and laws must be
shops. followed.
8.3 Bearings
Special care should be taken with the bearings.
NOTE!
Any repair by the end user, unless expressly
approved by the manufacturer, releases the
manufacturer from responsibility to conformity.
18 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
10. Troubleshooting
These instructions do not cover all details or variations
in equipment nor provide information for every possible
condition to be met in connection with installation,
operation or maintenance. Should additional information be
required, please contact the nearest ABB Sales Office.
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 19
TROUBLE CAUSE WHAT TO DO
Motor takes too Excessive load Reduce load.
long to accelerate Low voltage during start Check for high resistance. Make sure that an adequate cable size
and/or draws high is used.
current
Defective squirrel cage rotor Replace with new rotor.
Applied voltage too low Correct power supply.
Wrong rotation Wrong sequence of phases Reverse connections at motor or at switchboard.
direction
Motor overheats Overload Reduce load.
while running Frame or ventilation openings may be Open vent holes and check for a continuous stream of air
full of dirt and prevent proper ventilation from the motor.
of motor
Motor may have one phase open Check to make sure that all leads and cables are well connected.
Grounded coil Motor must be rewound.
Unbalanced terminal voltage Check for faulty leads, connections and transformers.
Motor vibrates Motor misaligned Realign.
Weak support Strengthen base.
Coupling out of balance Balance coupling.
Driven equipment unbalanced Rebalance driven equipment.
Defective bearings Replace bearings.
Bearings not in line Repair motor
Balancing weights shifted Rebalance rotor.
Contradiction between balancing of Rebalance coupling or rotor.
rotor and coupling (half key - full key)
Poly phase motor running single phase Check for open circuit.
Excessive end play Adjust bearing or add shim.
Scraping noise Fan rubbing end shield or fan cover Correct fan mounting.
Loose on bedplate Tighten holding bolts.
Noisy operation Air gap not uniform Check and correct end shield fits or bearing fits.
Rotor unbalance Rebalance rotor.
Hot bearings Bent or sprung shaft Straighten or replace shaft.
Excessive belt pull Decrease belt tension.
Pulleys too far away from shaft Move pulley closer to motor bearing.
shoulder
Pulley diameter too small Use larger pulleys.
Misalignment Correct by realignment of the drive.
Insufficient grease Maintain proper quality and amount of grease in bearing.
Deterioration of grease or lubricant Remove old grease, wash bearings thoroughly in kerosene and
contaminated replace with new grease.
Excess lubricant Reduce quantity of grease, bearing should not be more than half full.
Overloaded bearing Check alignment, side and end thrust.
Broken ball or rough races Replace bearing, clean housing thoroughly first.
20 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Niederspannungsmotoren
Montage-, Betriebs-, Wartungs- und Sicherheitsanleitung
Inhalt
1. Einführung .................................................................................................................................23
1.1 Konformitätserklärung........................................................................................................23
1.2 Gültigkeit ...........................................................................................................................23
2. Sicherheitshinweise ..................................................................................................................23
3. Handhabung ..............................................................................................................................24
3.1 Eingangsprüfung ...............................................................................................................24
3.2 Transport und Lagerung ....................................................................................................24
3.3 Heben ...............................................................................................................................24
3.4 Motorgewicht ....................................................................................................................24
4. Installation und Inbetriebnahme der Maschine .....................................................................25
4.1 Allgemeines .......................................................................................................................25
4.2 Motoren mit anderen als Kugellagern .................................................................................25
4.3 Prüfung des Isolationswiderstandes ...................................................................................25
4.4 Fundament ........................................................................................................................25
4.5 Auswuchten und Anbau von Kupplungshälften und Riemenscheiben ................................26
4.6 Einbau und Ausrichtung des Motors ..................................................................................26
4.7 Radialkräfte und Riemenantriebe .......................................................................................26
4.8 Motoren mit Kondenswasser-Ablaufstopfen .......................................................................26
4.9 Kabel und elektrische Anschlüsse ......................................................................................27
4.9.1 Anschlüsse für unterschiedliche Startmethoden ...................................................28
4.9.2 Anschlüsse von Zubehör ......................................................................................28
4.10 Anschlussklemmen und Drehrichtung ................................................................................28
5. Betriebsbedingungen ..............................................................................................................29
5.1 Allgemeines .......................................................................................................................29
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 21
6. Drehzahlgeregelte Niederspannungsmotoren ......................................................................30
6.1 Einführung .........................................................................................................................30
6.2 Wicklungsisolierung ...........................................................................................................30
6.2.1 Auswahl der Wicklungsisolierung für ABB-Frequenzumrichter ...............................30
6.2.2 Auswahl der Wicklungsisolierung aller übrigen Frequenzumrichter .......................30
6.3 Thermoisolierung der Wicklung .........................................................................................30
6.4 Lagerströme ......................................................................................................................31
6.4.1 Verhindern von Lagerströmen bei ABB-Frequenzumrichtern .................................31
6.4.2 Verhindern von Lagerströmen bei allen anderen Umrichtern ..................................31
6.5 Verkabelung, Erdung und EMV ..........................................................................................31
6.6 Betriebsdrehzahl ................................................................................................................31
6.7 Motoren mit drehzahlgeregelten Anwendungen .................................................................31
6.7.1 Allgemeines ..........................................................................................................31
6.7.2 Motorbelastbarkeit mit Frequenzumrichterantrieben
der Baureihe AC_8_ _ mit DTC-Regelung .............................................................31
6.7.3 Motorbelastbarkeit mit Frequenzumrichterantrieben der Baureihe AC_5_ _ ...........32
6.7.4 Motorbelastbarkeit mit PWM-Frequenzumrichtern
mit anderen Spannungsquellen .............................................................................32
6.7.5 Kurzzeitige Überlasten ..........................................................................................32
6.8 Leistungsschilder ...............................................................................................................32
6.9 Inbetriebnahme des drehzahlgeregelten Antriebs ...............................................................32
7. Wartung......................................................................................................................................33
7.1 Allgemeine Kontrolle ..........................................................................................................33
7.1.1 Standbymotoren ..................................................................................................33
7.2 Schmierung .......................................................................................................................33
7.2.1 Motoren mit dauergeschmierten Lagern ...............................................................33
7.2.2 Motoren mit nachschmierbarem Lager..................................................................34
7.2.3 Schmierintervalle und -mengen .............................................................................35
7.2.4 Schmiermittel........................................................................................................37
8. Kundendienst ............................................................................................................................38
8.1 Ersatzteile ..........................................................................................................................38
8.2 Demontage und Neueinbau sowie Neuwicklung ................................................................38
8.3 Lager .................................................................................................................................38
9. Umweltanforderungen ..............................................................................................................38
10. Motor-Störungssuchtabelle .....................................................................................................39
22 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
1. Einführung 2. Sicherheitshinweise
Die Montage und der Betrieb des Motors darf nur durch
HINWEIS!
hierfür qualifiziertes Fachpersonal erfolgen, das mit den
Die nachstehenden Anweisungen sind genau zu
Arbeitsschutz- und Sicherheitsvorschriften und den
befolgen, um die Sicherheit bei der Installation,
gesetzlichen Bestimmungen des jeweiligen Landes vertraut
beim Betrieb und bei der Wartung des Motors zu
ist.
gewährleisten. Jede/r Mitarbeiter/in, der/die an der
Montage, am Betrieb oder an der Wartung des Zur Unfallverhütung sind entsprechend den im betreffenden
Motors oder dessen Zubehör beteiligt ist, sollte von Land geltenden Gesetzen und Bestimmungen bei
diesen Anweisungen in Kenntnis gesetzt werden. Die der Montage und beim Betrieb des Motors geeignete
Montage und der Betrieb des Motors darf nur durch Sicherheitseinrichtungen zu verwenden.
hierfür qualifiziertes Fachpersonal erfolgen, das mit
den Arbeitsschutz- und Sicherheitsvorschriften und
den gesetzlichen Bestimmungen des jeweiligen WARNUNG!
Landes vertraut ist. Nichtbefolgung der Anweisungen Notstopp-Bedienelemente müssen mit
kann zum Verlust aller geltenden Gewährleistungen Wiedereinschaltsperren versehen sein. Nach
führen. einem Notstopp kann ein Wiedereinschaltbefehl
nur ausgeführt werden, nachdem die
Wiedereinschaltsperre vorsätzlich zurückgesetzt
1.1 Konformitätserklärung wurde.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 23
3. Handhabung Ösenschrauben vor dem Anheben festziehen. Die Position
der Ösenschraube kann bei Bedarf mit Hilfe geeigneter
Distanzstücke wie Unterlegscheiben justiert werden.
3.1 Eingangsprüfung
Es dürfen nur geeignete Hebeeinrichtungen und Haken in
Der Motor ist bei Empfang unverzüglich auf äußere für die jeweiligen Hebeösen geeigneter Größe verwendet
Beschädigungen (z.B. Wellenenden, Flansche und werden.
Lackierung) zu untersuchen und der Spediteur ggf. sofort
zu verständigen. Es ist darauf zu achten, dass Zusatzgeräte und am Motor
angeschlossene Kabel nicht beschädigt werden.
Alle Leistungsschilddaten überprüfen, insbesondere
Spannung und Wicklungsanschlüsse (Stern oder Dreieck). Eventuelle Transportvorrichtungen, die den Motor an der
Der Lagertyp ist auf dem Leistungsschild aller Motoren mit Palette befestigen, sind zu entfernen.
Ausnahme der kleinsten Baugrößen angegeben.
Spezifische Hebeanleitungen sind über ABB verfügbar.
Bei Drehzahlregelung maximal zulässige Belastbarkeit
entsprechend der auf dem zweiten Leistungsschild des
Motors angegebenen Frequenz überprüfen. WARNUNG!
Bei Hebe-, Montage- oder Wartungsarbeiten
müssen alle erforderlichen Sicherheitsvorrichtungen
3.2 Transport und Lagerung an Ort und Stelle sein, und es ist besonders
Der Motor muss in einem Gebäude (über –20°C) trocken darauf zu achten, dass sich niemand unter der
sowie schwingungs- und staubfrei gelagert werden. Beim angehobenen Last aufhält.
Transport sind Erschütterungen, Stürze und Feuchtigkeit zu
vermeiden. Wenn andere Bedingungen vorliegen, wenden
Sie sich bitte an ABB. 3.4 Motorgewicht
Ungeschützte bearbeitete Oberflächen (Wellenenden Das Gesamtgewicht des Motors kann innerhalb der
und Flansche) sollten mit einem Korrosionsschutzmittel gleichen Baugröße (mittige Höhe) je nach den Ausgängen,
behandelt werden. Einbauarrangements und Zusatzeinrichtungen schwanken.
Für eine gleichmäßige Schmierung wird empfohlen, Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die anhand des Rahmenmaterials
die Welle regelmäßig von Hand zu drehen. vorauss. Höchstgewichte für Motoren in der Grundaus-
stattung.
Falls vorhanden, sollten Standheizungen verwendet
werden, um Kondensation im Motor zu verhindern. Das tatsächliche Gewicht aller ABB Motoren ist mit
Ausnahme der kleinsten Baugrößen (56 und 63) auf dem
Zur Vermeidung von Lagerschäden darf der Motor im Leistungsschild angegeben.
Stillstand keinen äußeren Erschütterungen ausgesetzt
werden. Baugröße Aluminium Grauguss Zusätzl.
für Bremse
Motoren mit Zylinderrollen- oder Schrägkugellagern Gewicht kg Gewicht kg
müssen beim Transport mit Sperrvorrichtungen gesichert 56 4,5 - -
werden. 63 6 - -
71 8 13 5
3.3 Heben 80 14 20 8
90 20 30 10
Alle ABB-Motoren über 25 kg haben Hebeösen oder 100 32 40 16
Ösenschrauben. 112 36 50 20
132 93 90 30
Zum Anheben des Motors nur die Hebeösen oder
160 149 130 30
Ösenschrauben des Motors verwenden. Es ist nicht
180 162 190 45
zulässig, den Motor anzuheben, während er an andere
200 245 275 55
Komponenten gekoppelt ist.
225 300 360 75
Hebeösen für Zubehör (z. B. Bremsen, separate 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 -
Kühlgebläse) oder Verteilerkästen dürfen nicht zum
315 - 1.700 -
Heben des Motors verwendet werden. Motoren mit
355 - 2.700 -
gleichem Gehäuse können durch unterschiedliche
400 - 3.500 -
Leistungen, Bauanordnung und Zusatzgeräte verschiedene
450 - 4.500 -
Schwerpunkte haben.
24 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
4. Installation und Inbetriebnahme der Maschine
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 25
Sie müssen so ausgelegt und bemessen sein, dass Den Motor mit geeigneten Methoden ausrichten.
Resonanzschwingungen vermieden werden. Siehe dazu
Abbildung unten. Gegebenenfalls die Positionsbohrungen durchführen und
die Positionsbolzen an ihren Positionen befestigen.
4.5 Auswuchten und Anbau Bei Motoren mit Flanschanbau (z. B. B5, B35, V1)
sicherstellen, dass die Konstruktion eine ausreichende
von Kupplungshälften Luftströmung an der Außenfläche des Flansches zulässt.
und Riemenscheiben
Das Auswuchten des Motors erfolgte standardgemäß mit 4.7 Radialkräfte
halber Passfeder.
und Riemenantriebe
Kupplungshälften oder Riemenscheiben müssen nach
dem Einfräsen der Passfedernut ausgewuchtet werden. Riemen müssen gemäß der Anleitung des Lieferanten
Das Auswuchten muss entsprechend der für den Motor der angetriebenen Komponente gespannt werden.
angegebenen Auswuchtmethode erfolgen. Beachten Sie jedoch die maximal zulässigen Riemenkräfte
(bzw. Radialkraftbelastungen der Lager), die Sie den
Kupplungshälften und Riemenscheiben dürfen nur mit entsprechenden Produktkatalogen entnehmen können.
geeigneter Ausrüstung und Werkzeug auf der Welle
montiert werden, damit die Lager und Dichtungen nicht
beschädigt werden. WARNUNG!
Übermäßige Riemenspannung führt zur
Montieren Sie niemals eine Kupplungshälfte oder Beschädigung der Lager und kann den Bruch der
Riemenscheibe durch Schläge mit dem Hammer. Bei der Welle zur Folge haben!
Demontage darf nie ein Hebel gegen das Motorgehäuse
angesetzt werden.
26 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
4.9 Kabel und elektrische Mindestquerschnitt von Schutzleitern
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 27
4.9.1 Anschlüsse für unterschiedliche 4.10 Anschlussklemmen
Startmethoden
und Drehrichtung
Der Verteilerkasten von eintourigen Standardmotoren
enthält in der Regel sechs Anschlussklemmen und Von der Wellenstirnfläche auf das Antriebsende des
zumindest eine Erdungsklemme. Dies ermöglicht Starts mit Motors gesehen dreht die Welle im Uhrzeigersinn, und die
Netzbetrieb oder Stern-/Dreieckanlauf. Schaltphasensequenz - L1, L2, L3 - wird an die Klemmen
angeschlossen wie in Abb. 3 gezeigt.
Bei polumschaltbaren und Spezialmotoren sind die
entsprechenden Angaben im Klemmenkasten oder im Durch Umpolen der Zuleitungskabel kann die Drehrichtung
Motorhandbuch zu beachten. geändert werden.
Spannung und Anschlussart sind auf dem Typenschild Falls der Motor einen Ein-Weg-Lüfter hat, sicherstellen,
angegeben. dass er in Pfeilrichtung dreht (Pfeil am Motor angebracht).
Direktanlauf (DOL):
Y- oder D-Wicklungsanschlüsse können benutzt werden.
28 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
5. Betriebsbedingungen
5.1 Allgemeines
Sofern auf dem Leistungsschild nicht anders angegeben,
sind die Motoren für folgende Bedingungen ausgelegt:
WARNUNG!
Die Nichteinhaltung von Anweisungen oder der
Wartung des Geräts kann die Sicherheit und damit
den Einsatz des Motors gefährden.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 29
6. Drehzahlgeregelte Niederspannungsmotoren
Für weitere Informationen zu Frequenzumrichtern mit gesteuerten Einspeiseeinheiten oder Widerstandsbremsung wenden
Sie sich bitte an ABB.
30 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
6.4 Lagerströme Bei Motoren ab Baugröße 280 ist ein zusätzlicher Potenzial-
ausgleich zwischen Motorgehäuse und angetriebenen
Es sind isolierte Lager oder Lagerkonstruktionen, Komponenten erforderlich, sofern nicht beide auf einem
Gleichtaktfilter und geeignete Verkabelungs- und gemeinsamen Stahlfundament montiert sind. In diesem
Erdungsverfahren gemäß der folgenden Anweisungen und Fall muss die Leitfähigkeit bei hoher Frequenz der über
Tabelle 6.1 zu verwenden. das Stahlfundament vorhandenen Verbindung überprüft
werden, indem z. B. die Potentialdifferenz zwischen den
Komponenten gemessen werden.
6.4.1 Verhindern von Lagerströmen bei
ABB-Frequenzumrichtern Weitere Informationen über die Erdung und Verkabelung
Bei ABB-Frequenzumrichtern z.B. der Baureihe AC_8_ _ bei drehzahlgeregelten Antrieben finden Sie im Handbuch
und AC_5_ _ mit Dioden-Einspeisungseinheit, sind „Erdung und Verkabelung des Antriebssystems“ (Code:
Verfahren gemäß Tabelle 6.1 zu verwenden, um schädliche 3AFY 61201998).
Lagerströme in den Motoren zu verhindern.
6.6 Betriebsdrehzahl
HINWEIS!
Es werden isolierte Lager mit aluminiumoxid- Für Drehzahlen über der auf dem Leistungsschild des
beschichteten Innen- und/oder Außenringen Motors angegebenen Nenndrehzahl sicherstellen, dass die
oder Keramikwälzkörpern empfohlen. Aluminium- höchste zulässige Drehzahl des Motors oder die kritische
oxidbeschichtungen werden außerdem mit einem Drehzahl der gesamten Anwendung nicht überschritten
Dichtungsmittel behandelt, um das Eindringen wird.
von Schmutz und Feuchtigkeit in die poröse
Beschichtung zu verhindern. Genaue Angaben
zum Typ der Lagerisolierung finden Sie auf dem 6.7 Motoren mit drehzahl-
Leistungsschild des Motors. Das Ändern des
Lagertyps oder der Isolierungsmethode ohne die geregelten Anwendungen
Genehmigung von ABB ist untersagt.
6.7.1 Allgemeines
6.4.2 Verhindern von Lagerströmen Bei Frequenzumrichtern von ABB kann das Dimensionieren
bei allen anderen Umrichtern mithilfe des Dimensionierungsprogramms DriveSize von
ABB erfolgen. Das Tool kann von der ABB Website (www.
Der Betreiber ist für den Schutz des Motors und
abb.com/motors&generators) heruntergeladen werden.
der angetriebenen Komponenten vor schädlichen
Lagerströmen verantwortlich. Die Anweisungen in Kapitel Für Anwendungen, die durch andere Frequenzumrichter
6.4.1 können als Richtlinie verwendet werden, doch kann gestützt werden, muss die Dimensionierung manuell
ihre Wirksamkeit nicht in allen Fällen gewährleistet werden. erfolgen. Für weitere Informationen wenden Sie sich bitte
an ABB.
6.5 Verkabelung, Erdung Die Belastbarkeitskurven basieren auf der Nennver-
und EMV sorgungsspannung. Der Betrieb bei Unter- oder Über-
spannung kann die Leistung der Anwendung beeinflussen.
Um eine korrekte Erdung und Übereinstimmung mit allen
EMV-Richtlinien zu gewährleisten, müssen an 6.7.2 Motorbelastbarkeit mit Frequenz-
Motoren über 30 kW abgeschirmte symmetrische Kabel umrichterantrieben der Baureihe
angeschlossen und EMV-Kabelverschraubungen, d.
h. Verschraubungen mit 360°-Schirmkontaktierung, AC_8_ _ mit DTC-Regelung
verwendet werden. Die Belastbarkeitskurven in Abb. 5a - 5d gelten für
ABB-Frequenzumrichter der Baureihe AC_8_ _ mit
Für kleinere Motoren werden symmetrische abgeschirmte ungesteuerter DC-Spannung und DTC-Steuerung. Die
Kabel dringend empfohlen. Die 360°-Erdung an allen Abbildungen stellen das ungefähre maximal zulässige
Kabeleinführungen wie in den Anweisungen für die dauerhafte Ausgangsdrehmoment der Motoren als
Kabelverschraubungen vornehmen. Kabelabschirmungen Funktion der Versorgungsspannungsfrequenz dar.
zu Bündeln verdrillen und an die nächste Das Ausgangsdrehmoment wird als Prozentsatz des
Erdungsklemme/Sammelschiene im Klemmenkasten, Nenndrehmoments des Motors angegeben. Die Werte sind
Frequenzumwandlerschrank usw. anschließen. nur indikativ, genaue Werte sind auf Anfrage erhältlich.
HINWEIS! HINWEIS!
An allen Endpunkten, z. B. Motor, Frequenz- Die Höchstdrehzahl des Motors und der Anwendung
umrichter, ggf. Sicherheitsschalter usw., müssen darf nicht überschritten werden!
ordnungsgemäße Kabelverschraubungen mit
360°-Masseverbindung verwendet werden.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 31
6.7.3 Motorbelastbarkeit mit Frequenz- 6.9 Inbetriebnahme des
umrichterantrieben der Baureihe
AC_5_ _
drehzahlgeregelten Antriebs
Die Belastbarkeitskurven in Abb. 6a - 6d gelten für Die Inbetriebnahme des drehzahlgeregelten Motors muss
ABB-Frequenzumrichter der Baureihe AC_5_ _. Die gemäß den Anweisungen für den Frequenzumrichter und
Abbildungen stellen das ungefähre maximal zulässige den lokalen Gesetzen und Vorschriften erfolgen. Die durch
dauerhafte Ausgangsdrehmoment der Motoren als die Anwendung gesetzten Anforderungen und Grenzen
Funktion der Versorgungsspannungsfrequenz dar. sind ebenfalls zu berücksichtigen.
Das Ausgangsdrehmoment wird als Prozentsatz des
Nenndrehmoments des Motors angegeben. Die Werte sind Alle zum Einrichten des Frequenzumrichters erforderlichen
nur indikativ, genaue Werte sind auf Anfrage erhältlich. Parameter müssen den Motorleistungsschildern
entnommen werden. Die am häufigsten benötigten
Parameter lauten:
HINWEIS!
Die Höchstdrehzahl des Motors und der Anwendung
- Nennspannung
darf nicht überschritten werden!
- Nennstrom
- Nennfrequenz
6.7.4 Motorbelastbarkeit mit PWM- - Nenndrehzahl
Frequenzumrichtern mit anderen - Nennleistung
Spannungsquellen
Für andere Frequenzumrichter mit ungesteuerter Gleich-
HINWEIS!
spannung und einer Mindestschaltfrequenz von 3 kHz
Bei fehlenden oder ungenauen Daten den Motor
(200…500 V) kann die Dimensionierungsanleitung gemäß
nicht in Betrieb nehmen, bevor die korrekten
Kapitel 6.7.3 als Richtlinie verwendet werden. Es sollte aber
Einstellungen gewährleistet sind.
beachtet werden, dass die tatsächliche Wärmebelastbarkeit
auch niedriger sein kann. Wenden Sie sich an den
Hersteller des Frequenzumrichters oder den Lieferanten
ABB empfiehlt die Verwendung aller geeigneten
des Systems.
Schutzfunktionen des Frequenzumrichters, um die
Sicherheit der Anwendung zu erhöhen. Frequenzumrichter
HINWEIS! bieten in der Regel z. B. folgende Funktionen (Namen und
Die tatsächliche Wärmebelastbarkeit eines Motors Verfügbarkeit der Funktionen hängen von Hersteller und
kann geringer als durch die Richtlinienkurven Modell des Frequenzumrichters ab):
angegeben sein.
- Mindestdrehzahl
- Höchstdrehzahl
6.7.5 Kurzzeitige Überlasten - Zeit für Beschleunigung und Abbremsung
ABB-Motoren können normalerweise kurzfristig überlastet - Maximaler Strom
und im Aussetzbetrieb verwendet werden. Die bequemste - Maximales Drehmoment
Art der Dimensionierung solcher Anwendungen ist die - Blockierschutz
Verwendung des Tools DriveSize.
6.8 Leistungsschilder
Die Verwendung von ABB-Motoren mit drehzahlgeregelten
Anwendungen erfordert gewöhnlich keine zusätzlichen
Leistungsschilder. Die Parameter zur Inbetriebnahme des
Frequenzumrichters sind auf dem Hauptleistungsschild
enthalten. Für einige Spezialanwendungen können
Motoren jedoch mit zusätzlichen Leistungsschildern für
drehzahlgeregelte Anwendungen ausgestattet sein. Diese
enthalten folgende Informationen:
- Drehzahlbereich
- Leistungsbereich
- Spannungs- und Strombereich
- Drehmomenttyp (konstant oder quadratisch)
- Frequenzumrichtertyp und erforderliche Mindest-
schaltfrequenz
32 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
7. Wartung 1. Die Welle muss regelmäßig alle 2 Wochen durch
Starten des Systems (berichtspflichtig) gedreht werden.
Ist ein Start aus irgendeinem Grund nicht möglich,
WARNUNG! muss die Welle pro Woche mindestens einmal mit der
Auch bei Stillstand des Motors können gefährliche Hand gedreht werden, um so eine andere Position zu
Spannungen für die Versorgung von Heizelementen erreichen. Durch andere Behälterausrüstung verursachte
oder für eine direkte Wicklungsheizung anliegen. Vibrationen führen zu einer Korrosion des Lagers, was
durch regelmäßigen Betrieb oder durch Handbewegung
minimiert wird.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 33
Betriebsstunden für dauergeschmierte Lager bei einer Nachschmieren bei stillstehendem Motor
Umgebungstemperatur von 25 °C und 40 °C: Falls es nicht möglich ist, die Lager bei laufendem Motor
nachzuschmieren, kann auch bei stillstehendem Motor
Betriebs- Betriebs- geschmiert werden.
stunden stunden – In diesem Fall nur die Hälfte der Fettmenge benutzen,
Baugröße Pole bei 25° C bei 40° C anschließend den Motor für einige Minuten bei voller
56 2 52.000 33.000 Drehzahl laufen lassen.
56 4-8 65.000 41.000 – Nachdem der Motor abgestellt ist, den Rest der
63 2 49.000 31.000 vorgesehenen Fettmenge in das Lager drücken.
63 4-8 63.000 40.000 – Nach 1-2 Stunden Durchlauf die Fett-Auslassöffnung
71 2 67.000 42.000 verschließen oder das Sperrventil, falls vorhanden,
71 4-8 100.000 56.000 schließen.
80-90 2 100.000 65.000
B. Automatische Schmierung
80-90 4-8 100.000 96.000
100-112 2 89.000 56.000 Bei automatischer Schmierung muss die Fett-Auslass-
100-112 4-8 100.000 89.000 öffnung beständig offen sein, bzw. das Sperrventil, falls
132 2 67.000 42.000 vorhanden, geöffnet sein.
132 4-8 100.000 77.000
160 2 60.000 38.000
ABB empfiehlt dringend den Einsatz elektromechanischer
Anlagen.
160 4-8 100.000 74.000
180 2 55.000 34.000 Bei Benutzung eines zentralen Schmiersystems sind die
180 4-8 100.000 70.000 in der Tabelle angegebenen Werte für Schmierfett pro
200 2 41.000 25.000 Schmierintervall zu verdreifachen. Bei Verwendung eines
200 4-8 95.000 60.000 kleineren automatischen Nachschmiersystems (eine oder
225 2 36.000 23.000 zwei Patronen pro Motor), kann die normale Menge an Fett
225 4-8 88.000 56.000 verwendet werden.
250 2 31.000 20.000
Wenn 2-polige Motoren automatisch nachgeschmiert
250 4-8 80.000 50.000
werden, befolgen Sie bitte die entsprechenden
Daten gelten für Werte von bis zu 60 Hz. Schmierempfehlungen im Kapitel über Schmiermittel.
34 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
7.2.3 Schmierintervalle und -mengen
Für vertikal montierte Motoren sind die
Nachschmierintervalle in der folgenden Tabelle zu halbieren.
HINWEIS!
Ein Anstieg der Umgebungstemperatur lässt die
Temperatur der Lager entsprechend ansteigen.
Bei einem Anstieg der Lager-Temperatur von 15 °C
sollten die Werte halbiert, bei einem Absinken
um 15 °C können sie verdoppelt werden.
WARNUNG!
Die zulässigen Höchsttemperaturen für Lager und
Schmierfett, +110 °C,dürfen nicht überschritten
werden.
Die Höchstdrehzahl, für die der Motor ausgelegt ist,
darf nicht überschritten werden.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 35
Fett-
Bau- 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
menge kW kW kW kW
größe U/min U/min U/min U/min U/min U/min
g/Lager
Kugellager, Nachschmierintervalle in Betriebsstunden
112 10 alle 10.000 13.000 alle 18.000 21.000 alle 25.000 alle 28.000
132 15 alle 9.000 11.000 alle 17.000 19.000 alle 23.000 alle 26.500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9.000 12.000 ≤ 15 18.000 21.500 ≤ 11 24.000 alle 24.000
160 25 > 18,5 7.500 10.000 > 15 15.000 18.000 > 11 22.500 alle 24.000
180 30 ≤ 22 7.000 9.000 ≤ 22 15.500 18.500 ≤ 15 24.000 alle 24.000
180 30 > 22 6.000 8.500 > 22 14.000 17.000 > 15 21.000 alle 24.000
200 40 ≤ 37 5.500 8.000 ≤ 30 14.500 17.500 ≤ 22 23.000 alle 24.000
200 40 > 37 3.000 5.500 > 30 10.000 12.000 > 22 16.000 alle 20.000
225 50 ≤ 45 4.000 6.500 ≤ 45 13.000 16.500 ≤ 30 22.000 alle 24.000
225 50 > 45 1.500 2.500 > 45 5.000 6.000 > 30 8.000 alle 10.000
250 60 ≤ 55 2.500 4.000 ≤ 55 9.000 11.500 ≤ 37 15.000 alle 18.000
250 60 > 55 1.000 1.500 > 55 3.500 4.500 > 37 6.000 alle 7.000
2801) 60 alle 2.000 3.500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - alle 8.000 10.500 alle 14.000 alle 17.000
280 35 alle 1.900 3.200 - - - -
280 40 - - alle 7.800 9.600 alle 13.900 alle 15.000
315 35 alle 1.900 3.200 - - - -
315 55 - - alle 5.900 7.600 alle 11.800 alle 12.900
355 35 alle 1.900 3.200 - - - -
355 70 - - alle 4.000 5.600 alle 9.600 alle 10.700
400 40 alle 1.500 2.700 - - - -
400 85 - - alle 3.200 4.700 alle 8.600 alle 9.700
450 40 alle 1.500 2.700 - - - -
450 95 - - alle 2.500 3.900 alle 7.700 alle 8.700
36 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
7.2.4 Schmiermittel
HINWEIS!
Stets Hochgeschwindigkeitsfette verwenden für
WARNUNG! 2-polige Maschinen mit hoher Drehzahl, bei denen
Verschiedene Fetttypen nicht miteinander der Drehzahlfaktor höher als
vermischen. 480.000 ist (berechnet als Dm x n, wobei
Ungeeignete Schmiermittel können die Lager Dm = durchschnittlicher Lagerdurchmesser in mm;
beschädigen. n = Drehzahl U/min).
Für die Nachschmierung darf nur ein speziell auf die Folgende Schmierfette können mit Graugussmotoren mit
Schmierung von Kugellagern abgestimmtes Fett mit den hoher Drehzahl verwendet werden, dürfen jedoch nicht mit
folgenden Eigenschaften verwendet werden: Schmierfetten auf Lithiumkomplex-Basis gemischt werden:
– Hochwertiges Fett mit Lithiumkomplexseife und Mineral- - Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102 (Polyuretan-Basis)
oder PAO-Öl - Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (Polyuretan-Basis)
– Viskosität des Grundöls 100-160 cST bei 40 °C
– Konsistenz NLGI Bereich 1,5 - 3 *) Falls andere Schmiermittel verwendet werden, erkundigen
– Dauergebrauchstemperatur -30° C bis +120° C Sie sich bitte beim Hersteller, ob die Qualität derjenigen der
oben aufgeführten Fette entspricht. Die Schmierintervalle
*) Für vertikal montierte Motoren und unter heißen basieren auf den oben aufgeführten hochwertigen
Betriebsbedingungen ist ein steiferer NLGI-Grad zu Schmierfetten. Bei Verwendung anderer Schmierfette
empfehlen. können sich die Intervalle verringern.
Die oben angegebene Schmierfettspezifikation gilt für
Umgebungstemperaturen über -30 °C oder unter +55 °C
und Lagertemperaturen unter 110 °C. Wenden Sie sich
andernfalls an ABB für Informationen über geeignetes
Schmierfett.
WARNUNG!
Schmiermittel, denen EP-Zusätze beigemengt sind,
sind unter hohen Lager-Temperaturen bei Baugrößen
von 280 bis 450 nicht zu empfehlen.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 37
8. Kundendienst 9. Umweltanforderungen
Die meisten ABB Motoren haben einen Schalldruckpegel,
8.1 Ersatzteile der 82 dB(A) (± 3 dB) bei 50 Hz nicht überschreitet.
Sofern nicht anders angegeben, dürfen als Ersatzteile nur Konkrete Werte für die einzelnen Motoren sind dem
von ABB gelieferte und geprüfte Teile eingesetzt werden. jeweiligen Produktkatalog zu entnehmen. Bei 60 Hz
Bei der Bestellung von Ersatzteilen sollte die sinusförmige Versorgung sind die Werte ca. 4 dB(A) höher
Motorseriennummer, die vollständige Typenbezeichnung als die 50 Hz-Werte in den Produktkatalogen.
und der Produktkode (siehe Leistungsschild) angegeben Bzgl. des Schalldruckpegels bei Frequenzumrichter-
werden. speisung setzen Sie sich bitte mit ABB in Verbindung.
8.3 Lager
Die Lager sind mit besonderer Sorgfalt zu behandeln.
HINWEIS!
Jegliche vom Endanwender durchgeführte
Reparatur, sofern diese nicht ausdrücklich vom
Hersteller genehmigt worden ist, enthebt den
Hersteller seiner Haftung für Normenkonformität der
Ausrüstung.
38 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
10. Motor-Störungssuchtabelle
In den folgenden Anleitungen kann nicht auf sämtliche Motor-Fehlersuchtabelle
technische Einzelheiten oder Unterschiede zwischen den
verschiedenen Motoren oder alle bei der Installation, beim Wartungs- und etwaige Fehlersuchmaßnahmen am Motor
Betrieb oder bei der Wartung möglicherweise auftretenden dürfen nur von hierfür qualifiziertem Personal und mit
Situationen eingegangen werden. Anfragen bezüglich geeigneten Werkzeugen und Hilfsmitteln durchgeführt
weitergehender Informationen richten Sie bitte an die werden.
nächste ABB-Vertriebsstelle.
Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015 | ABB Motoren und Generatoren 39
FEHLER URSACHE MASSNAHMEN
Motor läuft zu Last zu hoch Last reduzieren.
langsam hoch Spannung beim Anlauf zu niedrig Auf zu hohen Widerstand überprüfen.
und/oder zieht zu Angemessenen Leitungsquerschnitt verwenden.
starken Strom
Defekter Käfigrotor Neuen Rotor einbauen.
Netzspannung zu niedrig Spannungsversorgung klären.
Falsche Falsche Phasenfolge Anschlüsse am Motor bzw. an der Schalttafel vertauschen.
Drehrichtung
Motor überhitzt bei Überlast Last reduzieren.
Betrieb unter Last Belüftungsöffnungen sind möglicher- Belüftungsöffnungen säubern und kontrollieren,
weise durch Schmutz verstopft und ob ein kontinuierlicher Luftstrom den Motor kühlt.
verhindern eine ordnungsgemäße
Kühlung des Motors
Eine Motorphase ist möglicherweise Kontrollieren, ob alle Anschlussleitungen richtig angeschlossen sind.
ausgefallen
Erdschluss Motor muss neu gewickelt werden.
Unsymmetrische Klemmenspannung Anschlussleitungen, Anschlüsse und Transformatoren
auf Fehler überprüfen.
Motor- Motor schlecht ausgerichtet Motor nachrichten.
schwingungen Mangelnde Stabilität des Unterbaus Unterbau verstärken.
Unwucht in Kupplung Kupplung auswuchten.
Unwucht in getriebener Anlage Getriebene Anlage neu auswuchten.
Defekte Lager Lager austauschen.
Lager schlecht ausgerichtet Motor reparieren.
Auswuchtgewichte verschoben Rotor neu auswuchten.
Wuchtung von Rotor und Kupplung Kupplung oder Rotor neu auswuchten.
nicht aufeinander abgestimmt
(Halbkeil- bzw. Vollkeilwuchtung)
Mehrphasenmotor läuft einphasig Auf offenen Stromkreis überprüfen.
Axialspiel zu groß Lager nachstellen oder Feder-Ausgleichsscheibe einlegen.
Geräusche Lüfter reibt an Lüfterkappe Lüftermontage korrigieren.
Lockerer Sitz auf Grundplatte Fußschrauben anziehen.
Betriebsgeräusch Luftspalt nicht gleichmäßig Lagerschildbefestigung bzw. Lager überprüfen und
zu laut entsprechend korrigieren.
Unwucht im Rotor Rotor neu auswuchten.
Lagertemperatur Welle verbogen oder beschädigt Welle richten oder austauschen.
zu hoch Riemenzug zu stark Riemenspannung reduzieren.
Riemenscheiben zu weit Riemenscheibe näher am Motorlager anordnen.
von Wellenschulter entfernt
Durchmesser der Riemenscheiben Größere Riemenscheiben verwenden.
zu klein
Schlechte Ausrichtung Durch Nachrichten des Antriebs korrigieren.
Unzureichendes Schmierfett Angemessene Qualität des im Lager vorhandenen
Schmierfetts sicherstellen.
Qualität des Schmierfetts beeinträchtigt Altes Schmierfett entfernen. Lager gründlich in Kerosin waschen
oder Schmiermittel verschmutzt und mit neuem Fett schmieren.
Überschüssiges Schmiermittel Schmiermittelmenge verringern; das Lager sollte maximal
zur Hälfte gefüllt sein.
Lager überlastet Ausrichtung, Radial- und Axialschub überprüfen.
Defekte Kugel oder raue Laufbahnen Lager austauschen; vor dem Einbau des neuen Lagers
das Lagergehäuse gründlich reinigen.
40 ABB Motoren und Generatoren | Anleitung für Niederspannungsmotoren, 3GZF500730-85 Änd. F 02-2015
Moteurs basse tension
Manuel d'installation, d'exploitation, de maintenance et de sécurité
Sommaire
1. Introduction ...............................................................................................................................43
1.1 Déclaration de Conformité .................................................................................................43
1.2 Validité ...............................................................................................................................43
2. Sécurité ......................................................................................................................................43
3. Manutention ..............................................................................................................................44
3.1 Contrôle à la réception.......................................................................................................44
3.2 Transport et entreposage ...................................................................................................44
3.3 Levage ..............................................................................................................................44
3.4 Poids du moteur ................................................................................................................44
4. Installation et mise en service .................................................................................................45
4.1 Généralités ........................................................................................................................45
4.2 Moteurs non équipés de roulements à bille ........................................................................45
4.3 Mesure de la résistance de l'isolation .................................................................................45
4.4 Fondations ........................................................................................................................45
4.5 Équilibrage et mise en place des demi-accouplements et des poulies ...............................46
4.6 Montage et alignement du moteur .....................................................................................46
4.7 Forces radiales et entraînements à courroie .......................................................................46
4.8 Moteurs avec trous de purge des eaux de condensation ...................................................46
4.9 Câblage et connexions électriques ....................................................................................46
4.9.1 Couplages pour les différentes méthodes de démarrage ....................................47
4.9.2 Couplages des éléments auxiliaires ....................................................................48
4.10 Bornes et sens de rotation .................................................................................................48
5. Conditions d'exploitation ........................................................................................................49
5.1 Généralités ........................................................................................................................49
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 41
6. Moteurs basse tension à vitesse variable .............................................................................50
6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................50
6.2 Isolation du bobinage ........................................................................................................50
6.2.1 Sélection de l'isolation du bobinage pour les convertisseurs ABB .......................50
6.2.2 Sélection de l'isolation du bobinage avec tous les autres convertisseurs ............50
6.3 Protection thermique ........................................................................................................50
6.4 Courants des roulements...................................................................................................51
6.4.1 Élimination des courants des roulements avec les convertisseurs ABB ...............51
6.4.2 Élimination des courants des roulements avec les autres convertisseurs.............51
6.5 Câblage, mise à la terre et CEM ........................................................................................51
6.6 Vitesse de fonctionnement.................................................................................................51
6.7 Moteurs utilisés dans des variateurs de vitesse ..................................................................51
6.7.1 Généralités .........................................................................................................51
6.7.2 Capacité de charge moteur avec les convertisseurs série AC_8__
à contrôle DTC ...................................................................................................52
6.7.3 Capacité de charge moteur avec les convertisseurs série AC_5__ ......................52
6.7.4 Capacité de charge moteur avec d’autres convertisseurs PWM
de source de tension ..........................................................................................52
6.7.5 Surcharges de courte durée ...............................................................................52
6.8 Plaques signalétiques ........................................................................................................52
6.9 Mise en service de l'application avec variateur ...................................................................52
7. Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................53
7.1 Entretien ............................................................................................................................53
7.1.1 Moteurs en attente ............................................................................................53
7.2 Lubrification .......................................................................................................................53
7.2.1 Moteurs avec roulements graissés à vie..............................................................53
7.2.2 Moteurs avec roulements regraissables ..............................................................54
7.2.3 Intervalles de lubrification et quantités de lubrifiant ..............................................55
7.2.4 Lubrifiants...........................................................................................................57
8. Service après vente ..................................................................................................................58
8.1 Pièces détachées ..............................................................................................................58
8.2 Démontage, remontage et rembobinage............................................................................58
8.3 Roulements .......................................................................................................................58
9. Contraintes d'environnement ..................................................................................................58
10. Dépannage ................................................................................................................................59
42 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
1. Introduction 2. Sécurité
Le moteur doit être installé et exploité par un personnel
REMARQUE !
qualifié, connaissant les règles de protection et de sécurité,
Seul le respect des consignes de cette notice
ainsi que la réglementation en vigueur.
garantira une installation, une exploitation et
une maintenance sûres et appropriées de votre Les dispositifs de sécurité obligatoires pour la prévention
moteur. Le personnel chargé de l'installation, des accidents sur les sites d'installation et d'exploitation
l'exploitation ou la maintenance du moteur ou de doivent être mis à disposition, conformément à la
l'équipement associé devra en être informé. Le réglementation en vigueur.
moteur doit être installé et exploité par un personnel
qualifié, connaissant les règles de protection et de
sécurité, ainsi que la réglementation en vigueur. AVERTISSEMENT !
Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entraîner Les commandes d'arrêt d'urgence doivent être
l'annulation des garanties applicables. équipées de dispositifs anti-redémarrage. Suite
à un arrêt d'urgence, une nouvelle commande
de démarrage ne peut prendre effet qu'après
1.1 Déclaration de Conformité réinitialisation intentionnelle du dispositif anti-
redémarrage.
La conformité du produit final à la Directive 2006/42/CE
(Machines) doit être établie par la partie chargée de la mise Points à respecter :
en service lorsque le moteur est monté dans la machine. 1. Ne marchez pas sur le moteur.
2. Au toucher, la température de l'enveloppe extérieure
1.2 Validité du moteur fonctionnant normalement, et en particulier
après son arrêt, peut être très élevée.
Cette notice technique s'applique aux machines électriques
3. Certaines applications spécifiques du moteur peuvent
ABB de types suivants, utilisées en modes moteur et
nécessiter des instructions complémentaires (par ex. en
générateur.
cas d'alimentation par un convertisseur de fréquence).
séries MT*, MXMA, 4. Prenez garde aux pièces du moteur en rotation.
séries M1A*, M2A*/M3A*, M2B*/M3B*, M4B*, M2C*/M3C*, 5. N'ouvrez pas les boîtes à bornes lorsqu'elles sont sous
M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, M2M*/M3M*, M2Q*, M2R*/M3R*, tension.
M2V*/M3V*
en hauteurs d'axe 56 - 450.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 43
3. Manutention Les anneaux de levage endommagés ne doivent pas être
utilisés. Vérifiez que les boulons à œil ou anneaux de levage
intégrés ne sont pas endommagés avant le levage.
3.1 Contrôle à la réception
Les boulons à œil de levage doivent être serrés avant
À la réception, vérifiez l'état du moteur (par ex. extrémités le levage. Au besoin, la position de chaque boulon sera
d'arbres, brides et surfaces peintes) ; tout dommage doit ajustée au moyen de rondelles (entretoises) appropriées.
être signalé immédiatement au transporteur.
Vérifiez la compatibilité de l'engin de levage et de la taille
Vérifiez toutes les données de la plaque signalétique, plus des crochets avec les anneaux de levage.
particulièrement la tension et le mode de couplage des
enroulements (étoile ou triangle). Le type de roulement Veillez à ne pas endommager les équipements auxiliaires et
est spécifié sur la plaque signalétique des moteurs, à les câbles raccordés au moteur.
l'exception de ceux de faible hauteur d'axe.
Retirez les éventuelles broches de transport fixant le
En cas d'utilisation d'un variateur de vitesse, vérifiez la moteur à la palette.
capacité de charge maximale autorisée en fonction de la
fréquence indiquée sur la plaque signalétique auxiliaire du Des instructions particulières relatives au levage sont
moteur. disponibles auprès d'ABB.
Les surfaces usinées non protégées (bouts d'arbre 3.4 Poids du moteur
et brides) doivent être recouvertes d'une protection
anticorrosion. La masse totale des moteurs de même hauteur d'axe peut
varier selon leur puissance, leur disposition de montage et
Nous préconisons de tourner l'arbre à la main à intervalles les auxiliaires montés.
réguliers pour prévenir tout écoulement de graisse.
Le tableau suivant donne la masse maximale approximative
L'utilisation de chauffages anti-condensation est des machines en exécution de base et en fonction du
recommandée afin d'éviter toute condensation d'eau dans matériau du châssis.
le moteur.
La masse réelle de tous les moteurs ABB (à l'exception
Le moteur ne doit pas être soumis à des vibrations des moteurs dotés des plus petits châssis – 56 et 63) est
supérieures à 0,5 mm/s à l'arrêt afin d'éviter tout indiquée sur leur plaque signalétique.
endommagement des roulements.
Hauteur d'axe Aluminium Fonte Ajouter
Pendant le transport ou tout déplacement, le rotor des Masse en kg Masse en kg pour le frein
moteurs dotés de roulements à rouleaux cylindriques et/ 56 4,5 - -
ou à contact oblique doit être immobilisé par un dispositif 63 6 - -
adéquat. 71 8 13 5
80 14 20 8
3.3 Levage 90 20 30 10
100 32 40 16
Tous les moteurs ABB dont le poids est supérieur à 25 kg 112 36 50 20
sont équipés d'anneaux de levage. 132 93 90 30
160 149 130 30
Seuls les anneaux de levage ou boulons à œil principaux 180 162 190 45
du moteur doivent être utilisés pour son levage. Ils ne 200 245 275 55
doivent en aucun cas servir à soulever le moteur lorsque 225 300 360 75
celui-ci est fixé à un autre équipement. 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 -
Les anneaux de levage pour éléments auxiliaires (freins,
315 - 1700 -
ventilateurs de refroidissement séparés) ou boîtes à
355 - 2700 -
bornes ne doivent pas être utilisés pour lever le moteur.
400 - 3500 -
Du fait des différentes formes de sorties, de montages et
450 - 4500 -
d'équipements auxiliaires, des moteurs avec un même
châssis peuvent avoir un centre de gravité différent. Si le moteur est équipé d'un ventilateur séparé, demandez-
en la masse à ABB.
44 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
4. Installation et mise en service
Vérifiez soigneusement toutes les valeurs de la plaque La résistance de l'isolation, corrigée à 25 °C, ne doit
signalétique afférentes à la certification pour vous assurer en aucun cas être inférieure à 1 MΩ (mesure à 500 ou
que les branchements et la protection du moteur sont 1000 VCC). La valeur de résistance de l'isolation est
réalisés correctement. divisée par deux pour chaque augmentation de 20 °C
de la température. La Figure 1 peut être utilisée pour la
correction de l'isolation à la température voulue.
4.2 Moteurs non équipés
de roulements à bille AVERTISSEMENT !
Afin d'éviter tout risque de choc électrique, le
Le cas échéant, retirez le dispositif d'immobilisation utilisé
châssis du moteur doit être mis à la terre et les
pour le transport. Si possible, tournez l'arbre du moteur à
bobinages doivent être déchargés sur le châssis
la main pour vérifier que sa rotation s'effectue sans entrave.
immédiatement après chaque mesure.
Un moteur monté en position verticale avec l'arbre dirigé Elles doivent être d'une conception et de dimensions
vers le bas doit être doté d'un capot de protection contre la permettant d'éviter tout transfert de vibration au moteur,
chute de corps étrangers et la pénétration de fluides via les ainsi que toute vibration provoquée par résonance. Voir la
ouvertures de ventilation. Cette mesure de protection peut figure ci-dessous.
également être assurée par l'emploi d'un capot séparé,
non fixé au moteur. Dans ce cas, le moteur doit porter une
étiquette d'avertissement.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 45
Précision de montage du demi-accouplement : vérifiez que
Règle le jeu b est inférieur à 0,05 mm et que l'écart entre a1 et a2
est également inférieur à 0,05 mm. Consultez la figure 2.
Remarque ! La différence de Revérifiez l'alignement après le serrage final des boulons et
niveau maximale entre les
emplacements des pattes goujons.
du moteur ne doit pas
excéder ± 0,1 mm. Ne dépassez pas les valeurs de charge admissibles des
roulements spécifiées dans les catalogues de produits.
46 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
Des anneaux de câble appropriés doivent être utilisés pour De plus, les connexions à la terre ou de raccordement à
la connexion de tous les câbles principaux. Les câbles l'extérieur de l'appareil électrique peuvent représenter une
pour éléments auxiliaires peuvent être connectés tels quels connexion efficace pour un conducteur doté d'une section
dans leurs boîtes à bornes. d'au moins 4 mm2.
Les moteurs sont uniquement destinés à une installation Le raccordement des câbles entre le réseau et les bornes
fixe. Sauf indication contraire, les filetages des entrées de du moteur doit satisfaire aux règles d'installation des
câble sont au pas métrique. La classe IP du presse-étoupe normes nationales ou de la norme EN 60204-1 pour ce
doit être au moins identique à celle des boîtes à bornes. qui concerne le courant nominal figurant sur la plaque
signalétique.
Un concentrateur de conduit ou un connecteur de câble
certifié doit être utilisé au moment de l'installation.
REMARQUE !
Lorsque la température ambiante dépasse +50 °C,
REMARQUE ! des câbles ayant une température d'utilisation
Les câbles doivent être protégés mécaniquement et autorisée d'au moins +90 °C doivent être utilisés.
fixés au plus près de la boîte à bornes pour satisfaire En outre, tous les autres facteurs de conversion
aux exigences correspondantes de la norme CEI/ dépendant des conditions d'installation doivent
EN 60079-0 et aux règles d'installation des normes être pris en compte lors du dimensionnement des
nationales. câbles.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 47
Autres modes de démarrage et démarrages en
conditions difficiles :
4.10 Bornes et sens de rotation
En cas d'utilisation d'autres méthodes de démarrage (par L'arbre tourne dans le sens horaire, vu du côté
ex. convertisseur ou démarreur progressif) pour les types accouplement du moteur, pour un ordre de phases – L1,
d'applications S1 et S2, on considère que le dispositif L2, L3 – aux bornes tel qu'illustré à la figure 3.
est « isolé du système de puissance lorsque la machine
Pour inverser le sens de rotation, permutez les deux
électrique est en fonctionnement », comme indiqué par
raccordements des câbles d'alimentation, au choix.
la norme CEI 60079-0, et que la protection thermique est
optionnelle. Si le moteur est doté d'un ventilateur unidirectionnel,
vérifiez que celui-ci tourne effectivement dans le sens
4.9.2 Couplages des éléments auxiliaires indiqué par la flèche figurant sur le moteur.
48 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
5. Conditions d'exploitation
5.1 Généralités
Les moteurs sont conçus pour les conditions d'utilisation
suivantes, sauf indication contraire sur la plaque
signalétique :
AVERTISSEMENT !
Le fait d'ignorer toute instruction ou maintenance
de l'appareil peut en compromettre la sécurité,
empêchant l'utilisation du moteur.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 49
6. Moteurs basse tension à vitesse variable
6.1 Introduction 6.2.1 Sélection de l'isolation du bobinage
pour les convertisseurs ABB
Cette partie du manuel fournit des instructions
supplémentaires pour les moteur utilisés avec une Dans le cas des systèmes d'entraînement uniques de
alimentation par convertisseur de fréquence. Le moteur séries ABB AC_8__ et AC_5__ avec unité d'alimentation à
est conçu pour fonctionner en étant alimenté par un seul diode (tension CC non contrôlée), la sélection de l'isolation
convertisseur de fréquence et non pour des applications du bobinage et des filtres peut se faire en fonction du
de moteurs tournant en parallèle à partir d'un seul tableau 6.1.
convertisseur de fréquence. Les instructions fournies par le
fabricant du convertisseur doivent être respectées. 6.2.2 Sélection de l'isolation du bobinage
Des informations supplémentaires peuvent être requises avec tous les autres convertisseurs
par ABB quant à l'adéquation de certains types de moteurs
Les surtensions ne doivent pas excéder certaines limites
utilisés pour certaines applications spécifiques ou de
acceptables. Veuillez contacter le concepteur du système
conception spécialement modifiée.
pour garantir la sécurité de l'application. L'influence
des filtres éventuels doit être prise en compte lors du
dimensionnement du moteur.
6.2 Isolation du bobinage
Les variateurs de vitesse engendrent des contraintes
de tension plus élevées qu'une alimentation sinusoïdale 6.3 Protection thermique
sur le bobinage du moteur. Par conséquent, l'isolation
La plupart des moteurs décrits dans ce manuel sont
du bobinage, ainsi que le filtre au niveau de la sortie
équipés de thermistances PTC ou d'autres types de RTD
du convertisseur, doivent être dimensionnés selon les
dans les bobinages du stator. Il est recommandé de les
instructions suivantes.
connecter au convertisseur de fréquence. Pour en savoir
plus, se reporter au chapitre 4.9.2.
Pour de plus amples informations concernant le freinage à résistance et les convertisseurs avec unités d'alimentation
contrôlées, contactez ABB.
50 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
6.4 Courants des roulements REMARQUE !
Il faut utiliser des roulements et structures de roulement Des presse-étoupes appropriés assurant une
isolées, des filtres en mode courant et un câblage continuité de masse sur 360° doivent être utilisés
approprié, ainsi que des méthodes de mise à la terre au niveau de tous les points de raccordement, par
adéquates, conformément aux instructions suivantes et en exemple au niveau du moteur, du convertisseur, de
se reportant au tableau 6.1. l'éventuel commutateur de sécurité, etc.
6.4.1 Élimination des courants des Pour les moteurs d'une hauteur d'axe supérieure ou égale
roulements avec les convertisseurs à CEI 280, il est nécessaire de procéder à une égalisation
ABB supplémentaire du potentiel entre le châssis du moteur et
Dans le cas des convertisseurs de fréquence ABB l'équipement entraîné, sauf si le moteur et l'équipement
(par exemple des séries AC_8__ et AC_5__ avec unité sont montés sur un même socle d'acier. Dans ce cas, la
d'alimentation à diode), les méthodes présentées dans le conductivité haute fréquence de la connexion fournie par le
tableau 6.1 doivent être utilisées afin d'éviter tout courant socle en acier doit être vérifiée, par exemple, en mesurant
dangereux dans les roulements des moteurs. la différence de potentiel entre les composants.
6.5 Câblage, mise à la terre Pour les applications fournies avec d'autres convertisseurs,
les moteurs devront être dimensionnés manuellement. Pour
et CEM plus d'informations, contactez ABB.
Pour assurer une mise à la terre correcte et garantir la Les courbes de capacité de charge sont basées sur la
conformité avec toutes les normes CEM applicables, les tension d'alimentation nominale. Le fonctionnement dans
moteurs d'une puissance supérieure à 30 kW doivent être des conditions de sous-tension ou de surtension peut
câblés à l'aide de câbles symétriques blindés et de presse- influencer les performances de l'application.
étoupe CEM assurant une continuité de masse sur 360°.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 51
6.7.2 Capacité de charge moteur avec 6.8 Plaques signalétiques
les convertisseurs série AC_8__
L'utilisation des moteurs ABB dans les applications à
à contrôle DTC
vitesse variable ne nécessitent habituellement aucune
Les courbes de capacité de charge présentées dans plaque signalétique supplémentaire. Les paramètres
les figures 5a - 5d sont valables pour les convertisseurs nécessaires à la mise en service du convertisseur se
ABB série AC_8__ avec une tension en courant continu trouvent sur la plaque signalétique principale. Cependant,
non contrôlée et un contrôle DTC. Les figures présentent dans certaines applications spéciales, les moteurs peuvent
le couple de sortie continu maximum approximatif être dotés de plaques signalétiques supplémentaires pour
des moteurs, en tant que fonction de la fréquence les applications à vitesse variable. Ces plaques contiennent
d'alimentation. Le couple de sortie est fourni en tant que les informations suivantes :
pourcentage du couple nominal du moteur. Les valeurs
sont fournies à titre indicatif. Les valeurs exactes sont - plage de vitesses
disponibles sur demande. - plage de puissances
- plage de tensions et de courants
REMARQUE ! - type de couple (constant ou quadratique)
Les vitesses maximum du moteur et de l'application - type de convertisseur et fréquence de commutation
ne doivent pas être dépassées ! minimale requise
52 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
7. Maintenance 1. L’arbre doit être tourné régulièrement, toutes les
2 semaines (à rapporter), en effectuant un démarrage du
système. Au cas où il ne soit pas possible d’effectuer de
AVERTISSEMENT ! démarrage pour une raison quelconque, il faudra tourner
Même avec le moteur à l'arrêt, la boîte à bornes peut l’arbre à la main afin de lui faire adopter une position
être sous tension pour les résistances de réchauffage différente une fois par semaine. Les vibrations causées
ou le réchauffage direct des enroulements. par le reste de l’équipement du vaisseau entraînent une
usure en cratères au niveau des roulements, que cette
mise en marche ou ce déplacement manuel peut limiter.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 53
Les heures de fonctionnement pour les roulements graissés Regraissage avec le moteur à l'arrêt
à vie à des températures de 25 °C et 40 °C sont : Il est impossible de regraisser les roulements si le moteur
ne tourne pas ; quant à la lubrification, elle peut être opérée
Heures de Heures de lorsque le moteur est à l'arrêt.
Hauteur fonctionne- fonctionne- – Dans ce cas, commencez en injectant la moitié de la
d'axe Pôles ment à 25 °C ment à 40 °C quantité de graisse et faites tourner le moteur à vitesse
56 2 52 000 33 000 maximale pendant quelques minutes.
56 4-8 65 000 41 000 – Après avoir arrêté le moteur, injectez le reste de graisse
63 2 49 000 31 000 dans le roulement.
63 4-8 63 000 40 000 – Après avoir fait tourner le moteur pendant 1 à 2 heures,
71 2 67 000 42 000 refermez le bouchon d'orifice d'évacuation de la graisse
71 4-8 100 000 56 000 ou la valve de fermeture si le moteur en est doté.
80-90 2 100 000 65 000
B. Lubrification automatique
80-90 4-8 100 000 96 000
100-112 2 89 000 56 000 En cas de lubrification automatique, le bouchon de l'orifice
100-112 4-8 100 000 89 000 d'évacuation de la graisse doit être retiré ou la valve de
132 2 67 000 42 000 fermeture doit être ouverte, si le moteur en est doté.
132 4-8 100 000 77 000
160 2 60 000 38 000
ABB recommande l'utilisation de systèmes
électromécaniques uniquement.
160 4-8 100 000 74 000
180 2 55 000 34 000 La quantité de graisse par intervalle de lubrification
180 4-8 100 000 70 000 indiquée dans le tableau doit être multipliée par trois si un
200 2 41 000 25 000 système de lubrification centralisé est utilisé. Lorsqu'une
200 4-8 95 000 60 000 unité de regraissage automatique plus petite (une ou deux
225 2 36 000 23 000 cartouches par moteur) est utilisée, la quantité normale de
225 4-8 88 000 56 000 graisse peut être utilisée.
250 2 31 000 20 000
Pour les moteurs à 2 pôles avec lubrification automatique,
250 4-8 80 000 50 000
la note relative aux recommandations de lubrification des
Les données sont valides jusqu'à 60 Hz. moteurs à 2 pôles figurant au paragraphe « Lubrifiants »
doit être observée.
7.2.2 Moteurs avec roulements La graisse utilisée doit convenir à la lubrification
regraissables automatique. Les recommandations du fournisseur du
système de lubrification automatique et celles du fabricant
Plaque de lubrification et procédure générale de
de la graisse doivent être respectées.
lubrification
Si le moteur est doté d'une plaque de lubrification, Exemple de calcul de la quantité de graisse pour le
respectez les valeurs indiquées. système de lubrification automatique
Système de lubrification centralisé : L'intervalle de
Les intervalles de graissage pour les roulements, la
regraissage du moteur CEI M3_P 315_ à 4 pôles dans un
température ambiante et la vitesse de rotation sont définis
réseau 50 Hz, selon le tableau, est de 7 600 h/55 g (DE) et
sur la plaque de lubrification.
7 600 h/40 g (NDE) :
Lors du premier démarrage ou après une lubrification de
roulement, une hausse de température temporaire peut se (DE) RLI = 55 g/7 600 h*3*24 = 0,52 g/jour
produire pendant environ 10 à 20 heures. (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7 600*3*24 = 0,38 g/jour
Certains moteurs peuvent être équipés d'un collecteur de
graisse usagée. Consultez les consignes spéciales fournies Exemple de calcul de la quantité de graisse
avec l'équipement. pour l'unité de lubrification automatique unique
(cartouche)
A. Lubrification manuelle (DE) RLI = 55 g/7 600 h*24 = 0,17 g/jour
Regraissage avec le moteur en marche (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7 600*24 = 0,13 g/jour
– Ôtez le bouchon de l'orifice d'évacuation de la graisse ou
ouvrez la valve de fermeture si le moteur en est doté. RLI = Intervalle de relubrification, DE = Côté entraînement,
– Assurez-vous que le conduit de lubrification est ouvert NDE = Côté non-entraînement
– Injectez la quantité spécifiée de graisse dans le
roulement.
– Faites tourner le moteur pendant 1 à 2 heures pour
évacuer le trop-plein de graisse du roulement. Refermez
les orifices d'évacuation de la graisse si le moteur en est
doté.
54 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
7.2.3 Intervalles de lubrification et Un fonctionnement à grande vitesse (ex., alimentation par
quantités de lubrifiant convertisseur de fréquence) ou à petite vitesse avec une
charge élevée impose des intervalles de lubrification plus
Pour les intervalles de lubrification des moteurs verticaux, rapprochés.
les valeurs du tableau ci-dessous doivent être divisées par
deux.
AVERTISSEMENT !
En règle générale, une lubrification adéquate peut être Ne pas dépasser la température maximum de
obtenue pour la durée suivante, conformément à L1. fonctionnement de la graisse et des roulements
Lorsque le travail doit être effectué à des températures (+110 °C).
ambiantes supérieures, prière de contacter ABB. La La vitesse maximale assignée au moteur ne doit pas
formule indicative de conversion des valeurs L1 en L10 est : être dépassée.
L10 = 2,0 x L1 avec lubrification manuelle.
REMARQUE !
Toute augmentation de la température ambiante
augmente d'autant la température des roulements.
Les intervalles seront réduits de moitié pour chaque
augmentation de 15 °C de la température des
roulements et doublés pour chaque réduction de
15 °C de la température des roulements.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 55
Quantité
Hauteur de graisse 3 600 3 000 1 800 1 500 1 000 500-900
kW kW kW kW
d'axe g/ tr/min tr/min tr/min tr/min tr/min tr/min
roulement
Roulements à billes, intervalles de lubrification en heures de fonctionnement
112 10 toutes 10 000 13 000 toutes 18 000 21 000 toutes 25 000 toutes 28 000
132 15 toutes 9 000 11 000 toutes 17 000 19 000 toutes 23 000 toutes 26 500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9 000 12 000 ≤ 15 18 000 21 500 ≤ 11 24 000 toutes 24 000
160 25 > 18,5 7 500 10 000 > 15 15 000 18 000 > 11 22 500 toutes 24 000
180 30 ≤ 22 7 000 9 000 ≤ 22 15 500 18 500 ≤ 15 24 000 toutes 24 000
180 30 > 22 6 000 8 500 > 22 14 000 17 000 > 15 21 000 toutes 24 000
200 40 ≤ 37 5 500 8 000 ≤ 30 14 500 17 500 ≤ 22 23 000 toutes 24 000
200 40 > 37 3 000 5 500 > 30 10 000 12 000 > 22 16 000 toutes 20 000
225 50 ≤ 45 4 000 6 500 ≤ 45 13 000 16 500 ≤ 30 22 000 toutes 24 000
225 50 > 45 1 500 2 500 > 45 5 000 6 000 > 30 8 000 toutes 10 000
250 60 ≤ 55 2 500 4 000 ≤ 55 9 000 11 500 ≤ 37 15 000 toutes 18 000
250 60 > 55 1 000 1 500 > 55 3 500 4 500 > 37 6 000 toutes 7 000
2801) 60 toutes 2 000 3 500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - toutes 8 000 10 500 toutes 14 000 toutes 17 000
280 35 toutes 1 900 3 200 - - - -
280 40 - - toutes 7 800 9 600 toutes 13 900 toutes 15 000
315 35 toutes 1 900 3 200 - - - -
315 55 - - toutes 5 900 7 600 toutes 11 800 toutes 12 900
355 35 toutes 1 900 3 200 - - - -
355 70 - - toutes 4 000 5 600 toutes 9 600 toutes 10 700
400 40 toutes 1 500 2 700 - - - -
400 85 - - toutes 3 200 4 700 toutes 8 600 toutes 9 700
450 40 toutes 1 500 2 700 - - - -
450 95 - - toutes 2 500 3 900 toutes 7 700 toutes 8 700
56 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
7.2.4 Lubrifiants
REMARQUE !
Pour les moteurs à 2 pôles tournant à grande vitesse
AVERTISSEMENT ! pour lesquels le facteur de vitesse est supérieur à
Ne mélangez pas différents types de graisse. 480 000 (obtenu par Dm x n, où Dm = diamètre
Des lubrifiants non miscibles peuvent endommager moyen du roulement en mm ; n = vitesse de rotation
les roulements. en tr/min), vous devez utiliser des graisses grande
vitesse.
Pour le regraissage, seules les graisses spéciales pour
roulements à billes présentant les propriétés suivantes Les graisses suivantes peuvent être utilisées pour les
doivent être utilisées : moteurs en fonte tournant à grande vitesse, sans être
- graisse de qualité supérieure à base de savon lithium mélangées à des graisses au lithium complexe :
complexe et d'huile minérale ou huile synthétique
(ex., PAO) - Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102
- viscosité de l'huile de base entre 100 et 160 cST à 40 °C (savon polycarbamide)
- consistance (échelle NLGI 1,5–3*) - Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (savon polycarbamide)
- températures d'utilisation : -30 °C à +120 °C, Si d'autres lubrifiants sont utilisés, vérifiez auprès du
en continu. fabricant que la qualité correspond aux lubrifiants
*) Une consistance supérieure est préconisée pour les mentionnés précédemment. Les intervalles de lubrification
moteurs à arbre vertical ou exploités en ambiance chaude. sont basés sur les graisses à hautes performances
présentées ci-dessus. L'utilisation d'autres graisses peut
Les caractéristiques de la graisse mentionnées ci-dessus sont réduire l'intervalle.
applicables si la température ambiante est comprise entre
-30 °C et +55 °C, et la température des roulements inférieure
à 110 °C. Si les conditions sont différentes, prière de consulter
ABB pour en savoir plus concernant la graisse applicable.
AVERTISSEMENT !
Les lubrifiants contenant des additifs EP sont
déconseillés pour les températures de roulements
élevées, pour les hauteurs d'axe de 280 à 450.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 57
8. Service après vente 9. Contraintes d'environnement
La plupart des moteurs ABB présentent un niveau de
8.1 Pièces détachées pression acoustique n'excédant pas 82 dB(A) (± 3 dB) à
Sauf indication contraire, les pièces de rechange doivent 50 Hz.
être des pièces d'origine approuvées par ABB. Les valeurs spécifiques à chaque moteur figurent dans
Lors de toute commande de pièces de rechange, vous les catalogues de produits correspondants. Lorsqu'une
devez fournir le numéro de série, la référence complète et alimentation sinusoïdale de 60 Hz est appliquée, les valeurs
toutes les spécifications du moteur figurant sur sa plaque sont de 4 dB(A) supérieures env. aux valeurs associées à
signalétique. une alimentation de 50 Hz dans les catalogues de produits.
8.3 Roulements
Les roulements du moteur doivent faire l'objet d'une
attention particulière.
REMARQUE !
Sauf autorisation spécifique du constructeur,
toute réparation réalisée par l'exploitant annule
l'engagement de conformité du constructeur.
58 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
10. Dépannage
Ces instructions ne couvrent pas toutes les variantes ou Tableau de dépannage du moteur
exécutions des machines et ne permettent pas de résoudre
tous les problèmes d'installation, d'exploitation ou de L'entretien et la maintenance du moteur doivent être
maintenance. Pour toute information complémentaire, nous réalisés par un personnel qualifié disposant des outils et
vous invitons à contacter votre correspondant ABB. des instruments adéquats.
Manuel des moteurs basse tension, 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015 | Moteurs et alternateurs ABB 59
PROBLÈME ORIGINE INTERVENTION
Le moteur prend Charge excessive Réduisez la charge.
trop de temps Basse tension lors du démarrage Vérifiez la présence de résistance élevée. Assurez-vous que la
à accélérer et/ dimension du câble utilisé est correcte.
ou présente un
courant trop élevé Rotor à cage d'écureuil défectueux Remplacement par un nouveau rotor.
Application d'une tension trop basse Corrigez l'alimentation.
Sens de rotation Séquence de phases erronée Inversez les connexions au niveau du moteur et du tableau de
erroné commande.
Surchauffe du Surcharge Réduisez la charge.
moteur lorsqu'il Il se peut que les ouvertures du châssis Ouvrez les trous de ventilation et vérifiez que l'air passe de façon
tourne ou de ventilation soit obstruées par des continue
impuretés, ce qui rend impossible la depuis le moteur.
ventilation adéquate du moteur
Possibilité de phase ouverte au niveau Vérifiez que tous les fils et câbles sont correctement connectés.
du moteur
Bobine mise à la terre Le moteur doit être rembobiné
Déséquilibre de tension de borne Vérifiez la présence de câbles, connexions et transformateurs
défaillants.
Le moteur vibre Désalignement du moteur Réalignez-le.
Support faible Renforcez la base.
Couplage déséquilibré Équilibrez le couplage.
Équipement entraîné déséquilibré Rééquilibrez l'équipement entraîné.
Roulements défectueux Remplacez les roulements.
Roulements désalignés Réparez le moteur.
Poids d'équilibrage mal positionnés Rééquilibrez-le.
Contradiction entre l'équilibrage du Rééquilibrez le couplage ou le rotor.
rotor et le couplage (demi-clavette -
clavette)
Moteur polyphasé tournant en phase Vérifiez l'absence de circuit ouvert.
unique
Jeu axial excessif Ajustez le roulement ou ajoutez une cale.
Bruit de raclement Flasque frottant contre le ventilateur ou Corrigez le positionnement du ventilateur.
le couvercle du ventilateur
Plaque de base desserrée Serrez les boulons de maintien.
Fonctionnement Passage d'air non uniforme Vérifiez et corrigez les fixations des flasques et des roulements.
bruyant Rotor déséquilibré Rééquilibrez-le.
Roulements Arbre plié ou détendu Redressez ou remplacez l'arbre.
chauds Tension de courroie excessive Réduisez la tension de la courroie.
Poulies trop éloignées de l'épaulement Rapprochez la poulie du roulement du moteur.
d'arbre
Diamètre de poulie trop petit Utilisez des poulies plus larges.
Désalignement Corrigez l'alignement de l'entraînement.
Quantité de graisse insuffisante Veillez à maintenir la qualité et la quantité de graisse appropriées dans
le roulement.
Détérioration de la graisse ou lubrifiant Vidangez la graisse usagée, nettoyez à fond les roulements au
contaminé kérosène et appliquez de la graisse neuve.
Excès de lubrifiant Réduisez la quantité de graisse ; le roulement ne doit être rempli qu'à
moitié.
Roulement surchargé Vérifiez l'alignement, la poussée latérale et la poussée axiale
Bille fissurée ou courses fissurées Remplacez le roulement ; nettoyez d'abord le logement à fond.
60 Moteurs et alternateurs ABB | Manuel des moteurs basse tension 3GZF500730-85 Rév. F 02-2015
Motores de baja tensión
Manual de instalación, funcionamiento, mantenimiento y seguridad
Contenido
1. Introducción ..............................................................................................................................63
1.1 Declaración de conformidad ..............................................................................................63
1.2 Validez ...............................................................................................................................63
2. Consideraciones de seguridad ................................................................................................63
3. Manipulación .............................................................................................................................64
3.1 Comprobación de recepción .............................................................................................64
3.2 Transporte y almacenaje ....................................................................................................64
3.3 Elevación ...........................................................................................................................64
3.4 Peso del motor ..................................................................................................................64
4. Instalación y puesta en servicio ..............................................................................................65
4.1 Generalidades ...................................................................................................................65
4.2 Motores con rodamientos distintos de los de bolas ...........................................................65
4.3 Comprobación de la resistencia de aislamiento..................................................................65
4.4 Anclajes .............................................................................................................................65
4.5 Equilibrado y montaje de acoplamientos y poleas ..............................................................66
4.6 Montaje y alineación del motor ..........................................................................................66
4.7 Fuerzas radiales y accionamientos por correas ..................................................................66
4.8 Motores con tapones de drenaje para condensación.........................................................66
4.9 Cableado y conexiones eléctricas ......................................................................................66
4.9.1 Conexiones para distintos métodos de arranque ................................................67
4.9.2 Conexión de elementos auxiliares .......................................................................68
4.10 Bornes y sentido de giro ....................................................................................................68
5. Operación .................................................................................................................................69
5.1 General..............................................................................................................................69
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 61
6. Motores de baja tensión alimentados por variadores de velocidad ...................................70
6.1 Introducción ......................................................................................................................70
6.2 Aislamiento del devanado ..................................................................................................70
6.2.1 Selección del aislamiento de devanado para convertidores ABB ........................70
6.2.2 Selección del aislamiento del devanado con todos los demás convertidores .....70
6.3 Protección por temperatura ..............................................................................................70
6.4 Corrientes a través de los rodamientos ..............................................................................71
6.4.1 Eliminación de las corrientes en los rodamientos con convertidores ABB ...........71
6.4.2 Eliminación de las corrientes en los rodamientos
con todos los demás convertidores ....................................................................71
6.5 Cableado, conexión a tierra y compatibilidad electro-magnética ........................................71
6.6 Velocidad de funcionamiento .............................................................................................71
6.7 Motores en aplicaciones con variador de velocidad ...........................................................71
6.7.1 General ..............................................................................................................71
6.7.2 Capacidad de carga del motor con la serie de convertidores AC_8_ _
con control de DTC ............................................................................................72
6.7.3 Capacidad de carga del motor con la serie de convertidores AC_5_ _................72
6.7.4 Capacidad de carga del motor con otros convertidores
de fuente de tensión de tipo PWM......................................................................72
6.7.5 Sobrecargas breves............................................................................................72
6.8 Placas de características ...................................................................................................72
6.9 Puesta en funcionamiento de la aplicación de velocidad variable .......................................72
7. Mantenimiento ..........................................................................................................................73
7.1 Inspección general.............................................................................................................73
7.1.1 Motores en reposo ............................................................................................73
7.2 Lubricación ........................................................................................................................73
7.2.1 Motores con rodamientos lubricados de por vida ...............................................74
7.2.2 Motores con rodamientos reengrasables ............................................................74
7.2.3 Intervalos de lubricación y cantidades de grasa ..................................................75
7.2.4 Lubricantes ........................................................................................................77
8. Servicio postventa ....................................................................................................................78
8.1 Piezas de repuesto ............................................................................................................78
8.2 Desmontaje, ensamblaje y rebobinado ..............................................................................78
8.3 Rodamientos .....................................................................................................................78
9. Requisitos medioambientales .................................................................................................78
10. Resolución de problemas ........................................................................................................79
62 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Introducción 2. Consideraciones
de seguridad
¡ATENCIÓN!
Debe seguir estas instrucciones para garantizar una El motor debe ser instalado y utilizado por personal
instalación, un funcionamiento y un mantenimiento cualificado y familiarizado con los requisitos de salud y
seguros y correctos del motor. Cualquiera que seguridad y la legislación nacional.
instale, maneje o realice el mantenimiento del motor
o los equipos asociados debe tenerlas en cuenta. Deben existir los equipos de seguridad necesarios para la
El motor debe ser instalado y utilizado por personal prevención de accidentes en el lugar de la instalación, y el
cualificado y familiarizado con los requisitos de lugar de funcionamiento debe respetar la normativa local.
salud y seguridad y la legislación nacional. No tener
en cuenta estas instrucciones puede suponer la
anulación de todas las garantías aplicables. ¡ADVERTENCIA!
Los controles de parada de emergencia deben
estar dotados de elementos de bloqueo del
1.1 Declaración de conformidad rearranque. Tras una parada de emergencia, un
comando de rearranque sólo puede funcionar tras
La conformidad del producto final con la Directiva el restablecimiento intencionado del bloqueo de
2006/42/CE (Máquinas) debe ser determinada por la parte rearranque.
encargada de la puesta en servicio en el momento del
montaje del motor en la maquinaria.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 63
3. Manipulación Debe apretar las argollas antes de la elevación. Si es
necesario, puede ajustar la posición de la argolla, usando
arandelas adecuadas como espaciadores.
3.1 Comprobación de recepción
Asegúrese de que utiliza el equipo de elevación adecuado
A su recepción, verifique inmediatamente si el motor y de que los tamaños de los ganchos son los adecuados
presenta daños externos (por ejemplo en las salidas de eje, para los cáncamos de elevación.
las bridas y las superficies pintadas) y, en tal caso, informe
inmediatamente al agente de ventas correspondiente. Tenga cuidado para no dañar los equipos auxiliares ni los
cables que estén conectados al motor.
Compruebe los datos de la placa de características,
especialmente la tensión y las conexiones del devanado Retire las posibles fijaciones de transporte que sujeten el
(estrella o triángulo). El tipo de rodamiento se especifica en motor al palé.
la placa de características de todos los motores, excepto
en los tamaños de carcasa más pequeños. ABB puede proporcionarle instrucciones de elevación
específicas.
En el caso de las aplicaciones con convertidor de
frecuencia, compruebe la capacidad máxima de carga
permitida de acuerdo con la frecuencia marcada en la ¡ADVERTENCIA!
segunda placa de características del motor. Durante los trabajos de elevación, montaje o
mantenimiento, deben tenerse en cuenta todas
las consideraciones de seguridad necesarias
3.2 Transporte y almacenaje y prestarse especial atención a que nadie esté
El motor debe almacenarse siempre en interior (por encima expuesto a una carga elevada.
de los –20 °C), en ambientes secos, sin vibraciones y sin
polvo. Durante el transporte, deben evitarse los golpes,
las caídas y la humedad. En presencia de cualquier otra 3.4 Peso del motor
situación, póngase en contacto con ABB.
El peso total del motor puede variar dentro de un mismo
Las superficies mecanizadas sin protección (salidas de eje tamaño de carcasa (altura de eje), en función de la poten-
y bridas) deben ser tratadas con un anticorrosivo. cia, la disposición de montaje y los elementos auxiliares.
Se recomienda hacer girar los ejes periódicamente con la La tabla siguiente muestra los pesos estimados para los
mano para evitar migraciones de grasa. motores en su versión básica, en función del material de la
carcasa.
Se recomienda el uso de las resistencias anti condensa-
ción, si las tiene, para evitar la condensación de agua en El peso real de todos los motores ABB, excepto el de los
el motor. tamaños de carcasa más pequeños (56 y 63) se indica en
la placa de características.
El motor no debe ser sometido a vibraciones externas en
reposo, para evitar daños en los rodamientos. Tamaño de Aluminio Hierro fundido Además
carcasa para el freno
Los motores equipados con rodamientos de rodillos Peso kg Peso kg
cilíndricos y/o de bolas de contacto angular deben llevar 56 4,5 - -
dispositivos de bloqueo durante el transporte. 63 6 - -
71 8 13 5
3.3 Elevación 80 14 20 8
90 20 30 10
Todos los motores ABB con peso superior a los 25 kg 100 32 40 16
están equipados con cáncamos de elevación. 112 36 50 20
132 93 90 30
A la hora de elevar el motor sólo deben usarse los
160 149 130 30
cáncamos de elevación principales del propio motor. No
180 162 190 45
deben usarse para elevar el motor si éste está unido a
200 245 275 55
otros equipos.
225 300 360 75
No deben usarse los cáncamos de elevación de los ele- 250 386 405 75
mentos auxiliares (por ejemplo frenos, ventiladores de refri- 280 425 800 -
geración separados) ni de las cajas de bornes para elevar 315 - 1700 -
el motor. Debido a las distintas potencias, la disposición 355 - 2700 -
de montaje y los equipos auxiliares, motores de la misma 400 - 3500 -
carcasa pueden tener centros de gravedad diferentes. 450 - 4500 -
64 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4. Instalación y puesta en servicio
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 65
Deben diseñarse y dimensionarse adecuadamente para Exactitud de montaje del acoplamiento: compruebe que
evitar la transferencia de vibraciones al motor y la aparición la separación b sea inferior a 0,05 mm y que la diferencia
de vibraciones por resonancia. Consulte la figura que entre a1 y a2 sea también inferior a 0,05 mm. Consulte la
aparece a continuación. Figura 2.
66 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Para la conexión de todos los cables principales deben Además, los medios de conexión a tierra o conexión
usarse terminales de cable adecuados. Los cables de equipotencial del exterior del aparato eléctrico deben
los elementos auxiliares pueden conectarse tal cual a sus permitir la conexión efectiva de un conductor con una
placas de bornes. sección transversal de al menos 4 mm2.
Estos motores son sólo para instalación fija. A no ser que La conexión de cable entre la red y los bornes del motor
se especifique lo contrario, las roscas de las entradas de debe cumplir los requisitos establecidos en las normas
cables son métricas. La clase IP del prensaestopas debe nacionales sobre instalación, o cumplir con la norma
ser al menos la misma que la de las cajas de bornes. IEC/EN 60204-1, según la intensidad nominal indicada en
la placa de características.
En el momento de la instalación, debe usarse un buje de
conducto o un conector de cables certificado.
¡ATENCIÓN!
Si la temperatura ambiente supera los +50 °C,
¡ATENCIÓN! deben utilizarse cables con una temperatura de
Los cables deben estar protegidos mecánicamente funcionamiento permitida de +90 °C como mínimo.
y sujetos cerca de la caja de bornes, para cumplir Al medir los cables, también deben tenerse en
los requisitos adecuados de la norma IEC/EN cuenta todos los demás factores de conversión en
60079-0 y las normas de instalación locales. función de las condiciones de instalación.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 67
Otros métodos de arranque y condiciones de
arranque difíciles:
En los casos en los que se utilicen otros métodos de
arranque, como un convertidor o un arrancador suave,
en los tipos de carga de S1 y S2, se considera que el
dispositivo está “aislado de la red eléctrica cuando la
máquina eléctrica está en funcionamiento”, según la norma
IEC 60079-0, y la protección por temperatura es opcional.
68 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
5. Operación
5.1 General
Estos motores han sido diseñados para las condiciones
siguientes, a no ser que se indique lo contrario en la placa
de características:
¡ADVERTENCIA!
No tener en cuenta las instrucciones o el
mantenimiento del aparato puede poner en peligro la
seguridad y con ello impedir el uso del motor.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 69
6. Motores de baja tensión alimentados por variadores
de velocidad
6.1 Introducción 6.2.1 Selección del aislamiento de
devanado para convertidores ABB
Esta parte del manual proporciona instrucciones
adicionales para los motores utilizados con alimentación En el caso de los convertidores de frecuencia de, por
a través de un convertidor de frecuencia. El motor ha sido ejemplo, las series AC_8_ _ y AC_5_ _ de ABB con
concebido para su alimentación con un solo convertidor rectificador de diodos (tensión de CC no controlada),
de frecuencia y no para su uso con otros motores la selección del aislamiento de devanado y de los filtros
funcionando en paralelo desde un solo convertidor puede hacerse de acuerdo con la tabla 6.1.
de frecuencia. Deben respetarse las instrucciones
proporcionadas por el fabricante del convertidor. 6.2.2 Selección del aislamiento del
ABB puede necesitar información adicional a la hora de devanado con todos los demás
decidir la idoneidad de algunos tipos de motores concretos convertidores
utilizados en aplicaciones especiales o con modificaciones
de diseño especiales. Los esfuerzos de tensión deben estar limitados por debajo
de los límites aceptados. Póngase en contacto con el
suministrador del sistema para garantizar la seguridad de la
aplicación. La influencia de los posibles filtros debe tenerse
6.2 Aislamiento del devanado en cuenta a la hora de dimensionar el motor.
Los convertidores de frecuencia generan esfuerzos
de tensión mayores en el devanado del motor que
la alimentación sinusoidal. Por ello el aislamiento de 6.3 Protección por temperatura
devanado del motor, así como el filtro de la salida del
convertidor, deben dimensionarse de acuerdo con las La mayoría de los motores tratados en este manual están
instrucciones que aparecen a continuación. equipados con termistores PTC u otro tipo de detector de
temperatura de resistencia en los devanados del estátor.
Se recomienda conectarlos al convertidor de frecuencia.
Para saber más, consulte el capítulo 4.9.2.
Para obtener más información sobre el frenado con resistencias y los convertidores con unidades de suministro
controladas, póngase en contacto con ABB.
70 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6.4 Corrientes a través ¡ATENCIÓN!
de los rodamientos Deben usarse prensaestopas adecuados que
proporcionen una conexión equipotencial de 360°
Deben usarse rodamientos aislados o construcciones de en todos los puntos de terminación, es decir, en
rodamientos aisladas, filtros de modo común y cables y el motor, el convertidor, el posible interruptor de
métodos de conexión a tierra adecuados, de acuerdo con seguridad, etc.
las instrucciones que aparecen a continuación y con la
tabla 6.1.
En el caso de los motores con tamaño de carcasa IEC
6.4.1 Eliminación de las corrientes en los 280 y mayores, se requiere una conexión equipotencial
adicional entre la carcasa del motor y el equipo accionado,
rodamientos con convertidores ABB a no ser que los dos estén montados sobre una base
En el caso de un convertidor de frecuencia de, por común de acero. En este caso, es necesario comprobar
ejemplo, las series AC_8_ _ y AC_5_ _ de ABB con la conductividad de alta frecuencia de la conexión ofrecida
rectificador de diodos, deben usarse los métodos de por la base de acero, por ejemplo midiendo la diferencia de
la tabla 6.1 para evitar la presencia de corrientes de potencial existente entre los componentes.
rodamiento dañinas en los motores.
Encontrará más información sobre la conexión a tierra y el
cableado de los convertidores de frecuencia en el manual
¡ATENCIÓN! “Grounding and cabling of the drive system” (Conexión a
Se recomienda utilizar rodamientos aislados tierra y cableado de un convertidor de frecuencia, código:
que cuenten con aros interiores y/o exteriores 3AFY 61201998).
recubiertos con óxido de aluminio, o elementos
rodantes cerámicos. Los recubrimientos de óxido
de aluminio también deben estar tratados con un 6.6 Velocidad de funcionamiento
sellante para evitar la penetración de suciedad y
humedad en el recubrimiento poroso. Para conocer En el caso de las velocidades superiores a la velocidad
el tipo exacto de aislamiento de los rodamientos, nominal indicada en la placa de características del motor
consulte la placa de características del motor. Se o en el catálogo de productos correspondiente, asegúrese
prohíbe cambiar el tipo de rodamiento o el método de que no se sobrepase la velocidad de rotación máxima
de aislamiento sin la autorización de ABB. permitida en el motor, ni la velocidad crítica de la aplicación
en su conjunto.
6.4.2 Eliminación de las corrientes en los
rodamientos con todos los demás
convertidores
6.7 Motores en aplicaciones
El usuario es responsable de la protección del motor y con variador de velocidad
los equipos accionados frente a corrientes dañinas en los
rodamientos. Puede seguir como directriz las instrucciones 6.7.1 General
del capítulo 6.4.1, pero su eficacia no puede garantizarse
En el caso de los convertidores de frecuencia de ABB, los
en todos los casos.
motores pueden dimensionarse con ayuda del programa
de dimensionamiento DriveSize de ABB. Puede descargar
6.5 Cableado, conexión a tierra esta herramienta desde la página web de ABB (www.abb.
com/motors&generators).
y compatibilidad electro-
En el caso de las aplicaciones alimentadas por otros con-
magnética vertidores, los motores deben dimensionarse manualmen-
te. Para más información, póngase en contacto con ABB.
Para ofrecer una conexión a tierra adecuada y garantizar
el cumplimiento de los requisitos de compatibilidad Las curvas de cargabilidad (o curvas de capacidad de
electromagnética aplicables, los motores de más de carga) se basan en la tensión de suministro nominal. El
30 kW deben estar cableados con cables apantallados funcionamiento en condiciones de tensión insuficiente
simétricos y prensaestopas EMC, es decir, que o sobretensión puede influir en el rendimiento de la
proporcionen una conexión equipotencial en los 360°. aplicación.
Para motores más pequeños, también se recomienda
encarecidamente el uso de cables simétricos y
apantallados. Efectúe la conexión a tierra de 360° en
todas las entradas de cables, de la forma descrita en las
instrucciones relativas a los prensaestopas. Entrelace los
apantallamientos de los cables en haces y conéctelos al
borne o barra de bus de conexión a tierra del interior de la
caja de bornes, el armario del convertidor, etc.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 71
6.7.2 Capacidad de carga del motor con la de velocidad no requiere normalmente placas de
serie de convertidores AC_8_ _ con características adicionales. Los parámetros necesarios
para la puesta en servicio del convertidor pueden
control de DTC encontrarse en la placa de características principal. Sin
Las curvas de capacidad de carga mostradas en las embargo, en algunas aplicaciones especiales los motores
Figuras 5a - 5d son válidas para los convertidores ABB de pueden contar con placas de características adicionales
la serie AC_8_ _ con tensión de CC no controlada y control para las aplicaciones con variador de velocidad. En este
de DTC. Las figuras muestran el par máximo de salida caso, contienen la información siguiente:
continua de los motores en función de la frecuencia de
alimentación. El par de salida se indica como un porcentaje - Rango de velocidades
del par nominal del motor. Los valores son indicativos. Los - Rango de potencias
valores exactos pueden proporcionarse si así se solicita. - Rango de tensiones e intensidades
- Tipo de par (constante o cuadrático)
- Tipo de convertidor y frecuencia de conmutación mínima
¡ATENCIÓN!
necesaria
¡No se debe superar la velocidad máxima del motor
y la aplicación!
- tensión nominal
6.7.4 Capacidad de carga del motor con - intensidad nominal
otros convertidores de fuente de - frecuencia nominal
tensión de tipo PWM - velocidad nominal
En el caso de otros convertidores con tensión de CC no - potencia nominal
controlada y una frecuencia de conmutación mínima de
3 kHz (200…500 V), pueden usarse las instrucciones de
dimensionamiento del capítulo 6.7.3 como directrices. ¡ATENCIÓN!
Sin embargo, debe recordarse que la capacidad de ¡Si falta información o es inexacta, no utilice el
carga térmica real puede ser también menor. Póngase motor antes de garantizar que los valores sean los
en contacto con el fabricante del convertidor o el correctos!
suministrador del sistema.
72 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7. Mantenimiento 7.1.1 Motores en reposo
Si el motor permanece en reposo durante periodos
prolongados en un buque o en otro entorno con
¡ADVERTENCIA!
vibraciones, se deben tomar las siguientes medidas:
Con el motor parado, el interior de la caja de bornes
puede haber tensión eléctrica usada para alimentar 1. El eje debe ser girado regularmente cada 2 semanas
las resistencias calefactoras o para el calentamiento (deberá documentarse) mediante una puesta en marcha
directo del devanado. del sistema. En el caso de que la puesta en marcha no
sea posible por algún motivo, al menos es necesario
girar el eje con la mano para conseguir una posición
7.1 Inspección general diferente una vez por semana. Las vibraciones causadas
por los demás equipos del buque pueden provocar el
1. Inspeccione el motor a intervalos regulares y al menos
picado de los rodamientos, que debe minimizarse con
una vez al año. La frecuencia de las comprobaciones
un funcionamiento regular o el giro manual.
depende, por ejemplo, del nivel de humedad del aire
y de las condiciones climatológicas locales. Puede 2. El rodamiento debe engrasarse una vez al año mientras
determinarse inicialmente de forma experimental y debe se hace girar el eje (deberá documentarse). Si el motor
ser respetada estrictamente a partir de ese momento. ha sido suministrado con rodamiento de rodillos en el
2. Mantenga el motor limpio y asegúrese de que el aire lado de acople, el bloqueo para transporte debe retirarse
puede fluir libremente. Si se utiliza el motor en un antes de girar el eje. El bloqueo para transporte debe
ambiente polvoriento, es necesario verificar y limpiar volver a montarse en caso de transporte.
periódicamente el sistema de ventilación. 3. Se deben evitar todas las vibraciones para evitar
3. Compruebe el estado de los retenes de eje (por la avería del rodamiento. Deben seguirse todas las
ejemplo, anillo en V o retén radial) y reemplácelos si es instrucciones del manual de instrucciones del motor en
necesario. lo relativo a la puesta en servicio y el mantenimiento.
La garantía no cubrirá los daños en devanados o
4. Compruebe el estado de las conexiones y de los
rodamientos si no se siguen estas instrucciones.
tornillos de montaje y ensamblaje.
5. Compruebe el estado de los rodamientos. Para ello,
escuche para detectar cualquier ruido inusual, mida 7.2 Lubricación
las vibraciones, mida la temperatura del rodamiento,
inspeccione la cantidad de grasa consumida o
monitoree los rodamientos mediante un medidor SPM.
¡ADVERTENCIA!
Preste una atención especial a los rodamientos si están
¡Tenga cuidado con todas las partes giratorias!
cerca del fin de su vida útil nominal calculada.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 73
7.2.1 Motores con rodamientos lubricados Algunos motores pueden contar con un colector para
de por vida la grasa utilizada. Siga las instrucciones especiales
entregadas junto con el equipo.
Los rodamientos son normalmente rodamientos lubricados
de por vida y son de los tipos 1Z, 2Z, 2RS o equivalentes. A. Lubricación manual
Como guía, es posible conseguir una lubricación suficiente Reengrase mientras el motor está en funcionamiento
en los tamaños hasta 250 para la duración que se indica – Retire el tapón de salida de grasa o abra la válvula de
posteriormente, de acuerdo con el principio L1. Para cierre si dispone de una.
entornos con temperaturas ambiente mayores, póngase en – Asegúrese de que el canal de lubricación esté abierto.
contacto con ABB. La fórmula informativa para cambiar los – Inyecte la cantidad especificada de grasa hacia el interior
valores L1 aproximadamente a valores L10 es: L10 = 2,0 x L1. del rodamiento.
– Haga funcionar el motor de 1 a 2 horas para garantizar
Las horas de funcionamiento para los rodamientos
que el exceso de grasa sea expulsado del rodamiento.
lubricados de por vida con temperaturas ambiente de 25 y
Cierre el tapón de salida de grasa o la válvula de cierre, si
40 °C son:
dispone de una.
Tamaño Horas de Horas de Reengrase mientras el motor está en reposo
de funcionamiento funcionamiento Si no es posible engrasar los rodamientos con los motores
carcasa Polos a 25 °C a 40 °C
en funcionamiento, la lubricación puede ser realizada
56 2 52 000 33 000
mientras el motor está parado.
56 4-8 65 000 41 000 – En este caso, utilice sólo la mitad de la cantidad de
63 2 49 000 31 000 grasa y haga funcionar el motor durante unos minutos a
63 4-8 63 000 40 000 máxima velocidad.
71 2 67 000 42 000 – Cuando el motor se haya detenido, aplique el resto de la
71 4-8 100 000 56 000 cantidad especificada de grasa al rodamiento.
80-90 2 100 000 65 000 – Tras 1 ó 2 horas de funcionamiento, cierre el tapón de
80-90 4-8 100 000 96 000 salida de grasa o la válvula de cierre, si dispone de una.
100-112 2 89 000 56 000
B. Lubricación automática
100-112 4-8 100 000 89 000
132 2 67 000 42 000 El tapón de salida de grasa debe estar quitado de forma
132 4-8 100 000 77 000 permanente si se utiliza la lubricación automática o si
160 2 60 000 38 000 se deja abierta permanentemente la válvula de cierre, si
160 4-8 100 000 74 000 cuenta con una.
180 2 55 000 34 000
ABB recomienda únicamente el uso de sistemas
180 4-8 100 000 70 000
electromecánicos.
200 2 41 000 25 000
200 4-8 95 000 60 000 La cantidad de grasa por intervalo de lubricación indicada
225 2 36 000 23 000 en la tabla debe multiplicarse por tres si se utiliza un
225 4-8 88 000 56 000 sistema de lubricación central. Si se utiliza una unidad de
250 2 31 000 20 000 reengrase automático más pequeña (uno o dos cartuchos
250 4-8 80 000 50 000 en cada motor), puede usarse la cantidad normal de grasa.
Estos datos son válidos hasta los 60 Hz. Si un motor de 2 polos se reengrasa automáticamente,
debe seguir la nota acerca de las recomendaciones de
7.2.2 Motores con rodamientos lubricantes indicadas para los motores de 2 polos en el
reengrasables capítulo Lubricantes.
Placa de información de lubricación e indicaciones La grasa utilizada debe ser adecuada para la lubricación
generales de lubricación automática. Deben comprobarse las recomendaciones
del proveedor del sistema de lubricación automática y el
Si el motor cuenta con una placa de información de fabricante de grasa.
lubricación, siga los valores indicados.
Ejemplo de cálculo para la cantidad de grasa del
En la placa de información de lubricación se indican los sistema de lubricación automática
intervalos de reengrase en relación con el tipo de montaje,
la temperatura ambiente y la velocidad de giro. Sistema de lubricación central: Motor IEC M3_P 315_ 4
polos en una red a 50 Hz; el intervalo de re-lubricación
Durante la primera puesta en marcha o después de la según la Tabla es 7600 h/55 g (lado de acople) y 7600 h/40
lubricación de los rodamientos, puede producirse un g (lado N):
incremento temporal de la temperatura durante un periodo
de 10 a 20 horas aproximadamente. (LA) RLI = 55 g/7600h*3*24 = 0,52 g/día
74 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Ejemplo de cálculo de cantidad de grasa de
una unidad de lubricación automática individual
(cartucho)
(LA) RLI = 55 g/7600h*24 = 0,17 g/día
¡ATENCIÓN!
Un aumento de la temperatura ambiente eleva
correspondientemente la temperatura de los
rodamientos. Los valores de los intervalos deben
reducirse a la mitad en caso de un aumento de
15 °C en la temperatura de los rodamientos y
pueden doblarse en caso de una reducción de
15 °C en la temperatura de los rodamientos.
¡ADVERTENCIA!
No debe sobrepasarse la temperatura máxima de
funcionamiento de la grasa y de los rodamientos,
que es de +110 °C.
No se debe superar la velocidad máxima de diseño
del motor.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 75
Tamaño
Cantidad
de 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
de grasa kW kW kW kW
carcasa rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm
g/rodam.
76 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7.2.4 Lubricantes
¡ATENCIÓN!
Utilice siempre grasa de alta velocidad para los
¡ADVERTENCIA! motores de 2 polos a alta velocidad cuyo factor de
No mezcle diferentes tipos de grasa. velocidad sea superior a 480 000 (calculado como
El uso de lubricantes incompatibles puede dar lugar Dm x n, donde Dm = diámetro del rodamiento en
a daños en los rodamientos. mm; n = velocidad de giro en rpm).
¡ADVERTENCIA!
No se recomienda utilizar lubricantes con contenido
de aditivos EP en caso de altas temperaturas de
rodamiento en los tamaños de carcasa del 280 al
450.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 77
8. Servicio postventa 9. Requisitos
medioambientales
8.1 Piezas de repuesto
La mayoría de los motores ABB presentan un nivel de
A no ser que se indique lo contrario, las piezas de repuesto
presión sonora que no sobrepasa los 82 dB(A) (± 3 dB) a
deben ser piezas originales o deben ser autorizadas por
50 Hz.
ABB.
Los valores de los distintos motores aparecen en los
A la hora de pedir piezas de repuesto, es necesario indicar
catálogos de producto pertinentes. Con un suministro
el número de serie del motor, la designación de tipo
sinusoidal a 60 Hz, los valores son aproximadamente 4
completa y el código de producto, indicados en la placa de
dB(A) superiores respecto de los valores de los catálogos
características.
de producto, que corresponden a 50 Hz.
El rebobinado debe ser realizado siempre por centros de Si es necesario desechar o reciclar los motores, debe
reparación cualificados. hacerse de la forma adecuada y según los reglamentos y
legislación locales.
Ni los motores smoke venting ni otros motores especiales
deben ser rebobinados sin antes ponerse en contacto con
ABB.
8.3 Rodamientos
Se debe prestar una atención especial a los rodamientos.
¡ATENCIÓN!
Cualquier reparación realizada por el usuario, a no
ser que sea autorizada por el fabricante, exonera
al fabricante de su responsabilidad sobre la
conformidad.
78 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
10. Resolución de problemas
Estas instrucciones no cubren todos los detalles o Tabla de solución de problemas del motor
variaciones del equipo ni proporcionan información acerca
de todas y cada una de las condiciones posibles que El servicio técnico y cualquier actividad de solución de
pueden darse en relación con la instalación, el manejo o el problemas del motor deben ser realizados por personas
mantenimiento. Si fuera necesaria información adicional, cualificadas y dotadas de los equipos y herramientas
póngase en contacto con la oficina comercial de ABB más adecuados.
cercana.
Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 79
PROBLEMA CAUSA ACCIONES
El motor tarda Carga excesiva Reduzca la carga.
demasiado en Tensión insuficiente durante el arranque Compruebe si la resistencia es excesiva. Asegúrese de utilizar un
acelerar y/o cable de una sección suficiente.
requiere una
intensidad Rotor de jaula de ardilla defectuoso Reemplace el rotor por uno nuevo.
excesiva Tensión aplicada insuficiente Corrija la alimentación de suministro.
Sentido de Secuencia de fases incorrecta Invierta las conexiones en el motor o en el panel de interruptores.
rotación incorrecto
El motor se Sobrecarga Reduzca la carga.
sobrecalienta La carcasa o las aberturas de Abra los orificios de ventilación y compruebe que se produzca un flujo
mientras funciona ventilación pueden estar obstruidas de aire continuo desde el motor.
con suciedad e impedir una ventilación
correcta del motor.
El motor puede tener abierta una fase Compruebe si todos los conductores y cables están bien conectados.
Bobina conectada a masa Se debe rebobinar el motor.
Tensión desequilibrada en los bornes Busque cables, conexiones y transformadores defectuosos.
El motor vibra Motor mal alineado Corrija la alineación.
Apoyo poco resistente Refuerce la base.
Desequilibrio en el acoplamiento Equilibre el acoplamiento.
Desequilibrio en el equipo accionado Corrija el equilibrio del equipo accionado.
Rodamientos en mal estado Sustituya los rodamientos.
Rodamientos mal alineados Repare el motor.
Pesos de equilibrado desplazados Corrija el equilibrio del rotor.
Contradicción entre el equilibrado del Reequilibre el acoplamiento o el rotor.
rotor y el del acoplamiento (media
chaveta - chaveta entera)
Motor polifásico funcionando como Compruebe si existe algún circuito abierto.
monofásico
Juego axial excesivo Ajuste el rodamiento o añada suplementos.
Ruido de Rozamiento del ventilador contra el Corrija el montaje del ventilador.
rozaduras escudo o la cubierta de ventilador
Sujeción incorrecta a la placa de base Apriete los pernos de anclaje.
Funcionamiento Entrehierro no uniforme Compruebe y corrija el ajuste de los escudos o del rodamiento.
ruidoso Desequilibrio del rotor Corrija el equilibrio del rotor.
Rodamientos a Eje doblado o deformado Enderece o sustituya el eje.
alta temperatura Tensión excesiva de la correa Reduzca la tensión de la correa.
Poleas demasiado alejadas del apoyo Sitúe la polea más cerca del rodamiento del motor.
del eje
Diámetro de polea demasiado reducido Utilice poleas más grandes.
Mala alineación Corrija el problema realineando el accionamiento.
Lubricación inadecuada Utilice siempre grasa de la calidad y en la cantidad adecuadas en el
rodamiento.
Deterioro de la grasa o lubricante Elimine la grasa antigua, lave meticulosamente los rodamientos con
contaminado queroseno y rellene con grasa nueva.
Exceso de lubricante Reduzca la cantidad de grasa. El rodamiento no debe llenarse por
encima de la mitad de su capacidad.
Rodamiento sobrecargado Compruebe la alineación y el empuje lateral y axial.
Bola rota o caminos de rodadura Sustituya el rodamiento pero limpie primero el alojamiento
rugosos meticulosamente.
80 ABB Motors and Generators | Manual de motores de baja tensión, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Motori a bassa tensione
Manuale d'installazione, funzionamento e manutenzione
Sommario
1. Introduzione...............................................................................................................................83
1.1 Dichiarazione di conformità ................................................................................................83
1.2 Validità ...............................................................................................................................83
2. Considerazioni riguardanti la sicurezza..................................................................................83
3. Gestione .....................................................................................................................................84
3.1 Controllo al ricevimento .....................................................................................................84
3.2 Trasporto e immagazzinaggio ............................................................................................84
3.3 Sollevamento .....................................................................................................................84
3.4 Peso del motore ................................................................................................................84
4. Installazione e messa in servizio .............................................................................................85
4.1 Informazioni generali ..........................................................................................................85
4.2 Motori senza cuscinetti a sfere ...........................................................................................85
4.3 Controllo della resistenza d'isolamento ..............................................................................85
4.4 Fondazione ........................................................................................................................85
4.5 Bilanciamento e montaggio di semigiunti e pulegge ...........................................................86
4.6 Montaggio e allineamento del motore ................................................................................86
4.7 Forze radiali e accoppiamenti a cinghia..............................................................................86
4.8 Motori con fori di scarico condensa ...................................................................................86
4.9 Cablaggio e collegamenti elettrici .......................................................................................86
4.9.1 Collegamenti per diversi metodi di avviamento....................................................87
4.9.2 Collegamenti di dispositivi ausiliari ......................................................................87
4.10 Terminali e senso di rotazione ............................................................................................88
5. Condizioni di funzionamento ..................................................................................................89
5.1 Informazioni generali ......................................................................................................................89
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 81
6. Motori a bassa tensione in funzionamento a velocità variabile ..........................................90
6.1 Introduzione.......................................................................................................................90
6.2 Isolamento dell'avvolgimento .............................................................................................90
6.2.1 Selezione dell'isolamento dell'avvolgimento per convertitori ABB ........................90
6.2.2 Selezione dell'isolamento dell'avvolgimento per tutti gli altri convertitori .............90
6.3 Protezione termica ............................................................................................................90
6.4 Correnti nei cuscinetti ........................................................................................................90
6.4.1 Eliminazione delle correnti nei cuscinetti con convertitori ABB .............................91
6.4.2 Eliminazione delle correnti nei cuscinetti con tutti gli altri convertitori ...................91
6.5 Cablaggio, messa a terra ed EMC .....................................................................................91
6.6 Velocità operativa ..............................................................................................................91
6.7 Motori in applicazioni a velocità variabile ............................................................................91
6.7.1 Informazioni generali ...........................................................................................91
6.7.2 Caricabilità dei motori con convertitori serie AC_8_ _ e controllo DTC .................91
6.7.3 Caricabilità dei motori con convertitori serie AC_5_ _ ..........................................91
6.7.4 Caricabilità dei motori con altre origini di tensione con convertitori tipo PWM ......92
6.7.5 Sovraccarichi di breve periodo............................................................................92
6.8 Dati nominali riportati sulle targhette ..................................................................................92
6.9 Messa in servizio per applicazioni a velocità variabile .........................................................92
7. Manutenzione ............................................................................................................................93
7.1 Ispezione generale .............................................................................................................93
7.1.1 Motori in standby ................................................................................................93
7.2 Lubrificazione ....................................................................................................................93
7.2.1 Motori con cuscinetti a ingrassaggio permanente ...............................................93
7.2.2 Motori con cuscinetti ingrassabili ........................................................................94
7.2.3 Intervalli e quantità di lubrificazione .....................................................................94
7.2.4 Lubrificanti ..........................................................................................................96
8. Assistenza postvendita ............................................................................................................97
8.1 Parti di ricambio.................................................................................................................97
8.2 Smontaggio, riassemblaggio e riavvolgimento....................................................................97
8.3 Cuscinetti ..........................................................................................................................97
9. Requisiti ambientali ..................................................................................................................97
10. Risoluzione dei problemi ..........................................................................................................98
82 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Introduzione 2. Considerazioni riguardanti
la sicurezza
NOTA.
Seguire attentamente le seguenti istruzioni, atte Il motore deve essere installato e utilizzato da personale
ad assicurare un'appropriata e sicura installazione, qualificato che sia a conoscenza dei requisiti di sicurezza
funzionamento e manutenzione del motore. indicati dalle normative nazionali vigenti.
Tutto il personale addetto all'installazione, al
funzionamento e alla manutenzione del motore Le attrezzature antinfortunistiche necessarie alla
o delle apparecchiature associate deve essere a prevenzione di incidenti durante l'installazione e il
conoscenza di tali istruzioni. Il motore deve essere funzionamento del motore sull'impianto, devono essere
installato e utilizzato da personale qualificato che sia conformi alle normative nazionali vigenti.
a conoscenza dei requisiti di sicurezza indicati dalle
normative nazionali vigenti. L'inosservanza di queste
istruzioni rende nulle tutte le garanzie applicabili. AVVERTENZA!
I controlli per l'arresto di emergenza devono essere
dotati di dispositivi di blocco del riavvio. Dopo un
1.1 Dichiarazione di conformità arresto di emergenza, un comando di avvio può
avere effetto solo dopo il ripristino intenzionale dei
La conformità del prodotto finale con la Direttiva 2006/42/ dispositivi di blocco del riavvio.
CE (Macchine) deve essere confermata dalla parte
responsabile della messa in opera quando il motore viene
collegato al macchinario.
Istruzioni da osservare:
1. Non salire sul motore.
1.2 Validità 2. La temperatura della carcassa del motore può risultare
Queste istruzioni sono valide per i seguenti tipi di macchine estremamente calda al contatto della mano durante
elettriche ABB, utilizzate sia come motore che come il normale funzionamento e in particolare dopo lo
generatore. spegnimento.
3. Alcune applicazioni speciali posso richiedere istruzioni
serie MT*, MXMA, speciali (ad esempio alimentazione a mezzo convertitore
serie M1A*, M2A*/M3A*, M2B*/M3B*, M4B*, M2C*/M3C*, di frequenza).
M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, M2M*/M3M*, M2Q*, M2R*/M3R*, 4. Prestare attenzione a tutte le parti in rotazione del
M2V*/M3V* motore.
grandezze carcassa 56 - 450.
5. Non aprire le scatole morsetti mentre l'alimentazione è
attiva.
È disponibile un manuale specifico per i motori Ex,
"Manuale per i motori a bassa tensione per atmosfere
esplosive: installazione, funzionamento e manutenzione
(3GZF500730-47)".
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 83
3. Gestione I golfari di sollevamento devono essere serrati prima
dell'utilizzo. Se necessario, la posizione dei golfari di
sollevamento può essere regolata utilizzando rondelle
3.1 Controllo al ricevimento idonee.
Ispezionare immediatamente il motore al ricevimento per Assicurarsi che vengano utilizzate apparecchiature di
verificare che non abbia subito danni durante il trasporto, sollevamento appropriate e che le dimensioni dei ganci di
ad esempio alle estremità dell'albero, alle flange e sulle sollevamento siano adatte ai golfari.
superfici verniciate. Se si dovessero riscontrare danni,
contestarli subito allo spedizioniere. Fare attenzione a non danneggiare le apparecchiature
ausiliarie e i cavi collegati al motore.
Controllare tutte le caratteristiche elencate sulla
targhetta, in particolare tensione e tipo di collegamento Rimuovere eventuali attrezzature utilizzate per fissare il
dell'avvolgimento (a stella o a triangolo). Ad eccezione delle motore al pallet durante il trasporto.
grandezze più piccole, il tipo di cuscinetto è specificato
sulla targhetta con i dati nominali dei motori. ABB può fornire istruzioni per il sollevamento specifiche.
Si consiglia di utilizzare le resistenze anticondensa, se Ad eccezione delle grandezze più piccole (56 e 63), il peso
montate, per evitare formazione di condensa nel motore. dei motori ABB è specificato sulla targhetta con i dati
nominali.
Da fermo, il motore non deve essere sottoposto a vibrazioni
esterne, per evitare danni ai cuscinetti. Grandezza Alluminio Ghisa Agg.
carcassa per freno
I motori provvisti di cuscinetti a rulli cilindrici e/o a contatto Peso (kg) Peso (kg)
angolare devono essere bloccati durante il trasporto. 56 4,5 - -
63 6 - -
3.3 Sollevamento 71 8 13 5
80 14 20 8
Tutti i motori ABB pesanti più di 25 kg sono dotati di golfari 90 20 30 10
di sollevamento. 100 32 40 16
112 36 50 20
Per sollevare il motore devono essere utilizzati solo i golfari
132 93 90 30
di sollevamento principali, che non devono essere utilizzati
160 149 130 30
per sollevare il motore quando è agganciato ad altre
180 162 190 45
apparecchiature o strutture.
200 245 275 55
I golfari per le apparecchiature ausiliarie, quali freni e 225 300 360 75
ventole di raffreddamento separate, o scatole morsetti, 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 -
non devono essere utilizzati per sollevare il motore. A
315 - 1700 -
causa delle potenze diverse, degli accessori e delle
355 - 2700 -
apparecchiature ausiliarie montate, motori con la stessa
400 - 3500 -
carcassa potrebbero avere un baricentro diverso.
450 - 4500 -
I golfari danneggiati non devono essere utilizzati. Prima di
sollevare il motore assicurarsi che i golfari di sollevamento
Se il motore è dotato di ventola separata, richiedere il peso
non siano danneggiati.
ad ABB.
84 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4. Installazione e messa in servizio
La resistenza d'isolamento, corretta a 25 °C, non deve in
AVVERTENZA! nessun caso essere minore di 100 MΩ (misurati con 500
Scollegare il motore prima di operare su di esso o o 1000 VCC). Il valore della resistenza d'isolamento viene
sull'apparecchiatura azionata. dimezzato ogni 20 °C di aumento della temperatura. Per
la correzione dell'isolamento secondo la temperatura
desiderata, è possibile utilizzare la figura 1.
4.1 Informazioni generali
Tutti i dati nominali inerenti alla certificazione devono essere AVVERTENZA!
controllati accuratamente per garantire che protezione del Per evitare rischi di shock elettrici, la carcassa
motore e collegamento siano adeguati. del motore deve essere collegata a terra
e gli avvolgimenti devono essere scaricati
4.2 Motori senza cuscinetti a sfere immediatamente dopo ogni misurazione.
d'isolamento
Controllare la resistenza d'isolamento prima della messa
in servizio e quando si sospetti una formazione di umidità
negli avvolgimenti. Posizione del piede
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 85
4.5 Bilanciamento e montaggio 4.7 Forze radiali e accoppiamenti
di semigiunti e pulegge a cinghia
Come standard, la bilanciatura del motore viene effettuata Mettere in tensione le cinghie secondo le istruzioni del
utilizzando una mezza chiavetta. fornitore dell'apparecchiatura azionata. Non superare le
tensioni di cinghia massime (ovvero i carichi radiali sui
Semigiunti o pulegge devono essere bilanciati dopo la cuscinetti) indicate nei relativi cataloghi prodotto.
lavorazione delle sedi delle chiavette. La bilanciatura deve
essere eseguita con lo stesso metodo di bilanciatura
utilizzato per il motore. AVVERTENZA!
Un'eccessiva tensione delle cinghie danneggia i
Semigiunti e pulegge devono essere montati sull'albero cuscinetti e può causare una rottura dell'albero.
utilizzando esclusivamente attrezzature e utensili che non
danneggino i cuscinetti e le tenute.
Non montare mai semigiunti o pulegge utilizzando un 4.8 Motori con fori di scarico
martello, né rimuoverli utilizzando una leva infulcrata contro
il corpo del motore. condensa
Controllare che i fori di scarico e i tappi siano rivolti verso il
basso. Nei motori montati in posizione verticale, i tappi di
4.6 Montaggio e allineamento scarico possono essere in posizione orizzontale.
Montare il motore sulla fondazione utilizzando bulloni o Oltre ai terminali dell'avvolgimento principale e ai morsetti di
prigionieri idonei e inserire degli spessori tra la fondazione e terra, la scatola morsetti può contenere i collegamenti per
i piedi. termistori, scaldiglie o altri dispositivi ausiliari.
Allineare il motore utilizzando metodi idonei. Per il collegamento di tutti i cavi principali devono essere
utilizzati capicorda idonei. I cavi per i dispositivi ausiliari
Se possibile, praticare dei fori per le spine di centraggio e possono essere direttamente collegati ai relativi terminali.
fissare le spine nella posizione corretta.
I motori sono destinati solo a installazioni fisse. Salvo
Precisione di montaggio del semigiunto: controllare che il diversa indicazione, le filettature di ingresso dei cavi sono
gioco b sia minore di 0,05 mm e che la differenza tra a1 e espresse in unità metriche. La classe IP dei pressacavi
a2 sia anch'essa minore di 0,05 mm. deve essere almeno pari a quelle delle scatole morsetti.
Ricontrollare l'allineamento dopo il serraggio finale dei Al momento dell'installazione, devono essere utilizzati
bulloni o dei prigionieri. canaline o connettori dei cavi certificati.
Non superare i valori di carico ammessi per i cuscinetti e
riportati sui cataloghi dei prodotti. NOTA.
I cavi devono essere meccanicamente protetti e
Controllare che il motore sia sufficientemente areato. fissati vicino alla scatola morsetti in conformità a
Assicurarsi che oggetti vicini o l'azione diretta del sole non EN 60079-0 e alle normative locali in merito alle
irradino calore aggiuntivo al motore. installazioni.
Per i motori montati su flangia (ad esempio B5, B35, V1),
assicurarsi che la costruzione sia tale da consentire un
flusso di aria sufficiente sulla superficie esterna della flangia. Gli ingressi cavi non utilizzati devono essere chiusi con
appositi tappi aventi la stessa classe di protezione e classe
IP della scatola morsetti.
86 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4.9.1 Collegamenti per diversi metodi di
AVVERTENZA! avviamento
Per gli ingressi cavi, utilizzare pressacavi e tenute
conformi al tipo di protezione e al tipo e al diametro La scatola morsetti dei motori standard a velocità singola
del cavo. contiene normalmente 6 terminali dell'avvolgimento e
almeno un morsetto di terra. In questo modo è possibile
realizzare l'avviamento DOL o Y/D.
La messa a terra deve essere eseguita in accordo
alle normative locali prima di collegare il motore Per i motori speciali o a due velocità, seguire attentamente
all'alimentazione di rete. le istruzioni di collegamento presenti all'interno della scatola
morsetti o nel manuale del motore.
Il morsetto di terra posto sulla carcassa deve essere
collegato alla messa a terra protettiva con un cavo come La tensione e il tipo di collegamento sono indicati sulla
illustrato nella Tabella 5 della normativa IEC/EN 60034-1: targhetta del motore.
Assicurarsi che il grado di protezione del motore sia L'isolamento dei sensori termici soddisfa i requisiti di
adatto alle condizioni ambientali e climatiche. Ad esempio, isolamento base.
assicurarsi che non possa entrare acqua all'interno del
motore o delle scatole morsetti.
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 87
4.10 Terminali e senso
di rotazione
L'albero ruota in senso orario visto dal lato comando
quando la sequenza di fase L1, L2, L3 è collegata ai
terminali come illustrato nella figura 3.
88 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
5. Condizioni di funzionamento
5.1 Informazioni generali
Salvo diversa indicazione nella targhetta dei dati nominali, i
motori sono progettati per le condizioni ambientali seguenti:
AVVERTENZA!
L'inosservanza delle istruzioni o la mancata
manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura può
compromettere la sicurezza e quindi impedire
l'utilizzo del motore.
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 89
6. Motori a bassa tensione in funzionamento
a velocità variabile
6.1 Introduzione 6.2.2 Selezione dell'isolamento
dell'avvolgimento per tutti gli altri
In questa sezione del manuale vengono fornite istruzioni
convertitori
aggiuntive per i motori utilizzati con alimentazione a mezzo
convertitore di frequenza. Il motore è progettato per Lo sforzo di tensione deve rientrare nei limiti accettati
funzionare con un singolo convertitore di frequenza, non Per garantire la sicurezza dell'applicazione, contattare
è prevista la possibilità di motori funzionanti in parallelo il fornitore del sistema. Quando si dimensiona il motore
alimentati da un convertitore di frequenza. Seguire le è necessario tenere in considerazione l'influenza degli
istruzioni fornite dal produttore del convertitore. eventuali filtri.
Informazioni aggiuntive possono essere richieste da ABB
per stabilire l'idoneità di determinati tipi di motori utilizzati in
applicazioni e/o con modifiche progettuali speciali. 6.3 Protezione termica
Per la maggior parte, i motori illustrati nel presente manuale
sono dotati di termistori PTC o di altri tipi di RTD negli
6.2 Isolamento dell'avvolgimento avvolgimenti dello statore. Si consiglia di collegarli al
convertitore di frequenza. Per ulteriori informazioni, vedere il
Gli azionamenti a velocità variabile provocano maggiori
capitolo 4.9.2.
sollecitazioni di tensione sull'avvolgimento del motore
rispetto all'alimentazione sinusoidale. Pertanto è necessario
dimensionare l'isolamento dell'avvolgimento del motore e
il filtro in corrispondenza dell'uscita del convertitore in base 6.4 Correnti nei cuscinetti
alle istruzioni riportate di seguito.
Utilizzare cuscinetti isolati o strutture di cuscinetti, filtri CMF
e cablaggi e metodi di messa a terra idonei in base alle
6.2.1 Selezione dell'isolamento dell'avvolgi- istruzioni fornite di seguito e utilizzando la tabella 6.1.
mento per convertitori ABB
Per azionamenti singoli, come gli ABB serie AC_8_ _
e AC_5_ _ con unità di alimentazione a diodi (tensione
CC non controllata), la selezione dell'isolamento
dell'avvolgimento e dei filtri può essere effettuata in base
alla tabella 6.1.
PN < 100 kW PN ≥ 100 kW o PN ≥ 350 kW o
IEC315 ≤ Grandezza carcassa ≤ IEC355 IEC400 ≤ Grandezza carcassa ≤ IEC450
UN ≤ 500 V Motore standard Motore standard Motore standard
+ cuscinetto N isolato + cuscinetto N isolato
+ Filtro di common mode
500 V >UN ≤ 600 V Motore standard Motore standard Motore standard
+ filtro dU/dt (reattore) + filtro dU/dt (reattore) + cuscinetto N isolato
OPPURE + cuscinetto N isolato + filtro dU/dt (reattore)
Isolamento rinforzato OPPURE + Filtro di common mode
Isolamento rinforzato OPPURE
+ cuscinetto N isolato Isolamento rinforzato
+ cuscinetto N isolato
+ Filtro di common mode
500 V >UN ≤ 600 V Motore standard Motore standard Motore standard
(lunghezza cavo > 150 m) + cuscinetto N isolato + cuscinetto N isolato
+ Filtro di common mode
Per ulteriori informazioni sulla resistenza di frenatura e sui convertitori con alimentatore controllato, contattare ABB.
90 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6.4.1 Eliminazione delle correnti nei Ulteriori informazioni sulla messa a terra e il cablaggio di
cuscinetti con convertitori ABB azionamenti a velocità variabile sono disponibili nel manuale
"Messa a terra e cablaggio degli azionamenti a velocità
Per convertitori di frequenza ABB come le serie AC_8_ _ e
variabile" (codice: 3AFY 61201998).
AC_5_ _ con unità di alimentazione a diodi, è necessario
utilizzare i metodi secondo la tabella 6.1 per evitare correnti
dannose nei cuscinetti dei motori.
6.6 Velocità operativa
Per velocità superiori alla velocità nominale indicata sulla
NOTA.
targhetta del motore o nel relativo catalogo prodotti,
Si consigliano cuscinetti isolati con sede interna
assicurarsi che non venga superata la massima velocità
e/o esterna rivestita in ossido di alluminio o con
di rotazione ammissibile del motore o la velocità critica
elementi rotanti in ceramica. I rivestimenti in ossido
dell'intera applicazione.
di alluminio vengono anche trattati con sigillante
per impedire a sporco e umidità di penetrare nel
rivestimento poroso. Per l'esatto tipo di isolamento
dei cuscinetti, vedere la targhetta del motore. Non è 6.7 Motori in applicazioni
consentito cambiare il tipo dei cuscinetti o il metodo
di isolamento senza l'autorizzazione di ABB.
a velocità variabile
6.7.1 Informazioni generali
6.4.2 Eliminazione delle correnti nei
Con i convertitori di frequenza ABB, il dimensionamento
cuscinetti con tutti gli altri convertitori dei motori può essere eseguito con il programma per il
Gli utenti sono responsabili della protezione del motore e dimensionamento DriveSize di ABB. Lo strumento può
dell'apparecchiatura azionata dalle correnti pericolose nei essere scaricato dal sito Web di ABB (www.abb.com/
cuscinetti. È possibile utilizzare le istruzioni descritte nel motors&generators).
capitolo 6.4.1 come linee guida, ma la loro efficacia non
può essere garantita in tutti i casi. Per applicazioni alimentate da altri convertitori, è necessario
dimensionare i motori manualmente. Per ulteriori
informazioni, contattare ABB.
6.5 Cablaggio, messa a terra
Le curve di caricabilità, o curve di capacità di carico,
ed EMC si basano sulla tensione di alimentazione nominale.
Il funzionamento in condizioni di sovratensione o
Per fornire la messa a terra appropriata e garantire la
sottotensione può influire sulle prestazioni dell'applicazione.
conformità a tutti i requisiti EMC applicabili, i motori
superiori a 30 kW devono essere cablati utilizzando cavi
simmetrici schermati e pressacavi EMC, ovvero pressacavi 6.7.2 Caricabilità dei motori con convertitori
che forniscono aderenza a 360°. serie AC_8_ _ e controllo DTC
I cavi simmetrici schermati sono consigliati anche per Le curve di caricabilità illustrate nelle Figure 5a - 5d sono
motori più piccoli. Eseguire la disposizione a terra a 360° valide per convertitori ABB serie AC_8_ _ con tensione
per tutti gli ingressi cavo come descritto nelle istruzioni CC non controllata e controllo DTC. Le figure mostrano
per i pressacavi. Torcere le schermature dei cavi insieme e la coppia di uscita continua massima approssimativa dei
collegare al morsetto/barra bus di terra più vicino all'interno motori in funzione della frequenza dell'alimentazione. La
della scatola morsetti, dell'armadietto del convertitore, ecc. coppia di uscita è fornita come percentuale della coppia
nominale del motore. I valori sono indicativi; i valori esatti
sono disponibili su richiesta.
NOTA.
È necessario utilizzare pressacavi con aderenza a
360° in tutti i punti terminali, ad esempio su motore, NOTA.
convertitore, eventuali interruttori di sicurezza e così Non superare la velocità massima del motore e
via. dell'applicazione.
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 91
NOTA.
6.9 Messa in servizio per
Non superare la velocità massima del motore e applicazioni a velocità
dell'applicazione.
variabile
La messa in servizio per applicazioni a velocità variabile
6.7.4 Caricabilità dei motori con altre origini
deve essere eseguita attenendosi alle istruzioni per il
di tensione con convertitori tipo PWM convertitore di frequenza e alle leggi e normative nazionali.
Per altri convertitori con tensione CC non controllata e Devono inoltre essere tenuti in considerazione i requisiti e le
frequenza di commutazione minima di 3 kHz (200…500 limitazioni imposti dall'applicazione.
V), è possibile utilizzare come linee guida le istruzioni per il
dimensionamento illustrate nel capitolo 6.7.3. Tuttavia, si Tutti i parametri necessari per l'impostazione del
deve notare che l'effettiva caricabilità termica può anche convertitore devono essere ricavati dalle targhette del
essere inferiore. Contattare il produttore del convertitore o il motore. I parametri richiesti in genere sono:
fornitore del sistema.
- tensione nominale
- corrente nominale
NOTA. - frequenza nominale
La caricabilità termica effettiva di un motore può - velocità nominale
essere minore di quella indicata nelle curve. - potenza nominale
6.8 Dati nominali riportati sulle ABB raccomanda l'utilizzo di tutte le caratteristiche
di protezione fornite dal convertitore per migliorare la
targhette sicurezza dell'applicazione. I convertitori garantiscono
in genere caratteristiche quali (nomi e disponibilità delle
L'utilizzo di motori ABB in applicazioni a velocità variabile caratteristiche dipendono dal produttore e dal modello del
non richiede, generalmente, targhette aggiuntive. I convertitore):
parametri necessari alla messa in servizio del convertitore
sono disponibili nella targhetta principale. Tuttavia, in - velocità minima
alcune applicazioni speciali i motori possono essere dotati - velocità massima
di ulteriori targhette per applicazioni a velocità variabile. Tali - tempi di accelerazione e decelerazione
targhette includono le informazioni seguenti: - corrente massima
- coppia massima
- intervallo di velocità - protezione da arresti accidentali
- intervallo di potenza
- intervallo di tensione e corrente
- tipo di coppia (costante o quadratica)
- tipo di convertitore e frequenza di commutazione
minima richiesta.
92 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7. Manutenzione 7.1.1 Motori in standby
Se il motore rimane in standby per un lungo periodo di
tempo su una nave o in altri ambienti con vibrazioni, è
AVVERTENZA!
necessario adottare le seguenti precauzioni:
Durante le fermate, all'interno della scatola morsetti
potrebbe essere presente tensione utilizzata per 1. L'albero deve essere fatto ruotare periodicamente ogni
alimentare resistenze o riscaldare direttamente 2 settimane (riportare gli interventi) eseguendo un avvio
l'avvolgimento. del sistema. Nel caso l'avvio non sia possibile, per
qualsiasi motivo, ruotare l'albero a mano una volta alla
settimana in modo che assuma posizioni diverse. Le
vibrazioni causate da altre apparecchiature della nave
7.1 Ispezione generale causeranno la vaiolatura dei cuscinetti che può essere
ridotta al minimo con il funzionamento normale o la
1. Ispezionare il motore a intervalli regolari, almeno con
rotazione manuale.
cadenza annuale. La frequenza dei controlli dipende,
ad esempio, dal livello di umidità presente nell'ambiente 2. È necessario ingrassare il cuscinetto ogni anno mentre
e dalle specifiche condizioni climatiche e, determinata si ruota l'albero (riportare gli interventi). Se il motore è
inizialmente in modo sperimentale, deve essere poi stato fornito con un cuscinetto a sfere lato azionamento,
rispettata con estrema precisione. rimuovere il blocco per il trasporto prima di ruotare
2. Mantenere il motore pulito e assicurare una buona l'albero. In caso di trasporto, rimontare il blocco.
ventilazione. Se il motore è utilizzato in un ambiente 3. Per prevenire danni ai cuscinetti, è opportuno evitare
polveroso, il sistema di ventilazione deve essere tutte le vibrazioni. È necessario seguire tutte le
regolarmente pulito e controllato. istruzioni fornite nel manuale per la messa in opera
3. Controllare le condizioni delle tenute dell'albero (es. e la manutenzione del motore. Se tali istruzioni non
V-ring o tenuta radiale) e se necessario sostituirle. vengono seguito, la garanzia non coprirà eventuali danni
all'avvolgimento e ai cuscinetti.
4. Controllare le condizioni dei collegamenti e dei bulloni di
fissaggio e fondazione.
5. Controllare le condizioni dei cuscinetti prestando 7.2 Lubrificazione
attenzione ai rumori anomali, alle vibrazioni, alla
temperatura, analizzando il grasso consumato o
effettuando monitoraggi con rilevatori SPM dove AVVERTENZA!
esistenti. Prestare particolare attenzione ai cuscinetti Prestare attenzione a tutte le parti rotanti.
quando la durata prevista è prossima al termine.
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 93
Ore di funzionamento per cuscinetti lubrificati a vita a Ingrassaggio con il motore fermo
temperature ambiente di 25 °C e 40°C: Se non è possibile eseguire l'ingrassaggio dei cuscinetti
con il motore in funzione, la lubrificazione può essere
Ore di funzio- Ore di funzio- eseguita a motore fermo.
Grandezza namento namento – In questo caso usare solo la metà della quantità di
carcassa Poli a 25 °C a 40 °C grasso richiesta, quindi mettere in funzione il motore per
56 2 52.000 33.000 alcuni minuti alla velocità massima.
56 4-8 65.000 41.000 – Quando il motore si ferma, introdurre nel cuscinetto il
63 2 49.000 31.000 resto del grasso.
63 4-8 63.000 40.000 – Dopo 1-2 ore di funzionamento, chiudere il tappo di
71 2 67.000 42.000 scarico del grasso o la valvola di chiusura, se montata.
71 4-8 100.000 56.000
B. Lubrificazione automatica
80-90 2 100.000 65.000
80-90 4-8 100.000 96.000 In caso di lubrificazione automatica, rimuovere
100-112 2 89.000 56.000 permanentemente il tappo di scarico del grasso o aprire la
100-112 4-8 100.000 89.000 valvola di chiusura, se montata.
132 2 67.000 42.000
132 4-8 100.000 77.000 Si raccomanda di utilizzare esclusivamente sistemi
160 2 60.000 38.000
elettromeccanici.
160 4-8 100.000 74.000 La quantità di grasso necessario per ogni intervallo di
180 2 55.000 34.000 lubrificazione riportata nella tabella deve essere triplicata
180 4-8 100.000 70.000 quando si utilizza un sistema di lubrificazione centrale.
200 2 41.000 25.000 Quando si utilizza un'unità di ingrassaggio automatico
200 4-8 95.000 60.000 più piccole (una o due cartucce per motore), è possibile
225 2 36.000 23.000 utilizzare la quantità normale di grasso.
225 4-8 88.000 56.000
Per l'ingrassaggio automatico dei motori a due poli, seguire
250 2 31.000 20.000
la nota sui lubrificanti per i motori a due poli nella sezione
250 4-8 80.000 50.000
relativa ai lubrificanti.
Dati validi fino a 60 Hz.
Il grasso utilizzato deve essere idoneo per la lubrificazione
automatica. Controllare il distributore del sistema di
7.2.2 Motori con cuscinetti ingrassabili lubrificazione automatica e le raccomandazioni del
Targhetta con i dati sulla lubrificazione e produttore del grasso.
suggerimenti generali sulla lubrificazione Esempio di calcolo della quantità di grasso per il
Se il motore è dotato di targhetta con i dati di lubrificazione, sistema di lubrificazione automatica
seguire i valori indicati. Sistema di lubrificazione centrale: Motore IEC M3_P 315_
Gli intervalli di lubrificazione in relazione a montaggio, 4-poli in rete a 50 Hz, l'intervallo di lubrificazione secondo la
temperatura ambiente e velocità di rotazione sono indicati tabella è 7600 h/55 g (DE) e 7600 h/40g (NDE):
sulla targhetta con le informazioni per la lubrificazione. (DE) RLI = 55 g/7600h*3*24 = 0,52 g/giorno
Durante il primo avviamento o dopo la lubrificazione di un
cuscinetto, è possibile che si manifesti temporaneamente (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7600*3*24 = 0,38 g/giorno
un aumento di temperatura, per circa 10-20 ore. Esempio di calcolo della quantità di grasso per unità
È possibile che alcuni motori siano muniti di un raccoglitore di lubrificazione automatica (cartuccia) singola
per il grasso usato. Seguire le istruzioni specifiche fornite (DE) RLI = 55 g/7600h*24 = 0,17 g/giorno
per l'attrezzatura.
(NDE) RLI = 40 g/7600*24 = 0,13 g/giorno
A. Lubrificazione manuale
RLI = Intervallo di lubrificazione, DE = Lato comando, NDE = Lato
Ingrassaggio con il motore in funzione opposto comando
– Rimuovere il tappo di scarico del grasso o aprire la
valvola di chiusura se montata. 7.2.3 Intervalli e quantità di lubrificazione
– Controllare che il canale di lubrificazione sia aperto.
– Iniettare nel cuscinetto la quantità di grasso specificata. Gli intervalli di lubrificazione per i motori verticali sono la
– Far funzionare il motore per 1-2 ore per assicurarsi metà dei valori riportati nella tabella seguente.
che tutto il grasso in eccesso venga spinto fuori dai
A titolo indicativo, nella tabella seguente sono illustrate le
cuscinetti. Chiudere il tappo di scarico del grasso o la
durate che possono essere ottenute in conformità a L1.
valvola di chiusura, se montata.
Per applicazioni con temperature ambiente più elevate,
contattare ABB. La formula per passare dai valori L1 a valori
approssimativamente corrispondenti a L10 è L10 = 2,0 x L1,
con lubrificazione manuale.
94 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Gli intervalli di lubrificazione si basano su una temperatura In caso di funzionamento a velocità superiori, ad es. in
di funzionamento dei cuscinetti di 80 °C (temperatura applicazioni con convertitori di frequenza, o a velocità
ambiente +25 °C). inferiori con carichi pesanti, sarà necessario ridurre gli
intervalli di lubrificazione.
NOTA.
Un aumento della temperatura ambiente determina
AVVERTENZA!
un pari aumento della temperatura dei cuscinetti. I
La temperatura massima di esercizio del grasso e
valori degli intervalli devono essere dimezzati ogni
dei cuscinetti, +110 °C, non deve essere superata.
15 °C di aumento della temperatura dei cuscinetti
La velocità massima nominale del motore non deve
e possono essere raddoppiati ogni 15 °C di
essere superata.
diminuzione della temperatura dei cuscinetti.
Quantità
Grandezza 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
di grasso kW kW kW kW
carcassa g/min g/min g/min g/min g/min g/min
g/cuscinetto
Cuscinetti a sfere, intervalli di lubrificazione in ore di funzionamento
112 10 tutti 10.000 13.000 tutti 18.000 21.000 tutti 25.000 tutti 28.000
132 15 tutti 9.000 11.000 tutti 17.000 19.000 tutti 23.000 tutti 26.500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9.000 12.000 ≤ 15 18.000 21.500 ≤ 11 24.000 tutti 24.000
160 25 > 18,5 7.500 10.000 > 15 15.000 18.000 > 11 22.500 tutti 24.000
180 30 ≤ 22 7.000 9.000 ≤ 22 15.500 18.500 ≤ 15 24.000 tutti 24.000
180 30 > 22 6.000 8.500 > 22 14.000 17.000 > 15 21.000 tutti 24.000
200 40 ≤ 37 5.500 8.000 ≤ 30 14.500 17.500 ≤ 22 23.000 tutti 24.000
200 40 > 37 3.000 5.500 > 30 10.000 12.000 > 22 16.000 tutti 20.000
225 50 ≤ 45 4.000 6.500 ≤ 45 13.000 16.500 ≤ 30 22.000 tutti 24.000
225 50 > 45 1.500 2.500 > 45 5.000 6.000 > 30 8.000 tutti 10.000
250 60 ≤ 55 2.500 4.000 ≤ 55 9.000 11.500 ≤ 37 15.000 tutti 18.000
250 60 > 55 1.000 1.500 > 55 3.500 4.500 > 37 6.000 tutti 7.000
2801) 60 tutti 2.000 3.500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - tutti 8.000 10.500 tutti 14.000 tutti 17.000
280 35 tutti 1.900 3.200 - - - -
280 40 - - tutti 7.800 9.600 tutti 13.900 tutti 15.000
315 35 tutti 1.900 3.200 - - - -
315 55 - - tutti 5.900 7.600 tutti 11.800 tutti 12.900
355 35 tutti 1.900 3.200 - - - -
355 70 - - tutti 4.000 5.600 tutti 9.600 tutti 10.700
400 40 tutti 1.500 2.700 - - - -
400 85 - - tutti 3.200 4.700 tutti 8.600 tutti 9.700
450 40 tutti 1.500 2.700 - - - -
450 95 - - tutti 2.500 3.900 tutti 7.700 tutti 8.700
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 95
7.2.4 Lubrificanti I grassi seguenti possono essere utilizzati per motori in
ghisa ad alta velocità, ma non miscelati con grassi con
composto al litio:
AVVERTENZA!
Non mischiare grassi di tipo diverso. - Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102 (base di poliurea)
Lubrificanti non compatibili possono danneggiare i - Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (base di poliurea)
cuscinetti.
Se vengono utilizzati altri lubrificanti, controllare con il
produttore che le caratteristiche corrispondano a quelle
Per il reingrassaggio utilizzare solo lubrificanti specifici per dei lubrificanti riportati sopra. Gli intervalli di lubrificazione
cuscinetti a sfere che abbiano le seguenti caratteristiche: si basano sui grassi ad alte prestazioni elencati sopra.
L'utilizzo di altri tipi di grasso può ridurre l'intervallo.
– grasso di buona qualità con composto al sapone di litio
e con olio PAO o minerale
– viscosità dell'olio di base 100-160 cST a 40 °C
– consistenza NLGI grado 1,5-3 *)
– intervallo di temperatura -30 °C - +120 °C, continuativa
AVVERTENZA!
Si sconsiglia l'uso di lubrificanti con additivi EP in
presenza di elevate temperature dei cuscinetti in
carcasse di grandezza 280-450.
NOTA.
Utilizzare sempre grasso per alte velocità se si usano
motori a due poli ad alta velocità in cui il fattore
velocità è superiore a 480.000 (calcolato come
Dm x n, dove Dm = diametro medio del cuscinetto,
in mm; n = velocità di rotazione, in g/min).
96 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
8. Assistenza postvendita 9. Requisiti ambientali
Nella maggior parte dei motori ABB il livello di rumorosità
8.1 Parti di ricambio non supera 82 dB (A) (± 3 dB) a 50 Hz.
Se non diversamente specificato, le parti di ricambio I valori per motori specifici sono indicati nel relativo catalogo
devono essere originali o approvate da ABB. prodotto. Per alimentazione sinusoidale a 60 Hz aggiungere
Nell'ordinare le parti di ricambio di un motore, indicare circa 4 dB(A) ai valori a 50 Hz riportati nei cataloghi di
il numero di serie, la designazione completa del tipo e il prodotto.
codice prodotto, come indicato sulla targhetta del motore Per il livello di rumorosità con alimentazione con
stesso. convertitore di frequenza, contattare ABB.
8.3 Cuscinetti
I cuscinetti necessitano di cure speciali.
NOTA.
Se non espressamente autorizzata dal costruttore,
qualsiasi riparazione eseguita dall'utilizzatore finale
fa decadere ogni responsabilità del costruttore sulla
conformità del motore fornito.
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 97
10. Risoluzione dei problemi
Le istruzioni seguenti non coprono tutti i particolari o Risoluzione dei problemi del motore
variazioni nelle apparecchiature, né forniscono informazioni
su tutte le possibili condizioni che potrebbero verificarsi La manutenzione e la riparazione dei guasti del motore
durante l'installazione, il funzionamento e la manutenzione. devono essere eseguite da personale qualificato
Per ulteriori informazioni, contattare l'ufficio commerciale utilizzando utensili e attrezzature idonei.
ABB di zona.
98 ABB Motors and Generators | Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
PROBLEMA CAUSA AZIONE
Il motore accelera Carico eccessivo Ridurre il carico.
troppo lentamente Bassa tensione all'avviamento Controllare che la resistenza non sia eccessiva. Assicurarsi che la
e/o consuma sezione dei cavi sia adeguata.
molta corrente
Rotore a gabbia di scoiattolo difettoso Sostituire con un rotore nuovo.
Tensione applicata troppo bassa Correggere l'alimentazione.
Senso di rotazione Sequenza delle fasi non corretta Invertire i collegamenti sul motore o sul quadro di comando.
errato
Il motore si Sovraccarico Ridurre il carico.
surriscalda durante La carcassa o le aperture per il Aprire i fori di ventilazione e controllare che vi sia un flusso d'aria
il funzionamento passaggio d'aria potrebbero essere continuo dal motore.
intasate e impedire la ventilazione del
motore.
Il motore potrebbe avere una fase Assicurarsi che tutti i conduttori e i cavi siano collegati correttamente.
aperta
Avvolgimento a terra Eseguire il riavvolgimento del motore.
Tensione ai morsetti non bilanciata Controllare che non vi siano conduttori, collegamenti o trasformatori
guasti.
Il motore vibra Motore non allineato Riallineare.
Supporto debole Rinforzare la base.
Giunti non bilanciati Bilanciare i giunti.
Apparecchiatura azionata non Bilanciare l'apparecchiatura azionata.
bilanciata
Cuscinetti difettosi Sostituire i cuscinetti.
Cuscinetti non in linea Riparare il motore
Pesi di bilanciamento spostati Bilanciare il rotore.
Bilanciamento del rotore e del giunto Bilanciare il giunto o il rotore.
diverso (mezza chiavetta - chiavetta
intera)
Motore polifase funzionante in Controllare che non vi siano circuiti aperti.
monofase
Gioco eccessivo Regolare il cuscinetto o aggiungere uno spessore.
Rumore di Ventola che sfrega sullo scudo o sul Correggere il montaggio della ventola.
sfregamento copriventola
Basamento allentato Serrare i bulloni di fissaggio.
Funzionamento Traferro non uniforme Controllare e regolare il montaggio dello scudo o dei cuscinetti.
rumoroso Rotore sbilanciato Bilanciare il rotore.
Cuscinetti caldi Albero piegato Raddrizzare o sostituire l'albero.
Cinghia eccessivamente tesa Ridurre la tensione della cinghia.
Pulegge troppo lontane dalla spalla Avvicinare le pulegge al cuscinetto del motore.
dell'albero
Diametro delle pulegge troppo piccolo Utilizzare pulegge più grandi.
Disallineamento Correggere riallineando l'azionamento.
Grasso insufficiente Mantenere la qualità e la quantità di grasso corrette nel cuscinetto.
Deterioramento del grasso o Rimuovere il grasso vecchio, lavare a fondo i cuscinetti con cherosene
contaminazione del lubrificante e sostituire con grasso nuovo.
Lubrificante in eccesso Ridurre la quantità di grasso, il cuscinetto deve essere pieno solo fino
a metà.
Cuscinetto sovraccarico Controllare allineamento e spinta laterale e finale.
Sfere rotte o piste danneggiate Pulire bene la sede del cuscinetto e sostituirlo.
Manuale motori in bassa tensione, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 99
Motores de baixa tensão
Manual de instalação, operação, manutenção e segurança
Índice
1. Introdução ...............................................................................................................................103
1.1 Declaração de Conformidade ..........................................................................................103
1.2 Validade...........................................................................................................................103
2. Considerações relativas à segurança...................................................................................103
3. Manuseamento .......................................................................................................................104
3.1 Verificação no momento da recepção ..............................................................................104
3.2 Transporte e armazenamento ..........................................................................................104
3.3 Elevação ..........................................................................................................................104
3.4 Peso do motor ................................................................................................................104
4. Instalação e colocação em serviço.......................................................................................106
4.1 Geral ...............................................................................................................................106
4.2 Motores não equipados com rolamentos de esferas ........................................................106
4.3 Verificação da resistência de isolamento ..........................................................................106
4.4 Fundações ......................................................................................................................106
4.5 Equilibrar e instalar os meios-acoplamentos e polias .......................................................107
4.6 Montagem e alinhamento do motor .................................................................................107
4.7 Forças radiais e correias de transmissão .........................................................................107
4.8 Motores com bujões de drenagem para condensação ....................................................107
4.9 Cablagem e ligações eléctricas........................................................................................107
4.9.1 Ligações para diferentes métodos de arranque ................................................108
4.9.2 Ligações de equipamentos auxiliares................................................................109
4.10 Terminais e sentido de rotação ........................................................................................109
5. Funcionamento ......................................................................................................................110
5.1 Geral ...............................................................................................................................110
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 101
6. Motores de baixa tensão em aplicações com velocidade variável ...................................111
6.1 Introdução .......................................................................................................................111
6.2 Isolamento dos enrolamentos ..........................................................................................111
6.2.1 Selecção do isolamento dos enrolamentos para conversores ABB ...................111
6.2.2 Selecção do isolamento dos enrolamentos com todos os outros conversores 111
6.3 Protecção térmica ..........................................................................................................111
6.4 Correntes nos rolamentos................................................................................................112
6.4.1 Eliminação de correntes nos rolamentos com conversores ABB .......................112
6.4.2 Eliminação de correntes nos rolamentos com todos os outros conversores .....112
6.5 Cablagem, ligação à terra e CEM ....................................................................................112
6.6 Velocidade de funcionamento ..........................................................................................112
6.7 Motores em aplicações de velocidade variável.................................................................112
6.7.1 Geral ................................................................................................................112
6.7.2 Capacidade de carga do motor com conversores da série AC_8_ _
com controlo DTC ............................................................................................113
6.7.3 Capacidade de carga do motor com conversores da série AC_5_ _ ................113
6.7.4 Capacidade de carga do motor com outros conversores
de alimentação tipo PWM.................................................................................113
6.7.5 Sobrecargas de curta duração .........................................................................113
6.8 Chapas de características ...............................................................................................113
6.9 Colocação em serviço da aplicação de velocidade variável..............................................113
7. Manutenção .............................................................................................................................114
7.1 Inspecção geral ...............................................................................................................114
7.1.1 Motores de reserva ..........................................................................................114
7.2 Lubrificação .....................................................................................................................114
7.2.1 Motores com rolamentos que não necessitam de lubrificação .........................114
7.2.2 Motores com rolamentos que necessitam de lubrificação .................................115
7.2.3 Intervalos de lubrificação e quantidades de lubrificante .....................................116
7.2.4 Lubrificantes .....................................................................................................118
8. Apoio pós-venda .....................................................................................................................119
8.1 Peças sobressalentes ......................................................................................................119
8.2 Desmontar, voltar a montar e rebobinar ...........................................................................119
8.3 Rolamentos .....................................................................................................................119
9. Requisitos ambientais ............................................................................................................119
10. Resolução de problemas .......................................................................................................120
102 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Introdução 2. Considerações relativas
à segurança
NOTA!
Estas instruções devem ser seguidas para assegurar O motor destina-se a ser instalado e utilizado por pessoal
uma correcta e segura instalação, operação e qualificado, familiarizado com os requisitos de segurança e
manutenção do motor. Devem ser disponibilizadas saúde relevantes e com a legislação nacional.
e seguidas pelo pessoal encarregue da instalação,
operação e manutenção deste motor ou do Os equipamentos de segurança necessários para
equipamento associado. O motor destina-se a a prevenção de acidentes no local de montagem e
ser instalado e utilizado por pessoal qualificado, funcionamento devem ser fornecidos de acordo com
familiarizado com os requisitos de segurança e regulamentos locais.
saúde relevantes e com a legislação nacional.
Ignorar estas instruções poderá invalidar todas as
garantias aplicáveis. AVISO!
Os controlos de paragem de emergência têm de
ser equipados com bloqueios de reinício. Após a
1.1 Declaração de Conformidade paragem de emergência, um novo comando de
início pode ter efeito apenas depois de o bloqueio
A conformidade do produto final com a Directiva 2006/42/ de reinício ter sido intencionalmente reposto.
CE (Maquinaria) tem de ser estabelecida pela parte
responsável pela colocação em serviço, quando o motor é
Pontos a observar:
instalado na máquina.
1. Não subir para cima do motor.
2. A temperatura da carcaça exterior do motor pode ser
1.2 Validade mais quente ao tacto durante o funcionamento normal
Estas instruções são válidas para os seguintes tipos de e, especialmente, depois da paragem.
máquinas eléctricas da ABB, utilizadas como motores ou 3. Algumas aplicações especiais do motor podem
geradores: requerer instruções adicionais (por exemplo, se
for utilizada uma alimentação com conversor de
séries MT*, MXMA, frequência).
séries M1A*, M2A*/M3A*, M2B*/M3B*, M4B*, M2C*/M3C*, 4. Tenha atenção às peças rotativas do motor.
M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, M2M*/M3M*, M2Q*, M2R*/M3R*, 5. Não abrir as caixas de terminais enquanto estiverem
M2V*/M3V* com energia.
com os tamanhos 56 a 450.
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 103
3. Manuseamento Não se devem utilizar patilhas de elevação danificadas.
Verifique se as patilhas de elevação ou os olhais integrados
não estão danificados, antes de proceder à elevação.
3.1 Verificação no momento
Os parafusos dos olhais de elevação deverão ser
da recepção apertados antes de iniciar a elevação. Se necessário, a
Imediatamente após a recepção, verifique o motor para posição do parafuso deve ser ajustada utilizando anilhas
identificar danos exteriores (por exemplo, extremidades adequadas como espaçadores.
dos veios, flanges e superfícies pintadas) e, se forem Certifique-se de que é utilizado o equipamento de elevação
encontrados danos, informe sem demora o transitário. adequado e de que os tamanhos dos ganchos são
Verifique todos os dados da chapa de características, adequados para as patilhas de elevação.
nomeadamente a tensão e as ligações dos enrolamentos Devem ser tomados os cuidados necessários para não
(estrela ou triângulo). O tipo de rolamentos é especificado danificar o equipamento auxiliar e os cabos ligados ao
na chapa de características para todos os motores, motor.
excepto para os motores de tamanhos mais reduzidos.
Remova os dispositivos instalados para transporte e que
No caso de uma aplicação de transmissão de velocidade fixam o motor à palete.
variável, verificar a capacidade de carga máxima permitida
de acordo com a frequência que se encontra gravada na A ABB disponibiliza instruções de elevação específicas.
segunda chapa de características do motor.
AVISO!
3.2 Transporte e armazenamento Durante os trabalhos de elevação, montagem ou
O motor deve ser sempre armazenado no interior (com manutenção, devem ser implementadas todas
temperaturas acima de –20 °C), em ambientes secos, não as considerações necessárias sobre segurança,
sujeitos a vibrações e sem poeiras. Durante o transporte, devendo ser prestada especial atenção ao facto de
devem ser evitados choques, quedas e humidade. Para que ninguém corre o risco de ser atingido pela carga
outras situações, contactar a ABB. elevada.
3.3 Elevação
Todos os motores ABB acima dos 25 kg estão equipados
com olhais de elevação.
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 105
4. Instalação e colocação em serviço
AVISO! 4.3 Verificação da resistência
Desligue e bloqueie todo o sistema antes de realizar de isolamento
trabalhos no motor ou no equipamento accionado.
Meça a resistência de isolamento antes de colocar o motor
em funcionamento e se houver suspeitas de humidade no
4.1 Geral enrolamento.
Devem ser verificados com cuidado todos os valores A resistência de isolamento, corrigida para 25 °C, nunca
indicados nas chapas de características, para garantir pode ser inferior a 1 MΩ (medidos com 500 ou 1000 V
que a protecção e as ligações do motor são feitas CC). O valor da resistência de isolamento é reduzido para
adequadamente. metade por cada aumento de 20 °C na temperatura. A
Figura 1 pode ser utilizada para a correcção do isolamento
para a temperatura desejada.
4.2 Motores não equipados
com rolamentos de esferas AVISO!
Para evitar o risco de choque eléctrico, a estrutura
Remova o travamento para o transporte, caso tenha sido
do motor tem e ser ligada à terra e os enrolamentos
aplicado. Rode o veio do motor à mão para comprovar
deverão ser descarregados contra a estrutura
que roda livremente, se possível.
imediatamente após cada medição.
106 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Volte a verificar o alinhamento após o último aperto dos
Régua parafusos ou cavilhas.
Certificar-se de que há espaço suficiente para a livre Os motores com bujões de drenagem em plástico vedáveis
circulação de ar em torno do motor. É aconselhável ter são entregues com os orifícios abertos. Em ambientes com
uma folga entre a tampa do ventilador e a parede, etc, de muita poeira, todos os orifícios de drenagem devem ser
pelo menos ½ da entrada de ar da tampa do ventilador. fechados.
Poderá encontrar informações adicionais no catálogo do
produto ou nos desenhos das dimensões disponíveis no
nosso site na Internet: www.abb.com/motors&generators. 4.9 Cablagem e ligações
O alinhamento correcto é fundamental para evitar avarias eléctricas
nos rolamentos, vibrações e possíveis falhas nos veios.
As caixas de terminais dos motores normais com uma
Montar o motor na fundação utilizando os parafusos ou única velocidade têm normalmente seis terminais para os
pernos adequados e colocando calços entre a fundação e enrolamentos e, pelo menos, um terminal para ligação à
os pés. terra.
Alinhe o motor utilizando os métodos adequados. Para além dos terminais para os enrolamentos principais e
para ligação à terra, a caixa de terminais pode também ter
Se aplicável, fazer furos de posicionamento e fixar os ligações para os termístores, elementos de aquecimento
pernos de posicionamento no lugar. ou outros dispositivos auxiliares.
Precisão de montagem dos meios acoplamentos: verifique Têm de ser utilizados terminais de condutores adequados
se a folga b é inferior a 0,05 mm e se a diferença entre a1 e para a ligação de todos os cabos principais. Os cabos
a2 é também inferior a 0,05 mm. Ver figura 2. para os equipamentos auxiliares podem ser ligados
directamente aos blocos de terminais sem necessidade de
terminais.
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 107
Os motores destinam-se apenas a instalação fixa. Salvo A ligação de cabos entre a rede e os terminais do motor
especificação em contrário, as roscas das entradas de tem de cumprir os requisitos indicados nas normas
cabos são métricas. A classe de protecção IP do bucim nacionais para a instalação ou na norma CEI/EN 60204-1
para o cabo deve ser, pelo menos, a mesma das caixas de de acordo com a corrente nominal indicada na chapa de
terminais. características.
108 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4.9.2 Ligações de equipamentos auxiliares
Se um motor estiver equipado com termístores ou outros
RTDs (Pt100, relés térmicos, etc.) e dispositivos auxiliares,
recomenda-se que sejam utilizados e ligados de forma
adequada. Para certas aplicações, é obrigatória a utilização
de protecção térmica. Estão disponíveis informações mais
pormenorizadas na documentação entregue com o motor.
Os diagramas de ligação de elementos auxiliares e peças
de ligação encontram-se no interior da caixa de terminais.
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 109
5. Funcionamento
5.1 Geral
Os motores foram concebidos para as seguintes
condições, salvo indicação em contrário na chapa de
características:
AVISO!
Ignorar quaisquer instruções de operação ou de
manutenção do aparelho pode comprometer a
segurança e impedir a utilização do motor.
110 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6. Motores de baixa tensão em aplicações com velocidade
variável
6.1 Introdução 6.2.1 Selecção do isolamento dos
enrolamentos para conversores ABB
Esta parte do manual contém instruções adicionais para
motores utilizados com conversores de frequência. O No caso de conversores de frequência ABB, por exemplo
motor destina-se a ser utilizado apenas com alimentação das séries AC_8_ _ e AC_5_ _ , com uma unidade de
de um único conversor de frequência, e não motores alimentação com díodos (tensão CC não controlada), a
a funcionar em paralelo a partir de um conversor de selecção do isolamento dos enrolamentos e dos filtros
frequência. Devem ser respeitadas as instruções do pode ser feita de acordo com a tabela 6.1.
fabricante do conversor.
A ABB pode necessitar de informações adicionais para 6.2.2 Selecção do isolamento dos
decidir a adequação de alguns tipos de motor utilizados enrolamentos com todos os outros
em aplicações especiais ou com alterações de concepção conversores
especiais.
Os esforços dieléctricos devem ser mantidos abaixo dos
limites aceitáveis. Contacte o fornecedor do sistema para
se certificar da segurança da aplicação. Ao dimensionar
6.2 Isolamento dos enrolamentos o motor, deve ser tida em consideração a influência de
As transmissões com velocidade variável provocam possíveis filtros.
tensões no enrolamento do motor superiores à tensão
sinusoidal de alimentação do motor. Por esse motivo, o
isolamento dos enrolamentos do motor, assim como o 6.3 Protecção térmica
filtro de saída do conversor, devem ser dimensionados de
acordo com as instruções seguintes. A maior parte do motores abrangidos por este manual
estão equipados com termístores PTC, ou outros tipos
de RTDs, nos enrolamentos do estator. Recomenda-se
que sejam ligados ao conversor de frequência. Para mais
informações, consultar o capítulo 4.9.2.
Para mais informações sobre travagem com resistências e conversores com unidades de alimentação controladas,
contactar a ABB.
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 111
6.4 Correntes nos rolamentos NOTA!
Devem ser utilizados rolamentos isolados ou rolamentos de Devem ser utilizados bucins para cabos adequados
construção especial, filtros de modo comum e métodos de que permitam fazer uma ligação a 360° em todos os
cablagem e ligação à terra adequados, de acordo com as pontos de conexão, tais como o motor, conversor,
instruções seguintes e utilizando a tabela 6.1. eventual interruptor de segurança, etc.
6.4.1 Eliminação de correntes nos Para motores com tamanho CEI 280 e superior, é
rolamentos com conversores ABB necessário fazer uma equalização do potencial adicional
No caso dos conversores de frequência, por exemplo das entre a estrutura do motor e o equipamento accionado,
séries AC_8_ _ e AC_5_ _ da ABB, com uma unidade de a não ser que ambos estejam montados sobre a mesma
alimentação com díodos, têm de ser utilizados os métodos base em aço. Neste caso, a condutividade de alta-
indicados na tabela 6.1 para evitar correntes prejudiciais frequência da ligação fornecida pela base em aço deve
nos rolamentos nos motores. ser verificada através de, por exemplo, uma medição da
diferença de potencial entre os componentes.
112 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6.7.2 Capacidade de carga do motor com 6.8 Chapas de características
conversores da série AC_8_ _ com
A utilização dos motores da ABB em aplicações com
controlo DTC
velocidade variável não exige normalmente chapas de
As curvas de capacidade de carga apresentadas nas características adicionais. Os parâmetros necessários para
Figuras 5a - 5d são válidas para os conversores da série a colocação em serviço do conversor estão indicados
AC_8_ _ da ABB com tensões CC não controladas e na chapa de características principal. No entanto, para
com controlo DTC. As figuras mostram o binário de saída algumas aplicações especiais, os motores podem ter
máximo contínuo aproximado dos motores em função da chapas de características adicionais para aplicações com
frequência da alimentação. O binário de saída é indicado velocidade variável. Essas chapas incluem as seguintes
como uma percentagem do binário nominal do motor. Os informações:
valores são apenas indicativos, podendo ser indicados
valores exactos a pedido. - limites de velocidade
- limites de potência
NOTA! - limites de tensão e corrente
A velocidade máxima do motor e da aplicação não - tipo de binário (constante ou quadrático)
deve ser ultrapassada! - e tipo de conversor e frequência mínima de comutação
necessária.
NOTA!
A capacidade de carga térmica real de um A ABB recomenda a utilização de todas as características
motor pode ser inferior à indicada pelas curvas protectoras adequadas fornecidas pelo conversor para
orientadoras. melhorar a segurança da aplicação. Os conversores têm
normalmente funções como (os nomes e disponibilidade
6.7.5 Sobrecargas de curta duração das funções dependem do fabricante e do modelo do
conversor):
Os motores da ABB podem normalmente suportar
sobrecargas temporárias e podem também ser utilizados
- velocidade mínima
com regimes de serviço intermitentes. O método mais
- velocidade máxima
adequado para dimensionar essas aplicações é utilizando
- tempos de aceleração e desaceleração
a ferramenta DriveSize.
- corrente máxima
- binário máximo
- protecção de bloqueio de motor
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 113
7. Manutenção funcionamento por qualquer razão, o veio deverá pelo
menos ser rodado à mão de modo a que fique numa
posição de repouso diferente, uma vez por semana. As
AVISO! vibrações provocadas pelos outros equipamentos do
Durante a paragem, a tensão pode ser ligada navio causam picadas (pitting) nos rolamentos, situação
dentro da caixa de terminais para elementos esta que deve ser evitada através da colocação em
de aquecimento ou aquecimento directo dos funcionamento/rotação manual regular.
enrolamentos. 2. Os rolamentos devem ser lubrificados ao mesmo tempo
que o veio é rodado, uma vez por ano (deve ser feito um
registo). Se o motor estiver equipado com rolamentos de
rolos no lado do veio motriz, o dispositivo de bloqueio
7.1 Inspecção geral para transporte tem de ser removido antes de se rodar o
1. Inspeccione o motor a intervalos regulares, pelo veio. O dispositivo de bloqueio para transporte deve ser
menos uma vez por ano. A frequência das inspecções novamente instalado se o motor for transportado.
depende, por exemplo, do nível de humidade do 3. Devem ser evitadas todas as vibrações para evitar
ar ambiente e das condições climatéricas locais. A danos e falhas dos rolamentos Devem ser seguidas
frequência das inspecções pode ser estabelecida todas as instruções contidas no manual de instruções
inicialmente de forma experimental e depois deve ser do motor, referentes à sua manutenção e colocação
estritamente respeitada. em serviço. A garantia não cobrirá danos causados aos
2. Manter o motor limpo e certificar-se de que o ar de enrolamentos e aos rolamentos se estas instruções não
ventilação circula livremente. Se o motor for utilizado em tiverem sido seguidas.
ambientes com muitas poeiras, o sistema de ventilação
deve ser verificado e limpo regularmente.
3. Verifique o estado dos vedantes do veio (por exemplo, 7.2 Lubrificação
anel em V ou vedante radial) e substitua-os, se
necessário.
AVISO!
4. Verifique o estado das ligações, a montagem e os
Cuidado com todas as peças rotativas!
parafusos de fixação.
5. Controle o estado dos rolamentos tentando detectar
quaisquer ruídos não habituais, medindo as vibrações,
medindo a temperatura dos rolamentos, inspeccionando AVISO!
a massa lubrificante gasta ou fazendo um controlo SPM Muitas massas podem provocar irritações da pele e
dos rolamentos. Preste especial atenção aos rolamentos inflamação dos olhos. Seguir todas as precauções
quando a sua vida útil nominal estiver a chegar ao fim. de segurança especificadas pelo fabricante da
massa.
Quando surgirem sinais de desgaste, desmonte o motor,
verifique as peças e substitua-as, se necessário. Ao
substituir os rolamentos, os rolamentos de substituição Os tipos dos rolamentos encontram-se especificados
devem ser do mesmo tipo dos originalmente instalados. nos catálogos dos produtos em questão e na chapa de
Quando se mudarem os rolamentos, os vedantes do veio características de todos os motores, excepto para os
têm de ser substituídos por vedantes da mesma qualidade motores de menores dimensões.
e características dos originais.
A fiabilidade é uma questão fundamental para os intervalos
No caso de motores com uma classe de protecção de lubrificação dos rolamentos. A ABB utiliza, para o seu
IP 55, e quando o motor tiver sido entregue com os bujões programa de lubrificação, sobretudo o princípio L1 (ou seja,
fechados, é aconselhável abrir os bujões de drenagem que 99% dos motores atingem o seu tempo de vida útil
periodicamente para garantir que a saída da condensação previsto).
não está bloqueada e permitir que a condensação saia
do motor. Esta operação tem de ser efectuada quando o
motor estiver parado e for seguro trabalhar nele. 7.2.1 Motores com rolamentos que não
necessitam de lubrificação
7.1.1 Motores de reserva Os rolamentos que não necessitam de lubrificação são dos
tipos 1Z, 2Z, 2RS ou equivalentes.
Se um motor estiver numa situação de reserva durante um
longo período de tempo num navio ou noutro ambiente Por norma, a lubrificação adequada para tamanhos
sujeito a vibrações, devem ser tomadas as seguintes até 250 pode ser atingida com os seguintes intervalos
medidas: de lubrificação, de acordo com L1. Para condições de
funcionamento com temperaturas ambiente superiores,
1. O veio deve ser rodado regularmente todas as 2 contactar a ABB. A fórmula para mudar os valores L1
semanas (deve ser feito um registo) pondo o sistema em aproximadamente para valores L10 é: L10 = 2.0 x L1.
funcionamento. Caso não seja possível pôr o motor em
114 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
As horas de funcionamento para rolamentos que não A. Lubrificação manual
necessitam de lubrificação a temperaturas ambiente de
25 °C e 40 °C são: Renovar a lubrificação com o motor em
funcionamento
Horas de Horas de – Remover o tampão de saída da massa ou abrir a válvula
Tamanho
da funcionamento funcionamento de fecho, se instalada.
estrutura Pólos a 25° C a 40° C – Certificar-se de que o canal de lubrificação está aberto.
56 2 52 000 33 000 – Injecte a quantidade especificada de massa lubrificante
56 4-8 65 000 41 000 no rolamento.
63 2 49 000 31 000
– Deixar o motor a funcionar durante 1 a 2 horas para
assegurar que todo o excesso de massa é forçado a sair
63 4-8 63 000 40 000
do rolamento. Fechar o tampão de saída da massa ou a
71 2 67 000 42 000
válvula de fecho, se instalada.
71 4-8 100 000 56 000
80-90 2 100 000 65 000 Renovar a lubrificação com o motor parado
80-90 4-8 100 000 96 000 Se não for possível renovar a lubrificação dos rolamentos
100-112 2 89 000 56 000 com os motores em funcionamento, a lubrificação pode
100-112 4-8 100 000 89 000 ser feita com o motor parado.
132 2 67 000 42 000 – Neste caso, utilize apenas metade da quantidade de
132 4-8 100 000 77 000 massa lubrificante e, em seguida, coloque o motor em
160 2 60 000 38 000 funcionamento durante alguns minutos, à velocidade
160 4-8 100 000 74 000
máxima.
– Quando o motor parar, aplique o resto da quantidade
180 2 55 000 34 000
especificada de massa no rolamento.
180 4-8 100 000 70 000
– Após 1 a 2 horas de funcionamento, feche o tampão de
200 2 41 000 25 000
saída da massa ou a válvula de fecho, se instalada.
200 4-8 95 000 60 000
225 2 36 000 23 000 B. Lubrificação automática
225 4-8 88 000 56 000
Quando é utilizada a lubrificação automática, o tampão de
250 2 31 000 20 000
saída da massa deve ser removido permanentemente, ou a
250 4-8 80 000 50 000
válvula de fecho, se instalada, deve ser deixada aberta.
Os dados são válidos até 60 Hz.
A ABB recomenda apenas a utilização de sistemas
electromecânicos.
7.2.2 Motores com rolamentos que
necessitam de lubrificação Se for utilizado um sistema de lubrificação central, deve ser
utilizado o triplo da quantidade de massa por intervalo de
Chapa de informações sobre lubrificação e lubrificação indicada no quadro. No caso de uma unidade
conselhos gerais sobre lubrificação mais pequena de renovação da lubrificação (um ou dois
Se o motor estiver equipado com uma chapa de cartuchos por motor), pode ser utilizada a quantidade
informações sobre lubrificação, respeite os valores normal de massa.
indicados.
Quando for utilizada uma lubrificação automática em
Na chapa de informações sobre lubrificação, estão motores com 2 pólos, deve ser seguida a nota sobre as
recomendações relativas aos lubrificantes para os motores
definidos os intervalos de lubrificação no que diz respeito com 2 pólos, no capítulo Lubrificantes.
à montagem, à temperatura ambiente e à velocidade de
rotação. A massa utilizada deve ser adequada para a lubrificação
automática. Devem ser consultadas as recomendações
Após o primeiro arranque ou após uma lubrificação dos do fornecedor e do fabricante do sistema, relativas à
rolamentos, pode surgir um aumento temporário da lubrificação automática.
temperatura, durante aproximadamente 10 a 20 horas de
funcionamento. Exemplo de cálculo da quantidade de massa para
sistema de lubrificação automática
Alguns motores poderão estar equipados com um colector
para massas lubrificantes usadas. Siga as instruções Sistema de lubrificação central: Motor CEI M3_P 315_ de
especiais dadas para o equipamento. 4 pólos em rede de 50 Hz, com o intervalo de renovação
da lubrificação especificado na Tabela 7600 h/55 g (DE) e
7600 h/40 g (NDE):
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 115
Exemplo de cálculo da quantidade de massa para
unidade de lubrificação automática (cartucho)
(DE) RLI = 55 g/7600 h*24 = 0,17 g/dia
NOTA!
Um aumento na temperatura ambiente aumenta
respectivamente a temperatura dos rolamentos.
Os valores dos intervalos deverão ser reduzidos em
metade para um aumento de 15 °C na temperatura
dos rolamentos e deverão ser duplicados para
um decréscimo de 15 °C na temperatura dos
rolamentos.
AVISO!
A temperatura máxima de funcionamento do
lubrificante e dos rolamentos, +110 ºC, não deve ser
excedida.
A velocidade máxima de concepção do motor não
deve ser excedida.
116 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Quantidade
Tamanho 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
de massa kW kW kW kW
do motor r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/rolamento
Rolamentos de esferas, intervalos de lubrificação em horas de serviço
112 10 todas 10 000 13 000 todas 18 000 21 000 todas 2 5 000 todas 28 000
132 15 todas 9 000 11 000 todas 17 000 19 000 todas 23 000 todas 26 500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9 000 12000 ≤ 15 18 000 21 500 ≤ 11 24 000 todas 24 000
160 25 > 18,5 7 500 1 0000 > 15 15 000 18 000 > 11 22 500 todas 24 000
180 30 ≤ 22 7 000 9 000 ≤ 22 15 500 18 500 ≤ 15 24 000 todas 24 000
180 30 > 22 6 000 8 500 > 22 14 000 17 000 > 15 21 000 todas 24 000
200 40 ≤ 37 5 500 8 000 ≤ 30 14 500 17 500 ≤ 22 23 000 todas 24 000
200 40 > 37 3 000 5 500 > 30 10 000 12 000 > 22 16 000 todas 20 000
225 50 ≤ 45 4 000 6 500 ≤ 45 13 000 16 500 ≤ 30 22 000 todas 24 000
225 50 > 45 1 500 2 500 > 45 5 000 6 000 > 30 8 000 todas 10 000
250 60 ≤ 55 2 500 4 000 ≤ 55 9 000 11 500 ≤ 37 15 000 todas 18 000
250 60 > 55 1 000 1 500 > 55 3 500 4 500 > 37 6 000 todas 7 000
2801) 60 todas 2 000 3 500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - todas 8 000 10 500 todas 14 000 todas 17 000
280 35 todas 1 900 3 200 - - - -
280 40 - - todas 7 800 9 600 todas 13 900 todas 15 000
315 35 todas 1 900 3 200 - - - -
315 55 - - todas 5 900 7 600 todas 11 800 todas 12 900
355 35 todas 1 900 3 200 - - - -
355 70 - - todas 4 000 5 600 todas 9 600 todas 10 700
400 40 todas 1 500 2 700 - - - -
400 85 - - todas 3 200 4 700 todas 8 600 todas 9 700
450 40 todas 1 500 2 700 - - - -
450 95 - - todas 2 500 3 900 todas 7 700 todas 8 700
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 117
7.2.4 Lubrificantes
NOTA!
Utilize sempre massa lubrificante para altas
AVISO! velocidades em motores com 2 pólos de alta
Não misturar diferentes tipos de massas velocidade em que o factor de velocidade é superior
lubrificantes. a 480 000 calculado como Dm x n onde
Lubrificantes incompatíveis poderão provocar danos Dm = diâmetro médio do rolamento, mm;
nos rolamentos. n = velocidade rotacional, r/min).
Ao renovar a lubrificação, utilizar unicamente massa As seguintes massas lubrificantes podem ser utilizadas
especial para rolamentos de esferas com as seguintes em motores de ferro fundido de alta velocidade, mas não
características: podem ser misturadas com massas de complexo de lítio:
– massa de boa qualidade com sabão de complexo de - Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102 (base de poliureia)
lítio e com óleo PAO ou mineral - Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (base de poliureia)
– viscosidade do óleo de base 100-160 cST a 40 °C
– consistência NLGI de grau 1,5 - 3 *) Se forem utilizados outros lubrificantes, confirme com
– intervalo de temperatura entre -30 °C e +120 °C, o fabricante que as qualidades correspondem às dos
continuamente lubrificantes acima mencionados. Os intervalos de
lubrificação baseiam-se nas massas lubrificantes de
*) Para motores montados verticalmente ou em condições elevados desempenhos acima indicadas. A utilização de
de altas temperaturas, recomenda-se um valor superior outras massas lubrificantes poderá reduzir esses intervalos.
mais elevado.
AVISO!
Os lubrificantes que contêm aditivos EP não são
recomendados para temperaturas de rolamentos
elevadas em tamanhos de 280 a 450.
118 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
8. Apoio pós-venda 9. Requisitos ambientais
A maior parte dos motores ABB tem um nível de pressão
8.1 Peças sobressalentes sonora que não excede os 82 dB(A) (± 3 dB) a 50 Hz.
As peças sobresselentes têm de ser peças originais ou Os valores para motores específicos encontram-se
aprovadas pela ABB, salvo especificação em contrário. indicados nos respectivos catálogos dos produtos. Para
Para encomendar peças sobresselentes, é necessário uma alimentação sinusoidal a 60 Hz, os valores são
indicar o número de série do motor, a designação aproximadamente 4 dB(A) mais elevados em comparação
completa do tipo e o código do produto, de acordo com com valores indicados para 50 Hz, nos catálogos dos
as indicações na chapa de características. produtos.
8.3 Rolamentos
Os rolamentos exigem cuidados especiais.
NOTA!
Qualquer reparação efectuada pelo utilizador
final, a menos que seja expressamente aprovada
pelo fabricante, isenta o fabricante da sua
responsabilidade em relação à conformidade.
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 119
10. Resolução de problemas
Estas instruções não abrangem todos os pormenores ou
variações nos equipamentos nem incluem informações
sobre todas as possíveis situações relacionadas com
a instalação, funcionamento ou manutenção. Em caso
de necessidade de informações adicionais, contactar o
Departamento de Vendas da ABB mais próximo.
120 Motores e Geradores ABB | Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
PROBLEMA CAUSA O QUE FAZER
O motor demora Carga excessiva Reduzir a carga.
demasiado tempo Baixa tensão durante o arranque Verificar se existe uma resistência elevada. Certificar-se de que é
a acelerar e/ou utilizado um cabo de tamanho adequado.
tem um consumo
muito elevado Rotor em curto-circuito (gaiola de Substituir por um rotor novo.
esquilo) com defeito
Tensão aplicada demasiado baixa Corrigir a alimentação eléctrica.
Sentido de rotação Sequência de fases errada Inverta as ligações no motor ou no quadro eléctrico.
errado
O motor entra em Sobrecarga Reduzir a carga.
sobreaquecimento As aberturas da estrutura ou da Abrir os furos de ventilação e verificar se existe um fluxo de ar
durante o ventilação podem estar entupidas ou contínuo na saída de ar do motor.
funcionamento sujas e impedir a ventilação adequada
do motor
O motor poderá ter uma fase aberta Verificar para se certificar de que todos os cabos estão bem ligados.
Bobina com passagem à massa O motor tem de ser rebobinado.
Tensão desequilibrada nos terminais. Verificar se existem avarias nos cabos, nas ligações ou nos
transformadores.
O motor vibra Motor desalinhado Alinhar novamente.
Suporte fraco Reforçar a base.
Acoplamento desequilibrado Equilibrar o acoplamento.
Equipamento accionado desequilibrado Voltar a equilibrar o equipamento accionado.
Rolamentos avariados Substituir os rolamentos.
Rolamentos desalinhados Reparar o motor
Massas de equilibragem deslocadas Voltar a equilibrar o rotor.
Contradição entre o equilíbrio do rotor Voltar a equilibrar o acoplamento ou o rotor
e o acoplamento (meia chaveta –
chaveta completa)
Motor com várias fases a funcionar Verificar a existência de um circuito aberto.
com uma única fase
Folga axial excessiva Ajustar o rolamento ou adicionar um calço.
Ruídos de Ventilador a roçar na tampa do motor Corrigir a montagem do ventilador.
interferências ou do ventilador
mecânicas Motor solto da base Apertar os parafusos de fixação.
Funcionamento Folga não uniforme Verificar e corrigir a instalação das tampas de topo ou dos
ruidoso rolamentos.
Rotor desequilibrado Voltar a equilibrar o rotor.
Rolamentos Veio dobrado ou flectido Endireitar ou substituir o veio.
quentes Tracção excessiva da correia Reduzir a tensão da correia.
Polias demasiado afastadas do apoio Deslocar a polia para uma posição mais próxima do rolamento do
do veio motor.
Diâmetro da polia demasiado pequeno Utilizar polias maiores.
Desalinhamento Corrigir voltando a alinhar a transmissão.
Falta de lubrificação Manter a qualidade e quantidade adequada de lubrificante no
rolamento.
Deterioração da massa ou Remover a massa antiga, lavar bem os rolamentos em querosene e
contaminação do lubrificante lubrificar com massa nova.
Lubrificante em excesso Reduzir a quantidade de massa, o rolamento não deve estar cheio
com mais de metade da sua capacidade.
Rolamento em sobrecarga Verificar o alinhamento e o esforço radial e axial.
Esferas partidas ou caminhos de Substituir o rolamento, limpando bem primeiro a caixa do rolamento.
rolamento danificados ou gripados
Manual para motores de baixa tensão 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | Motores e Geradores ABB 121
Lågspänningsmotorer
Installations-, drifts-, underhålls- och säkerhetsmanual
Innehåll
1. Inledning ..................................................................................................................................125
1.1 EU-deklaration .................................................................................................................125
1.2 Giltighet ...........................................................................................................................125
2. Säkerhetsöverväganden ........................................................................................................125
3. Hantering .................................................................................................................................126
3.1 Ankomstkontroll...............................................................................................................126
3.2 Transport och lagring .......................................................................................................126
3.3 Lyft ..................................................................................................................................126
3.4 Motorns vikt ....................................................................................................................126
4. Installation och driftsättning ..................................................................................................127
4.1 Allmänt ............................................................................................................................127
4.2 Motorer med annat än kullager ........................................................................................127
4.3 Kontroll av isolationsresistansen.......................................................................................127
4.4 Fundament ......................................................................................................................127
4.5 Balansering och montering av kopplingshalvor och remskivor ..........................................128
4.6 Montering och uppriktning av motorn ..............................................................................128
4.7 Radialkrafter och remdrift .................................................................................................128
4.8 Motorer med dräneringspluggar för kondensvatten ..........................................................128
4.9 Kablage och elanslutningar ..............................................................................................128
4.9.1 Anslutningar för olika startmetoder ...................................................................129
4.9.2 Anslutning av hjälputrustning ............................................................................129
4.10 Uttag och rotationsriktning ...............................................................................................129
5. Drift ..........................................................................................................................................130
5.1 Allmänt ............................................................................................................................130
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 123
6. Lågspänningsmotorer med omriktarmatning .....................................................................131
6.1 Inledning ..........................................................................................................................131
6.2 Lindningsisolering ............................................................................................................131
6.2.1 Val av lindningsisolering för ABB-omriktare .......................................................131
6.2.2 Val av lindningsisolering med övriga omriktare ..................................................131
6.3 Överhettningsskydd ........................................................................................................131
6.4 Lagerström ......................................................................................................................131
6.4.1 Eliminering av lagerströmmar med ABB-omriktare ............................................131
6.4.2 Eliminering av lagerströmmar med övriga omriktare ..........................................132
6.5 Kabelanslutningar, jordning och EMC...............................................................................132
6.6 Driftsvarvtal ......................................................................................................................132
6.7 Motorer i tillämpningar med omriktarmatning ...................................................................132
6.7.1 Allmänt .............................................................................................................132
6.7.2 Motorns belastbarhet med AC_8_ _-seriens omriktare med DTC-styrning ........132
6.7.3 Motorns belastbarhet med AC_5_ _ -seriens omriktare.....................................132
6.7.4 Motorns belastbarhet med andra spänningsomriktare av PWM-typ ..................132
6.7.5 Kortvarig överbelastning ...................................................................................133
6.8 Märkskyltar ......................................................................................................................133
6.9 Driftsättning av tillämpning med omriktarmatning .............................................................133
7. Underhåll..................................................................................................................................134
7.1 Allmän inspektion ............................................................................................................134
7.1.1 Standby-läge ...................................................................................................134
7.2 Smörjning ........................................................................................................................134
7.2.1 Motorer med permanentsmorda lager ..............................................................134
7.2.2 Motorer med smörjnipplar.................................................................................135
7.2.3 Smörjintervall och fettmängder .........................................................................135
7.2.4 Smörjmedel ......................................................................................................137
8. Eftermarknad...........................................................................................................................138
8.1 Reservdelar .....................................................................................................................138
8.2 Demontering, montering och omlindning .........................................................................138
8.3 Lager ...............................................................................................................................138
9. Miljökrav ..................................................................................................................................138
10. Felsökning ...............................................................................................................................139
124 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Inledning 2. Säkerhetsöverväganden
Motorn ska installeras och användas av kvalificerad
OBS!
personal som fullt behärskar gällande hälso- och
Dessa regler måste följas för att garantera säker och
säkerhetsmässiga krav samt gällande nationell lagstiftning.
korrekt installation, funktion och underhåll. Dessa
regler måste delges varje person som installerar, Den säkerhetsutrustning som krävs för att förhindra olyckor
använder eller underhåller motorn eller tillhörande vid montering och användning ska användas i enlighet med
utrustning. Motorn ska installeras och användas av lokala föreskrifter.
kvalificerad personal som fullt behärskar gällande
hälso- och säkerhetsmässiga krav samt gällande
nationell lagstiftning. Att ignorera dessa regler kan VARNING!
upphäva samtliga tillämpliga garantier. Nödstoppsfunktioner måste vara utrustade med
omstartspärrar. Efter ett nödstopp kan ett nytt
startkommando inte utföras förrän omstartspärren
1.1 EU-deklaration avsiktligt har återställts.
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 125
3. Hantering Lyftöglorna måste vara väl åtdragna före lyft. Vid behov kan
lyftöglornas lägen justeras med hjälp av brickor.
Stilleståndsuppvärmning, om sådan finns installerad, Den faktiska vikten är specificerad på märkskylten på alla
rekommenderas för att undvika kondensvatten i motorn. ABB-motorer utom för de minsta storlekarna (56 och 63).
Motorn får inte utsättas för externa vibrationer vid Storlek Aluminium Gjutjärn Lägg till
stillastående, då detta kan skada lagren. för broms
Vikt kg Vikt kg
Motorer utrustade med rullager och/eller vinkelkontaktlager 56 4,5 - -
ska vara försedda med transportlåsning av rotorn under 63 6 - -
transport. 71 8 13 5
80 14 20 8
3.3 Lyft 90 20 30 10
100 32 40 16
Alla ABB-motorer över 25 kg är utrustade med lyftöglor. 112 36 50 20
132 93 90 30
Bara motorns huvudlyftöglor ska användas för lyft av
160 149 130 30
motorn. De får inte användas för att lyfta motorn när denna
180 162 190 45
är fäst vid annan utrustning.
200 245 275 55
Lyftöglor för hjälputrustning (t.ex. bromsar, separata 225 300 360 75
kylfläktar) eller uttagslådor får inte användas för lyft av 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 -
motorn. Motorns tyngdpunkt kan, trots samma storlek,
315 - 1 700 -
variera beroende på motoreffekter, monteringssätt och
355 - 2 700 -
hjälputrustning.
400 - 3 500 -
Skadade lyftöglor får inte användas. Kontrollera att 450 - 4 500 -
lyftöglorna på motorstativet är oskadade före lyft.
Om motorn är utrustad med separat kylning, fråga ABB
efter vikt.
126 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4. Installation och driftsättning
VARNING! VARNING!
Frånskilj och lås motorn före arbete på den eller den Motorhöljet måste vara jordat och lindningarna
drivna utrustningen. måste laddas ur mot höljet omedelbart efter varje
mätning så att risken för elektriska stötar undviks.
4.1 Allmänt
Om referensresistansen inte kan uppnås är lindningen
Alla data på motorns märkskylt måste kontrolleras noggrant för fuktig och måste torkas i ugn. Ugnstemperaturen ska
för att säkerställa att motorskydd och anslutningar utförs vara 90 °C under 12–16 timmar, följt av 105 °C under 6–8
korrekt. timmar.
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 127
4.5 Balansering och montering 4.7 Radialkrafter och remdrift
av kopplingshalvor och Spänn remmarna enligt anvisningarna från leverantören
remskivor av den drivna utrustningen. Överskrid dock inte maximal
remkraft (tillåten radiell kraft på lagret) angiven i tillämplig
Balansering av motorn har som standard utförts med halv produktkatalog.
kil.
Borra styrhål och fäst styrpinnarna på plats om det behövs. Motorerna är enbart avsedda för fast installation. Gängor
för kabelgenomföringar är metriska om inget annat anges.
Krav på kopplingshalvans monteringsnoggrannhet: Kabelförskruvningens IP-klass måste vara minst samma
kontrollera att frigången b är mindre än 0,05 mm och att som uttagslådornas.
skillnaden mellan a1 och a2 också är mindre än 0,05 mm.
Se figur 2. Ett certifierat ledningsnav eller kabelkontakt måste
användas vid installationstillfället.
Kontrollera uppriktningen på nytt efter en sista åtdragning
av bultar eller klotsar.
OBS!
Överskrid inte lagrens tillåtna belastningar som finns Kablarna ska ha mekaniskt skydd och ska
angivna i produktkatalogerna. vara fixerade nära uttagslådan för att uppfylla
tillämpliga krav i IEC/EN 60079-0 och lokala
Kontrollera att motorn får tillräckligt med kylluft. Säkerställ
installationsföreskrifter.
att ingen angränsande utrustning eller direkt solljus strålar
ytterligare värme mot motorn.
Se till att konstruktionen tillåter tillräckligt luftflöde på Kabelgenomföringar som inte används ska förslutas med
utsidan av flänsen för motorer med flänsmontering (t.ex. skyddsproppar i enlighet med uttagslådans IP-klass.
B5, B35, V1).
Kapslingsklass och diameter anges i de dokument som
medföljer kabelförskruvningen.
128 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4.9.1 Anslutningar för olika startmetoder
VARNING!
Använd rätt kabelförskruvningar och tätningar i Uttagslådan till en enhastighetsmotor av standardtyp
kabelgenomföringarna beroende på kabelns typ och innehåller normalt sex lindningsuttag och minst ett jordat
diameter. uttag. Detta möjliggör användning av direktstart (DOL) eller
Y/D-start.
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 129
5. Drift
5.1 Allmänt
Motorerna är avsedda att användas under följande
förhållanden såvida inget annat anges på märkskylten.
VARNING!
Om instruktioner för eller underhåll av apparaten
ignoreras kan säkerheten äventyras och motorn kan
då inte användas.
130 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6. Lågspänningsmotorer med omriktarmatning
6.1 Inledning 6.2.2 Val av lindningsisolering med övriga
omriktare
I den här delen av handboken finns ytterligare instruktioner
för motorer som används med frekvensomriktarmatningar. De elektriska fältstyrkorna måste understiga godkända
Motorn är avsedd att drivas från en enskild frekvens- gränser. Kontakta systemets konstruktör för att säkerställa
omriktarmatning och inte motorer som körs parallellt från tillämpningens säkerhet. Hänsyn måste tas till inverkan av
en frekvensomriktare. Följ anvisningarna från tillverkaren av eventuella filter vid dimensionering av motorn.
omriktaren.
Kontakta ABB för mer information om motståndsbromsning och omriktare med kontrollerade matningsenheter.
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 131
OBS! 6.7 Motorer i tillämpningar
Isolerade lager med aluminiumoxidbelagda inre med omriktarmatning
och/eller yttre lopp eller keramiska rullningselement
rekommenderas. Aluminiumoxidbeläggningarna
ska även behandlas med ett tätningsmedel så 6.7.1 Allmänt
att inte smuts och fukt tränger ned i den porösa Med ABB:s frekvensomriktare kan motorerna
beläggningen. Exakt typ av lagerisolering anges på dimensioneras med hjälp av ABB:s dimensionerings-
märkskylten. Det är inte tillåtet att ändra lagertyp eller program DriveSize. Verktyget kan hämtas på ABB:s
isoleringsmetod utan tillstånd från ABB. webbplats (www.abb.com/motors&generators).
132 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
OBS!
6.9 Driftsättning av tillämpning
Motorns faktiska termiska belastbarhet kan vara med omriktarmatning
lägre än vad som visas i riktlinjekurvorna.
Driftsättning av en tillämpning med omriktarmatning måste
utföras enligt anvisningarna för frekvensomriktaren samt
6.7.5 Kortvarig överbelastning lokala lagar och föreskrifter. Hänsyn måste även tas till de
krav och gränser som ställs av tillämpningen.
ABB-motorer kan normalt överbelastas och även användas
för intermittent drift. Det smidigaste sättet att dimensionera Alla parametrar som krävs för inställning av omriktaren
sådana tillämpningar är att använda DriveSize-verktyget. måste hämtas från motorns märkskyltar. De parametrar
som oftast behövs är:
6.8 Märkskyltar - märkspänning
Användning av ABB-motorer i tillämpningar med - märkström
omriktarmatning kräver normalt inte extra märkskyltar. De - märkfrekvens
parametrar som krävs för driftsättning av omriktaren finns - märkvarvtal
på huvudmärkskylten. I vissa specialtillämpningar kan - märkeffekt
motorerna dock utrustas med ytterligare märkskyltar för
tillämpningar med omriktarmatning och dessa innehåller
följande information: OBS!
Om information saknas eller är felaktig ska motorn
- varvtalsområde inte användas förrän korrekta inställningar gjorts!
- effektområde
- spännings- och strömområde
- typ av moment (konstant eller kvadratiskt) ABB rekommenderar att omriktarens alla lämpliga
- och typ av omriktare och minsta tillåtna skyddsfunktioner används för att förbättra tillämpningens
kopplingsfrekvens. säkerhet. Exempel på vanliga funktioner hos omriktare
(funktionernas namn och tillgänglighet beror på omriktarens
tillverkare och modell):
- lägsta varvtal
- högsta varvtal
- accelerations- och retardationstider
- högsta strömstyrka
- högsta moment
- skydd mot fastlåsning
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 133
7. Underhåll 2. Lagret måste smörjas medan axeln roteras varje år (ska
rapporteras). Om motorn försetts med ett rullager vid
den drivna änden måste transportlåset tas bort innan
VARNING! axeln roteras. Transportlåset måste sättas tillbaka vid
Även om motorn står stilla kan spänning för transport.
värmeelement eller direktvärmning av lindningen 3. Alla slags vibrationer måste undvikas för att undvika
finnas ansluten i uttagslådan. lagerfel. Dessutom måste alla anvisningar i motorns
instruktionshandbok för driftsättning och underhåll följas.
Garantin täcker inte lindnings- och lagerskador om
dessa anvisningar inte följts.
7.1 Allmän inspektion
1. Inspektera motorn regelbundet, minst en gång om
året. Vilket kontrollintervall som behövs beror bl.a. 7.2 Smörjning
på fukthalten i den omgivande luften och lokala
väderförhållanden. Intervallet skall bestämmas
experimentellt, varefter det ska följas strikt. VARNING!
2. Håll motorn ren och se till att ventilationsluften kan Se upp för roterande delar!
strömma fritt. Om motorn används i dammig miljö
skall ventilationssystemet regelbundet kontrolleras och
rengöras. VARNING!
3. Kontrollera axeltätningarnas kondition (t.ex. V-ring eller Fett kan förorsaka hudirritation och
radialtätning) och ersätt dem om det är nödvändigt. ögoninflammation. Följ alla säkerhetsföreskrifter som
angivits av fettleverantören.
4. Kontrollera nätanslutningarnas tillstånd och alla skruvar
för uppställning och montage.
5. Kontrollera lagrens tillstånd genom att lyssna efter Lagertyper finns angivna i respektive produktkatalog samt
främmande ljud, utföra vibrationsmätning, mäta lagrens på märkskylten för alla motorer utom de minsta storlekarna.
temperatur, inspektera det använda fettet eller utnyttja
SPM lagerövervakning. Speciell uppmärksamhet bör Tillförlitligheten kommer i första hand vid val av
iakttas angående lagren, när den beräknade angivna lagersmörjningsintervall. ABB tillämpar L1-principen (dvs. att
lagerlivslängden närmar sig sitt slut. 99 % av motorerna ska klara livslängden) för smörjning.
Om förslitningsskador upptäcks ska motorn demonteras
och alla delar kontrolleras och vid behov ersättas. När 7.2.1 Motorer med permanentsmorda lager
lagren byts måste ersättningslagren vara av samma typ Lagren är permanentsmorda och vanligtvis av typ 1Z, 2Z,
som originallagren. Vid byte av axeltätningar måste dessa 2RS eller motsvarande.
ersättas med tätningar av samma kvalitet och med samma
egenskaper som originalen. Som riktvärde gäller att tillräcklig smörjning för storlekar upp
till 250 kan uppnås under följande tid, enligt L1. Kontakta
Om en IP 55-motor som har levererats med stängd ABB för drift i högre omgivningstemperaturer. Formel för att
dräneringsplugg bör pluggen öppnas regelbundet så att grovt ändra L1-värdena till L10-värden: L10 = 2,0 x L1.
kondensvatten kan rinna ut ur motorn och inte bli kvar.
Motorn ska vara avstängd och ha gjorts arbetssäker innan
detta utförs.
7.1.1 Standby-läge
Om en motor står i standby-läge en längre tid på ett fartyg
eller i någon annan vibrerande miljö måste följande åtgärder
vidtas:
134 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Driftstimmar för permanentsmorda lager vid Smörjning när motorn står stilla
omgivningstemperaturerna 25 och 40 °C är: Om det inte är möjligt att smörja lagren medan motorn
arbetar kan de istället smörjas under stillestånd.
Driftstimmar Driftstimmar – Använd i så fall endast halva fettmängden och låt därefter
Storlek Poler vid 25 °C vid 40 °C motorn gå några minuter med högsta hastighet.
56 2 52 000 33 000 – Tryck in resten av angiven mängd fett i lagret när motorn
56 4–8 65 000 41 000 har stannat.
63 2 49 000 31 000 – Stäng fettutloppspluggen eller stängningsventilen, om
63 4–8 63 000 40 000 sådan finns, efter 1–2 timmars körning.
71 2 67 000 42 000 B. Automatisk smörjning
71 4–8 100 000 56 000
80–90 2 100 000 65 000 Vid automatisk smörjning ska fettutloppspluggen avlägsnas
80–90 4–8 100 000 96 000 permanent och en ev. stängningsventil ska vara öppen.
100–112 2 89 000 56 000
ABB rekommenderar endast användning av
100–112 4–8 100 000 89 000
elektromekaniska system.
132 2 67 000 42 000
132 4–8 100 000 77 000 De fettmängder per smörjintervall som anges i tabellen ska
160 2 60 000 38 000 multipliceras med tre om centralsmörjsystem används. När
160 4–8 100 000 74 000 en mindre automatisk smörjenhet (en eller två patroner per
180 2 55 000 34 000 motor) används kan den normala fettmängden användas.
180 4–8 100 000 70 000
Om tvåpoliga motorer smörjs automatiskt ska
200 2 41 000 25 000
fettrekommendationerna för tvåpoliga motorer i kapitlet
200 4–8 95 000 60 000 Smörjmedel följas.
225 2 36 000 23 000
225 4–8 88 000 56 000 Smörjmedlet ska vara lämpligt för automatisk smörjning.
250 2 31 000 20 000 Följ rekommendationerna från leverantören av det
250 4–8 80 000 50 000 automatiska smörjsystemet och fettillverkaren.
Data gäller upp till 60 Hz. Räkneexempel för mängd smörjmedel för ett
automatiskt smörjsystem
7.2.2 Motorer med smörjnipplar Centralsmörjsystem: Motor IEC M3_P 315_ 4-polig i
50 Hz-nät, smörjintervall enligt tabellen är 7 600 h/55 g (DE)
Smörjinformationsskylt och allmänna smörjningsråd och 7 600 h/40 g (NDE):
Om motorn är försedd med en informationsskylt för
(DE) RLI = 55 g/7 600 h*3*24 = 0,52 g/dag
smörjning ska denna följas.
På smörjinformationsskylten anges smörjintervall med (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7 600 h*3*24 = 0,38 g/dag
hänsyn tagen till monteringssätt, omgivningstemperatur
Räkneexempel för fettmängd för en enkel automatisk
och varvtal.
smörjenhet (patron)
Vid första start eller efter en lagersmörjning kan en tillfällig (DE) RLI = 55 g/7 600 h*24 = 0,17 g/dag
temperaturhöjning uppstå under cirka 10 till 20 timmar.
(NDE) RLI = 40 g/7 600 h*24 = 0,13 g/dag
En del motorer kan vara försedda med en uppsamlare för
gammalt fett. Följ i så fall de särskilda instruktionerna för RLI = smörjintervall, DE = drivande ände, NDE = icke-drivande
denna utrustning. ände
A. Manuell smörjning
7.2.3 Smörjintervall och fettmängder
Smörjning medan motorn är igång
– Ta bort fettutloppspluggen eller öppna stängningsventilen Smörjintervallen för vertikalt monterade motorer är hälften
om sådan finns. av angivna värden i tabellen nedan.
– Se till att smörjkanalen är öppen. Som riktvärde gäller att tillräcklig smörjning kan uppnås
– Pressa in angiven mängd fett i lagret. under följande tid, enligt L1. Kontakta ABB för drift i högre
– Låt motorn arbeta 1–2 timmar så att allt överskottsfett omgivningstemperaturer. Formeln för att grovt ändra
garanterat har trängt ut ur lagret. Stäng fettutlopps- L1-värdena till L10-värden lyder L10 = 2,0 x L1, med manuell
pluggen eller stängningsventilen om sådan finns. smörjning.
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 135
Högvarvsdrifter, t.ex. frekvensomriktardrifter, eller lägre
OBS! varvtal vid stor last kräver kortare smörjintervall.
En höjning av omgivningstemperaturen medför
en motsvarande höjning av temperaturen i lagret.
VARNING!
Intervallvärdena i tabellen bör halveras för 15 °C
Den maximala arbetstemperaturen för fett och lager,
ökning av lagertemperaturen och bör fördubblas för
+110 °C, får inte överskridas.
15 °C minskning av lagertemperaturen.
Det maximala varvtal motorn är konstruerad för får ej
överskridas.
Mängd
Stomme 3 600 3 000 1 800 1 500 1 000 500–900
smörjfett kW kW kW kW
storlek r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/lager
Kullager, smörjintervall i driftstimmar
112 10 alla 10 000 13 000 alla 18 000 21 000 alla 25 000 alla 28 000
132 15 alla 9 000 11 000 alla 17 000 19 000 alla 23 000 alla 26 500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9 000 12 000 ≤ 15 18 000 21 500 ≤ 11 24 000 alla 24 000
160 25 > 18,5 7 500 10 000 ≤ 15 15 000 18 000 > 11 22 500 alla 24 000
180 30 ≤ 22 7 000 9 000 ≤ 22 15 500 18 500 ≤ 15 24 000 alla 24 000
180 30 > 22 6 000 8 500 > 22 14 000 17 000 ≤ 15 21 000 alla 24 000
200 40 ≤ 37 5 500 8 000 ≤ 30 14 500 17 500 ≤ 22 23 000 alla 24 000
200 40 > 37 3 000 5 500 > 30 10 000 12 000 > 22 16 000 alla 20 000
225 50 ≤ 45 4 000 6 500 ≤ 45 13 000 16 500 ≤ 30 22 000 alla 24 000
225 50 > 45 1 500 2 500 > 45 5 000 6 000 > 30 8 000 alla 10 000
250 60 ≤ 55 2 500 4 000 ≤ 55 9 000 11 500 ≤ 37 15 000 alla 18 000
250 60 > 55 1 000 1 500 > 55 3 500 4 500 > 37 6 000 alla 7 000
2801) 60 alla 2 000 3 500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - alla 8 000 10 500 alla 14 000 alla 17 000
280 35 alla 1 900 3 200 - - - -
280 40 - - alla 7 800 9 600 alla 13 900 alla 15 000
315 35 alla 1 900 3 200 - - - -
315 55 - - alla 5 900 7 600 alla 11 800 alla 12 900
355 35 alla 1 900 3 200 - - - -
355 70 - - alla 4 000 5 600 alla 9 600 alla 10 700
400 40 alla 1 500 2 700 - - - -
400 85 - - alla 3 200 4 700 alla 8 600 alla 9 700
450 40 alla 1 500 2 700 - - - -
450 95 - - alla 2 500 3 900 alla 7 700 alla 8 700
136 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7.2.4 Smörjmedel Följande typer av fett kan användas för högvarviga
gjutjärnsmotorer, men inte tillsammans med
litiumkomplexfett:
VARNING!
Blanda inte olika typer av fett. - Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102 (polyureabas)
Inkompatibla smörjmedel kan orsaka lagerskador. - Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (polyureabas)
VARNING!
Smörjmedel som innehåller EP-tillsatser
rekommenderas inte vid höga lagertemperaturer för
storlekarna 280–450.
OBS!
Använd alltid höghastighetsfett för högvarviga
2-poliga motorer om varvtalsfaktorn överstiger
480 000 (beräknad som Dm x n där Dm = lagrets
medeldiameter (mm) och n = varvtal, r/min).
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 137
8. Eftermarknad 9. Miljökrav
De flesta av ABB:s motorer har en ljudtrycksnivå som
8.1 Reservdelar underskrider 82 dB(A) vid 50 Hz, med tolerans ±3 dB(A).
Reservdelar måste vara originaldelar eller godkända av
Värden för specifika motorer kan hittas i motsvarande
ABB om inget annat anges.
produktkataloger. Vid 60 Hz sinusmatning ska 50 Hz-
Vid beställning av reservdelar ska motorns tillverknings- värdena i produktkatalogerna ökas med cirka 4 dB(A).
nummer, fullständiga typbeteckning och produktkod enligt
Kontakta ABB för ljudtrycksnivåer vid frekvensomriktar-
märkskylten anges.
matning.
8.3 Lager
Lager kräver speciell omsorg.
OBS!
Om slutanvändaren utför reparationer, som inte
uttryckligen har godkänts av tillverkaren, befrias
tillverkaren från allt ansvar för överensstämmelse.
138 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
10. Felsökning
Nedanstående instruktioner täcker inte alla detaljer
eller varianter för utrustningen och beskriver inte heller
alla situationer som kan tänkas uppstå i samband med
installation, drift och underhåll. För närmare information,
kontakta närmaste ABB-försäljningskontor.
Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorer och generatorer 139
PROBLEM ORSAK ÅTGÄRD
Motorn behöver Överbelastning Minska belastningen.
för lång tid för att Låg spänning vid start Kontrollera om resistansen är för hög. Kontrollera att rätt
accelerera och/ kabeldimension används.
eller drar mycket
ström Fel på kortsluten rotor Byt till ny rotor.
För låg matningsspänning Korrigera matningsspänningen.
Fel Fel fasföljd Låt två fasledare byta plats vid motorn eller i gruppcentralen.
rotationsriktning
Motorn blir Överbelastning Minska belastningen.
överhettad vid Ventilationsöppningarna kan vara Öppna ventilationsöppningarna och se till att kylluften kan strömma
körning igensatta så att motorn inte får tillräcklig fritt.
kylning
En fas kan vara öppen Kontrollera att samtliga ledare och kablar är korrekt anslutna.
Jordsluten spole Motorn måste lindas om.
Obalanserad uttagsspänning Kontrollera om det finns felaktiga ledare, anslutningar och
transformatorer.
Motorn vibrerar Motorn felaktigt uppriktad Rikta upp motorn.
Svagt fundament Förstärk fundamentet.
Obalanserad koppling Balansera kopplingen.
Driven utrustning obalanserad Balansera den drivna utrustningen.
Lagerfel Byt lager.
Lager ej uppriktade Reparera motorn
Balanseringsvikterna har förskjutits Balansera om rotorn.
Bristande kompatibilitet mellan rotor- Balansera om kopplingen eller rotorn.
och kopplingsbalansering (halv kil – hel
kil)
Flerfasmotor drivs med enfasmatning Kontrollera om någon krets är öppen.
För stort ändspel Justera lager eller sätt in shims.
Skrapljud Fläkten i kontakt med lagersköld eller Korrigera fläktens montering.
fläktkåpa
Motorn lös på fundamentplattan Dra åt fästskruvarna.
Onormalt driftbuller Ojämnt luftgap Kontrollera och korrigera montering av lagersköldar och lager.
Rotor obalanserad Balansera om rotorn.
Överhettade lager Böjd eller sned axel Rikta upp eller byt axeln.
För hög remspänning Minska remspänningen.
Remskivan för långt från axelansatsen För remskivan närmare motorlagret.
För liten remskivediameter Använd större remskivor.
Felaktig uppriktning Korrigera genom att rikta upp drivsystemet.
Bristande smörjning Se till att rätt mängd lagerfett av rätt kvalitet används.
Fettet eller smörjmedlet förbrukat eller Avlägsna gammalt fett, tvätta lagret grundligt med fotogen och pressa
förorenat in nytt fett.
För mycket smörjmedel Minska fettmängden. Lagret ska inte vara fyllt mer än till hälften.
Överhettat lager Kontrollera uppriktningen samt den radiella och axiella belastningen.
Skadade kulor eller löpbanor Byt lager och rengör samtidigt lagerhuset noggrant.
140 ABB Motorer och generatorer | Handbok för lågspänningsmotor, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Pienjännitemoottorit
Asennus-, käyttö-, kunnossapito- ja turvallisuusohje
Sisällys
1. Johdanto ..................................................................................................................................143
1.1 Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus ......................................................................................143
1.2 Voimassaolo ....................................................................................................................143
2. Turvallisuusnäkökohtia ...........................................................................................................143
3. Käsittely ...................................................................................................................................144
3.1 Vastaanottotarkastus .......................................................................................................144
3.2 Kuljetus ja säilytys ............................................................................................................144
3.3 Nostaminen .....................................................................................................................144
3.4 Moottorin paino ...............................................................................................................144
4. Asennus ja käyttöönotto ........................................................................................................145
4.1 Yleistä..............................................................................................................................145
4.2 Muilla kuin kuulalaakereilla varustetut moottorit ................................................................145
4.3 Eristysvastuksen tarkistaminen ........................................................................................145
4.4 Alusta ..............................................................................................................................145
4.5 Kytkinpuolikkaiden ja hihnapyörien tasapainottaminen ja asentaminen .............................146
4.6 Moottorin kiinnitys ja linjaus..............................................................................................146
4.7 Radiaaliset voimat ja hihnakäytöt .....................................................................................146
4.8 Vesireiät ...........................................................................................................................146
4.9 Kaapelit ja sähköliitännät..................................................................................................146
4.9.1 Kytkennät eri käynnistystavoille .........................................................................147
4.9.2 Lisälaiteliitännät ................................................................................................147
4.10 Liitännät ja pyörimissuunta ...............................................................................................147
5. Toiminta ..................................................................................................................................148
5.1 Yleistä..............................................................................................................................148
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 141
6. Pienjännitemoottorit taajuusmuuttajakäytössä ..................................................................149
6.1 Johdanto .........................................................................................................................149
6.2 Käämityksen eristys .........................................................................................................149
6.2.1 Käämityksen eristyksen valinta käytettäessä ABB-taajuusmuuttajia..................149
6.2.2 Eristyksen valinta kaikille muille taajuusmuuttajille .............................................149
6.3 Lämpösuojaus ................................................................................................................149
6.4 Laakerivirrat .....................................................................................................................149
6.4.1 Laakerivirtojen ehkäiseminen säätökäytöissä, joissa on
ABB:n taajuusmuuttaja .....................................................................................150
6.4.2 Laakerivirtojen ehkäiseminen kaikissa muissa säätökäytöissä ...........................150
6.5 Kaapelointi, maadoitus ja sähkömagneettinen yhteensopivuus ........................................150
6.6 Pyörimisnopeus ...............................................................................................................150
6.7 Moottorit taajuusmuuttajakäytössä ..................................................................................150
6.7.1 Yleistä ..............................................................................................................150
6.7.2 Moottorin kuormitettavuus AC_8_ _ -sarjan taajuusmuuttajilla,
joissa on DTC-säätö .........................................................................................150
6.7.3 Moottorin kuormitettavuus AC_5_ _ -sarjan taajuusmuuttajilla ...........................150
6.7.4 Moottorin kuormitettavuus muilla PWM-tyyppisillä
jännitelähdetaajuusmuuttajilla ............................................................................151
6.7.5 Lyhytaikaiset ylikuormitukset .............................................................................151
6.8 Arvokilvet .........................................................................................................................151
6.9 Taajuusmuuttajakäytön käyttöönotto ................................................................................151
7. Kunnossapito ..........................................................................................................................152
7.1 Yleinen tarkistus ..............................................................................................................152
7.1.1 Valmiustilassa olevat moottorit .........................................................................152
7.2 Voitelu .............................................................................................................................152
7.2.1 Kestovoidelluilla laakereilla varustetut moottorit .................................................152
7.2.2 Jälkivoideltavilla laakereilla varustetut moottorit .................................................153
7.2.3 Voiteluvälit ja -määrät ........................................................................................153
7.2.4 Voiteluaineet .....................................................................................................155
8. After Sales -tuki ......................................................................................................................156
8.1 Varaosat ..........................................................................................................................156
8.2 Purkaminen, kokoaminen ja uudelleenkäämintä ...............................................................156
8.3 Laakerit ...........................................................................................................................156
9. Ympäristövaatimukset ...........................................................................................................156
10. Vianmääritys ............................................................................................................................157
142 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Johdanto 2. Turvallisuusnäkökohtia
Moottori on tarkoitettu pätevien, voimassa olevat
HUOM.! turvallisuusvaatimukset tuntevien henkilöiden
Näitä ohjeita on noudatettava, jotta varmistetaan asennettavaksi ja käytettäväksi.
moottorin turvallinen ja oikea asennus, käyttö ja
huolto. Henkilöiden, jotka asentavat, käyttävät Turvalaitteita, jotka ovat tarpeen onnettomuuksien
tai huoltavat moottoreitamme tai niihin liittyviä estämiseksi asennuksen ja käytön yhteydessä, on
laitteita, on saatava nämä ohjeet käyttöönsä. käytettävä asianomaisen maan määräysten mukaan.
Moottori on tarkoitettu pätevien, voimassa olevat
turvallisuusvaatimukset tuntevien henkilöiden
asennettavaksi ja käytettäväksi. Näiden ohjeiden VAROITUS!
noudattamatta jättäminen voi mitätöidä kaikki Hätäpysäyttimet on varustettava uudelleen-
soveltuvat takuut. käynnistyksen lukituksilla. Hätäpysäytyksen jälkeen
uusi käynnistyskäsky voi astua voimaan vasta sen
jälkeen, kun uudelleenkäynnistyksen lukitus on
tarkoituksella nollattu.
1.1 Vaatimustenmukaisuus-
vakuutus
Kun moottori asennetaan koneeseen, toimeksiantajan on Huomioitavia seikkoja:
määritettävä, vastaako lopputuote konedirektiivin 2006/42/ 1. Älä astu moottorin päälle.
EY vaatimuksia.
2. Moottorin ulkopinta voi olla kuuma normaalikäytössä ja
erityisesti pysäytyksen jälkeen.
1.2 Voimassaolo 3. Jotkin erikoiskäytöt saattavat vaatia erikoisohjeita (esim.
taajuusmuuttajakäytöt).
Nämä ohjeet ovat voimassa seuraaville ABB:n
sähkökoneille sekä moottori- että generaattorikäytöissä: 4. Ota huomioon moottorin pyörivät osat.
5. Älä avaa liitäntäkoteloita, kun ne ovat jännitteisinä.
sarjat MT*, MXMA,
sarjat M1A*, M2A*/M3A*, M2B*/M3B*, M4B*, M2C*/M3C*,
M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, M2M*/M3M*, M2Q*, M2R*/M3R*,
M2V*/M3V*
runkokoot 56–450.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 143
3. Käsittely Kierteellä kiinnitetyt nostosilmukat täytyy kiristää ennen
nostamista. Tarvittaessa nostosilmukka on säädettävä
oikeaan asentoon sopivia aluslaattoja käyttäen.
3.1 Vastaanottotarkastus
Varmista, että nostovälineet ovat oikeankokoisia ja
Tarkista heti vastaanoton jälkeen, ettei moottori ole nostokoukut sopivat nostosilmukoihin.
vahingoittunut ulkoisesti (tarkista akselien päät, laipat ja
maalatut pinnat). Ota tarvittaessa välittömästi yhteyttä Nostettaessa on varottava vahingoittamasta moottoriin
kuljetusliikkeeseen. kiinnitettyjä lisälaitteita ja kaapeleita.
Tarkista kaikki arvokilven tiedot, etenkin jännite ja kytkennät Irrota mahdolliset kuljetuskiinnittimet, jotka kiinnittävät
(tähti tai kolmio). Laakerityyppi on mainittu kaikkien muiden moottorin lavaan.
paitsi runkokooltaan pienimpien moottoreiden arvokilvessä.
Tarkat nostotiedot saa ABB:ltä.
Taajuusmuuttajakäytössä tarkista sallittu enimmäis-
kuormitettavuus moottorin toiseen tyyppikilpeen leimatun
taajuuden mukaan. VAROITUS!
Nosto-, asennus- tai huoltotöiden aikana kaikkien
tarvittavien turvallisuustoimien on oltava käytössä ja
3.2 Kuljetus ja säilytys erityishuomiota on kiinnitettävä siihen, että kukaan ei
Moottorit tulee varastoida sisätiloissa (lämpötila yli −20 °C), ole nostetun kuorman alla.
kuivissa, tärinättömissä ja pölyttömissä olosuhteissa.
Kuljetuksen aikana moottorit on suojattava iskuilta,
putoamisilta ja kosteudelta. Muissa olosuhteissa ota yhteys 3.4 Moottorin paino
ABB:n edustajaan.
Moottorin kokonaispaino voi vaihdella samassakin
Suojaamattomat koneistetut pinnat (akselien päät ja laipat) runkokoossa (keskikorkeus) eri nimellistehon,
on käsiteltävä korroosionestoaineella. asennusasennon ja lisävarusteiden takia.
Akselia suositellaan pyöritettävän säännöllisin väliajoin käsin Seuraavassa taulukossa on esitetty moottoreiden arvioidut
rasvan muuttumisen estämiseksi. enimmäispainot vakiomallin moottoreille runkomateriaalin
mukaisesti.
Mahdollisten seisontalämmitysvastusten käyttö on
suositeltavaa, jotta kondensaatioveden kerääntyminen Kaikkien ABB:n moottoreiden todellinen paino on mainittu
moottoriin voitaisiin estää. arvokilvessä runkokooltaan pienimpiä moottoreita (56 ja 63)
lukuun ottamatta.
Pysähdyksissä olevaan moottoriin ei saa kohdistua ulkoista
tärinää, jotta laakerit eivät vahingoittuisi. Runkokoko Alumiini Valurauta Lisäys
jarrusta
Moottorit, joissa on rullalaakerit tai viistokuulalaakerit, tulee Paino (kg) Paino (kg)
varustaa lukituksella kuljetuksen ajaksi. 56 4,5 – –
63 6 – –
3.3 Nostaminen 71 8 13 5
80 14 20 8
Kaikissa yli 25 kg:n painoisissa ABB:n moottoreissa on 90 20 30 10
nostosilmukat. 100 32 40 16
112 36 50 20
Moottorin nostamiseen saa käyttää vain sen omia
132 93 90 30
päänostosilmukoita. Niitä ei saa käyttää moottorin
160 149 130 30
nostamiseen silloin, kun se on kytketty muuhun laitteistoon.
180 162 190 45
Lisälaitteiden (esimerkiksi jarrujen tai erillisten puhaltimien) 200 245 275 55
tai liitäntäkoteloiden nostosilmukoita ei saa käyttää 225 300 360 75
moottorin nostamiseen. Eri tehojen, asennusasentojen ja 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 –
lisävarusteiden takia saman runkokoon moottoreilla saattaa
315 – 1 700 –
olla eri painopiste.
355 – 2 700 –
Vahingoittuneita nostosilmukoita ei saa käyttää. Tarkista 400 – 3 500 –
ennen nostoa, että silmukkapultit tai kiinteät nostosilmukat 450 – 4 500 –
ovat vahingoittumattomat.
Jos moottori on varustettu erillisellä puhaltimella, kysy paino
ABB:ltä.
144 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4. Asennus ja käyttöönotto 4.3 Eristysvastuksen
tarkistaminen
VAROITUS! Mittaa eristysvastus ennen käyttöönottoa ja silloin, kun
Katkaise virta moottorista ennen moottorin tai epäilet käämityksen olevan kostea.
käytettävän laitteiston käsittelemistä.
Eristysvastus ei saa 25 °C:n lämpötilaan korjattuna missään
tapauksessa olla alle 1 MΩ (mitattuna jännitteellä 500 tai
4.1 Yleistä 1 000 V DC). Eristysvastuksen arvo tulee puolittaa jokaista
20 °C:n lämpötilan nousua kohti. Eristyksen voi korjata
Tarkista kaikki arvokilven arvot, jotta moottorin oikeasta haluttuun lämpötilaan kuvan 1 mukaisesti.
suojauksesta ja kytkennästä voidaan varmistua.
VAROITUS!
4.2 Muilla kuin kuulalaakereilla Sähköiskujen välttämiseksi moottorin runko on
maadoitettava ja käämitysten sähkövaraus on
varustetut moottorit purettava runkoon välittömästi jokaisen mittauksen
Poista kuljetuslukitukset, jos niitä on. Tarkista jälkeen.
mahdollisuuksien mukaan vapaa pyöriminen kääntämällä
moottorin akselia käsin. Ellei eristysvastusmittauksessa saavuteta ohjearvoa,
käämitys on liian kostea ja se on kuivattava uunissa. Uunin
Rullalaakereilla varustetut moottorit: lämpötilan on oltava 90 °C 12–16 tunnin ajan ja sen jälkeen
Moottorin käyttö ilman säteittäistä kuormitusta akselille 105 °C 6–8 tunnin ajan.
saattaa vahingoittaa rullalaakereita.
Mahdolliset vesireikien tulpat on irrotettava ja sulkuventtiilit
avattava lämmityksen ajaksi. Lämmityksen jälkeen tulpat
Viistokuulalaakerilla varustetut moottorit: on muistettava sulkea. Vaikka moottori on varustettu
Moottorin käyttö ilman oikeansuuntaista ja -suuruista vesireiällä ja tulpalla, on suositeltavaa purkaa laakerikilvet ja
aksiaalivoimaa saattaa vahingoittaa moottorin liitäntäkotelon kansi kuivausta varten.
viistokuulalaakeria.
Meriveden kastelemat käämitykset on useimmiten
käämittävä uudelleen.
VAROITUS!
Moottoreissa, joissa on viistokuulalaakerit,
aksiaalivoima ei saa millään tavoin muuttaa suuntaa. 4.4 Alusta
Loppukäyttäjällä on täysi vastuu alustan valmistamisesta.
Laakerityyppi on mainittu arvokilvessä.
Metalliset alustat on maalattava, jotta ne eivät ruostu.
Jälkivoideltavilla laakereilla varustetut moottorit: Alustan on oltava tasainen ja riittävän tukeva, jotta se
Moottoria käynnistettäessä ensimmäistä kertaa sekä kestää mahdolliset oikosulkuvoimat.
moottorin pitkän varastoinnin jälkeen tulee laakereille tehdä
ensirasvaus, jossa voiteluainetta lisätään voitelukilven Alusta on suunniteltava ja mitoitettava siten, että vältetään
ohjeen mukainen määrä. tärinän johtuminen moottoriin ja resonanssin aiheuttama
tärinä. Katso seuraava kuva.
Katso lisätietoja kohdasta 7.2.2, Jälkivoideltavilla laakereilla
varustetut moottorit. Viivain
Kun moottori asennetaan pystyasentoon akseli alas
osoittaen, on siinä oltava suojakansi, joka estää vieraiden
esineiden ja nesteiden tulemista tuuletusaukkojen läpi.
HUOM.! Moottorin jalkojen
Tämä voidaan toteuttaa myös erillisellä kannella, jota ei ole korkeusero ei saa olla
kiinnitetty moottoriin. Tässä tapauksessa moottorissa on yli ± 0,1 mm.
oltava varoitusmerkintä.
Jalan paikka
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 145
4.5 Kytkinpuolikkaiden ja hihna- 4.7 Radiaaliset voimat ja
pyörien tasapainottaminen hihnakäytöt
ja asentaminen Hihnat tulee kiristää käytettävän laitteiston toimittajan
ohjeiden mukaan. Älä kuitenkaan ylitä tuote-
Moottori tasapainotetaan normaalisti puolella kiilalla. esitteissä ilmoitettuja maksimihihnavoimia (laakerin
Kytkinpuolikkaat ja hihnapyörät on tasapainotettava radiaalikuormituksia).
kiilaurien jyrsimisen jälkeen. Tasapainotusmenetelmä tulee
valita akselin tasapainotusmenetelmään sopivaksi. VAROITUS!
Kytkinpuolikkaat ja hihnapyörät tulee asentaa akselille Liiallinen hihnojen kiristys vaurioittaa laakereita ja voi
käyttäen tarkoitukseen sopivia tarvikkeita ja työkaluja, jotka aiheuttaa akselin vahingoittumisen.
eivät vaurioita laakereita tai tiivisteitä.
Poraa tarvittaessa reiät ohjaustapeille ja kiinnitä ohjaustapit Syöttökaapelit on liitettävä sopivien kaapelikenkien avulla.
paikoilleen. Lisälaitteiden kaapelit voidaan liittää kytkentärimaan
sellaisinaan.
Kytkimen asennustarkkuus: Tarkista, että poikkeama b
on alle 0,05 mm ja että ero a1–a2 on myös alle 0,05 mm. Moottorit on tarkoitettu vain kiinteään asennukseen. Jos
Katso kuva 2. erikseen ei ole muuta mainittu, kaapeliläpivienneissä on
metriset kierteet. Holkkitiivisteillä tulee olla vähintään sama
Tarkista linjaus uudelleen, kun pultit tai kierretangot on IP-luokka kuin liitäntäkoteloilla.
kiristetty lopullisesti.
Asennuksen aikana on käytettävä sertifioitua putken
Älä ylitä tuoteluetteloissa mainittuja laakereiden suurimpia keskiötä tai kaapeliliitintä.
sallittuja kuormitusarvoja.
146 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4.9.1 Kytkennät eri käynnistystavoille
VAROITUS!
Käytä kaapeliläpivienneissä asianmukaisia Normaalissa yksinopeuksisessa moottorissa on yleensä
holkkitiivisteitä kaapelin tyypin ja läpimitan kuusi liitintä staattorikäämeille (pääliittimet) ja ainakin yksi
mukaisesti. maadoitusliitin. Tämä mahdollistaa suoran käynnistyksen tai
tähtikolmiokäynnistyksen.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 147
5. Toiminta
5.1 Yleistä
Moottorit on suunniteltu käytettäviksi seuraavissa
olosuhteissa, ellei arvokilvessä ole toisin ilmoitettu.
VAROITUS!
Laitteiden käyttö- ja kunnossapito-ohjeiden
laiminlyöminen voi vaarantaa turvallisuuden ja estää
moottorin käyttämisen.
148 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6. Pienjännitemoottorit taajuusmuuttajakäytössä
6.1 Johdanto 6.2.2 Eristyksen valinta kaikille muille
taajuusmuuttajille
Ohjeen tässä osassa on lisäohjeita taajuusmuuttajakäytössä
käytettävistä moottoreista. Moottori on tarkoitettu Jänniterasitukset eivät saa ylittää sallittuja raja-arvoja.
käytettäväksi yhdestä taajuusmuuttajakäytöstä, eikä Sovelluksen turvallisuus tulee varmistaa laitteiston
useita moottoreita saa käyttää rinnakkain yhdestä toimittajalta. Mahdollisten suodattimien vaikutus on otettava
taajuusmuuttajasta. Taajuusmuuttajan valmistajan antamia huomioon moottorin mitoituksessa.
ohjeita on noudatettava.
Ota yhteyttä ABB:hen, jos tarvitset lisätietoja vastusjarrutuksesta tai ohjatulla syöttöyksiköllä varustetuista
taajuusmuuttajista.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 149
6.4.1 Laakerivirtojen ehkäiseminen Lisätietoja taajuusmuuttajakäyttöjen maadoittamisesta ja
säätökäytöissä, joissa on ABB:n kaapeloinnista on ohjeessa "Grounding and cabling of the
drive system" (Koodi: 3AFY 61201998).
taajuusmuuttaja
Kun käytetään ABB:n dioditasasuuntaajalla varustettua
taajuusmuuttajaa (esim. AC_8_ _- ja AC_5_ _ -sarjat),
taulukon 6.1 mukaisia menetelmiä on käytettävä haitallisten
6.6 Pyörimisnopeus
laakerivirtojen välttämiseksi. Moottorin arvokilvessä tai tuoteoppaassa ilmoitettua
nimellisnopeutta suuremmilla nopeuksilla on varmistettava,
että nopeus ei kasva suuremmaksi kuin moottorin suurin
HUOM.! sallittu pyörimisnopeus tai koko sovelluksen kriittinen
On suositeltavaa käyttää eristettyjä laakereita, joiden nopeus.
sisä- ja/tai ulkokehät on pinnoitettu alumiinioksidilla,
tai laakereita, joissa on keraamiset vierintäelimet.
Lisäksi alumiinioksidipinnoitteet tulee käsitellä
kyllästeellä, joka estää lian ja kosteuden pääsyn 6.7 Moottorit taajuusmuuttaja-
huokoiseen pinnoitteeseen. Tarkat tiedot laakereiden käytössä
eristyksestä on ilmoitettu moottorin arvokilvessä.
Laakerityypin tai eristysmenetelmän muuttaminen
ilman ABB:n lupaa on kiellettyä.
6.7.1 Yleistä
Jos käytössä on ABB:n taajuusmuuttaja, moottorit voidaan
mitoittaa ABB:n DriveSize-mitoitusohjelman avulla. Tämän
6.4.2 Laakerivirtojen ehkäiseminen kaikissa ohjelman voi ladata ABB:n Web-sivustosta (www.abb.com/
muissa säätökäytöissä motors&generators).
Käyttäjä on vastuussa moottorin ja käytettävän laitteiston
suojaamisesta haitallisilta laakerivirroilta. Luvussa 6.4.1 Jos käytössä on muita taajuusmuuttajia, moottorien
annettuja ohjeita voidaan soveltaa, mutta niiden toimivuutta mitoitus täytyy tehdä manuaalisesti. Lisätietoja saat
ei voida taata kaikissa tapauksissa. ABB:ltä.
150 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6.7.4 Moottorin kuormitettavuus 6.9 Taajuusmuuttajakäytön
muilla PWM-tyyppisillä
jännitelähdetaajuusmuuttajilla
käyttöönotto
Muilla taajuusmuuttajilla, joilla on ei-säädettävä tasajännite Taajuusmuuttajakäytön käyttöönotossa on noudatettava
ja vähimmäiskytkentätaajuus 3 kHz (200–500 V), luvussa taajuusmuuttajan ohjeita ja paikallista lainsäädäntöä.
6.7.3 mainittuja mitoitusohjeita voidaan käyttää viitteellisinä Lisäksi on otettava huomioon käyttökohteen asettamat
ohjeina. On kuitenkin huomioitava, että todellinen terminen vaatimukset ja rajoitukset.
kuormitettavuus voi myös olla pienempi. Ota yhteyttä
taajuusmuuttajan valmistajaan tai järjestelmän toimittajaan. Kaikki taajuusmuuttajan säätämiseen tarvittavat parametrit
on luettava tai otettava moottorin arvokilvistä. Tavallisimmin
tarvittavat parametrit ovat seuraavat:
HUOM.!
Moottorin todellinen terminen kuormitettavuus voi
– nimellisjännite
olla pienempi kuin ohjeellisissa käyrissä ilmoitettu
– nimellisvirta
arvo.
– nimellistaajuus
– nimellisnopeus
6.7.5 Lyhytaikaiset ylikuormitukset – nimellisteho.
ABB:n moottoreita voidaan tavallisesti ylikuormittaa
väliaikaisesti sekä käyttää jaksottaisesti. Tällaisten
sovellusten mitoittaminen on helpointa DriveSize-työkalulla. HUOM.!
Jos tietoja puuttuu tai ne ovat epätäsmällisiä,
moottoria ei saa käyttää, ennen kuin oikeat
6.8 Arvokilvet asetukset on varmistettu laitteiden valmistajilta.
ABB:n moottorien käyttö taajuusmuuttajakäytössä ei
tavallisesti vaadi ylimääräisiä arvokilpiä. Taajuusmuuttajan ABB suosittelee kaikkien tilanteeseen soveltuvien
käyttöönotossa tarvittavat parametrit löytyvät taajuusmuuttajan suojausominaisuuksien käyttämistä
pääarvokilvestä. Joissakin erikoistapauksissa turvallisuuden parantamiseksi. Taajuusmuuttajissa on
moottorit saatetaan varustaa taajuusmuuttajakäytön yleensä seuraavanlaisia ominaisuuksia (ominaisuuksien
lisäarvokilvillä. Niissä on seuraavat tiedot: nimet ja käytettävyys vaihtelevat taajuusmuuttajan
valmistajan ja mallin mukaan):
– nopeusalue
– tehoalue – vähimmäisnopeus
– jännite- ja virta-alue – enimmäisnopeus
– momenttityyppi (vakio tai neliöllinen) – kiihdytys- ja jarrutusajat
– taajuusmuuttajatyyppi ja vaadittava – enimmäisvirta
vähimmäiskytkentätaajuus. – enimmäismomentti
– jumisuojaus.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 151
7. Kunnossapito 7.1.1 Valmiustilassa olevat moottorit
Jos laivalla tai muussa tärisevässä ympäristössä oleva
moottori on valmiustilassa pidemmän aikaa, on suoritettava
VAROITUS!
seuraavat toimenpiteet:
Moottorin seisoessa jännite voi olla kytkettynä
liitäntäkotelon sisällä lämmitysvastuksille tai suoraan 1. Akselia täytyy pyörittää säännöllisesti kahden viikon
käämityksen lämmitykselle. välein (raportoidaan) käynnistämällä järjestelmä. Jos
käynnistys ei ole jostakin syystä mahdollinen, akselia
tulee vähintäänkin kääntää käsin kerran viikossa,
jotta se tulee eri asentoon. Muista aluksella olevista
7.1 Yleinen tarkistus laitteista johtuva tärinä aiheuttaa laakerin kolosyöpymää,
joka tulee minimoida säännöllisen käytön / käsin
1. Tarkista moottori säännöllisin väliajoin, vähintään kerran
pyörittämisen avulla.
vuodessa. Tarkastusten väli määräytyy esimerkiksi
ympäröivän ilman kosteustason ja paikallisten sääolojen 2. Laakeri täytyy rasvata akselin pyörittämisen yhteydessä
mukaan. Tarkastusten väli voidaan aluksi määrittää vuosittain (raportoidaan). Jos moottorin käyttöpäässä on
kokeellisesti, ja sitä on jatkossa noudatettava. rullalaakeri, kuljetuslukitus täytyy irrottaa ennen akselin
2. Pidä moottori puhtaana ja huolehdi jäähdytysilman pyörittämistä. Kuljetuslukitus täytyy asentaa takaisin
vapaasta kulusta. Jos moottoria käytetään pölyisessä paikalleen ennen kuljetusta.
ympäristössä, tuuletusjärjestelmä on tarkistettava ja 3. Kaikkea tärinää tulee välttää, jotta laakerin vioittuminen
puhdistettava säännöllisesti. voidaan estää. Kaikkia moottorin käyttöoppaassa olevia
3. Seuraa akselitiivisteiden (esim. V-renkaan tai käyttöönotto- ja huolto-ohjeita on noudatettava. Takuu ei
säteistiivisteen) kuntoa ja uusi ne tarvittaessa. kata käämityksen ja laakerin vahinkoja, jos näitä ohjeita ei
ole noudatettu.
4. Seuraa kytkentöjen ja kiinnitysruuvien kuntoa.
5. Tarkkaile laakerien kuntoa laakeriääntä kuuntelemalla,
laakerien tärinää tai lämpötilaa mittaamalla, poistuvaa 7.2 Voitelu
voiteluainetta tarkkailemalla tai SPM-valvontalaitteilla.
Tarkkaile laakereita erityisen huolellisesti silloin, kun
niiden laskettu käyttöikä alkaa lähestyä loppuaan.
VAROITUS!
Kun muuttumista alkaa tapahtua, avaa moottori, tarkista Varo pyöriviä osia!
osat ja uusi ne tarvittaessa. Moottoreihin vaihdettavien
laakereiden on oltava samaa tyyppiä kuin alkuperäisten.
Akselitiiviste on vaihdettava laakerivaihdon yhteydessä,
VAROITUS!
ja tiivisteen on oltava ominaisuuksiltaan samanlainen kuin
Monet voiteluaineet saattavat ärsyttää ihoa tai
alkuperäinen tiiviste.
aiheuttaa silmätulehduksia. Noudata voiteluaineen
Jos IP 55 -moottori on toimitettu tulppa suljettuna, on valmistajan antamia turvaohjeita.
suositeltavaa avata vesireikien tulpat säännöllisesti,
jotta moottoriin kondensoituneen veden poistumistie ei
tukkeutuisi ja jotta vesi pääsisi ulos. Tämä tehdään, kun Laakerityypit on mainittu tuote-esitteissä ja kaikkien
moottori on pysähdyksissä ja sellaisessa tilassa, jossa sen moottoreiden arvokilvissä runkokooltaan pienimpiä
käsittely on turvallista. moottoreita lukuun ottamatta.
152 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Kestovoideltujen laakereiden käyttötunnit lämpötiloissa Uudelleenvoitelu moottorin ollessa pysähtyneenä
25 °C ja 40 °C ovat seuraavat: Moottori voidellaan yleensä moottorin pyöriessä,
mutta voitelu voidaan suorittaa myös moottorin ollessa
Runko- Käyttötunteja Käyttötunteja pysähtyneenä.
koko Napaluku 25 °C 40 °C – Tällöin lisätään ensin vain puolet suositellusta voitelu-
56 2 52 000 33 000 ainemäärästä ja annetaan koneen käydä täydellä
56 4–8 65 000 41 000 nopeudella muutama minuutti.
63 2 49 000 31 000 – Kun moottori on pysähtynyt, lisätään loput
63 4–8 63 000 40 000 voiteluaineesta.
71 2 67 000 42 000 – Anna moottorin pyöriä 1–2 tuntia ja sulje sen jälkeen
71 4–8 100 000 56 000 tiivistystulpilla varustetut poistoaukot tai sulkuventtiili.
80–90 2 100 000 65 000
B. Automaattivoitelu
80–90 4–8 100 000 96 000
100–112 2 89 000 56 000 Poistoaukon tulppa on poistettava pysyvästi tai mahdollinen
100–112 4–8 100 000 89 000 sulkuventtiili on avattava, jos käytetään automaattista
132 2 67 000 42 000 voitelua.
132 4–8 100 000 77 000
ABB suosittelee vain sähkömekaanisten järjestelmien
160 2 60 000 38 000
käyttöä.
160 4–8 100 000 74 000
180 2 55 000 34 000 Taulukoissa mainitut voiteluainemäärät voiteluväliä kohti
180 4–8 100 000 70 000 täytyy nelinkertaistaa, jos käytetään keskusvoitelu-
200 2 41 000 25 000 järjestelmää. Pienemmän automaattivoiteluyksikön (yksi tai
200 4–8 95 000 60 000 kaksi kasettia moottoria kohti) tapauksessa voidaan käyttää
225 2 36 000 23 000 normaalia voiteluainemäärää.
225 4–8 88 000 56 000
Käytettäessä automaattivoitelua kaksinapaisille moottoreille
250 2 31 000 20 000
on noudatettava niitä koskevaa voiteluainesuositusta, joka
250 4–8 80 000 50 000 on annettu luvussa Voiteluaineet.
Tiedot ovat voimassa 60 Hz:iin asti.
Käytetyn voiteluaineen tulee soveltua automaattivoiteluun.
Automaattivoitelujärjestelmän jakaja ja voiteluaineen
7.2.2 Jälkivoideltavilla laakereilla varustetut valmistajan suositukset tulee tarkistaa.
moottorit
Laskentaesimerkki automaattivoitelujärjestelmän
Voiteluohjekilpi ja yleisiä voiteluohjeita voiteluainemäärälle
Jos moottorissa on voiteluohjekilpi, noudata siinä olevia Keskusvoitelujärjestelmä: Moottori IEC M3_P 315_
arvoja. 4-napainen 50 Hz:n verkossa, taulukon mukainen
uudelleenvoiteluväli on 7 600 h/55 g (DE) ja 7 600 h/40 g
Voiteluohjekilvessä ilmoitetaan voiteluvälit asennustavan, (NDE):
ympäristön lämpötilan ja pyörintänopeuden mukaisesti.
Ensimmäisen käynnistyksen aikana tai laakerin voitelun (DE) RLI = 55 g/7 600 h*3*24 = 0,52 g/vrk
jälkeen voi esiintyä väliaikaista lämpötilan kohoamista noin (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7 600 h*3*24 = 0,38 g/vrk
10–20 tunnin ajan.
Laskentaesimerkki yhden automaattivoiteluyksikön
Joissakin moottoreissa voi olla poistuvan voiteluaineen
(kasetin) voiteluainemäärälle
kerääjä. Noudata laitteen erillisohjeita.
(DE) RLI = 55 g/7 600 h*24 = 0,17 g/vrk
A. Manuaalinen voitelu
(NDE) RLI = 40 g/7 600 h*24 = 0,13 g/vrk
Uudelleenvoitelu moottorin pyöriessä
– Jos voiteluaineen poistoaukot on varustettu tiivistystulpilla RLI = uudelleenvoiteluväli, DE = käyttöpää, NDE = N-pää
tai sulkuventtiilillä, poista ne voitelun ajaksi.
– Varmista, että voitelukanava on auki. 7.2.3 Voiteluvälit ja -määrät
– Purista suositeltu määrä voiteluainetta laakereihin.
– Anna moottorin pyöriä 1–2 tuntia varmistaaksesi, että Pystyasentoon asennettujen moottorien voiteluvälit ovat
ylimääräinen voiteluaine on poistunut. Sulje tiivistystulpilla puolet taulukon arvoista.
varustetut poistoaukot tai sulkuventtiili.
Ohjeena on seuraava taulukko, jossa esitetään voitelun
riittävyys L1-periaatteen mukaan. Lisätietoja käyttötunneista
korkeammissa lämpötiloissa saa tarvittaessa ABB:ltä.
Ohjeellinen kaava, jolla L1-arvot voidaan muuntaa karkeasti
L10-arvoiksi, on L10 = 2,0 x L1 manuaalivoitelulla.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 153
Nopeamman pyörimisen käyttö, esim. taajuusmuuttaja-
HUOM.! käyttö, tai pienempi nopeus raskaammalla kuormituksella
Ympäristön lämpötilan nousu nostaa laakerien edellyttää lyhyempää voiteluväliä.
lämpötilaa vastaavasti. Väliarvot tulee puolittaa
laakerin lämpötilan noustessa 15 °C, ja ne voidaan
VAROITUS!
kaksinkertaistaa laakerin lämpötilan laskiessa 15 °C.
Voiteluaineen ja laakerin suurinta sallittua
käyttölämpötilaa +110 °C ei saa ylittää.
Moottorin suurinta sallittua nopeutta ei saa ylittää.
Voiteluaineen
Runko- 3 600 3 000 1 800 1 500 1 000 500–900
määrä kW kW kW kW
koko r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min
g/laakeri
Kuulalaakerit, voiteluväli käyttötunteina
112 10 kaikki 10 000 13 000 kaikki 18 000 21 000 kaikki 25 000 kaikki 28 000
132 15 kaikki 9 000 11 000 kaikki 17 000 19 000 kaikki 23 000 kaikki 26 500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9 000 12 000 ≤ 15 18 000 21 500 ≤ 11 24 000 kaikki 24 000
160 25 > 18,5 7 500 10 000 > 15 15 000 18 000 > 11 22 500 kaikki 24 000
180 30 ≤ 22 7 000 9 000 ≤ 22 15 500 18 500 ≤ 15 24 000 kaikki 24 000
180 30 > 22 6 000 8 500 > 22 14 000 17 000 > 15 21 000 kaikki 24 000
200 40 ≤ 37 5 500 8 000 ≤ 30 14 500 17 500 ≤ 22 23 000 kaikki 24 000
200 40 > 37 3 000 5 500 > 30 10 000 12 000 > 22 16 000 kaikki 20 000
225 50 ≤ 45 4 000 6 500 ≤ 45 13 000 16 500 ≤ 30 22 000 kaikki 24 000
225 50 > 45 1 500 2 500 > 45 5 000 6 000 > 30 8 000 kaikki 10 000
250 60 ≤ 55 2 500 4 000 ≤ 55 9 000 11 500 ≤ 37 15 000 kaikki 18 000
250 60 > 55 1 000 1 500 > 55 3 500 4 500 > 37 6 000 kaikki 7 000
2801) 60 kaikki 2 000 3 500 – – – – – –
2801) 60 – – – kaikki 8 000 10 500 kaikki 14 000 kaikki 17 000
280 35 kaikki 1 900 3 200 – – – –
280 40 – – kaikki 7 800 9 600 kaikki 13 900 kaikki 15 000
315 35 kaikki 1 900 3 200 – – – –
315 55 – – kaikki 5 900 7 600 kaikki 11 800 kaikki 12 900
355 35 kaikki 1 900 3 200 – – – –
355 70 – – kaikki 4 000 5 600 kaikki 9 600 kaikki 10 700
400 40 kaikki 1 500 2 700 – – – –
400 85 – – kaikki 3 200 4 700 kaikki 8 600 kaikki 9 700
450 40 kaikki 1 500 2 700 – – – –
450 95 – – kaikki 2 500 3 900 kaikki 7 700 kaikki 8 700
154 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7.2.4 Voiteluaineet Seuraavia voiteluaineita voidaan käyttää valurautaisissa
suurnopeusmoottoreissa, mutta ei sekoitettuina
litiumkompleksirasvoihin:
VAROITUS!
Älä sekoita eri voiteluaineita keskenään. – Klüber Klüber Quiet BQH 72-102 (polyureapohja)
Yhteensopimattomat voiteluaineet voivat aiheuttaa – Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (polyureapohja).
laakerivaurion.
Jos muita voiteluaineita käytetään, tarkista valmistajalta,
että niiden laatu vastaa edellä mainittuja voiteluaineita.
Voitelussa on käytettävä vain erikoisesti kuulalaakereille Voiteluaineiden voiteluvälit perustuvat siihen, että käytetään
tarkoitettuja voiteluaineita, joiden ominaisuudet vastaavat edellä lueteltuja laadukkaita voitelulaineita. Muiden
seuraavia vaatimuksia: voiteluaineiden käyttäminen voi lyhentää voiteluväliä.
– laadukas litium-kompleksisaippua ja mineraali- tai
PAO-öljy
– perusöljyn viskositeetti 100–160 cST 40 °C:ssa
– kovuusluokka NLGI-aste 1,5–3 *)
– lämpötila-alue −30 °C...+120 °C, jatkuvasti.
VAROITUS!
EP-lisäaineisia voiteluaineita ei suositella korkeissa
laakerilämpötiloissa runkokokoluokissa 280 - 450.
HUOM.!
Kaksinapaisissa suurnopeusmoottoreissa, joiden
nopeuskerroin (Dm x n, jossa Dm = keskimääräinen
laakerin halkaisija [mm] ja n = pyörimisnopeus, r/min)
on suurempi kuin 480 000, on käytettävä suur-
nopeusvoiteluaineita.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 155
8. After Sales -tuki 9. Ympäristövaatimukset
Useimpien ABB:n moottoreiden äänenpainetaso ei ole yli
8.1 Varaosat 82 dB(A) (± 3 dB) 50 Hz:n taajuudella.
Ellei muuta mainita, varaosien on oltava alkuperäisosia tai Yksittäisten moottorien arvot on annettu vastaavissa tuote-
ABB:n hyväksymiä. esitteissä. 60 Hz:n sinimuotoisella syötöllä arvot ovat noin
Varaosia tilattaessa on ilmoitettava moottorin sarjanumero, 4 dB(A) suuremmat kuin tuote-esitteissä annetut 50 Hz:n
täydellinen tyyppimerkintä ja tuotekoodi. Nämä tiedot on arvot.
annettu arvokilvessä. Tietoja äänenpainetasoista taajuusmuuttajakäytöissä saat
ABB:ltä.
8.2 Purkaminen, kokoaminen Kun moottori(t) on hävitettävä tai kierrätettävä, on
ja uudelleenkäämintä noudatettava asianmukaisia menetelmiä sekä paikallisia
säädöksiä ja lakeja.
Uudelleenkääminnän saa suorittaa vain pätevä korjaamo.
8.3 Laakerit
Laakereista on pidettävä erityistä huolta.
HUOM.!
Loppukäyttäjän tekemät korjaukset, joita valmistaja
ei ole erikseen hyväksynyt, vapauttavat valmistajan
vaatimustenmukaisuusvastuusta.
156 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
10. Vianmääritys
Nämä ohjeet eivät kata kaikkia laitteiston vaihtoehtoja tai
yksityiskohtia eivätkä anna tietoja kaikista mahdollisista
asennuksen, käytön tai huollon aikana ilmenevistä
tilanteista. Lisäohjeita saa ottamalla yhteyttä lähimpään
ABB:n myyntikonttoriin.
Moottorin vianetsintäkaavio
Moottorin huolto- ja vianetsintätoimenpiteitä saavat
suorittaa vain pätevät henkilöt, joilla on tarvittavat työkalut ja
välineet.
Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 157
ONGELMA AIHEUTTAJA SUOSITELTAVA TOIMENPIDE
Moottorin Ylikuormitus Vähennä kuormitusta.
kiihdytysaika on Liian alhainen jännite käynnistettäessä Tarkista mahdollinen suuri vastus. Varmista, että kaapelin koko on
liian pitkä, ja/tai riittävä.
virrankulutus on
liian suuri Viallinen oikosulkuroottori Vaihda roottori.
Liian pieni syöttöjännite Korjaa syöttöjännite.
Väärä Väärä vaihejärjestys Vaihda kytkentä moottorin liittimissä tai kytkintaulussa.
pyörimissuunta
Moottori Ylikuormitus Vähennä kuormitusta.
ylikuumenee Runko tai jäähdytysaukot voivat olla Avaa tuuletusaukot ja varmista, että ilmavirtaus moottorista on jatkuva.
likaiset tai tukossa, mikä estää riittävän
tuuletuksen
Moottorin yhdessä vaiheessa voi olla Tarkista kaikkien johdinten ja kaapelien kytkentä.
katkos
Maasulku Moottori täytyy käämiä uudelleen.
Epäsymmetrinen jännite Tarkista johtimet, kytkennät ja muuntajat.
moottoriliittimissä
Moottori tärisee Virheellinen linjaus Linjaa moottori uudelleen.
Moottorin alusta heikko Vahvista alustaa.
Kytkin epätasapainossa Tasapainota kytkin.
Käytettävä laite epätasapainossa Tasapainota laite.
Vialliset laakerit Vaihda laakerit.
Laakerit eivät ole linjassa Korjaa moottori.
Roottorin tasapainotus muuttunut Tasapainota roottori.
Roottorin ja kytkimen tasapainotukset Tasapainota kytkin tai roottori.
erilaiset (puoli kiilaa – täysi kiila)
Monivaiheinen moottori käy Tarkista kytkennät.
yksivaiheisena
Liian suuri aksiaalivälys Säädä laakerointi tai lisää välilevy.
Hankaava ääni Tuuletin hankaa laakerikilpeen tai Korjaa tuulettimen kiinnitys.
suojukseen
Moottori irronnut alustastaan Kiristä pultit.
Meluinen Ilmaväli on epätasainen Tarkista laakerikilvet ja laakerit.
käyntiääni Roottori epätasapainossa Tasapainota roottori.
Laakereiden Taipunut tai rikkoutunut akseli Vaihda roottori.
kuumeneminen Hihna on liian kireällä Vähennä hihnan kireyttä.
Hihnapyörät liian kaukana akselin Siirrä hihnapyörä lähemmäksi moottorin laakeria.
olakkeesta
Hihnapyörän halkaisija liian pieni Käytä halkaisijaltaan suurempia hihnapyöriä.
Moottori ei ole linjassa Korjaa linjaamalla käyttö uudelleen.
Liian vähän voiteluainetta Huolehdi laakerin riittävästä voitelusta ja voiteluaineen laadusta.
Voiteluaineen laadun heikkeneminen tai Poista vanha voiteluaine, pese laakerit huolellisesti ja vaihda uusi
epäpuhtaudet voiteluaine.
Liikaa voiteluainetta Vähennä voiteluaineen määrää.
Laakerin ylikuormitus Tarkasta linjaus sekä sivuttaisvoima ja aksiaalipaine.
Vioittunut laakeri Vaihda laakeri. Puhdista ensin laakeripesä huolellisesti.
158 ABB Motors and Generators | Pienjännitemoottorien käyttöohje, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Alçak Gerilim Motor
Kurulum, işletim, bakım ve emniyet kılavuzu
İçindekiler
1. Giriş .................................................................................................................................................... 161
1.1 Uygunluk Bildirimi ................................................................................................................................................................................161
1.2 Geçerlilik .....................................................................................................................................................................................................161
2. Emniyet değerlendirmeleri.............................................................................................................. 161
3. Taşıma ................................................................................................................................................ 162
3.1 Kabul kontrolü ........................................................................................................................................................................................162
3.2 Nakliye ve depolama ..........................................................................................................................................................................162
3.3 Kaldırma ......................................................................................................................................................................................................162
3.4 Motor ağırlığı ...........................................................................................................................................................................................162
4. Kurulum ve devreye alma ................................................................................................................ 163
4.1 Genel.............................................................................................................................................................................................................163
4.2 Bilyalı rulman dışında donanımları olan motorlar.............................................................................................................163
4.3 Yalıtım direnci kontrolü .....................................................................................................................................................................163
4.4 Temel ............................................................................................................................................................................................................163
4.5 Kaplinlerin ve kasnakların balansının alınması ve takılması ........................................................................................163
4.6 Motorun montajı ve kaplin ayarının yapılması ...................................................................................................................164
4.7 Radyal kuvvetler ve kayış tahrikleri .............................................................................................................................................164
4.8 Yoğuşma için tahliye tapalarına sahip motorlar.................................................................................................................164
4.9 Kablo ve elektriksel bağlantılar .....................................................................................................................................................164
4.9.1 Farklı yolverme yöntemlerine ilişkin bağlantılar ........................................................................................165
4.9.2 Yardımcı aksesuarların bağlantıları .....................................................................................................................165
4.10 Terminaller ve dönüş yönü..............................................................................................................................................................165
5. İşletim ............................................................................................................................................... 166
5.1 Genel.............................................................................................................................................................................................................166
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 159
6. Değişken hızlarda işletilen alçak gerilim motorlar ........................................................................... 167
6.1 Giriş ................................................................................................................................................................................................................167
6.2 Sargı yalıtımı .............................................................................................................................................................................................167
6.2.1 ABB konvertörler için sargı yalıtımı seçimi .....................................................................................................167
6.2.2 Tüm diğer konvertörlere ilişkin sargı izolasyonunun seçimi .............................................................167
6.3 Termal koruma .......................................................................................................................................................................................167
6.4 Rulman akımları .....................................................................................................................................................................................167
6.4.1 ABB konvertörleri için rulman akımlarının giderilmesi ..........................................................................167
6.4.2 Diğer konvertörler için rulman akımlarının giderilmesi ........................................................................168
6.5 Kablolama, topraklama ve EMC (Elektromanyetik Uyumluluk) ................................................................................168
6.6 İşletme hızı ................................................................................................................................................................................................168
6.7 Değişken hızlı uygulamalarda motorlar ..................................................................................................................................168
6.7.1 Genel.....................................................................................................................................................................................168
6.7.2 AC_8_ _ – serisi DTC kontrolü konvertörler ile motor yüklenebilirliği .........................................168
6.7.3 AC_5_ _ – serisi konvertörler ile motor yüklenebilirliği ........................................................................168
6.7.4 Diğer gerilim kaynağı PWM tipi konvertörler ile motor yüklenebilirliği......................................168
6.7.5 Kısa süreli aşırı yüklenmeler ....................................................................................................................................169
6.8 Motor plakaları ........................................................................................................................................................................................169
6.9 Frekans konvertörünün devreye alınması .............................................................................................................................169
7. Bakım ................................................................................................................................................. 170
7.1 Genel inceleme ......................................................................................................................................................................................170
7.1.1 Bekleme konumundaki motorlar ...................................................................................................................................170
7.2 Yağlama.......................................................................................................................................................................................................170
7.2.1 Kendinden yağlamalı rulmanlara sahip motorlar .....................................................................................170
7.2.2 Gresörlüklü rulmanlara sahip motorlar............................................................................................................171
7.2.3 Yağlama aralıkları ve miktarları..............................................................................................................................171
7.2.4 Yağlar ....................................................................................................................................................................................173
8. Satış sonrası Destek.......................................................................................................................... 174
8.1 Yedek parçalar .........................................................................................................................................................................................174
8.2 Parçalarına ayırma, birleştirme ve tekrar sarma ..................................................................................................................174
8.3 Rulmanlar ...................................................................................................................................................................................................174
9. Çevresel gereklilikler........................................................................................................................ 174
10. Sorun Giderme .................................................................................................................................. 175
160 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
1. Giriş 2. Emniyet değerlendirmeleri
Motor, nitelikli, sağlık ve emniyet gereklilikleri ile ulusal mevzuatı
NOT!
bilen kişilerce kurulum ve bakım için tasarlanmıştır.
Motorun emniyetli ve uygun kurulumu, işletimi ve bakımı
için bu talimatlara uyulmalıdır. Bu talimatlar, motoru veya Kurulumda ve işletim sahasında kazaların önlenmesi için gerekli
bağlantılı ekipmanı kuran, işleten veya bakımını yapan emniyet ekipmanı, yerel yönetmeliklere göre sağlanmalıdır.
kişilerin dikkatine sunulmalıdır. Motor, nitelikli, sağlık ve
emniyet gereklilikleri ile ulusal mevzuatı bilen kişilerce
kurulum ve bakım için tasarlanmıştır. Bu talimatlara UYARI!
uyulmaması, yürürlükteki tüm garantileri geçersiz kılabilir. Acil stop kontrolleri yeniden başlatma kilitleriyle
donatılmalıdır. Acil stop sonrasında, yeni bir başlatma
komutu sadece yeniden başlatma kilidi kasten
1.1 Uygunluk Bildirimi resetlendiğinde etkili olabilir.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 161
3. Taşıma Uygun kaldırma ekipmanının kullanılmasını ve kancaların
boyutlarının kaldırma mapaları için uygun olmasını sağlayın.
3.1 Kabul kontrolü Motora bağlı yardımcı ekipmana ve kablolara zarar verilmemesi
için özen gösterilmelidir.
Alımı takiben derhal motoru harici hasara karşı (örneğin mil
uçları, lanşlar ve boyalı yüzeyler gibi) kontrol edin, tespit Motoru palete sabitleyen nakliye kılavuzlarını çıkarın.
edildiğinde, gecikmeksizin taşıyıcıyı bilgilendirin.
ABB'den özel kaldırma talimatları alınabilir.
Tüm etiket değerlerini, özellikle gerilim ve sargı bağlantısı (yıldız
veya üçgen) bilgilerini kontrol edin. Rulman tipi, en küçük yapı
büyüklüğündeki motorlar hariç olmak üzere, tüm motorların UYARI!
motor etiketi üzerinde belirtilir. Kaldırma, montaj ya da bakım çalışması sırasında, gerekli
tüm güvenlik hususları göz önünde bulundurulacak ve
Değişken hızlı tahrik uygulaması durumunda, motorun ikinci kaldırılan yük nedeniyle kimsenin tehlikede olmamasına
motor etiketinde bulunan frekansa göre izin verilen maksimum özellikle dikkat edilecektir.
yüklenebilirliği kontrol edin.
Yağ azalmasını önlemek için millerin düzenli olarak elle Tüm ABB motorlarına ait gerçek ağırlık, en küçük gövde
döndürülmesi tavsiye edilir. boyutundaki motorlar hariç olmak üzere (56 ve 63), motor
etiketinde gösterilmiştir
Isıtıcıların, takıldıkları takdirde, motordaki su yoğuşmasını
önlemek için kullanılmaları tavsiye edilir. Yapı büyüklüğü Alüminyum Pik döküm İlave.
fren için
Motor stok durumundayken, rulmanlara yönelik zarardan Ağırlık kg Ağırlık kg
kaçınmak amacıyla harici titreşimlere maruz kalmamalıdır. 56 4.5 - -
63 6 - -
Silindirik makaralı ve/veya açısal temaslı rulmanlara sahip 71 8 13 5
motorlar nakliye esnasında kilitleme cihazları ile donatılmalıdır. 80 14 20 8
90 20 30 10
3.3 Kaldırma 100 32 40 16
112 36 50 20
25 kg'dan ağır tüm ABB motorlarında kaldırma mapaları veya 132 93 90 30
gözlü cıvatalar bulunur. 160 149 130 30
180 162 190 45
Motorun kaldırılması için sadece motora ait kaldırma mapaları
200 245 275 55
ve gözlü cıvatalar kullanılmalıdır. Motor diğer ekipmana 225 300 360 75
bağlıyken, motoru kaldırmak için kullanılmamalıdırlar. 250 386 405 75
280 425 800 -
Yardımcı ekipmana (örneğin frenler, harici soğutma fanları) veya
315 - 1700 -
terminal kutularına ait kaldırma mapaları motorun kaldırılması
355 - 2700 -
için kullanılmamalıdır. Farklı çıkış, montaj düzenlemeleri ve
400 - 3500 -
yardımcı ekipman nedeniyle, aynı yapı büyüklüğüne sahip
450 - 4500 -
motorların ağırlık merkezi farklı olabilir.
Hasarlı kaldırma mapaları kullanılmamalıdır. Gözlü cıvataları veya Motorda harici fan bulunuyorsa, ağırlık için ABB ile irtibata geçin.
entegre kaldırma mapalarını, kaldırma öncesinde kontrol edin.
162 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
4. Kurulum ve devreye alma
UYARI! UYARI!
Motoru veya tahrik edilen ekipmanı çalışmaya Elektrik çarpması riskini önlemek için, motor şasesi
başlamadan önce devre dışı bırakın ve kilitleyin. topraklanmalı ve sargılar ölçümden hemen sonra şase
üzerinden deşarj edilmelidir.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 163
Kaplin ve kasnaklar, rulman ve contalara hasar vermeyen uygun 4.8 Yoğuşma için tahliye tapalarına
ekipman ve alet kullanılarak mile takılmalıdır.
sahip motorlar
Asla çekiç kullanılarak veya motor gövdesine bastırılan bir kol
kullanarak kaplini veya kasnağı takmayın. Tahliye deliklerinin ve tapalarının aşağı yöne baktığını kontrol
edin. Dikey konumlandırılmış motorlarda, tahliye tapaları yatay
konumda olabilir.
4.6 Motorun montajı ve kaplin
Sızdırmaz plastik tahliye tapalarına sahip makineler açık
ayarının yapılması konumda teslim edilir. Çok tozlu ortamlarda, tüm tahliye delikleri
kapatılmalıdır.
Motor etrafında serbest hava akışı için yeterince boşluğun
olmasını sağlayın. Fan kapağı ile duvar vb. arasında en az
fan kapağı hava girişinin ½'si kadar açıklık olması önerilir. Ek
bilgileri ürün kataloğundan ya da web sayfalarımızdaki boyut
4.9 Kablo ve elektriksel bağlantılar
çizimlerinden edinebilirsiniz: www.abb.com/motors&generators. Standart tek hızlı motorlardaki terminal kutusunda normalde altı
sargı terminali ve en az bir topraklama terminali bulunur.
Doğru hizalama, rulman, titreşim ve olası mil arızalarının
önlenmesi için esastır. Ana sargı ve topraklama terminaline ilaveten, terminal kutusu
ayrıca termistörlerin, ısıtıcıların veya diğer yardımcı aksesuarların
Uygun cıvataları veya saplamaları kullanarak motoru temele bağlantılarını içerebilir.
takın ve temel ile ayakların arasına şimleri yerleştirin.
Tüm ana kabloların bağlantısı için uygun kablo mapaları
Motoru uygun yöntemler kullanarak hizalayın. kullanılmalıdır. Yardımcı ekipmanlara ilişkin kablolar aynı şekilde
Mümkünse, tespit deliklerini delin ve tespit pimlerini bu kendi terminal bloklarına bağlanmalıdır.
konumlara takın. Motorlar sadece sabit / kalıcı kurulum için tasarlanmıştır. Aksi
Kaplin yarımının montaj doğruluğu: B aralığının 0,05 mm'den belirtilmediği takdirde, kablo girişi ölçüleri metriktir. Kablo
az olduğunu ve a1 ile a2 arasındaki farkın da 0,05 mm'den az rakorunun IP sınıfı en az terminal kutularınınki ile aynı olmalıdır.
olduğunu kontrol edin. Bkz. Tablo 2. Kurulum sırasında sertifikalı kablo göbeği ya da kablo
Cıvataların veya saplamaların son sıkıştırma işlemini takiben konnektörü kullanılmalıdır.
hizalamayı tekrar kontrol edin.
Flanşlı motorların (örn. B5, B35, V1), yapının lanşın dış yüzeyinde
yeterli hava akışına olanak sağladığından emin olun. Kullanılmayan kablo girişleri terminal kutusunun IP sınıfına göre
körleme elemanları ile kapatılmalıdır.
164 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Koruyucu iletkenin minimum kablo kesit alanı Direkt-on-line starting (DOL) (direkt yolverme):
Y veya D sargı bağlantıları kullanılabilir.
Kurulum faz iletkenlerinin kesit İlgili koruyucu iletkenin minimum
alanı, S, [mm2] kesit alanı, SP, [mm2]
Örneğin, 690 VY, 400 VD, 690 V için Y bağlantısını ve 400 V için D
4 4 bağlantısını gösterir.
6 6
10 10 Yıldız/Üçgen başlatma (Y/D):
16 16
Bir D bağlantısı kullanılırken, besleme gerilimi mutlaka motorun
25 25
35 25
nominal gerilimine eşit olmalıdır.
50 25
Terminal bloğundan tüm bağlantıları çıkarın.
70 35
95 50 Diğer yolverme yöntemleri ve aralıklı başlatma koşulları:
120 70
S1 ve S2 tipi çalışma sınılarında, konvertör veya yumuşak
150 70
yolverici gibi diğer yol verme yöntemlerinin kullanılması
185 95
halinde, aygıtın, IEC 60079-0 standardındaki gibi “elektrik motoru
240 120
çalışırken güç sisteminden yalıtıldığı” ve termal korumanın isteğe
300 150
400 185
bağlı olduğu göz önünde bulundurmalıdır.
Ayrıca, elektrikli aparatların dışındaki topraklama veya ek 4.9.2 Yardımcı aksesuarların bağlantıları
bağlantı tesisleri en az 4 mm2 kesit alanına sahip bir iletkenin
efektif bağlantısını sağlayabilmelidir. Bir motor termistör veya diğer RTD'ler (Pt100, termal röleler vb.)
ile yardımcı cihazlarla teçhiz edilmişse, bunların uygun yollarla
Şebeke ve motor terminalleri arasındaki kablo bağlantısı kullanılması ve bağlanması tavsiye edilir. Bazı uygulamalar için,
kurulum için ulusal standartlarda ve motor etiketinde belirtilen termal koruma kullanılması zorunludur. Motor ile birlikte verilen
nominal akıma göre IEC/EN 60204-1 standardında belirtilen belgelerde daha detaylı bilgi bulunabilir. Yardımcı elemanlara ve
gereklilikleri karşılamalıdır. bağlantı parçalarına ilişkin bağlantı diyagramları terminal kutusu
içinde bulunabilir.
NOT!
Ortam sıcaklığı +50 °C'yi aştığında, en az +90 °C izin Termistörler için maksimum ölçüm gerilimi 2.5 V'tur. Pt100
verilen çalışma sıcaklığına sahip kablolar kullanılacaktır. için maksimum ölçüm akımı 5 mA'dir. Daha yüksek bir ölçüm
Ayrıca kurulum koşullarına bağlı diğer tüm dönüşüm gerilimi veya akımının kullanımı, okumalarda hatalara veya
faktörleri kablo boyutlandırmasında hesaba katılacaktır. sıcaklık algılayıcısında hasara yol açabilir.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 165
5. İşletim
5.1 Genel
Motorlar, motor etiketinde aksi belirtilmedikçe, aşağıdaki koşullar
için tasarlanmıştır:
UYARI!
Verilen talimatların veya aparat bakımının göz ardı
edilmesi emniyeti tehlikeye atabilir ve sonucunda
motorun kullanımını engelleyebilir.
166 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6. Değişken hızlarda işletilen alçak gerilim motorlar
6.1 Giriş 6.2.2 Tüm diğer konvertörlere ilişkin sargı
izolasyonunun seçimi
Kılavuzun bu kısmı, frekans konvertör beslemesinde kullanılan
motorlar için ilave talimatları içerir. Motor tek frekans konvertörü Gerilim stresleri aşağıdaki kabul edilen sınırların altında
kaynağından çalışmak üzere tasarlanmıştır ve paralel çalışan sınırlandırılmalıdır. Uygulamanın emniyetini sağlamak için lütfen
motorlar tek bir frekans konvertöründen çalışmaz. Konvertör sistem tedarikçinizle irtibata geçin. Olası filtrelerin etkisi, motor
üreticisi tarafından belirtilen talimatlar dikkate alınmalıdır. boyutlandırılırken dikkate alınmalıdır.
Rezistör frenlemesi ile kontrollü besleme ünitelerine sahip konvertörlere ilişkin daha fazla bilgi için, lütfen ABB ile irtibata geçin.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 167
NOT!
6.7 Değişken hızlı uygulamalarda
Alüminyum oksit kaplamalı iç ve/veya dış delikler veya motorlar
seramik silindir elemanlara sahip izole rulmanlar tavsiye
edilir. Alüminyum oksit kaplamalar ayrıca gözenekli
kaplamaya giren kiri ve nemi önleyecek bir sızdırmazla
6.7.1 Genel
ayrıca işleme tutulmalıdır. İzole rulmanın kesin tipi için, ABB'nin frekans konvertörleri ile, motorlar, ABB DriveSize
motor etiketine bakın. Rulman tipinin veya yalıtım boyutlandırma programı kullanılarak boyutlandırılabilir.
yönteminin ABB'nin izni olmaksızın değiştirilmesi yasaktır. Program, ABB internet sitesinden indirilebilir (www.abb.com/
motors&generators).
6.4.2 Diğer konvertörler için rulman akımlarının Diğer konvertörler tarafından sağlanan uygulama için, motorlar
manuel boyutlandırılmalıdır. Daha fazla bilgi için, lütfen ABB ile
giderilmesi irtibata geçin.
Kullanıcı, motoru ve tahrikli ekipmanı zararlı rulman
akımlarından korumakla sorumludur. Bölüm 6.4.1'de açıklanan Yüklenebilirlik eğrileri (veya yük kapasite eğrileri) nominal
talimatlar, kılavuz ilke olarak kullanılabilir, ancak etkinliği tüm besleme gerilimine dayanır. Düşük veya aşırı gerilimli koşullarda
durumlar için garanti edilemez. işletim, uygulamanın performansını etkiler.
NOT!
Bir motorun gerçek termal yüklenebilirliği, kılavuz
eğrilerinde gösterilenden daha düşük olabilir.
168 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
6.7.5 Kısa süreli aşırı yüklenmeler Konvertörün ayarlanması için gerekli tüm parametreler motor
ABB motorları sıklıkla geçici olarak aşırı yüklenebilir ayrıca plakalarından alınmalıdır. En sık biçimde ihtiyaç duyulan
aralıklı çalışmalarda kullanılabilir. Bu tür uygulamaların parametreler şunlardır:
boyutlandırılmasına ilişkin en uygun yöntem, DriveSize
programını kullanmaktır. – nominal gerilim
– nominal akım
– nominal frekans
6.8 Motor plakaları – nominal hız
– nominal güç
ABB motorlarının değişken hızlı uygulamalarda kullanılması
genelde ek motor plakaları gerektirmez. Konvertörün işletime
alınması için gereken parametreler ana motor etiketinde NOT!
bulunabilir. Bununla birlikte bazı özel uygulamalarda motorlara Eksik veya yanlış bilgi durumunda, doğru ayarları
değişken hızlı uygulamalar için ek plaka takılabilir. Bunlar sağlamadan motoru çalıştırmayın!
aşağıdaki bilgileri içerir:
– minimum hız
– maksimum hız
6.9 Frekans konvertörünün devreye – hızlanma ve yavaşlama zamanları
alınması – maksimum akım
– maksimum tork
Frekans konvertörünü devreye alma işlemi, frekans konvertörü – arıza koruması
talimatlarına ve yerel kanun ile yönetmeliklere göre yapılmalıdır.
Uygulama tarafından ortaya çıkan gereklilikler ve sınırlamalar da
ayrıca dikkate alınmalıdır.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 169
7. Bakım 7.2 Yağlama
UYARI! UYARI!
Motora bağlı ısıtıcılarda enerji olabilir. Tüm dönen parçalara dikkat edin!
170 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7.2.2 Gresörlüklü rulmanlara sahip motorlar Otomatik yağlama sistemi için yağ miktarı hesaplama
örneği
Yağlama bilgi plakası ve genel yağlama tavsiyesi Merkezi yağlama sistemi: 50 Hz şebekedeki IEC M3_P 315_ 4
Motor bir yağlama bilgi plakası ile teçhiz edilmişse, verilen kutuplu motor, Tabloya göre yağlama aralığı 7600 saat/55 g (DE)
değerlere uyun. ve 7600 saat/40 g (NDE) şeklindedir:
Montaj, ortam sıcaklığı ve rotasyon hızına göre yağlama aralıkları (DE) RLI = 55 g/7600h*3*24 = 0,52 g/gün
yağlama bilgi plakasında tanımlanmıştır.
(NDE) RLI = 40 g/7600*3*24 = 038 g/gün
İlk başlatma esnasında veya rulman yağlamasını takiben, geçici
sıcaklık artışı yaklaşık 10 ila 20 saat boyunca görülebilir. Tekli otomatik yağlama ünitesi (kartuş) için yağ miktarı
Bazı motorlar, eski yağ için kolektör ile teçhiz edilebilir. Ekipman hesaplama örneği
için verilen özel talimatlara uyun. (DE) RLI = 55 g/7600h*24 = 0,17 g/gün
A. Manuel yağlama (NDE) RLI = 40 g/7600*24 = 0,13 g/gün
Motor çalışırken yağlama RLI = Yağlama aralığı, DE = Tahrik ucu, NDE = Tahrik edilmeyen uç
– Yağ boşaltma tapasını çıkarın veya mevcutsa kapatma valfini
açın. 7.2.3 Yağlama aralıkları ve miktarları
– Yağlama kanalının açık olduğundan emin olun
– Belirtilen miktarda yağı rulmana enjekte edin. Dikey motorlara ilişkin yağlama aralıkları, aşağıda gösterilen
– Aşırı miktardaki yağın tümünün rulmandan boşaltılması için tablodaki değerlerin yarısıdır.
motorun 1-2 saat çalışmasına izin verin. Yağ boşaltma tapasını
veya mevcutsa kapatma valfini kapatın. Kılavuz olarak, yeterli yağlama, L1'ye göre aşağıdaki sürelerde
gerçekleştirilebilir. Daha yüksek ortam sıcaklıklarında çalışma için,
Motor bekleme konumundayken yağlama lütfen ABB ile irtibata geçin. L1 değerlerini kabaca L10 değerlerine
Motorlar çalışırken rulmanların yağlanması mümkün değilse, değiştirmek için bilgilendirici formül, manuel yağlama ile
yağlama motor bekleme konumundayken yapılabilir. L10 = 2.0 x L1.
– Bu durumda, sadece yağın yarısını kullanın ve birkaç dakika
boyunca tam devirde motoru çalıştırın. Yağlama aralıklarında, rulman işletim sıcaklığı 80°C esas alınır
– Motor durdurulduğunda, rulmana belirtilen miktardaki yağın (ortam sıcaklığı +25°C).
kalanını uygulayın.
– 1-2 saatlik çalışma sonrasında, yağ boşaltma tapasını veya
mevcutsa kapatma valfini kapatın. NOT!
Ortam sıcaklığındaki artış rulmanların sıcaklığında da
B. Otomatik yağlama artışa neden olur. Rulman sıcaklığındaki 15°C'lik bir artış
için yağlama aralığı değerlerinin yarısı alınmalıdır ve
Yağ boşaltma tapası kalıcı olarak çıkarılmalıdır veya takılıysa rulman sıcaklığındaki 15°C'lik azalma için yağlama aralığı
kapama valfi açılmalıdır. değerleri iki kat artırılabilir.
ABB sadece elektromekanik yağlama sistemlerin kullanımını
tavsiye etmektedir.
Daha yüksek hızda işletim, örn. frekans konvertörü
Tabloda belirtilen her bir yağlama aralığına ait yağ miktarı, uygulamalarında, veya ağır yükte daha düşük hız için yağlama
merkezi yağlama sistemi kullanılıyorsa üç ile çarpılmalıdır. Daha aralıklarının daha kısa tutulması gerekir.
küçük otomatik yağlama ünitesi kullanılması durumunda (motor
başına bir veya iki kartuş), normal yağ miktarı kullanılabilir.
UYARI!
2 kutuplu motorlar yeniden yağlandığında, Yağlayıcılar Yağ ve rulmanların maksimum işletim sıcaklığı +110°C'yi
bölümünde 2 kutuplu motorlara ilişkin yağlayıcı tavsiyelerine aşmamalıdır.
dair not dikkate alınmalıdır. Motorun tasarlanan maksimum hızı aşılmamalıdır.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 171
Gres 3600 3000 1800 1500 1000 500-900
Yapı
miktarı kW devir/ devir/ kW devir/ devir/ kW devir/ kW devir/
büyüklüğü
g/yatak dakika dakika dakika dakika dakika dakika
Bilyalı rulmanlar, çalışma saati cinsinden yağlama aralıkları
112 10 tümü 10 000 13 000 tümü 18 000 21 000 tümü 2 5 000 tümü 28 000
132 15 tümü 9 000 11 000 tümü 17 000 19 000 tümü 23 000 tümü 26 500
160 25 ≤ 18,5 9 000 12000 ≤ 15 18 000 21 500 ≤ 11 24 000 tümü 24 000
160 25 > 18,5 7 500 1 0000 > 15 15 000 18 000 > 11 22 500 tümü 24 000
180 30 ≤ 22 7 000 9 000 ≤ 22 15 500 18 500 ≤ 15 24 000 tümü 24 000
180 30 > 22 6 000 8 500 > 22 14 000 17 000 > 15 21 000 tümü 24 000
200 40 ≤ 37 5 500 8 000 ≤ 30 14 500 17 500 ≤ 22 23 000 tümü 24 000
200 40 > 37 3 000 5 500 > 30 10 000 12 000 > 22 16 000 tümü 20 000
225 50 ≤ 45 4 000 6 500 ≤ 45 13 000 16 500 ≤ 30 22 000 tümü 24 000
225 50 > 45 1 500 2 500 > 45 5 000 6 000 > 30 8 000 tümü 10 000
250 60 ≤ 55 2 500 4 000 ≤ 55 9 000 11 500 ≤ 37 15 000 tümü 18 000
250 60 > 55 1 000 1 500 > 55 3 500 4 500 > 37 6 000 tümü 7 000
2801) 60 tümü 2 000 3 500 - - - - - - -
2801) 60 - - - tümü 8 000 10 500 tümü 14 000 tümü 17 000
280 35 tümü 1 900 3 200 - - - -
280 40 - - tümü 7 800 9 600 tümü 13 900 tümü 15 000
315 35 tümü 1 900 3 200 - - - -
315 55 - - tümü 5 900 7 600 tümü 11 800 tümü 12 900
355 35 tümü 1 900 3 200 - - - -
355 70 - - tümü 4 000 5 600 tümü 9 600 tümü 10 700
400 40 tümü 1 500 2 700 - - - -
400 85 - - tümü 3 200 4 700 tümü 8 600 tümü 9 700
450 40 tümü 1 500 2 700 - - - -
450 95 - - tümü 2 500 3 900 tümü 7 700 tümü 8 700
1)
M3AA
172 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
7.2.4 Yağlar Aşağıdaki yağlar yüksek hızlı pik döküm motorlarda kullanılabilir,
ancak lityum kompleks bazlı yağlarla karıştırılmamalıdır:
UYARI!
EP ilave katkılarını içeren yağlar 280 ila 450 gövde
boyutlarında yüksek rulman sıcaklıklarında tavsiye
edilmez.
NOT!
Hız faktörünün 480.000'den yüksek olduğu yüksek hızlı 2
kutuplu motorlar için her zaman yüksek hızlı gres
kullanın (Dm x n olarak hesaplanan; Dm = ortalama
rulman çapı, mm; n = rotasyon hızı, r/dak).
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 173
8. Satış sonrası Destek 9. Çevresel gereklilikler
ABB motorlarının birçoğu 50 Hz'de 82 dB(A) (± 3 dB) seviyesini
8.1 Yedek parçalar aşmayan bir ses basınç seviyesine sahiptir.
Yedek parçalar aksi belirtilmediği sürece orijinal ve ABB Belirli motorlara ilişkin değerler, ilgili ürün kataloglarında
tarafından onaylanmış olmalıdır. bulunabilir. 60 Hz sinüzoidal beslemede, değerler ürün
Yedek parçalar sipariş edilirken, motor seri numarası, tam kataloglarındaki 50 Hz değerle karşılaştırıldığında yaklaşık
tip tanımı ve ürün kodu motor etiketinde yazılan şekilde 4 dB(A) daha yüksektir.
belirtilmelidir. Frekans konvertörü beslemesindeki ses basınç seviyeleri için,
lütfen ABB ile irtibata geçin.
8.2 Parçalarına ayırma, birleştirme Motorların kazınması ve geri dönüştürülmesi gerektiğinde,
ve tekrar sarma uygun yollar, yerel yönetmelikler ve yasalar izlenmelidir.
8.3 Rulmanlar
Rulmanlara özellikle dikkat edilmelidir.
Rulman değişimi, ABB Satış Ofisinde mevcut olan ayrı bir talimat
kitapçığında detaylı olarak açıklanmıştır.
NOT!
Üretici tarafından açıkça onaylanmadığı sürece, kullanıcı
tarafından gerçekleştirilen her türlü onarım üreticinin
sorumluluğunu geçersiz kılar.
174 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
10. Sorun Giderme
Bu talimatlar, ekipmana ait tüm detayları veya değişiklikleri
kapsamamakta ve kurulum, işletim veya bakım ile bağlantılı
olarak karşılanacak her tür olası koşulu sağlamamaktadır. İlave
bilgiye ihtiyaç duyulduğunda, lütfen en yakın ABB Satış Ofisi ile
irtibata geçin.
Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri 175
SORUN NEDEN YAPILMASI GEREKEN
Motor hızlanması Aşırı yük Yükü azaltın.
çok uzun zaman Başlatmada alçak gerilim Yüksek direnç olup olmadığını kontrol edin. Yeterli kablo boyutunun
alıyor ve/veya kullanıldığından emin
yüksek akım çekiyor olun.
Arızalı sincap kafesli rotor Yeni bir rotorla değiştirin.
Uygulanan gerilim çok düşük Güç beslemesini onarın.
Yanlış dönüş yönü Yanlış faz sırası Motorda veya dağıtım panosunda bağlantıları ters çevirin.
Motor çalışırken aşırı Aşırı yük Yükü azaltın.
ısınıyor Gövde veya havalandırma açıklıkları Havalandırma deliklerini açın ve motordan sürekli bir hava
kirli ve motorun uygun havalandırması akışı olup olmadığını kontrol edin.
engelleniyor olabilir
Motorun bir fazı açık olabilir Tüm uçların iyi bağlandığından emin olmak için kontrol edin.
Topraklanmış sargı Motor tekrar sarılmalıdır.
Dengesiz terminal gerilimi Hatalı uçları, bağlantıları ve transformatörleri kontrol edin.
Motor titreşim Motor yanlış hizalanmış Tekrar hizalayın.
yapıyor Zayıf destek Tabanı güçlendirin.
Kaplin dengesiz Kaplini balanse edin.
Tahrik edilen ekipman dengesiz Tahrik ekipmanının tekrar balanse edin.
Arızalı rulmanlar Rulmanları değiştirin.
Rulmanlar hizada değil Motoru onarın
Dengeleme ağırlıkları değişmiş Rotoru tekrar balanse edin.
Rotor ve kaplin balansı arasında Kaplini veya rotoru tekrar balanse edin.
uyumsuzluk (yarım kama - tam kama)
Polifaz motor tek fazda çalışıyor Açık devre olup olmadığını kontrol edin.
Aşırı uç boşluğu Rulmanı ayarlayın veya şim koyun.
Sürtünme sesi Fan arka rulman kapağına veya fan Fan montajını düzeltin.
kapağına sürtüyor
Yatak plakasında gevşeklik Tutucu cıvataları sıkıştırın.
Gürültülü işletim Hava boşluğu üniform değil Motor kapak geçmelerini veya rulman geçmelerini kontrol edin ve düzeltin.
Rotor dengesiz Rotoru tekrar balanse edin.
Rulmanlar sıcak Mil bükülmüş veya esnemiş Mili düzeltin veya değiştirin.
Aşırı kayış çekmesi Kayış gerginliğini azaltın.
Kasnaklar, mil desteğinden çok uzakta Kasnağı motor rulmanının yakınına getirin.
Kasnak çapı çok küçük Daha büyük kasnak kullanın.
Yanlış hizalama Tahriki yeniden hizalayarak düzeltin.
Yetersiz yağ Rulmanda uygun kalite ve miktarda yağın bulunmasını sağlayın.
Yağın bozulması veya kirlenmesi Eski yağı tahliye edin, rulmanları kerosenle tamamen yıkayın ve yeni yağı
koyun.
Aşırı yağ Yağ miktarını azaltın, rulman yarıdan fazla dolu olmamalıdır.
Aşırı yüklenmiş rulman Hizalamayı, yan ve uç baskısını kontrol edin.
Kırık bilya veya kaba yüzeyler Rulmanı değiştirin, önce gövdeyi iyice temizleyin.
176 ABB Motorları ve Generatörleri | Alçak gerilim motor kılavuzu, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
11. Figures Key
X-axis: Winding temperature, Celsius Degrees
Y-axis: Insulation Resistance Temperature Coefficient, ktc
100 1) To correct observed insulation resistance, Ri, to 40 °C
multiply it by the temperature coefficient ktc. Ri 40 °C = Ri x
50
Passfeder
x-Achse: Wicklungstemperatur, Grad Celsius
y-Achse: Temperaturkoeffizient des Isolationswiderstandes, ktc
1) Zur Korrektur des ermittelten Isolationswiderstandes,
10 Ri, bis 40 °C, multiplizieren Sie ihn mit dem
Temperaturkoeffizient ktc. Ri 40 °C = Ri x
5
Légende
Axe X : Température du bobinage, degrés Celsius
Axe Y : Coefficient de température de la résistance d'isolation,
ktc
1.0 1) Pour corriger la résistance d'isolation observée, Ri,
à 40 °C, la multiplier par le coefficient de température
0.5 ktc. Ri 40 °C = Ri x
Clave
Eje X: Temperatura de devanado, grados centígrados
1)
Eje Y: Coeficiente de temperatura de resistencia de
0.1 aislamiento, ktc
1) Para corregir una resistencia de aislamiento observada, Ri, a
0.05 40 °C, multiplíquela por el coeficiente de temperatura
ktc. Ri 40 °C = Ri x
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 177
Figure 2. Mounting of half-coupling or pulley
a1 b
Abb. 2. Montage von Kupplungshälften und
Riemenscheiben
178 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Y Key
1.10
X axis frequency p.u.
Y axis voltage p.u.
1 zone A
2 zone B (outside zone A)
3 rating point
1.05
Passfeder
x-Achse Frequenz p.u.
1.03
1
y-Achse Spannung p.u.
1 Zone A
3
1.09
2 Zone B (außerhalb Zone A)
X 3 Bewertungspunkt
0.95 0.98 1.00 1.02
2 Légende
0.93 Axe X fréquence p.u.
Axe Y tension p.u.
1 zone A
0.95
2 zone B (hors zone A)
3 point nominal
Clave
Eje X frecuencia p.u.
0.90 Eje Y tensión p.u.
1 zona A
2 zona B (fuera de la zona A)
3 punto nominal
Figure 4. Voltage and frequency deviation
Legenda
in zones A and B
Asse X frequenza p.u.
Asse Y tensione p.u.
Abb. 4. Spannungs- und Frequenzabweichung 1 zona A
in den Zonen A und B 2 zona B (fuori dalla zona A)
3 punto nominale
Selitys
Figur 4. Spännings- och frekvensavvikelse X-akseli taajuus yksikköä kohti
i zoner A och B Y-akseli jännite yksikköä kohti
1 vyöhyke A
2 vyöhyke B (vyöhykkeen A ulkopuolella)
Kuva 4. Jännite- ja taajuuspoikkeama
3 arvopiste
vyöhykkeillä A ja B
Tuş
Tablo 4. Zon A ve B'de voltaj ve frekans sapması X ekseni frekans p.u.
Y ekseni voltaj p.u.
1 zon A
2 zon B (zon A dışında)
3 değerlendirme noktası
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 179
Guideline loadability curves with converters with DTC control
Richtlinie Belastbarkeitskurven mit Frequenzumrichtern mit DTC-Regelung
Courbes de capacité de charge de référence avec convertisseurs à contrôle DTC
Curvas indicativas de capacidad de carga con convertidores dotados de control de DTC
Curve di funzionamento con alimentazione da convertitore di frequenza, controllo DTC
Curvas de capacidade de carga orientadoras com conversores com controlo DTC
Riktlinjer: lastbarhetskurvor för omriktare med DTC-styrning
Ohjeelliset kuormitettavuuskäyrät DTC-ohjatuilla taajuusmuuttajilla
DTC kontrollü konvertörler ile kılavuz yüklenebilirlik eğrileri
Figures/Abbildungen/Figures/Figure/Figure/Figuras/Figur/Kuvat/Tablolar 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d
Figure 5c Figure 5d
180 ABB Motors and Generators | Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015
Guideline loadability curves with other voltage source PWM type
Belastbarkeitskurven als Richtlinie für PWM-Frequenzumrichter mit anderen Spannungsquellen
Courbes de capacité de charge de référence avec d’autres convertisseurs PWM de source de tension
Curvas indicativas de capacidad de carga con otros convertidores de fuente de tensión de tipo PWM
Curve di funzionamento con convertitori di frequenza PWM
Curvas de capacidade de carga orientadoras com outros conversores de alimentação tipo PWM
Riktlinjer: belastbarhetskurvor för annan spänningsomriktare av PWM-typ
Ohjeelliset kuormitettavuuskäyrät muilla PWM-tyyppisillä jännitelähdetaajuusmuuttajilla
Diğer voltaj kanyağı PWM tipi ile kılavuz yüklenebilirlik eğrileri
Figures/Abbildungen/Figures/Figure/Figure/Figuras/Figur/Kuvat/ Tablolar 6a, 6b, 6c, 6d
Other voltage source PWM type converter, 50/60 Hz, temperature rise B/F
PWM-Frequenzumrichter mit anderen Spannungsquellen, 50/60 Hz, Temperaturanstieg B/F
Autre convertisseur PWM de source de tension, 50/60 Hz, élévation de température B/F
Otro convertidor de fuente de tensión de tipo PWM, 50/60 Hz, aumento de temperatura B/F
Convertitore PWM, 50/60 Hz, sovra-temperatura classe B/F
Outros conversores de alimentação tipo PWM, 50/60 Hz, aumento de temperatura B/F
Annan spänningsomriktare av PWM-typ, 50/60 Hz, temperaturstegring B/F
Muu PWM-tyyppinen jännitelähde-taajuusmuuttaja, 50/60 Hz, lämpötilan nousu B/F
Diğer voltaj kaynağı PWM tipi konverter, 50/60 Hz, sıcaklık artışı B/F
Figure 6a Figure 6b
Figure 6c Figure 6d
Low voltage motors manual, 3GZF500730-85 Rev F 02-2015 | ABB Motors and Generators 181
Contact us
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Superficie di tenuta
Sigillatura
del filetto ! di misuratori di pressione smontati possono
mettere a rischio la salute umana,
danneggiare l'ambiente e le apparecchiature.
Telefono (+49) 93 72/132-0
Adottare gli opportuni provvedimenti precauzionali.
08/2006
Applicazioni
■ Con cassa a riempimento di liquido per applicazioni con
carichi di pressione altamente dinamici o vibrazioni 1)
■ P4r lu838 066r4ss8v8 60ssos8 4 l8qu838 non 0lt0m4nt4 v8s2os8
o cristallizzanti, anche in ambienti aggressivi
■ Industria di processo: Chimica/petrolchimica, centrali
4l4ttr8274, 8n3ustr80 m8n4r0r80, ons7or4 4 ofs7or4,
tecnologia ambientale, costruzione di macchine e
impiantistica generale
Caratteristiche distintive
■ Eccellente stabilità a lungo termine e resistenza agli urti
■ Costruzione interamente in acciaio inox
■ Approvato da German Lloyd, Gosstandart e DVGW
■ C0mp8 s20l0 ino 0 ... . 10r Manometro a molla tubolare modello 232.50
Grado di protezione
1) Modello 233.50 IP 2on5orm4 0 EN / lEC
Elemento di misura
Conformità CE
A22808o 8nox AISI L
< 10r: 5orm0 0 C Direttiva PED
10r: 5orm0 4l82o830l4 97/23/EC, PS > 200 bar; modulo A, accessorio di pressione
Quadrante
Alluminio, bianco, scritte in nero, Omologazioni
DN 2on 54rmo sullo z4ro
■ GL, 8m10r20z8on8, 2ostruz8on8 n0v0l8 4s. ofs7or4 ,
Indice
Germania
Alluminio, nero
■ GOST, t42nolo680 38 m8sur0z8on4/m4trolo680, Russ80
■ GOST-R, 24rt8i20to 3'8mport0z8on4, Russ80
Cassa
■ DVGW, s82ur4zz0 4s. s82ur4zz0 4l4ttr820,
A22808o 8nox, 2on 5oro 38 s20r82o sull0 28r2on54r4nz0 34ll0
sovraccaricabilità, ...), Germania
20ss0, or4 DN 4 sul r4tro 34ll0 20ss0 DN 4 ,
■ KBA, automotive, Comunità europea
C0mp8 s20l0 ... 10r 2on v0lvol0 38 2omp4ns0z8on4 p4r
■ CRN, s82ur4zz0 4s. s82ur4zz0 4l4ttr820, sovr0220r82018l8tà,
si0to 20ss0
...), Canada
■ KOSHA, t8po 38 prot4z8on4 0nt834l06r0nt4 8 - s82ur4zz0
Trasparente
intrinseca, Corea del Sud
Vetro multistrato di sicurezza
DN : pol820r1on0to
Anello
Certiicati 1)
Anello a baionetta, in acciaio inox
■ Proto2ollo 38 prov0 . 2on5orm4 0 EN 4s.
pro3uz8on4 0llo st0to 34ll'0rt4, 24rt8i20z8on4 348 m0t4r80l8,
Riempimento di liquido (per modello 233.50)
pr428s8on4 3'8n3820z8on4
Glicerina 99,7 %
■ C4rt8i20to 3'8sp4z8on4 . 2on5orm4 0 EN 4s.
pr428s8on4 3'8n3820z8on4
Opzioni 1) Opzione
.
DN 63, attacco al processo posteriore centrale (CBM) DN 100, 160, attacco al processo posteriore eccentrico (LBM)
1520814.03
> 10r s4nz0 v0lvol0 38 si0to > 10r s4nz0 v0lvol0 38 si0to
DN Dimensioni in mm Peso in kg
a b b1 b2 D1 D2 e f G h ±1 SW Modello 232.50 Modello 233.50
63 9,5 33 33 57 11,5 - G¼B 54 14 , 0,20
100 15,5 49,5 49,5 83 101 99 17,5 30 G½B 87 22 , 0,90
160 15,5 49,5 2) 49,5 2) 83 1) 159 17,5 50 G½B 118 22 1,10 2,00
Attacco al processo per EN 837-1 / 7.3
P8ù mm 2on 20mp8 s20l0 10r
P8ù mm 2on 20mpo s20l0 10r
© 2000 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG, tutti i diritti riservati.
L4 sp428i274 t42n8274 r8port0t4 8n qu4sto 3o2um4nto r0ppr4s4nt0no lo st0to 34ll'0rt4 0l mom4nto 34ll0 pu11l820z8on4.
C8 r8s4rv80mo 8l 38r8tto 38 0pport0r4 mo38i274 0ll4 sp428i274 t42n8274 43 08 m0t4r80l8.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
B
C
A
1
LOC A B
AIR OIL COOLER
C D
2
5
1/ 2 A
B
LOC
AIR OIL COOLER B
1/ 2 A
A
13
Catalogue HY10-6003-UM/EU
Y-koppling D-koppling
Y-connection D-connection
Y-Anschluss D-Anschluss
Connexion en Y Connexion en D
Conexión en Y Conexión en D
7 8
LOC IL CO
OLE
R
O
AIR
9 10
11 A 11 B 12
F
E
C
B D
A
G
K
H
I
J
A B C D
E
H
G
G
Accessories Accessoires
A Lifting eye A Anneaux de levage
G Vibration dampener G Patins antivibratoires
Inledning 8
Säkerhetsföreskrifter 8
Beskrivning 8
Installation 9
Handhavande 9 SE
Förebyggande underhåll 10
Underhåll 10
Tekniska data 13
Försäkran om överensstämmelse 14
Introduction 15
Safety instructions 15
Description 15
Installation 16
Handling 16 GB
Preventive maintenance 17
Maintenance 17
Technical speciication 20
Declaration of conformity 21
Einleitung 22
Sicherheitsvorschriften 22
Beschreibung 23
Installation 23
Bedienung 24 DE
Vorbeugende Wartung 24
Wartung 25
Technische Daten 27
Konformitätserklärung 28
Introduction 29
Consignes de sécurité 29
Description 30
Installation 30
Consignes d’emploi 31 FR
Entretien préventif 31
Entretien 32
Caractéristiques techniques 35
Déclaration de conformité 36
Introducción 37
Instrucciones de seguridad 37
Descripción 38
Instalación 38
Modo de empleo 39 ES
Mantenimiento preventivo 39
Mantenimiento 40
Características técnicas 43
Declaración de conformidad 44
Lyft Fara Risk för elchock. Elektrisk anslutning får endast utföras
av behörig elektriker!
Varning Kläm-/krossrisk. För att undvika personskador vid
lyft är det viktigt att använda rätt lyftmetod. Kontrollera att Innan inkoppling av motorn till elnätet, se till att uppgifterna på
den lyftanordning och de lyftdon som används är felfria och motorns märkskylt överensstämmer med nätets spänning och
godkända för kylsystemets vikt. frekvens.
Elmotorn ska installeras i enlighet med allmänt gällande regler och
LOC kylsystem är från och med storlek 033 förberedda för lyftög- elsäkerhetsföreskrifter och måste installeras av en behörig elektriker.
lor. Lyftöglor inns att beställa som tillbehör.
Försiktighet Var noggrann vid inkoppling. Felaktig
Montering inkoppling, skadade kablar, etc. kan ge upphov till
Försiktighet Risk för personskador. Se till att kyl systemets strömförande komponenter och fel rotationsriktning på
alla delar är ordentligt ixerade. motor, läkt och pump. Se Bild 6.
Parker rekommenderar att installera LOC kylsystem horisontellt, Viktigt Elmotorns märkström får inte överskridas, se märkplåt på
stående på kylsystemets fötter. För att undvika personskador, se elmotorn.
alltid till att kylsystemet är ordentligt fastsatt. Anm! Parker rekommenderar att använda överströmsskydd för
För att uppnå god luftgenomströmning och därmed bästa möjliga elmotorn.
kyleffekt och lägsta möjliga ljudtrycksnivå, lämna ett utrymme
motsvarande åtminstone halva elementhöjden fritt framför och I mycket fuktig miljö, speciellt i samband med intermittent
bakom kylsystemet. Se Bild 3. drift, kan kondens vatten bildas i elmotorn. Vissa elmotorer är
Om systemet är utrustat med ilterenhet, se till att ett utrymme försedda med pluggade hål som kan användas som utlopp för
motsvarande ilterpatronens storlek lämnas fritt över iltret för att eventuellt kondensvatten. Beroende på elmotorns placering bör
förenkla vid byte av ilterpatron. Se Bild 3. dräneringspluggarna avlägsnas.
Ljudtrycksnivån kan uppgå till 57-86 dB(A) LpA vid 1 m avstånd LOC kylsystem kan förses med termokontakt för temperaturlarm.
under normala driftsförhållanden. Olämplig placering av Fläkten startar då automatiskt vid uppnådd temperatur. Använd
kylsystemet, eller drift under extrema förhållanden, kan orsaka relä vid högre belastning än vad som är tillåtet för termokontakten.
förhöjd ljud trycksnivå och sämre kyleffekt.
Viktigt Termokontakten får ej användas för att direkt styra elmotorn.
För att förhindra att tanken töms vid byte av ilterpatron, bör
kylsystemets vätskenivå vara högre än tankens vätskenivå. Om detta
inte är möjligt, installera en backventil eller en avstängningsventil i
systemets in- och utlopp.
Handhavande
Innan första uppstart
Anslutning av kylsystemet
Försiktighet se till att enheten kan startas utan risk för
Använd hydraulslangar för att ansluta kylsystemet. Se till att
skada på person, egendom eller miljö.
kopplingar och slangar är dimensionerade efter hydraulsystemets
tryck, löde, temperatur och typ av olja. Kontrollera att:
Anslut hydraulslangarna till pumpenheten enligt Bild 4. • kylsystemets delar inte är skadade
A – Inlopp. • läkten roterar fritt (använd handkraft)
B – Utlopp för modell S-bypass, enpassage. • alla hydrauliska anslutningar är åtdragna
C - Utlopp för modell T-bypass, två-passage. • läkthusets insida är fri från föremål som kan slungas iväg och
D - Anslutning för termokontakt. orsaka skador på person eller egendom
Maximalt tillåten oljetemperatur är 100 °C. • ventiler eller liknande strypdon är öppna samt att ledningar eller
kopplingar inte är skadade.
Dimensioner på anslutningar beror på kylsystemets storlek.
Se Tekniska data för rekommenderade vätskekombinationer.
Maximalt tillåten vätsketemperatur i kylsystemet är 100 °C.
Innan start
Flödesschema, se Bild 5.
Försiktighet Se till att enheten kan startas utan risk för
För bästa möjliga pumpeffekt, placera kylsystemet under tankens
skada på person, egendom eller miljö.
vätskenivå (max. 5 meter) och så nära tanken som möjligt. Vid
montering ovanför tankens vätskenivå, skall höjdskillnaden Kontrollera att:
minimeras. • alla hydrauliska anslutningar är åtdragna
Inloppsledningens diameter bör inte vara mindre än pumpens • ventiler eller liknande strypdon är öppna samt att ledningar eller
anslutningsdiameter. En grövre diameter rekommenderas. kopplingar inte är skadade.
Undvik strömningshastigheter över 1 m/s i pumpens ingående
oljeledning. Maximalt tryck på pumpens sugsida är 0,5 bar.
De viktigaste underhållsåtgärderna är de förebyggande Viktigt Använda patroner får ej kastas i vanlig sophantering
åtgärderna som brukaren ska utföra med jämna intervaller. utan skall lämnas in på därför avsedda depåer/stationer.
Kontrollera att: Demontering av kylelement
• inga onormala ljud och vibrationer förekommer
1. Stäng av systemet.
• kylsystemet är ordentligt fastsatt
• kylsystemet är rent, smuts försämrar kyleffekten 2. Koppla bort drivkällan för motorn.
• kylsystemet är fritt från skador, byt ut skadade komponenter 3. Se till att systemet är trycklöst.
• kylsystemet inte läcker 4. Stäng oljeanslutningarna.
• varningsdekaler är i gott skick, ersätt skadade eller saknade 5. Koppla bort hydraulslangarna.
dekaler omedelbart. 6. Skruva loss skruvarna med brickor som fäster kylelementet i
läkthuset. Se Bild 8.
Årligen: Kontrollera den elektriska installationen. Detta får en-
7. Lyft bort kylelementet.
dast utföras av behörig elektriker.
Pumpen är under normala driftsförhållanden underhållsfri. Montering av kylelement
Drift under extrema förhållanden kräver inspektion och underhåll 1. Lyft kylelementet på plats.
eller utbyte av pump och/eller koppling. Se separat broschyr för 2. Skruva fast kylelementet i läkthuset. Se Bild 8.
pumpen. 3. Anslut hydraulslangarna till kyl elementet. Se Bild 4.
4. Koppla till drivkällan för motorn.
5. Utför åtgärder enligt Innan start och Vid start.
Tekniska data
Kylsystem
Maximalt arbetstryck: 10 bar
Värmeöverföringstolerans: ±6%
Maximalt tillåten oljetemperatur: 100 °C
Kompatibilitet
Mineralolja
Syntetiska oljor
Vegetabiliska oljor
Vid drift med andra vätskor eller vid extrema driftsförhållanden,
kontakta Parker.
Material
Pumphus/Kylelement Aluminium
Filterenhet (tillval) Aluminium
Fläkthus Stål
Fläktblad/nav Glasiberförstärkt polypropylen/aluminium
Fläktgaller Stål
Ytbehandling Elektrostatisk pulverlackering
Elmotor
3-fas asynkronmotor enligt IEC 60034-1
Rekommenderad omgivnings temperatur -20 °C - +40 °C
Isolationsklass F
Temperaturstegring B
Kapslingsklass IP 55
För märkström, se separat manual för elmotorn.
EC Dec
claration off conformitty
The pro
oduct is in conformity with
w the requ
uirements in
n the followiing standards and directives.
- Safety of machinery
S m – Basic conccepts, generral principle es for design
n, SS-EN IS SO 12100-
1/A1:2009 and
a SS-EN ISO 12100 0-2/A1:20099.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety requ uirements foor fluid powwer systems and their components
c s
– Hydrauliccs, SS-EN IS
SO 4413:20 010.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety dista ances to pre
event hazard zones be eing reache ed by upper
a lower liimbs, SS-EN ISO 1385
and 57:2008.
- Pumps and d pump unitss for liquidss – Common n safety req quirements, SS-EN 809 9+
A
A1:2009/AC C:2010.
- Electric motors used on
o the produ uct comply with
w the Low w Voltage DDirective (LV
VD)
2
2006/95/EC C and the Electromagnetic Compa atibility Direcctive (EMC) 2004/108//EC.
The abo
ove is valid for a complete producct delivered by Parker Hannifin
H Ma
anufacturing
g Sweden
AB and a complete
e product is
CE-marrked by Parrker Hannifin
n Manufacturing Swed
den AB.
Sätra, January
J 15 2013 ___
__________
__________
_______
Rika
ard Eriksso
on
Tecchnical Man
nager
Parrker Hannifin Manufactturing Swed
den AB
PARKER Accumulator
A & Cooler Division Europe - Sätra
a · Box 8064 · 141
1 08 Kungenss Kurva © 2012 Copyrig
ght
Introduction Installation
Danger Electrical shock hazard. All electrical connec-
The purpose of this manual is to serve as a reference guide for in-
tions must be made by a qualiied electrician!
stallation, maintenance and operation of the LOC cooling system.
Keep the manual at hand. A lost manual should be replaced as Operation, handling and maintenance
soon as possible. Caution Risk of bodily injury. Disconnect the motor
For optimum performance and in order to prevent incorrect use, power supply prior to maintenance.
please read this manual carefully and observe all safety precau-
tions prior to putting the cooling system into service. Caution Risk of bodily injury. Before disconnecting the
Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out by hydraulic connections, make sure the system is depres-
qualiied personnel. surized.
Parker reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior
Caution Risk of severe burns. As the cooling system
notice.
could become extremely hot during operation, make
Use sure the system is cool before touching.
The LOC cooling system is designed to cool oils and, as an op-
Precaution Risk of bodily injury. If the cooling system is
tion, to clean oils in hydraulic systems for industrial applications.
provided with a thermo contact, the fan will start when
Warranty and claims the preset temperature has been reached. Keep away
In the event of malfunction, consult your local Parker ofice. Parker from rotating parts.
shall not be held responsible for any consequences due to modii-
Precaution This indicates a toxic hazard. To prevent
cation and/ or alterations made by the customer.
bodily injury and damage to property or environment,
used oil should be collected according to speciic
Safety instructions industrial waste regulations of each country.
The installation contractor as well as the user should be aware Important Static electricity. Fans generate static electricity.
of, understand and observe all safety precautions in this manual, Do not put sensitive devices (electronics etc.) in the immediate vici-
including any information mentioned on labels attached to the nity of the cooling system. Antistatic fans are available on request.
product. Note! Use hearing protection when standing close to an opera-
Definition of Safety Warning Levels…. ting cooling system for long periods of time.
…concerning personal safety Warning label
All precautions concerning personal safety are classiied as per The warning label speciied below is attached to the LOC
below, depending on how severe the consequences of an inci- cooling system at delivery.
dent could be. Caution! High temperature surfaces! Use hearing protection!
Rotating fan!
Danger This alerts you to an action or procedure that, if (P/N 500029 – 70 x 30 mm or
performed im-properly, will produce bodily harm or death. P/N 5000291 – 120 x 50 mm). See Figure 1.
Caution This alerts you to an action or procedure that, if
performed improperly, is likely to produce bodily harm or
death. Description
Precaution This alerts you to an action or procedure that, The LOC cooling system consists of an air oil cooler, a DC motor
if performed improperly, is likely to cause an accident with and a gerotor type of low pressure pump from our QPM series.
physical harm. In addition, the cooling system can be provided with a ilter for
cleaning of the oil. LOC cooling system is avail able with cooling
…..concerning other safety issues
capacity 2.7 - 44.8 kW and nominal oil low 20 - 80 l/min.
Notiications concerning other safety issues (property, process or
environmental) and maintenance work are classiied as follows: Cooling system identification plate
Important This alerts you to an action or procedure that, if per- The type plate of the cooling system is located on the fan housing.
formed improperly, is likely to result in damages to the product, See Figure 2.
process or environment. The type plate contains the following information:
….concerning additional informationn A – Part number
Additional information is marked as follows. B – Designation
C – Serial number
Note! This alerts you to important information related to the text D – Date of delivery
in a paragraph. (year and week, e.g. 1018, i.e. year 2010 and week 18)
Overall instructions Replace a damaged or missing type plate as soon as possible.
Lifting Filter unit identification plate
Caution Risk of bodily injury. To prevent physical harm
when lifting the unit, ensure correct lifting technique is used. The type plate on the ilter unit contains information about:
Make sure that all lifting devices are free from damage and • P/N of the ilter element
approved for the weight of the cooling system. • Designation of ilter element (04” HP).
Connect the cooling system using lexible hydraulic hoses to the Prior to start up
hydraulic system. Make sure that all connections and hoses are Precaution Make sure that the unit can be put into service
sized according to the system pressure, low, temperature and without causing bodily injury or damage to property or
type of oil. Connect the hydraulic hoses as illustrated in Figure 4 environment.
A – Inlet. Make sure that:
B – Outlet for S by-pass, single-pass. • the fan rotates freely (use hand force)
C - Outlet for T by-pass, two-pass. • all oil linlets and outlets are tight
D - Connection for thermo contact • the inside of the fan housing is free from objects that could be
The sizes of connections are cooling system dependent. thrown around and cause bodily injury or damage to property
• valves and similar throttling devices are open and that conduits
Maximum permitted oil temperature is 100°C. and couplings are not damaged.
Flow chart, see Figure 5. • valves and similar throttling devices are open and that conduits
and couplings are not damaged.
To achieve the very best pump capacity, place the cooling system
below tank oil level (max. 5 meter) and as close to the tank as At start-up
possible. When installed above tank oil level, minimize the difference
in height. The size of the inlet line should not be inferior to the pump Make sure that:
connection size. A larger size is recommended. • the direction of rotation of the fan and the airlow corresponds to
Avoid low rates in excess of 1 m/s in the pump inlet line. indications on the fan housing,
Maximum pressure on the pump suction side is 0.5 bar. • the cooling system is free from abnormal noise and vibrations,
• the cooling system is free from leaks.
Electrical connection
Make sure not to overload the electric motor due to cold start
Danger Electrical shock hazard. All electrical connections conditions or operation with high oil viscosity. Viscosity range is
must be made by a qualiied electrician! 10 – 800 cSt considering the pump, motor power, ilter element
Prior to connecting the motor to the electrical supply system, make size etc.
sure the speciication on the electric motor rating plate corresponds
to the mains supply voltage and frequency. The electric motor
should be installed according to general rules and electrical safety
regulations and must be installed by a qualiied electrician.
Consult your local Parker ofice when using high viscosity oils Cooling system When cleaning the exterior of the cooling
(e.g. thick lubricating oils) or when operating in cold start mode. system, for instance using water, disconnect all power supplies.
For optimal operation, a cleanliness rating of 17/15 according Be aware of the electric motor protection standard.
to ISO 4406 ISO is required.
Cooler matrix The air ins of the cooler matrix can be cleaned by
Note! Air in the inlet line could cause problem at start-up, ill blowing through with compressed air. If necessary, a highpressure
the line with oil. washing system and degreasing agent can be used. When using
a high-pressure washing system point the jet parallel to the air ins.
During operation See Figure 7.
Caution Risk of severe burns. The cooling system Fan housing Remove the cooler matrix when cleaning the inside
could become extremely hot during operation, make of the fan housing. To clean the inside of the fan housing, use
sure that the cooling system is cool before touching. compressed air. If necessary a degreasing agent can be used.
Note! Use hearing protection when standing in the immediate Blow with compressed air from the electric motor side through the
vicinity of an operating cooling system for long periods of time. fan guard.
Caution LOC cooling system must not be run in such Pump Parker will not be held responsible for any interference in
a way that the pump maximum pressure is exceeded, the pump such as internal cleaning. If the pump has been run with
which could occur if the pump outlet is closed or se- contaminated oil, clean it by running it with clean oil.
verely throttled. (See pamphlet for the QPM pump.) This Filter unit (option) Filter elements cannot be cleaned.
could damage the pump and cause personal injuries.
The pump has no pressure relief valve as standard. Install a
pressure relief valve if the system is equipped with e.g. a shut-
off valve and/or if the pump is operating in cold start condi- Maintenance
tions. A pump itted with internally or externally drained by-pass Dismounting Parker will not be held responsible for any con-
valve is available as option. sequences after repairs, modiications or alterations made by
the customer.
Preventive maintenance Caution Risk of severe burns. As the cooling system
could become extremely hot during operation, make
Preventive maintenance work must be carried out at regular sure that the cooling system is cool before touching.
intervals. Make sure that:
Caution Risk of bodily injury. Disconnect the motor
• the cooling system is free from abnormal noise or vibrations power supply prior to maintenance.
• the cooling system is securely ixed
• the cooling system is clean - debris will reduce the cooling Note! Used ilter elements should be collected according to
capacity speciic industrial waste regulations of each country.
• the cooling system is free from damage, and that damaged Dismounting the cooler matrix
components are replaced
• the cooling system is free from leaks 1. Turn off the system.
• warning labels are in good condition, replace any damaged/ 2. Disconnect the electric motor power supply.
missing label immediately. 3. Make sure that the system is de-pressurized.
4. Disconnect the oil inlets and outlets.
Annually: Check the electrical installation. This may only be 5. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the cooler matrix.
made by a qualiied electrician. 6. Unscrew the screws with washers ixing the cooler matrix to
In normal operating conditions the pump is maintenance free. the fan housing. See Figure 8.
In extreme operating conditions the pump requires inspection, 7. Remove the cooler matrix.
service or replacement of the pump and/or couplings.
See separate pump manual. Mounting of the cooler matrix
Cleaning 1. Locate the cooler matrix.
2. Secure the cooler matrix to the fan housing by screws.
Caution Risk of bodily injury. Prior to cleaning, See Figure 8.
disconnect all motor power supplies. 3. Connect the hydraulic hoses to the cooler matrix.
Caution Risk of severe burns. As the cooling system See Figure 4.
could become extremely hot during operation, make 4. Connect the electric motor power supply
sure the system is cool before touching. 5. Proceed to Prior to start-up and At start-up.
Dismounting the pump and coupling Mounting of the electric motor and fan
1. Turn off the system. Note! There are models with ixed hub Figure 10 and models with
2. Disconnect the power supply. detachable hub Figure 11 A and Figure 11 B.
3. Make sure that the system is de-pressurized.
4. Disconnect the oil inlets and outlets. 1. Fit the motor to the motor bracket.
5. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the cooler matrix. 2. Fit the motor to the motor attachment by screws.
6. Remove the screws and rubber steel washers ixing the pump See Figure 12.
to the electric motor. 3. Fit the hub groove to the motor spline. Lube the hub with
7. Remove the pump and the gear ring of the coupling. ethanol and secure the fan with hub to the cranks haft. If
The pump and the coupling parts can now be replaced. required, knock carefully with e.g. a rubber mal let. Use Loctite
8. Loosen the stop screw of the shaft coupling part. on the screw and secure the fan with hub on the crankshaft by
Remove the shaft coupling part from the crankshaft. screws. See Figure 10.
4. Make sure that the fan is itted to the crankshaft without too
Mounting of the pump and coupling much play.
5. Place the motor attachment with fan, fan guard, motor and
1. Fit the shaft coupling part to the crankshaft. motor support in the fan housing.
Tighten the stop screw. 6. Adjust the fan guard and motor and ix the motor attachment
2. Install the pump and gear ring of the coupling. onto the fan housing by screws. See Figure 9.
3. Install the screws and rubber steel washer ixing the pump to Secure the motor support by screws.
the electric motor. 7. Make sure the fan is centred/aligned and rotates freely
4. Connect the hydraulic hoses. See Figure 4. (use hand force). If necessary, adjust the location of the fan
5. Connect the electric motor power supply. guard and motor.
6. Proceed to Prior to start-up and At start-up. 8. Make sure all screws are tightened.
Dismounting the electric motor and fan 9. Connect the electric motor power supply.
10.Proceed to Prior to start-up and At start-up.
Caution Risk of severe burns. As the cooling system
could become extremely hot during operation, make sure Oil filter unit FX3
the system is cool before touching. Fitted with an ilter unit type FX3 the oil will be cleaned in a sepa-
Precaution Risk of bodily harm. Prior to maintenance, rate system. This is an excellent complement to the system oil
disconnect the electric motor power supply. The fan is cleaning system. Filter unit FX3 is available as option.
balanced together with the hub prior to delivery. Prior to start-up
The fan is balanced together with the hub at delivery. 1. Bleed ilter by opening the vent plug at the top of ilter approx-
Note! There are models with ixed hub Figure 10 and models with imately two turns.
detachable hub Figure 11 A and Figure 11 B. 2. Fill ilter until all air bleeds through the plug, then tighten plug.
3. Pressurize system fully and check for leaks; if leaks occur refer
1. Turn off the system. to Routine maintenance.
2. Dismount the pump according to Dismounting the pump and
coupling. Precaution Failure to bleed the ilter unit adequately will
3. Secure the motor. increase the dissolved air content of the system oil, which
4. Unscrew the screws with washers ixing the motor attachment will shorten oil life and may cause other problems in the
to the fan housing. See Figure 9. system.
5. Unscrew the screws with washers ixing the motor support to Routine maintenance
the feet. Pull the motor backwards.
6. Unscrew the screw with washer ixing the fan/hub to the The ilter unit FX3 does not normally require special attention
crankshaft. See Figure 10. Remove with care the fan/hub from except for periodic monitoring of the pressure drop indicator.
the crankshaft. Use a pulley if required. Schedule replacement of ilter element every six months or sooner,
7. Unscrew the screws with washers ixing the motor to the motor and have ample supply of spare elements available.
attachment. See Figure 12.
8. Unscrew the screws with washers ixing the motor to the motor Caution Failure to depressurize the ilter unit before servi-
bracket. cing element may result in personnel injury or damage to
9. Remove the motor. property, or environment.
During servicing the external surfaces of the ilter assembly must Filter element replacement
be cleaned to remove any dust deposits. Servicing must be
conducted using suitable tools that do not present a hazard. If 1. Turn off the system and shut-off valve if any.
external leakage is noted, replace O-ring at leak. If leakage per- 2. Make sure the system is depressurized.
sists, check sealing surfaces for scratches or cracks; replace any 3. Open the vent plug on the ilter unit cover approximately two
defective parts. turns.
A dirty system can quickly plug a new ilter element. It may require 4. Unscrew and remove cover counter clockwise when viewed
one or two initial element changes to stabilize element life. If ele- from above.
ment life is short or differential pressure is excessive, ilter may be 5. Remove the ilter element. Discard both the ilter element and
undersized; contact your local Parker ofice. its O-ring. The ilter element is not cleanable. Any attempt to
clean the element can cause degradation of the ilter medium
Pressure drop indicators and allow contaminated oil to pass through the ilter element.
Used ilter elements should be collected according to speciic
A pressure drop indicator operates by sensing the differential industrial waste regulations of each country.
pressure between port upstream and downstream of the ilter 6. Install a new ilter element. Make sure this is itted with an
element. The pressure drop indicator operates independent from O-ring in the bottom.
the bypass valve and is intended to react before the valve opens. 7. Install a new O-ring in the ilter unit cover and screw on the
This implies that there is time available to change ilter cartridge cover.
before the bypass valve opens and lets uniltered oil through, and 8. Start the pump motor with vent plug open approximately two
this also maximizes the utilization time of the ilter element. turns.
If the indis ignored and the contamination persists, the bypass 9. Tighten the vent plug when only oil bleeds through.
valve will open in the ilter unit when the pressure drop across the During start-up the pressure drop indicator could actuate
ilter element reaches 3,5 bar. The system will then operate as a because of high viscosity. Reset the indicator. Do not run the
cooling system without oil cleaning. system without a ilter element installed.
Indicator type D After element change ensure pressure drop indicator is reset by
pushing in the red button. The electrical indicator will reset auto-
If visual indicator D is itted and actuates ‘cold start’ (red button matically.
extends 5 mm), reset by depressing the button when the normal When system reaches normal operating temperature, check that
operating temperature is reached. If indicatoractuates after reset- the electrical indicator has not actuated and/or the visual warning
ting, replace ilter element. button has remained depressed. If visual indicator rises due to
Indicator type P a cold start condition, reset again as per section Pressure drop
indicator.
Visual indicator type P has thermal lockout , i.e. no signal when Parker do not warrant the service life of the ilter element as this
the temperature is below 0 °C; signal when temperature is above is beyond our control and depends upon the condition of the
+29 °C. This indicator has manual reset. system into which the ilter unit is installed.
Indicator type M Note! The FX3 ilter unit is equipped with an element extraction
The electrical pressure drop indicator M has an automatic reset mechanism to facilitate element removal. While removing the cap,
and connection according to DIN 43650, ISO4400 (Hirschmann) tabs on the element end cap lock into hooks in the cap and the
and is moisture-proof according to IP65. Use of both positive element is automatically pulled from the nipple.
indication (green light) and negative indication (red light for dirty Important Do not attempt to clean or re-use the ilter element.
element) is recommended to effectively monitor ilter element life.
Filter elements should be replaced upon indication or at speciied
If an electrical pressure drop indicator type M is used and actuates intervals, six months maximum.
(e.g. red light comes on) during cold tart, continue operating until
the signal (red light) goes out as system warms to normal opera-
ting temperature. This feature can be used as ‘warm up’ indication
in operating procedures. If the warning signal (red light) remains or
appears when system is warm, replace the ilter element.
Indicator type U
The electrical pressure drop indicator type U is equipped with a
2-pole AMP contact.
Technical specification
Cooling system
Maximum working pressure 10 bar
Heat transfer tolerance: ±6%
Maximum permitted oil temperature 100 °C
Compatibility
Mineral oil
Synthetic oils
Vegetable oils
For use with other oils or operation in extreme conditions,
contact your local Parker office.
Material
Pump housing/Cooler matrix Aluminium
Filter unit (option) Aluminium
Fan housing Steel
Fan blades/hub Glass iber reinforced polypropylene/aluminium
Fan guard Steel
Surface treatment Electrostatic powder coating
Electric motor
3-phase asyncronuous motor according to IEC 60034-1
Recommended surrounding temperature -20 °C - +40 °C
Insulation standard F
Rise in temperature B
Protection standard IP 55
Regarding nominal voltage, see separate eletric motor manual.
EC Dec
claration off conformitty
The pro
oduct is in conformity with
w the requ n the followiing standards and directives.
uirements in
- Safety of machinery
S m – Basic conccepts, generral principle es for design
n, SS-EN IS SO 12100-
1/A1:2009 and
a SS-EN ISO 12100 0-2/A1:20099.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety requ uirements foor fluid powwer systems and their components
c s
– Hydrauliccs, SS-EN IS
SO 4413:20 010.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety dista ances to pre
event hazard zones be eing reache ed by upper
a lower liimbs, SS-EN ISO 1385
and 57:2008.
- Pumps and d pump unitss for liquidss – Common n safety req quirements, SS-EN 809 9+
A
A1:2009/AC C:2010.
- Electric motors used on
o the produ uct comply with
w the Low w Voltage DDirective (LV
VD)
2
2006/95/EC C and the Electromagnetic Compa atibility Direcctive (EMC) 2004/108//EC.
The abo
ove is valid for a complete producct delivered by Parker Hannifin
H Ma
anufacturing
g Sweden
AB and a complete
e product is
CE-marrked by Parrker Hannifin
n Manufacturing Swed
den AB.
Sätra, January
J 15 2013 ___
__________
__________
_______
Rika
ard Eriksso
on
Tecchnical Man
nager
Parrker Hannifin Manufactturing Swed
den AB
PARKER Accumulator
A & Cooler Division Europe - Sätra
a · Box 8064 · 141
1 08 Kungenss Kurva © 2012 Copyrig
ght
Das LOC Kühlsystem besteht im Wesentlichen aus einen Öl- Der Anschluss des Kühlsystems erfolgt mittels
/Luftkühler, ein Drehstrommotor und einer Niederdruckpumpe der Hydraulikschläuchen. Sicherstellen, dass Anschlüsse und
Baureihe QPM. Darüber hinaus kann das Kühlsystem mit einem Schläuche auf Druck, Durchsatz, Temperatur und Öltyp der
Filter für die Reinigung des Öls ausgerüstet werden. Das LOC Anlage ausgelegt sind.
Kühlsystem ist mit einer Kühlleistung von 2,7–44,8 kW und einer Hydraulikschläuche wie in Abb. 4 an das Kühlelement anschlie-
Fördermenge von 20–80 l/min lieferbar. ßen:
Typenschild des Kühlsystems A – Eintritt
B – Austritt für S-Bypass, Einzeldurchlauf
Das Typenschild des Kühlsystems beindet sich am Lüftergehäuse.
C – Austritt für T-Bypass, Doppeldurchlauf
Siehe Abb. 2.
D – Anschluss für Thermokontakt
Es enthält folgende Angaben:
A - Artikelnummer Die Größe der Anschlüsse hängt vom Kühlsystem ab.
B - Artikelbezeichnung Die maximal zulässige Temperatur des Öls im Kühlelement be-
C - Seriennummer trägt 100 °C.
D – Lieferdatum Durchsatzdiagramm, siehe Abb. 5.
(Jahr und Kalenderwoche, Zur Erzielung der optimalen Pumpenleistung stellen Sie das Kühl-
z. B. 1018, also Jahr 2010 und KW 18) system unterhalb des Tankfüllstands (max. 5 Meter) mit der An-
saugseite so nah wie möglich am Tank auf. Bei Montage über
Ein beschädigtes oder fehlendes Typenschild ist unverzüglich Tankfüllstand halten Sie den Höhenunterschied zwischen Füll-
zu ersetzen. stand und Kühlsystem so gering wie möglich. Der Durchmesser
der Ansaugleitung darf nicht kleiner als der Durchmesser des
Typenschild am Filter
Pumpenanschlusses sein. Es wird ein größerer Durchmesser
Das Typenschild des Filters enthält folgende Angaben: empfohlen.
• Artikelnummer des Filterelements Vermeiden Sie Durchlussmengen in der Ansaugleitung von mehr
• Artikelbezeichnung des Filterelementes (04“ HP). als 1 m/s. Der maximale Druck an der Ansaugseite der Pumpe
beträgt 0,5 bar.
Elektrischer Anschluss
Installation
Gefahr Elektroschock. Alle elektrische Anschlüsse dürfen
Anheben
nur von einem entsprechend ausgebildeten Elektriker aus-
Warnung Quetschgefahr. Damit beim Anheben Verletz-- geführt werden!
ungen verhindert werden, ist das richtige Hebever-
Vor dem Anschluss des Motors an das Stromnetz ist sicherzu-
fahren anzuwenden. Sicherstellen, dass die verwendeten
stellen, dass die Angaben auf dem Typenschild des Motors der
Hebvorrichtungen und -geräte ordnungsgemäß
Spannung und Frequenz des Netzes entsprechen.
funktionieren und für das Gewicht des Kühlsystems
ausgelegt sind. Der Motor ist gemäß den allgemeingültigen Vorschriften und Elek-
Alle Kühlsysteme ab Größe 033 sind für Hebeösen vorbereitet. trosicherheitsbestimmungen von einem ausgebildeten Elektriker
Hebeösen sind als Zubehör von Parker zu bestellen. anzuschließen.
Montage Vorsicht Beim Anschluss des Gerätes ist sehr vorsichtig
zu arbeiten. Falsche Anschlüsse, beschädigte Kabel etc.
Vorsicht Verletzungsgefahr. Sicherstellen, dass das können zur Folge haben, dass Komponenten unter Strom
Kühlsystem immer ordnungsgemäß befestigt ist. gesetzt werden und Motor, Lüfterrad und Pumpe sich in
Eine stehende Aufstellung auf den Füßen des Kühlsystems ist die falsche Richtung drehen. Siehe Abb. 6.
zu bevorzugen. Um Verletzungsgefahr zu vermeiden, überprüfen Wichtig Der zulässige Nennstrom des Motors darf nicht über-
Sie ob das Kühlsystem ordnungsgemäß befestigt ist. Vor und schritten werden. Siehe Angaben auf dem Typenschild.
hinter dem Kühlsystem muss ein Mindestabstand von der halben
Höhe des Kühlelements (A) vorhanden sein, damit eine gute Hinweis! Parker empiehlt den Einsatz eines Überlastungsschutzes
Luftversorgung und damit eine optimale Kühlleistung und eine für den Elektromotor.
geringe Geräuschemission gewährleistet ist. Siehe Abb. 3. In sehr feuchter Umgebung und insbesondere bei nicht konti-
Wenn das System mit einem Filter ausgerüstet ist, muss über nuierlichem Betrieb kann sich im Motor Kondenswasser bilden.
dem Filterdeckel einen Freiraum von mindestens der Größe des Einige Motoren sind mit verschlossenen Ablauföffnungen für Kon-
Filterelementes vorhanden sein, damit das Filterelement problem- denswasser versehen. Abhängig von der Lage des Motors sind
los getauscht werden kann. Siehe Abb. 3. dazu die entsprechenden Verschlüsse zu entfernen.
Der Schaldruckpegel kann unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen
57-86 dB(A) LpA (Abstand von 1 m) erreichen. Bei unsachgemä- Das LOC Kühlsystem kann mit einem Thermokontakt für die
ßer Aufstellung des Kühlsystems oder Betrieb unter ungünstigen Temperaturregelung versehen werden. Das Lüfterrad läuft dann
Bedingungen kann der Schaldruckpegel steigen und die Kühllei- bei Erreichen der Einschalttemperatur automatisch an. Liegt die
stung sinken. Stromlast über dem für den Thermokontakt zulässigen Wert,
Wenden Sie sich mit entsprechenden Fragen bitte an Parker. sollte ein Relais verwendet werden.
Um eine Entleerung des Behälters beim Elementwechsel zu
Wichtig Mit dem Thermokontakt darf der Elektromotor nicht di-
verhindern, muss der Füllstand des Kühlsystems über dem des
rekt gesteuert werden.
Behälters liegen. Falls dies nicht möglich ist, installieren Sie am
Ein- und Austritt des Systems ein Rückschlag- oder Absperrventil.
Warnung Gefahr schwerer Verbrennungen. Im Betrieb Hinweis! Einige Modelle haben eine starre Nabe siehe Abb. 10.
kann das Kühlsystem sehr heiß werden. Daher darf es Bei anderen Modellen ist die Nabe lose Abb. 11 A und Abb. 11 B.
erst berührt werden, wenn es sich abgekühlt hat. 1. Die Anlage abschalten.
Warnung Verletzungsgefahr. Vor Wartungsarbeiten ist 2. Die Pumpe mit den unter Demontage von Pumpe und Kupp-
die Stromversorgung des Motors vom Netz zu trennen. lung genannten Schritten demontieren.
3. Den Motor abstützen.
Wichtig Gebrauchte Filterelemente müssen unter Einhaltung der 4. Die Schrauben und Unterlegscheiben, mit denen die Motor-
Richtlinien für die Entsorgung von Industrieabfällen des jeweiligen halterung am Lüftergehäuse befestigt ist, entfernen.
Landes entsorgt werden. Siehe Abb. 9.
5. Die Schrauben samt Unterlegscheiben lösen, mit denen die
Demontage des Kühlelementes
Motorkonsole am Fuß befestigt ist. Den Motor nach hinten
1. Die Anlage abschalten. ziehen.
2. Den Motor von der Stromversorgung trennen. 6. Die Schraube samt Unterlegscheibe lösen, mit denen das
3. Sicherstellen, dass das System drucklos ist. Lüfterrad mit Nabe an der Motorwelle befestigt ist.
4. Die Öleintritt und -austritt verschließen. Siehe Abb. 10. Das Lüfterrad mit Nabe vorsichtig von der
5. Die Hydraulikschläuche lösen. Motorwelle abziehen ggf. einen Abzieher verwenden.
6. Die Schrauben und Unterlegscheiben, mit denen das Kühlele- 7. Die Schrauben samt Unterlegscheiben lösen, mit denen der
ment am Lüftergehäuse befestigt ist, entfernen. Motor an der Motorhalterung befestigt ist. Siehe Abb. 12.
Siehe Abb. 8. 8. Die Schrauben samt Unterlegscheiben entfernen, mit denen
7. Das Kühlelement abnehmen. der Motor an der Motorkonsole befestigt ist.
9. Den Motor abnehmen.
Montage des Kühlelementes
Wenn ein weiteres Zerlegen des Lüfterrads erforderlich ist, sind
1. Das Kühlelement im Lüftergehäuse setzen. alle Teile zur Gewährleistung des richtigen Zusammenbaus zu
2. Das Kühlelement am Lüftergehäuse anschrauben. kennzeichnen, insbesondere hinsichtlich Auswuchtung und
Siehe Abb. 8. Drehrichtung. Siehe Abb. 13.
3. Die Hydraulikschläuche am Kühlelement anschließen.
Siehe Abb. 4. Montage von Elektromotor und Lüfterrad
4. Die Stromversorgung des Motors anschließen.
Hinweis! Einige Modelle haben eine starre Nabe siehe Abb. 10.
5. Die unter Vor dem Start und Beim Start genannten Schritte
Bei anderen Modellen ist die Nabe lose Abb. 11 A und Abb. 11 B.
ausführen.
1. Den Motor an der Motorkonsole anschrauben.
Demontage der Pumpe und der Kupplung
2. Den Motor an der Motorhalterung anschrauben.
1. Die Anlage abschalten. Siehe Abb. 12.
2. Die Stromversorgung abschalten. 3. Bei Montage des Lüfterrades auf der Motorwelle ist die in der
3. Sicherstellen, dass das System drucklos ist. Lüfterradnabe beindliche Nut an der Passfeder der Motor-
4. Die Öleintritt und -austritt verschließen. welle auszurichten und auf diese aufzusetzen. Dabei ist als
5. Die Hydraulikschläuche lösen. Schmiermittel Äthanol zu verwenden. Ggf. ist die Lüfterradna-
6. Die Schrauben und Gummi-/Stahlunterlegscheiben entfernen, be mit einem Gummihammer vorsichtig auf die Motorwelle zu
mit denen die Pumpe am E-Motor befestigt ist. klopfen. Loctite auf die Schraube auftragen und das Lüfterrad
7. Die Pumpe und den Zahnkranz der Kupplung abnehmen. mit der Nabe an der Motorwelle festschrauben.
Die Pumpe und Kupplungsteile können jetzt ausgetauscht Siehe Abb. 10.
werden. 4. Überprüfen, ob das Lüfterrad fest auf der Motorwelle sitzt und
8. Die Anschlagschraube des Wellenkupplungsteils lösen. nicht zu viel Spiel hat.
Das Wellenkupplungsteil von der Motorwelle entfernen. 5. Die Motorhalterung mit Lüfterrad, Schutzgitter, Motor und
Motorkonsole zur Montage in das Lüftergehäuse setzen.
Montage von Pumpe und Kupplung 6. Schutzgitter und Motor ausrichten und die Motorhalterung am
1. Das Wellenkupplungsteil an der Motorwelle anbringen. Lüftergehäuse anschrauben. Siehe Abb. 9.
Die Anschlagschraube festziehen. Die Motorkonsole festschrauben.
2. Die Pumpe und den Zahnkranz der Kupplung anbringen. 7. Überprüfen, ob das Lüfterrad zentriert/ausgerichtet ist und
3. Die Schrauben und Gummi-/Stahlunterlegscheiben anbring- sich frei dreht (mit der Hand drehen). Bei Bedarf die Anbring-
en, mit denen die Pumpe am E-Motor befestigt ist. ung von Schutzgitter und Motor ändern.
4. Die Hydraulikschläuche anschließen. Siehe Abb. 4. 8. Sicherstellen, dass alle Schrauben festgezogen sind.
5. Die Stromversorgung des Motors anschließen. 9. Die Stromversorgung des Motors anschließen.
6. Die unter Vor dem Start und Beim Start genannten Schritte 10.Die unter Vor dem Start und Beim Start genannten Schritte
ausführen. ausführen.
Demontage von Elektromotor und Lüfterrad Filtereinheit FX3
Warnung Gefahr schwerer Verbrennungen. Im Betrieb Bei Ausstattung mit einer Filtereinheit des Typs FX3 wird das Öl
kann das Kühlsystem sehr heiß werden. Daher darf es in einem separaten System gereinigt. Dies ist eine hervorragende
erst berührt werden, wenn es sich abgekühlt hat. Ergänzung zum Ölreinigungssystem der Anlage. Die Filtereinheit
FX3 ist als Zubehör erhältlich.
Technische Daten
Kühlsystem
Maximaler Betriebsdruck 10 bar
Kühlleistungstoleranz ±6%
Maximal zulässige Öltemperatur 100 °C
Zulässige Öltypen
Mineralöl
Synthetiköle
Planzenöle
Hinsichtlich eines Betriebs mit anderen Ölen oder unter erschwerten
Bedingungen wenden Sie sich an Parker.
Material
Pumpengehäuse/Kühlelement Aluminium
Filtereinheit (optional) Aluminium
Lüftergehäuse Stahl
Lüfterrad/Nabe Glasfaserverstärktes Polypropylen/Aluminium
Schutzgitter Stahl
Oberläche Im Magnetpulververfahren aufgebrachte Pulver-Schicht
E-Motor
3-phasig, asynchron gemäß IEC 60034-1
Empfohlene Umgebungstemperatur -20 °C - +40 °C
Isolationsklasse F
Temperaturklasse B
Schutzklasse IP 55
Hinsichtlich der Nennspannung siehe gesondertes Handbuch zum E-
Motor.
EC Dec
claration off conformitty
The pro
oduct is in conformity with
w the requ n the followiing standards and directives.
uirements in
- Safety of machinery
S m – Basic conccepts, generral principle es for design
n, SS-EN IS SO 12100-
1/A1:2009 and
a SS-EN ISO 12100 0-2/A1:20099.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety requ uirements foor fluid powwer systems and their components
c s
– Hydrauliccs, SS-EN IS
SO 4413:20 010.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety dista ances to pre
event hazard zones be eing reache ed by upper
a lower liimbs, SS-EN ISO 1385
and 57:2008.
- Pumps and d pump unitss for liquidss – Common n safety req quirements, SS-EN 809 9+
A
A1:2009/AC C:2010.
- Electric motors used on
o the produ uct comply with
w the Low w Voltage DDirective (LV
VD)
2
2006/95/EC C and the Electromagnetic Compa atibility Direcctive (EMC) 2004/108//EC.
The abo
ove is valid for a complete producct delivered by Parker Hannifin
H Ma
anufacturing
g Sweden
AB and a complete
e product is
CE-marrked by Parrker Hannifin
n Manufacturing Swed
den AB.
Sätra, January
J 15 2013 ___
__________
__________
_______
Rika
ard Eriksso
on
Tecchnical Man
nager
Parrker Hannifin Manufactturing Swed
den AB
PARKER Accumulator
A & Cooler Division Europe - Sätra
a · Box 8064 · 141
1 08 Kungenss Kurva © 2012 Copyrig
ght
Le système de refroidissement LOC se compose d’un échangeur Utilisez des lexibles hydrauliques pour raccorder le système LOC
air/huile, d’un moteur triphasé et d’une pompe basse pression au système hydraulique. Assurez-vous que tous les raccords
de la série QPM. Le système de refroidissement peut également et lexibles sont dimensionnés suivant la pression, le débit, la
être équipé d’un iltre pour nettoyage de l’huile. température et le type d’huile du système.
Le système de refroidissement LOC offre une capacité de refroi- Raccordez les lexibles hydrauliques selon la Figure 4.
dissement de 2,7 à 44,8 kW ainsi qu’une plage de débit d’huile A – Entrée.
standard de 20 à 80 l/min. B – Sortie pour modèle Bypass type S, 1 passe.
C – Sortie pour Bypass type T, 2 passes
Plaque signalétique du système de refroidissement
D – Connexion pour le thermocontact
La plaque signalétique du système de refroidissement est placée
Les dimensions des connexions dépendent de la taille du système
sur le caisson ventilateur. Voir la Figure 2.
LOC.
La plaque signalétique contient les informations suivantes: La température maximale autorisée de l’huile eset de 100 °C.
A – Le numéro de référence du produit Schéma de principe, voir la Figure 5.
B – La désignation du produit Pour une capacité optimale de le pompe, placez le système LOC
C – Le numéro de série du produit endessous du niveau de l’huile du réservoir (maxi 5 m) et le plus
D – La date de livraison (année et semaine, par exemple près possible du réservoir. En cas d’une installation au-dessus du
1018, c’est-à-dire l’année 2010 et la semaine 18) niveau de l’huile du réservoir, minimisez la différence de hauteur.
Le diamètre du lexible d’entrée ne doit pas être inférieur à celui
Remplacez immédiatement une plaque endommagée ou du raccordement à la pompe. Un diamètre supérieur est recom-
manquante. mandé. Évitez un débit supérieur à 1 m/s dans le lexible d’entrée
Plaque signalétique du filtre de la pompe. La pression maximale du côté aspiration de la pompe
est de 0,5 bar.
La plaque signalétique du iltre contient les informations
suivantes: Connexion électrique
• Le numéro de référence de l’élément iltrant Danger Risque d’électrocution. Toute connexion électrique
• La désignation de l’élément iltrant (04” HP). doit être effectuée par un électricien agréé.
Avant la connexion du moteur au réseau électrique, contrôlez que
Installation les données sur la plaque signalétique du moteur correspondent à
Levage la tension et à la fréquence du réseau.
L’installation du moteur doit être effectuée conformément à la
Avertissement Risque de pincement/d’écrasement. Pour réglementation et aux prescriptions de sécurité électriques en
éviter les blessures corporelles lors des levages, l’utilisation vigueur et exclusivement par un électricien agréé.
d’une méthode de levage correcte est impérative. Vériiez
que les dispositifs de levage utilisés sont en bon état Avertissement Effectuez la connexion avec un maximum
et homologués pour le poids du système LOC. Tous les de soins. Une connexion incorrecte, des câbles défectueux
systèmes LOC à partir de la taille 033 sont preparés pour etc. peuvent résulter en des éléments conducteurs de
être équipés d’anneaux de levage. Les anneaux de levage courant et un sens de rotation incorrect du moteur, du
sont disponibles sur demande auprès de Parker. ventilateur et de la pompe. Voir la Figure 6.
Montage Important Ne surchargez pas le moteur électrique (courant trop
élevé). Consultez la plaque signalétique sur le moteur.
Prudence Risque de blessures corporelles. Assurez-vous
que tous les éléments du système de refroidissement sont Remarque Nous recommandons une protection contre les sur-
correctement ixés. charges pour le moteur.
Nous vous recommandons d’installer le système debout sur ses Dans un environnement extrêmement humide, surtout en
pieds. Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle, assurez-vous que le sys- fonctionnement intermittent, de la condensation peut se former.
tème de refroidissement est bien ixé. Certains moteurs sont munis de trous obturés lesquels peuvent
Laissez un espace libre correspondant à au moins la moitié de la être utilisés pour purger cette condensation. En fonction de
hauteur du radiateur devant et derrière le système LOC pour assurer l’emplacement du moteur électrique, retirez les bouchons
une capacité de refroidissement optimale grâce à une bonne circu- appropriés.
lation d’air et pour réduire la pression acoustique. Voir la Figure 3. La température du système LOC peut être commandé via un
Si le ème est équipé d’un iltre, laisser une espace correspondant thermocontact. Le ventilateur démarre automatiquement dès
au moins à la taille de l’élément iltrant audessus du iltre ain de per- que la température préréglée est atteinte. Utilisez un relais si le
mettre le remplacement de l’élément iltrant. Voir la Figure 3. thermocontact est soumis à une charge supérieure à sa charge
La pression acoustique peut atteindre 57-86 dB(A) LpA à une dis- maximale.
tance de 1 m dans des conditions de fonctionnement normales.
Important N’utilisez jamais le thermocontact pour un contrôle
L’installation d’un système de refroidissement dans un endroit inap-
direct du moteur électrique.
proprié ou un fonctionnement dans des conditions de fonctionne-
ment extrêmes risque d’entraîner une pression acoustique élevée et
même réduire la capacité de refroidissement. Contactez Parker.
Pour éviter que le réservoir ne se vide pendant le remplacement
de l’élément iltrant, le niveau d’huile du système LOC doit être
au-dessus du niveau du luide du réservoir. Si cela n’est pas
possible, installez un clapet de commande ou un clapet d’arrêt
côté entrée et sortie du système.
Pompe Parker ne peut être tenu responsable des Montage de la pompe et du raccord
dysfonctionnements engendrés à la suite d’un nettoyage
de l’intérieur de la pompe. Si vous avez utilisé une huile 1. Posez la partie de raccord de l’arbre du moteur .
contaminée, nettoyez la pompe en la faisant fonctionner avec Serrez la vis d’arrêt.
une huile propre. 2. Posez la pompe et la couronne du raccord.
3. Posez les vis et les joints à lèvres qui ixent la pompe au
Filtre (option) moteur électrique.
4. Connectez les lexibles hydrauliques. Voir la Figure 4.
Les éléments iltrants ne peuvent pas être nettoyés. 5. Connectez la source d’entraînement du moteur.
6. Effectuez les procédures Avant le démarrage et Au
Entretien démarrage.
Démontage du moteur électrique et du ventilateur
Démontage La responsabilité de Parker concernant le produit
cesse dès lors que des réparations et/ou des modiications ont Avertissement Risque de brûlures graves. Pendant le
été effectuées sur celui-ci par l’utilisateur lui-même. fonctionnement, le système peut devenir très chaud. Ne
pas toucher avant qu’il n’ait refroidi.
Avertissement Risque de brûlures graves. Pendant
le fonctionnement, le système LOC peut devenir très Avertissement Risque de blessures corporelles.
chaud. Ne pas toucher avant qu’il n’ait refroidi. Déconnectez la source d’entraînement du moteur avant
toute intervention d’entretien.
Avertissement Risque de blessures corporelles.
Déconnectez la source d’entraînement du moteur avant À la livraison, le ventilateur est équilibré avec le moyeu.
toute intervention d’entretien.
Remarque Certains modèles sont équipés d’un moyeu ixe
Important Les éléments iltrants usagés doivent être traités Figure 10 et d’autres ont un moyeu non ixe Figure 11 A et
selon la législation sur les déchets industriels en vigueur dans Figure 11 B.
chaque pays.
1. Arrêtez le système.
Démontage du radiateur 2. Démontez la pompe selon la procédure Démontage de la
pompe et du racc
1. Arrêtez le système. 3. Fixez le moteur.
2. Déconnectez la source d’entraînement du moteur. 4. Dévissez les vis avec rondelles qui ixent le support du
3. Assurez-vous que le système est purgé de toute pression. moteur au caisson ventilateur. Voir la Figure 9.
4. Déconnectez les entrées et les sorties d’huile. 5. Dévissez les vis avec les rondelles qui ixent la chaise du
5. Déconnectez les lexibles hydrauliques du radiateur. moteur aux pieds. Tirez le moteur en arrière.
6. Dévissez les vis avec rondelles qui ixent le radiateur au 6. Dévissez la vis avec la rondelle qui ixe l’hélice/moyeu à
caisson ventilateur. Voir la Figure 8. l’arbre du moteur. Voir la Figure 10.
7. Déposez le radiateur. Déposez avec soin l’hélice/moyeu de l’arbre du moteur.
Montage du radiateur Utilisez une extracteur si besoin.
7. Dévissez les vis avec les rondelles qui ixent le moteur à son
1. Mettez le radiateur en place. support. Voir la Figure 12.
2. Fixez le radiateur au caisson ventilateur avec les vis. 8. Dévissez les vis avec rondelles qui ixent le moteur à la
Voir la Figure 8. chaise.
3. Connectez les lexibles hydrauliques au radiateur. 9. Déposez le moteur.
Voir la Figure 4.
4. Connectez la source d’entraînement du moteur. Si le ventilateur doit être démonté, marquez toutes les pièces
5. Effectuez les procédures Avant le démarrage et Au pour assurer un remontage correct, surtout du point de vue de
démarrage. l’équilibre et du sens de rotation. Voir la Figure 13.
Démontage de la pompe et du raccord Montage du moteur électrique et du ventilateur
1. Arrêtez le système. Remarque Certains modèles sont équipés d’un moyeu ixe
2. Déconnectez la source d’entraînement. Figure 10 et d’autres ont un moyeu non ixe Figure 11 A et
3. Assurez-vous que le système est purgé de toute pression. Figure 11 B.
4. Déconnectez les entrées et les sorties d’huile. 1. Fixez le moteur à sa chaise à l’aide des vis.
5. Déconnectez les lexibles hydrauliques. 2. Fixez le moteur à sa chaise avec les vis. Voir la Figure 12.
6. Retirez les vis et les joints à lèvres qui ixent la pompe au 3. Adaptez la rainure dans le moyeu par rapport à la clavette
moteur électrique. longitudinale sur moteur. Lubriiez l’intérieur du moyeu avec
7. Déposez la pompe et la couronne du raccord. de l’alcool éthylique et ixez l’hélice avec le moyeu sur l’arbre
La pompe et les parties du raccord peuvent maintenant être du moteur en poussant. Si nécessaire, frappez légèrement
remplacées. avec un maillet en caoutchouc par exemple. Appliquez du
8. Desserrez la vis d’arrêt de la partie de raccord de l’arbre. produit Loctite sur la vis et ixez l’hélice avec le moyeu à
Retirez la partie de raccord de l’arbre du moteur. l’arbre du moteur. Voir la Figure 10.
4. Assurez-vous que le ventilateur est bien ixé à l’arbre du
moteur et qu’il ne presente pas de jeu.
5. Installez le support du moteur avec le ventilateur, la grille, le
moteur et sa chaise dans le caisson ventilateur.
Caractéristiques techniques
Système de refroidissement
Pression de service maxi 10 bar
Tolérance de transfert de chaleur ±6%
Température maximale de l’huile 100 °C
Compatibilité
Huile minérale
Huiles synthétiques
Huiles végétales
Consultez Parker en cas d’utilisation d’autres huiles ou d’une utilisation
dans des conditions extrêmes.
Matériaux
Corps de pompe/radiateur Aluminium
Filtre (option) Aluminium
Caisson de ventilateur Acier
Hélice/moyeu Polypropylène renforcé ibre de verre/aluminium
Grille du ventilateur Acier
Revêtement Décapage électronique et revêtement de poudre
Moteur électrique
Moteur triphasé asynchrone selon IEC 60034-1
Température ambiante recommandée -20 °C - +40 °C
Isolement F
Élévation de température B
Norme de protection IP 55
Pour de plus amples informations sur le courant nominal,
consultez la brochure du moteur.
EC Dec
claration off conformitty
The pro
oduct is in conformity with
w the requ n the followiing standards and directives.
uirements in
- Safety of machinery
S m – Basic conccepts, generral principle es for design
n, SS-EN IS SO 12100-
1/A1:2009 and
a SS-EN ISO 12100 0-2/A1:20099.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety requ uirements foor fluid powwer systems and their components
c s
– Hydrauliccs, SS-EN IS
SO 4413:20 010.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety dista event hazard zones be
ances to pre eing reache ed by upper
a lower liimbs, SS-EN ISO 1385
and 57:2008.
- Pumps and d pump unitss for liquidss – Common n safety req quirements, SS-EN 809 9+
A
A1:2009/AC C:2010.
- Electric motors used on
o the produ uct comply with
w the Low w Voltage DDirective (LV
VD)
2
2006/95/EC C and the Electromagnetic Compa atibility Direcctive (EMC) 2004/108//EC.
Sätra, January
J 15 2013 ___
__________
__________
_______
Rika
ard Eriksso
on
Tecchnical Man
nager
Parrker Hannifin Manufactturing Swed
den AB
PARKER Accumulator
A & Cooler Division Europe - Sätra
a · Box 8064 · 141
1 08 Kungenss Kurva © 2012 Copyrig
ght
El sistema de refrigeración LOC se compone principalmente de Utilizar lexibles hidráulicos para las conexiones de entrada
un intercambiador aire/aceite, un motor de corriente alterna y y salida del radiador. Asegurarse de que los rácords y
una bomba de baja presión tipo engrenaje de la serie QPM. los lexibles estén dimensionados y sean adecuados a la
Además, el sistema de refrigeración puede equiparse con un presión, el caudal, la temperatura y el aceite del sistema.
iltro para la limpieza del aceite. El sistema de refrigeración LOC Conectar los lexibles hidráulicos al radiador como sigue.
está disponbile con una capacidad de refrigeración de 2,7 – Ver fig 4.
44,8 kW, y un caudal de aceite nominal de 20 – 80 l/min. A – Entrada
B – Salida modelo estándar o salida modelo by-pass tipo S,
Placa del fabricante Sistema de refrigeración
1 paso
La placa del fabricante del sistema LOC está colocada sobre la C – Salida modelo by-pass tipo T, 2 pasos
caja del ventilador. Ver fig 2. D – Conexión para termocontactoTemperatura máxima perme-
tida del aceite es de 100 °C.
La placa del fabricante contiene la siguiente información:
Las dimensiones de las conexiones dependen del tamaño del
A – Referencia del producto radiador.
B – Descripción del producto La temperatura máxima permitida del radiador es de 100 ºC.
C – Número de serie Diagrama de lujo. Ver fig 5.
D – Fecha de entrega
(año y semana, p.e. 1018, es decir año 2010 semana 18). Para mejorar la capacidad de la bomba, coloque el sistema de
refrigeración bajo el nivel de aceite del depósito (máx. 5 metros)
Remplace de inmediato una placa perdida o rota. y tan cerca del depósito como sea posible. En caso de una ins-
Placa del fabricante Filtro talación por encima del nivel de aceite del depósito, minimizar la
diferencia de altura.
La placa del fabriante del iltro contiene la siguiente información: El diámetro de la tubería de la entrada no debe ser inferior al
• Referencia del elemento iltrante diámetro de la conexion de la bomba. Se recomienda un diá-
• Descripción del elemento iltrante. (04” HP). metro mayor.
Evitar caudales superiores de 1 m/seg. en la tubería de entrada
de la bomba. Presión máxima lado aspiración de la bomba es
Instalación de 0,5 bar.
Advertencia Riesgo de caída. Para evitar daños corporales Peligro Riesgo de electrocución. La conexión eléctrica
en la elevación, es básico utilizar un método de elevación debe ser realizada por personal eléctrico cualiicado.
correcto. Controlar que el dispositivo de elevación y las Antes de la conexión del motor a la fuente eléctrica, controlar
herramientas de uso estén en buen estado y homologados que los datos de la placa del motor correspondan a la tensión y
para la elevación del peso del sistema LOC. a la frecuencia de la fuente.
Todos los sistemas de refrigeración apartir del modelo LOC 033 La instalación del motor debe ser efectuada conforme a la
están preparados para llevar cáncamos de elevación. os cánmos de normativa vigente sobre seguridad eléctrica y exclusivamente
elevación están disponibles bajo pedido como accesorios de Parker. por personal cualiicado.
Montaje Precaución Efectuar la conexión con cuidado. Una
conexión incorrecta, cables defectuosos, etc. pueden
Precaución Riesgo de heridas corporales. Asegurarse de acortar la vida útil de los componentes o provocar un
que todas las piezas del sistema de refrigeración estén co- sentido incorrecto de giro del motor eléctrico, del ventila-
rrectamente colocadas. dor y de la bomba. Ver fig 6.
Parker recomienda un montaje vértical sobre las patas del
sistema. Para evitar daños corporales, asegurarse de que el Importante No sobrecargar el motor eléctrico. Ver la placa técnica
sistema esté bien ijado. del motor eléctrico.
Para garantizar un circulación de aire óptima y con esto una Nota! Parker recomienda el uso de una protección de sobrecarga
capacidad de refrigeración máxima y un bajo nivel de presión para motor eléctrico.
acústica, déjar un espacio libre correspondiente a, al menos, la
mitad de la altura del radiador en la parte frontal y posterior del En ambientes muy húmedos, en especial cuando la operación es
sistema LOC. Ver fig 3. intermitente, es posible que se genere una acumulación de agua
En el caso en que el sistema LOC esté equipado con un iltro, de condensación. Ciertos motores vienen equipados con oriicios
el espacio correspondiente a, como mínimo, el tamaño del taponados para poder ser usados como drenajes de agua de
elemento de iltro debe estar disponible sobre el iltro a in de condensación. Dependiendo de la ubicación del motor, deberá
permitir la sustitución del elemento. Ver fig 3. extraer estos tapones.
El nivel de presión acústica puede alcanzar los 57-86 dB(A) El sistema LOC puede estar equipado con un termocontacto
LpA a una distancia de 1 metro en condiciones operativas para el control de la temperatura. El ventilador se pone en marcha
normales. Un emplazamiento inadecuado, o su funcionamiento automáticamente cuando se alcanza la temperatura de consigna.
en condiciones extremas, puede provocar un nivel de presión Utilize un relé si la corriente excede la corriente máxima permitida
acústica elevado y reducir la capacidad de refrigeración. en el termocontacto.
Para evitar el vaciado del depósito al sustituir el elemento, Importante El termocontacto no puede ser utilizado para control
asegúrese de que el nivel de aceite del sistema LOC es superior directo del motor eléctrico.
al nivel del depósito. Si esto no fuera posible, instale una válvula
de control o de cierre en la entrada y la salida del sistema.
7. Controlar que el ventilador esté bien centrado y gire bien (con la Dispositivo de presión diferencial tipo D
mano). Ajustar si se cree necesario la posición de la rejilla y del
motor. Si se dispone de indicador visual y este actúa durante el arranque
8. Asegurarse de que los tornillos estén bien apretados. en frío (el botón rojo sobresale 5 mm), reajustar pulsando el
9. Conectar la fuente de alimentación al motor. botón al alcanzarse la temperatura normal de funcionamiento. Si
10. Efectuar los procesos de Antes de la puesta en marcha y En después del reajuste, el indicador volviese a activarse, reemplazar
el momento de la puesta en marcha. el elemento.
Equipado con un sistema de iltro de tipo FX3, el aceite se limpiará El indicador opcional ‘P’ se activa por temperatura y se reajusta
en un sistema aparte. El iltro FX3 es un excelente complemento de forma manual. Sin señal por debajo de 0 °C, con señal por
del iltro propio sistema. El iltro FX3 está disponible como opción. encima de 29 °C.
1. Purgar el iltro abriendo el tapón de venteo en la parte superior El indicador eléctrico tipo M se reajusta de manera automática.
del iltro con aproximadamente dos vueltas. Su conexión está en conformidad con DIN 43650, ISO 4400
2. Llenar el iltro hasta que todo el aire salga por el tapón; apretar (Hirschmann) y está protegido frente la humedad conforme a
el tapón. IP65. Se recomienda utilizar el indicador positivo (luz verde) y el
3. Presurizar el sistema y comprobar que no hay fugas; en caso indicador negativo (luz roja para elemento sucio) para controlar de
de detectar fugas véase el apartado Mantenimeinto rutinario. forma eicaz la vida útil del elemento iltrante.
Si actúa el interruptor eléctrico (por ejemplo, se enciende la luz
Precaución Si no se realiza el purgado correcto de la roja) durante el arranque en frío, continuar con el servicio hasta
carcasa del iltro, aumentará el contenido de aire disuelto que la señal (luz roja) se apague cuando el equipo se caliente
en el luido del sistema, lo que acortará la vida del mismo y hasta alcanzar una temperatura de servicio normal. Esta función
podrá provocar otros problemas en el sistema. se puede utilizar como un indicador de ‘calentamiento’ durante
el servicio. Si la señal de aviso (luz roja) permanence encendida o
Mantenimiento rutinario se enciende cuando el sistema está caliente, se deberá sustituir el
Los iltros FX3 normalmente no requieren un mantenimiento elemento iltrante.
especial, salvo la revisión periódica del dispositivo de presión Dispositivo de presión diferencial tipo U
diferencial. La sustitución del elemento de iltro se deberá realizar
cada seis meses o antes y se deberá tener disponible un surtido El indicador de tipo U está equipado con un contacto AMP de 2
amplio de elementos de repuesto. polos.
Advertencia Si no se libera la presión del iltro antes de Sustitución del elemento
llevar a cabo el manteniminento del elemento, se puede
provocar lesiones personales, daños en el equipo y al 1. Desconectar el sistema y la válvula de cierre, si procede.
medio ambiente. 2. Asegurarse de que el sistema esté despresurizado.
3. Abrir el tapón de venteo en la parte superior del iltro aprox. con
Al realizar el mantenimiento se deberán limpiar las supericies 2 vueltas.
externas del conjunto de iltro para eliminar cualquier resto de 4. Desenroscar y quitar la cubierta del tubo girando en sentido
polvo. El mantenimiento se deberá realizar utilizando herramientas antihorario visto desde arriba.
adecuadas que no supongan un peligro. 5. Quitar el elemento iltrante. Desechar el elemento iltrante y su
junta tórica. El elemento iltrante no debe limpiarse. La limpieza
En caso de detectar fugas externas se deberá sustituir la junta del elemento iltrante puede provocar la degradación del medio
tórica en el punto de fuga. Si la fuga persiste, revisar si las iltrante y permitir el paso del luido contaminado a través
supericies de sellado están ralladas o rotas; sustituir cualquier del iltro. Los elementos iltrantes usados deben gestionarse
pieza defectuosa. conforme a las normativas de residuos industriales vigentes en
Un sistema sucio puede embozar rápidamente un elemento cada país.
iltrante nuevo. Puede ser necesario realizar uno o dos cambios 6. Montar un elemento nuevo. Asegurarse de que esté equipado
de elemento antes de estabilizarse la vida útil del mismo. Si la con una junta tórica en el fondo.
vida útil del elemento es muy corta o si la presión diferencial 7. Instalar una nueva junta tórica en la cubierta del iltro y atornillar
es excesiva, es posible que el iltro sea demasiado pequeño; la cubierta.
contacte con Parker. 8. Arranque el motor con el tapón de venteo abierto con
Dispositivos de presión diferencial aproximadamente dos vueltas.
9. Cerrar el tapón de venteo cuando solo salga aceite por el
Un dispositivo de presión diferencial actúa detectando la presión tapón.
diferencia existente entre la entrada y la salida del iltro. El
dispositivo de presión diferencial funciona independientemente 10.Reajustar el indicador. No hacer funcionar el sistema sin el
de la válvula bypass, y está diseñada para reaccionar antes de la elemento iltrante instalado.
apertura de la válvula. Esto signiica que existe tiempo suiciente
disponible para cambiar el cartucho del iltro antes de que la
válvula by-pass se abra permitiendo el paso de aceite no iltrado;
igualmente maximiza la vida útil del elemento.
Si la indicaión fuera ignorada y la contaminación persistiera, el iltro
pasará a funcionar en bypass cuando la caída de presión alcance
los 3,5 bar. El sistema operará entonces como un sistema de
refrigeración sin función de limpieza de aceite.
Características técnicas
Sistema de refrigeración
Máxima presión de régimen de trabajo 10 bar
Tolerancia de transferencia de calor ±6%
Máxima temperatura permitida del aceite 100 °C
Compatibilidad
Aceite mineral
Aceites sintéticos
Aceites vegetales
Para utilizar otros aceites, o para el funcionamiento bajo
condiciones extremas, contacte con su empresa
Material
Carcasa de la bomba/Radiador Aluminio
Conjunto iltro (opcional) Aluminio
Caja del ventilaor Acero
Helices/asiento ventilador Polipropileno reforzado con ibra de vidrio/aluminio
Rejilla de protección Acero
Revestimiento Pintado mediante polvo electrostático
Motor eléctrico
Motor asíncrono trifásico en conformidad con IEC 60034-1
Temperatura ambiente recomendada -20 °C - +40 °C
Estándar de aislamiento F
Aumento de temperatura B
Estándar de protección IP 55
Con respecto a la tensión nominal, consulte el manual
adjunto del motor eléctrico.
EC Dec
claration off conformitty
The pro
oduct is in conformity with
w the requ
uirements in
n the followiing standards and directives.
- Safety of machinery
S m – Basic conccepts, generral principle es for design
n, SS-EN IS SO 12100-
1/A1:2009 and
a SS-EN ISO 12100 0-2/A1:20099.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety requ uirements foor fluid powwer systems and their components
c s
– Hydrauliccs, SS-EN IS
SO 4413:20 010.
- S
Safety of machinery
m – Safety dista ances to pre
event hazard zones be eing reache ed by upper
a lower liimbs, SS-EN ISO 1385
and 57:2008.
- Pumps and d pump unitss for liquidss – Common n safety req quirements, SS-EN 809 9+
A
A1:2009/AC C:2010.
- Electric motors used on
o the produ uct comply with
w the Low w Voltage DDirective (LV
VD)
2
2006/95/EC C and the Electromagnetic Compa atibility Direcctive (EMC) 2004/108//EC.
The abo
ove is valid for a complete producct delivered by Parker Hannifin
H Ma
anufacturing
g Sweden
AB and a complete
e product is
CE-marrked by Parrker Hannifin
n Manufacturing Swed
den AB.
Sätra, January
J 15 2013 ___
__________
__________
_______
Rika
ard Eriksso
on
Tecchnical Man
nager
Parrker Hannifin Manufactturing Swed
den AB
PARKER Accumulator
A & Cooler Division Europe - Sätra
a · Box 8064 · 141
1 08 Kungenss Kurva © 2012 Copyrig
ght
© 2013 Parker Hanniin Corporation. All rights reserved. Catalogue HY10-6003-UM/EU, 1M, 03/2013, VITT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Esempi
IWIKAII
5 Part of your business
IT Manuale d'uso modelli RTD e TC Pagina 3 - 24
Contenuti
IT
1. Informazioni generali 4
2. Esecuzione e funzioni 4
3. Sicurezza 5
4. Trasporto, imballaggio e stoccaggio 10
5. Messa in servizio, funzionamento 11
6. Malfunzionamenti e guasti 18
7. Manutenzione e pulizia 20
8. Smontaggio, resi e smaltimento 21
9. Specifiche tecniche 23
10. Accessori 24
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
1. Informazioni generali
■ Le sonde di temperatura descritte nel manuale d'uso sono stati fabbricate secondo lo
stato dell'arte della tecnica.
IT
■ Questo manuale d'uso contiene importanti informazioni sull'uso dello strumento.
Lavorare in sicurezza implica il rispetto delle istruzioni di sicurezza e di funzionamento.
■ Il manuale d‘uso deve essere letto con attenzione e compreso dal personale qualificato
prima dell‘inizio di qualsiasi attività.
■ Ulteriori informazioni:
- Indirizzo Internet: www.wika.it
- Consulenze tecniche ed applicative: Tel.: +39 02 93861-1
Fax: +39 02 93861-74
info@wika.it
2. Esecuzione e funzioni
2.1 Descrizione
Queste termoresistenze e termocoppie sono usate per la misura della temperatura in
applicazioni industriali.
Questo documento descrive gli strumenti nella versione standard. Per le applicazioni in
aree pericolose sono richiesti strumenti speciali.
Guaina Guaina
Collegamento elettrico
Per quanto riguarda il collegamento elettrico, la sonda è dotata di una custodia e di un
connettore o di un filo nudo uscente. La custodia contiene il terminali di connessione o i
trasmettitori certificati. In opzione, nelle custodie possono essere integrati separatamente
display digitali certificati.
3. Sicurezza
3.1 Legenda dei simboli
ATTENZIONE!
... indica una situazione di potenziale pericolo che, se non evitata, può
causare ferite gravi o morte.
CAUTELA!
... indica una situazione di potenziale pericolo che, se non evitata, può
causare ferite lievi o danni alle apparecchiature o all'ambiente.
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
ATTENZIONE!
... indica una situazione di potenziale pericolo che, se non evitata, può
causare ustioni causate da superfici o liquidi bollenti.
Informazione
... fornisce suggerimenti utili e raccomandazioni per l'utilizzo efficiente e
senza problemi dello strumento.
IT
3.2 Destinazione d'uso
Le sonde di temperatura qui descritte sono adatte per misura della temperatura in
applicazioni industriali.
Il costruttore non è responsabile per reclami di qualsiasi natura in caso di utilizzo dello
strumento al di fuori della sua destinazione d'uso.
ATTENZIONE!
Rischio di lesioni in caso di personale non qualificato
L'uso improprio può condurre a lesioni gravi o danni alle apparecchiature. IT
▶ Le attività riportate in questo manuale d'uso possono essere effettuate
solo da elettricisti in possesso delle qualifiche riportate di seguito.
Personale operativo
Per personale formato dall'operatore si intende personale che, sulla base della propria
istruzione, conoscenza ed esperienza, sia in grado di svolgere il lavoro descritto e
riconoscere autonomamente potenziali pericoli.
Eventuali condizioni operative speciali richiedono inoltre conoscenze specifiche, es. fluidi
aggressivi.
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
D-63911 Klingenberg
TR10-A
IEC 60751 11012345
1 x Pt100 / B / 3
-50 ... +250 °C
D = 6 mm 525 mm
(F)
Made in Germany 2015
Modello
Modello del trasmettitore (solo per esecuzioni con trasmettitore)
Anno di produzione
Sensore conforme agli standard
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
TC10-B 11012345
D-63911 Klingenberg IEC 60584 IT
1 x Type K / 1 / . 0 ... 1260 °C
T32 4 ... 20 mA -50 ... +250 °C
HART ®
Made in Germany 2015
D-63911 Klingenberg
TC10-A
IEC 60584 11012345
1 x Type K / 1 / .
0 ... 1260 °C
D = 2 mm 525 mm
Made in Germany 2015
Modello
Modello del trasmettitore (solo per esecuzioni con trasmettitore)
Anno di produzione
Sensore conforme agli standard
■ non collegato a massa
■ collegato a massa
Simbolo sensore
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
Simboli
CAUTELA!
Danni dovuti a trasporto improprio
Con un trasporto non corretto, lo strumento può subire danni gravi.
▶ Quando le merci imballate si scaricano al momento della consegna, così
come durante il trasporto interno, procedere con cautela e osservare i
simboli riportati sull'imballo.
▶ In caso di trasporti interni, osservare le istruzioni riportate nel capitolo 10
“Accessori”.
trasmettitore
Conservare lo strumento nel suo imballo originale in un luogo rispondente alle condizioni
riportate sopra. Se l'imballo originale non è disponibile, imballare e conservare lo
strumento come indicato di seguito:
1. Riporre lo strumento nella scatola con materiale assorbente gli urti.
2. Se la conservazione deve essere effettuata per un lungo periodo (più di 30 giorni), IT
includere una bustina di gel antiumidità all'interno dell'imballo.
Come standard, WIKA utilizza guarnizioni in rame per la connessione tra il tubo di
estensione e il pozzetto termometrico, e guarnizioni piatte in carta per la connessione tra la
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
Pressacavi
Requisiti per raggiungere la classe di protezione:
■ Usare solo pressacavi all'interno della coppia di serraggio indicata (diametro del cavo
adatto al pressacavo).
■ Non usare l'area di serraggio inferiore con tipi di cavo molto morbidi.
■ Usare solo cavi a sezione circolare (se necessario, a sezione leggermente ovale).
■ Non torcere il cavo.
■ È possibile l'apertura/chiusura ripetuta; tuttavia, solo se necessario in quanto potrebbe
avere un effetto dannoso sulla classe di protezione
■ Per i cavi con un comportamento “cold-flow” pronunciato, il collegamento a vite deve
essere completamente serrato.
CAUTELA!
Pericolo di cortocircuito
Danni ai cavi, fili e punti di collegamento possono comportare il IT
malfunzionamento dello strumento.
▶ Evitare di danneggiare i cavi e i fili. I cavi flessibili sottili con terminali
scoperti vanno dotati di giunzioni finali.
5.3.1 Termoresistenze
■ Con morsettiera
3160629.06
rosso bianco rosso
rosso rosso
rosso rosso rosso
nero
nero giallo
rosso rosso
rosso rosso rosso
nero
giallo giallo giallo
giallo
Senza connettore
rosso rosso
IT
3160629.06
1 x Pt100
2 fili bianco bianco
2 x Pt100
2 fili
nero
rosso giallo
1 x Pt100 rosso
3 fili rosso
bianco rosso
2 x Pt100 bianco
rosso 3 fili nero
1 x Pt100 rosso nero
4 fili
bianco giallo
bianco
Connettore Lemosa
Connettore (maschio) Connettore (femmina)
3366036.02
Vista frontale Vista frontale
1 x Pt100
2 fili
1 x Pt100
3 fili
1 x Pt100
4 fili
2 x Pt100
2 fili
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
2 x Pt100
3 fili
3366142.05
IT
Vista dei contatti Vista dei contatti
1 x Pt100 Binder
2 fili Serie 680
1 x Pt100 Binder
3 fili Serie 680
1 x Pt100 Binder
4 fili Serie 680
2 x Pt100 Binder
2 fili Serie 680
2 x Pt100 Binder
3 fili Serie 692
2 x Pt100 Amphenol
4 fili C16-3
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
5.3.2 Termocoppie
■ Con morsettiera
3166822.03
IT
La marcatura
colorata sul polo
positivo determina
la correlazione tra
polarità e terminale.
3374900.01a
3171966.01
3374896.01
Per la marcatura
delle parti finali del
cavo, vedi tabella
Termocoppia
singola
Termocoppia
doppia
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
3160670.07
200 °C 50 mm 50 mm
> 200 °C ≤ 0 °C 100 mm 100 mm
11355647.01
Filettatura Filettatura(NPT)
6. Malfunzionamenti e guasti
CAUTELA!
Lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e all'ambiente
Se il guasto non può essere eliminato mediante le misure elencate, lo
strumento deve essere messo fuori servizio immediatamente.
▶ Assicurarsi che non vi sia più alcun segnale e proteggerlo dalla
riattivazione accidentale.
▶ Contattare il costruttore.
▶ Se è necessario restituire lo strumento, seguire le istruzioni riportate nel
capitolo 8.2 “Resi”.
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
ATTENZIONE!
Lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e all'ambiente causati da fluidi
pericolosi
A contatto con fluidi pericolosi (ad esempio ossigeno, acetilene, sostanze
infiammabili o tossiche), con fluidi nocivi (ad esempio corrosivi, tossici,
cancerogeni, radioattivi), e anche con impianti di refrigerazione e
compressori, vi è il rischio di lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e dell'ambiente.
7. Manutenzione e pulizia
7.1 Manutenzione
Le sonde di temperatura qui descritte sono esenti da manutenzione.
7.2 Pulizia
CAUTELA!
Lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e all'ambiente
Una pulizia non corretta può provocare lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e
all'ambiente. I residui dei fluidi di processo negli strumenti smontati possono
causare rischi alle persone, all'ambiente ed alla strumentazione.
▶ Effettuare la pulizia come descritto di seguito.
cariche elettrostatiche.
Le connessioni elettriche non devono entrare in contatto con l'umidità!
CAUTELA!
Danni allo strumento
Una pulizia non corretta può causare danni allo strumento!
▶ Non usare detergenti aggressivi.
▶ Per la pulizia non utilizzare oggetti appuntiti o duri.
IT
▶ Lavare o pulire lo strumento smontato, allo scopo di proteggere le persone e l'ambiente
dall'esposizione con i fluidi residui.
ATTENZIONE!
Lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e all'ambiente a causa di fluidi residui
A contatto con fluidi pericolosi (ad esempio ossigeno, acetilene, sostanze
infiammabili o tossiche), con fluidi nocivi (ad esempio corrosivi, tossici,
cancerogeni, radioattivi), e anche con impianti di refrigerazione e
compressori, vi è il rischio di lesioni fisiche e danni alle cose e dell'ambiente.
▶ Prima dello stoccaggio, lavare o pulire lo strumento smontato (dopo l'uso),
allo scopo di proteggere le persone e l'ambiente dall'esposizione con i
fluidi residui.
▶ Usare l'equipaggiamento protettivo richiesto (a seconda dell'applicazione:
il termometro stesso è di base non pericoloso).
▶ Osservare le informazioni contenute nella scheda di sicurezza per il
corrispondente fluido.
ATTENZIONE!
Rischio di ustioni
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
8.2 Resi
8.3 Smaltimento
Lo smaltimento inappropriato può provocare rischi per l'ambiente.
Lo smaltimento dei componenti dello strumento e dei materiali di imballaggio deve essere
effettuato in modo compatibile ed in accordo alle normative nazionali.
03/2016 IT based on 12/2015 EN
9. Specifiche tecniche
10. Accessori
Legenda:
CuFA = Rame, max. 45HBa; riempito con materiale sigillante privo di amianto
Al = Alluminio Al99; F11, da 32 a45 HBb
StFA = Ferro dolce, da 80 a 95 HBa; riempito con materiale sigillante privo di amianto
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
• ! ! "
• # (LC)
• # $ (LCT)
• # % (LCTV)
• & ' ( $ (LCO)
• ) * "
• +
• , - . / 0 1# 2 3
• , 0
4 0
• 5 &+*
• 6
+, ! +, ! 7,
• 4 ) $,48 4 ! ) $,48 &
GALLEGGIANTI , -"
Materiale $ - ! $&6& . *
Peso specifico 1 1 1 1* 1*
Risoluzione di misura / mm ! !
Pressione max – Bar .
Temperatura max – Classe L ; 0
$ R ; 0
74
Sensore Continuo di Livello
ATTACCHI DI PROCESSO Tab.3
Tipo LC uscita P1–P2 = Montaggio dall’interno Tipo LC – LCT – LCTV – LCO = Montaggio dall’esterno
Tipo
10 15 25 32 40 50 FSHX DN65 DN125
Gallegg.
3/8” ½” 1” 1 1/4” 1 1/2” 2” Flangia Flangia Flangia
S29 G GCN GCN ●
S32 G GCN GCN ●
Tutti i tipi di galleggiante
S52S GCN ●
Tutti i tipi di filettatura
S52 GCN ●
S100 / ●
Filettature maschio Materiali disponibili DN = Materiali disponibili
G C N S S C
Gas cilindrico Gas conico conico AISI 316 AISI 316 Acciaio
UNI 228/1 UNI 7/1 NPT su richiesta
∅4,5 mm
CABLAGGIO ELETTRICO
USCITA INDICATORE
USCITA 4/20 mA USCITA 0/5 / 0/10 V
POTENZIOMETRICA USCITA 4/20 mA
Tubo di calma −S −V
▬
su richiesta AISI 316 PVC
NOMENCLATURA
LC S52 10 1300 / 1400 S −S 50 G S W1 L 1,5 M
● Tipo: LC – LCT – LCTV / LCO
● Tab.1 Galleggiante
● Tab.1 Risoluzione di misura in mm.
● Tab.4 Lunghezza di misura LM / Lunghezza totale L0 in mm.
● Tab.3 Materiale dell’asta di misura
● Tab.4 Presenza e materiale tubo di calma (opzione)
● Tab.3 Dimensione attacco di processo
● Tab.3 Filettatura attacco di processo
● Tab.3 Materiale attacco di processo
● Tab.2 Uscita elettrica
● Tab.1 Classe di temperatura
● Tab.2 Lunghezza cavo (P1 P2) 1,5m / 3m, oltre a richiesta
Ci riserviamo il diritto di apportare modifiche e/o aggiornamenti senza preavviso B#177/1 04/2014
75
9.9 MANUALE TAPPO DI CARICO
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
98 51
2
35
.... ...._,
o
"" o
........,
i..n
3!
:;·
'"
"'
,.-
"''"
ID
~
Il~ il'
~ -l !i
!!!l
- · :;·
- ):>~
f'D
-. ~-
l " -..]~
., ~
O"- z ,., ~ al "T1 3: -i
l o o ....,
o::~ o ID > l'TI
i OJ -1 3: :;c DI ID -1 n
""1
i• -.........,
m "'C ;:o;: ..... m
ro ....... .. > =r :;c :::r:
QJ o -1 :r 3: :z:
ID
VI
zc:;'l >
):> c 65 IC c. alc:;'lnaJ::I:r- n
;;;;r "D ;:::: -1 iii" ""'JDIODIOVI
"D m < IDIII::::IIIIC·· >
Iii' t'D ):> ::::j Dl:;r::::l::lr"!:!!. r-
;;-, 3: !!!..
-
"~):>
-n;·
c. -<
~
"'C
m
:;c
<
ID
-t-ID ID ID ::::l
2:
::l
~ ~
-·
-T u:::a o
/
/
- -i
)>
VI ""'
o' !;. VI IC O > z
w ..... ::::j > ID ::l -i ;;o;:
VI =r :I: -1 ..... < .....
ro c: ..... DI o >
o "T1 :;c :r 3:
3 c r- m IC
-< .....
..... .. .. ID =r o
C"' n c: ID
f
l c
=r o ..... 'S
- DI VI DI z
+""
:r ::l N -i
)> "'
~"-i ~ "'~ "' §!-
"' 1 ,. -
z
~!.1
L.J~
~o~
ffi ~;;;-
N
i 3:~
~ 9~
~
~ "T1
...., o
;...,
.....
o "'CZ>>>
t- Q
CD l ::l o iii"~VIVIVI I
l=l- ...... iS ~ i ID
...., 3 D" 3
o DI n
...., ~ .................. o
= = DI l ...., -·
n o o o
..,...,_..,_ r-
e
>
)>
·-
~
~ ~~
:ii'
o :i?
;;:-~;;t
-o ..,.
o
o
o
::l
\ " 3:
....,
rn
~ "' N
"'U o
-l
,., ~/ '
o o_, ..... z:
~
-"'oC
I.IJ ati VI o ...._,
'< .:c ..... :r
"'
= lfl"""c." C"O 111 "'Il
::l +
..... c o
~c=-
,..,. ,.,!SJ;;r!SJ z~~~
..... o
...., n>
~ ID C>!!:-+ -Ili N ID =r ID vo
r ~ ID o .....
~~~·! ~~ ~~ ..... ,., o =r
)> ;:;;~ iil !!l ~~:~:::!.
•'cz '11 ;:;· DI
..... ~ 'iiit ZID>C3 "--OIDDI
' = ~~ ~~: ~~-~ § ::l
< ' > ~ o
iQì -.J!!:!..cg Q)IDNiii" ID
~
" Cl\"' ..... ,.. 1 IDro"'
l 0!:12
~ ~
~
<
'
1ijJ
=
ilf~ ~~i!
iii
~:q;:g (J\<!!:!..-g
1 g..,-+ l ID~!:\.
-~S.. ii ..... ~111 ID
9.10 SCHEDA TECNICA LIVELLO VISIO
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
SCREW: INOX-A4-70
PIPE: Glass borosilicated
BLOCK AND PROTECTION: Stainless Steel AISI316
Seal material : MFQ
Dimension
25
370
500
550
500
50
40
25
M5
40
8
35
37
9.11 MANUALE POMPA
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Installation and
start-up information
PV series
Design series ≥ 44, PVplus
Variable displacement
axial piston pump
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
Contents Page
Note
This document and other information from Parker Hannifin GmbH & Co KG, its subsidiaries, sales offices
and authorized distributors provide product or system options for further investigation by users having
technical expertise. Before you select or use any product or system it is important that you analyse all
aspects of your application and review the information concerning the product or system in the current
product catalogue. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for these products or sys-
tems, the user, through his own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the final selection
of the products and systems and assuring that all performance and safety requirements of the application
are met. The products are subject to change by Parker Hannifin GmbH at any time without notice.
2 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
1. Installation and start-up The suction pipe must have access to clean, cooled
For a safe and disruption free operation of any and filtered fluid, free of air bubbles. No turbulences
machine or system a careful installation and start or high flow velocities should occur at the tube inlet.
up according to the manufacturers instructions is Therefore position inlet as far as possible away from
mandatory. return line and drain line. Make sure that the fluid
Hydraulic systems can be designed for many totally circulation in the reservoir does keep return flow from
different functions and they require consequently suction pipe inlet. In case of positive head use shut
different start up procedures. The hydraulic pump off valve in the inlet, monitored with proximity switch
is in this respect only one, but nevertheless a very or equivalent to avoid start up of motor when valve
important component of the whole system. is closed. When installed into the reservoir use short
A general start up instruction therefore can give many suction pipe with pipe end cut under 45°.
helpful hints but it needs to be completed by specific
additions depending of the individual nature of the Pressure port
system or power unit. Select correct pressure rating for pipe, hose and con-
During installation and start up the following steps nectors. Take pressure peaks into account. Dimension
need to be carried out carefully: the piping according to the port size. Prevent excitation
of the system by using flexible port connections.
Visual inspection
Make sure that all components of the shipment are Drain port
complete, free of any damage, free of outside con- Always use highest possible drain port of the pump.
tamination and properly protected against ingression Drain port must be higher than pump centerline or
of contamination. install additional air bleed line. Never combine pump
drain line with other return lines and/or drain lines.
Cleanliness Pump shall not be able to run empty. Max. allowable
case pressure ≤0.5 bar (2 bar peak), also during
Contamination of any kind is the enemy of any hy-
compensation.
draulic component. It is still the number one cause
for component failure. Therefore maximum care and Use low pressure pipe/hose, as short as possible and
cleanliness are required during all handling and man- full cross section according to port dimension. Do not
aging of parts that come in contact with the hydraulic use elbows or sharp corners. When drain port is on the
fluid. All ports of the pumps and other components side of the pump drain line should have bridge higher
must be covered until pipes or hoses are mounted to than pump top (also when installed in reservoir). Drain
them. Perform assembly preferrably in a dry and dust pipe must end at least 200 mm below fluid level even
free room. Use only suitable tools. at lowest filling level. Never let drain flow go direct into
suction area of reservoir (temperature, air bubbles).
Max. length 2 m, otherwise use larger pipe diameter
Installation than port size.
Installation horizontal or vertical, avoid rigid connec- Note: During operation of PV pumps of all sizes under
tion from pump to reservoir cover or frame and to inlet the following conditions:
and outlet piping to prevent excitation of the whole
system due to pump vibrations. Q ~ Qmax
pinlet < 2 bar absolute
Poutlet < 25 bar
Suction port
(e. g. low pressure circulation) the drain flow can
Position to the side or to the bottom, max. fluid velocity
change direction. Fluid is taken from the case into the
approx. v = 1.0 m/sec, cut suction pipe inlet under 45°.
piston mainly through the decompression orifice and
Minimum distance from bottom 2 - 3 times diameter
across the slippers. There is a danger that the pump
and, even at lowest fluid level, approx. 200 mm below
case runs dry, the pump overheats and the bearings
fluid level. Inlet pressure, even during compensation,
lack of lubrication when the fluid is removed from the
never should drop below 0.8 bar (absolute).
pump case.
Absolute gas tight connection (risk of cavitation,
Therefore the drain pipe must be able to take fluid from
noise). Air bubbles due to vacuum in the inlet can
the reservoir. That means: The drain line must end
destroy pumps within a short time due to cavitation
below fluid level, and a check valve in the drain line
erosion. Suction pipe should be as short as possible.
is not permissible. If it has to be installed for whatever
Use only clean, low pressure pipe, avoid sharp elbows
reason the case needs to be flushed with a flow of
and any restriction of cross section.
10 - 15% of the nominal pump flow.
3 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
Port positions for PV (shown for clockwise rotation, for ccw rotation ports are mirrored)
L1 drain port interface for
compensator suction port (inlet)
adjustment screw
lock nut
alternative drain
port L3
4 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
Flushing should be taken from the filter/cooling circuit Filling of the system
(e. g. pre-loaded return line). Recommended flushing Use only high quality mineral oil based fluids, like
flows see following table. HLP oils according to DIN 51524 part 2. For other
PV016 - PV028 4 - 6 l/min fluids (HFC, HFD, bio degradable or synthetic fluids)
PV032 - PV046, PV076 5 - 8 l/min please contact Parker and review the Hydraulic Fluids
PV063 - PV092 7 - 10 l/min Information in Catalogue 2500/UK.
PV140 - PV180 9 - 12 l/min Operation viscosity should be 16 to 100 mm²/s, op-
PV270 - PV360 13 - 17 l/min timum viscosity range is in the 20 to 40 mm²/s, max.
viscosity for short time up to 320 mm²/s.
(flushing flow for front bearing: 10 - 15% of the total
Because of the possibly uncompatible ingredients
flushing flow)
fluids should not be mixed (separation of fluid, reduc-
tion or loss of fluid properties).
Drive input
For direct drive use elastic coupling free of axial Pay highest attention on cleanliness!
and radial reaction forces. Please follow strictly the
Fill system only via a filtration device. Use filtration
instructions of the coupling supplier regarding axial
unit, when basic contamination of the refill fluid ex-
clearance, axial displacement and angular tolerances.
ceeds class 10 according NAS 1638 (contamination
Couplings never shall be mounted using a hammer.
level 21/19/16 according to ISO 4406). Hydraulic
Threads in the shaft end allow smooth mounting of
fluid supplied in barrels typically exceeds these con-
the coupling.
tamination levels.
The drive shaft should only carry true torque. Contact
Parker for allowable side loads or axial forces.
Filtration
PV pumps are normally for one direction of rotation Filtration is the most important factor to the opera-
only. Therefore check rotation of drive motor prior to tional life of the hydraulic system. Statistical analy-ses
installation. indicate, that contamination is by far the most impor-
tant reason for system or component failure.
Electrical interface Use return line, pressure and/or bypass filtration.
Check voltage, current, phase and connection proper- Bypass filtration usually is most efficient. For general
ties. Verify direction of motor rotation. purpose hydraulic systems with limited requirements
for operational life contamination level 19/15 accord-
Fluid reservoir ing to ISO 4406 should be desired; corresponding filter
The reservoir needs to meet all system requirements rating: x = 25 µm ( b25≥75 ) according to ISO 4572.
concerning design, size, location and porting. Beside Cleanliness level for systems with higher re-quire-
beeing reservoir for the hydraulic fluid, the tank also ments for operational life and functional safety should
supports heat dissipation, air removal, water removal be 18/16/13 according to ISO 4406; corresponding
and contamination sedimentation. Often the reservoir filter rating x = 10 µm ( b10≥75 ) according to ISO
also is the fundament for the motor pump unit. In this 4572.
case the separation of pump and remaining struc- Use filter with indicator or electrical signal when ca-
ture by elastic means is mandatory to avoid noise pacity limit is approached.
and vibration being induced into the frame work. The Suction filter should be avoided. Suction conditions
reservoir needs to be carefully sealed against ingres- will be affected. Filter can be blocked and cause
sion of contamination and water. A level indicator and cavitation and severe pump damage. When used, a
thermometer should be placed in an easily accessible vacuum sensor with shut off function is mandatory.
location.
Properly dimensioned breather rating ≤10 µm should
Fluid content (general rule): stationary systems 3 to be used. Observe min. and max. fluid level; consider
4 times pump nominal flow, 1 times or even smaller exchange volume with cylinders in the system.
in mobile systems.
Filling of pump case
Pump case must be filled via the drain port, to ensure
lubrication, sealing and smooth start up.
5 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
Start up
Minimum adjustable
Check if all ports are properly connected according
to the specification, all connectors are tightened and
(approx. cm³/U)
(approx. cm³/U)
all adjustments are made.
Displacement
Displacement
displacement
Open suction valve (if installed)!
Switch system to free circulation or to lowest pressure.
Allow air bleeding for quick priming. Start pump in tip
mode operation until pump and all pipes are filled
and free from air bubbles. If pump does not build up Size
pressure, double check the installation.
PV016 1.5 1.5 9
Raise pressure setting only when all air is re-
moved. Let the pump work at reduced pressure for PV020 1.5 1.5 13
5 - 10 min, check if all pipes and connections are leak PV023 1.5 1.5 16
free and tight. PV028 1.5 1.5 20
Observe reservoir: fluid level, built up of foam, fluid PV032 2.2 2.2 17
temperature. When system is warmed up first func- PV040 2.2 2.2 25
tional tests can be performed. PV046 2.2 2.2 30
PV063 3.4 5.1 35
2. Displacement adjustment
PV076 2.2 2.2 40
All axial piston pumps of the PV series are equipped
with an adjustable displacement limiter. PV080 3.4 5.1 50
The servo piston stroke is limited at full displacement PV092 3.4 5.1 65
by a screw, guided in the end cover plug of the servo PV140 5.6 8.4 20
piston bore. The screw is protected against uninten- PV180 5.6 8.4 60
tional adjustment by a self-sealing lock nut (see figure PV270 6.8 10.2 120
on page 4). PV360 8.6 12.9 180
The factory setting of the displacement is according to
the nominal displacement of the pump. An adjustment
may only be made to a lower displacement (turning 3. Standard pressure compensator, code ...MMC
screw in). An adjustment to a higher than the nominal The adjustment of the compensating pressure is
displacement can destroy the pump. performed for the standard pressure compensator
Adjustment should only be made with the pump work- directly at the compensator.
ing at full displacement (not compensated) and at a To adjust the pressure, the lock nut (SW 13) is to be
low output. At full displacement the piston area of the loosened and the adjustment spindle is to be turned
servo piston is under case pressure. Opening the (screw driver).
self-sealing nut will only cause a negligible leakage
Turning clockwise will increase the compensating
under these conditions.
pressure, turning counter-clockwise will decrease the
Turning the adjustment screw clockwise will reduce compensating pressure.
the pumps displacement. For the sizes PV016 –
The compensating pressure can be adjusted in a
PV092 the thread pitch is 1mm, for sizes PV140 –
range from 15 to 350 bar (approx. 100 bar/turn).
PV360 the thread pitch is 1.5 mm. The table shows
the displacement change per mm resp. per turn and By turning the pressure pilot cartridge housing the
the minimum adjustable displacement. compensator differential can be adjusted. It is factory
set to 15±1 bar and should not be changed (approx.
Note: All pumps are adjusted and tested after as-
20 bar/turn).
sembly in our factory. Only the compensator pressure
needs to be adjusted. That is done on the pilot valve Different compensator differential settings can cause
spindle. No other adjustments on the compensator instability or excessive power losses.
or the pump is required. Only after service or repair By using adapter kit PVCMCK** the standard pres-
a basic adjustment needs to be performed. sure compensator can be made remote controllable.
This adapter replaces one of the side plugs. Adapt-
ers are available for G1/4, M12x1.5 ISO 6149 and
7/16-20 UNF.
See also the remarlks in chapter 6.
6 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
lock nut
lock nut
pressure
adjustment
7 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
6. Remote pressure compensator, codes ...MRC, 7. Load sensing compensator, codes ...MFC,
...MR1 and ...MRZ ...MF1 and ...MFZ
compensator differential The load sensing or flow compensator primarily
adjustment controls the pump output flow. To achieve this the
load pressure after a main stream throttle valve (load
lock nut sensing valve, not included in the shipment of the
pump) is connected to the load sensing port of the
compensator. The compensator control strategy is,
to keep the pressure drop constant across this main
stream throttle valve.
The integrated pilot valve maintains a pressure
compensation when the adjusted max. pressure is
reached. The pilot orifice Ø 0,8 mm is located in the
load sensing port adapter. This orifice replaces the
remote control port orifice in the control spool of the ...MM* and ...MR*
lock nut compensators, because pilot pressure is in the load
compensator pressure sensing compensator provided through the load
adjustment sensing line.
8 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
The length of the load sensing line can be up to 15 m. 8. Two spool load sensing compensator, codes
If the line is longer than 5 m it has to be considered, ...MTP and ...MTK
that low environmental temperatures and high fluid
viscosity can have a negative influence to the com- interface NG6, DIN24 340 load sensing
pensator performance. for pilot valve port
The line should be designed to avoid any significant
pressure drop. pressure control
Factory setting for the load sensing pressure differ- stage
ential is 10 bar ± 1 bar. This adjustment should only
be changed in exceptional cases.
The adjustment is possible by turning the pilot valve
housing after loosening the lock nut.
Please refer to the setting instructions on page 7.
All compensators described in chapters 3 - 6 can be
shipped with a directional control valve for stand-by flow control stage
operation (compensator codes ends with..W) or with
a proportional pilot valve for electrical pressure adjust-
ment (compensator code ends with ..K) The two spool compensator, code ...MT* has two
separate compensator valves for flow (load sensing)
and pressure compensation.
That results in a steeper pressure compensation
curve, which can be beneficial in certain applica-
tions.
The flow control stage has no integrated pilot valve,
because this would eliminate the effect of the two
spool control. The pressure stage has no integrated
pilot valve, because during flow control the T port of
the pressure compensator is under control pressure.
This would prevent the pilot valve from opening.
With the adapter kit PVCMCK.. the pressure compen-
sator can be made remote controlled.
On the topside interface any pressure pilot valve can
Compensator code ...MMW with directional control be mounted. See chapter 3 for requirements.
valve code D1VW2K*JW for stand-by operation The factory setting of the flow compensator is
(24 VDC, normally open) 10 ± 1 bar, the adjustment for the pressure compen-
sator is 15 ± 1 bar. These adjustments should not be
modified.
If different adjustments are required by the system or
by the load sensing valves used in the system, see
page 7 for setting instructions.
With ordering code ...MTP a manual adjustable pres-
sure pilot valve code PVAC1PM*S35 is mounted on
the elbow manifold.
With ordering code ...MTK a proportional pilot valve
code PVACRES-*35 is mounted on top. For electronic
pressure control a suitable power amplifier is required.
We recommend the digital modules PCD00... supplied
by Parker HCD.
Because the two spool compensator has no integrated
Compensator code ...MMK with proportional pressure pilot valves, for a stand-by function the compensator
pilto valve code PVACRES-*35 accessory PVAC1EM*C**35, including a directional
control valve and a pilot section, is required.
9 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
10 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
10. Compensator accessories nected to the compensator valve. The lower pressure
10.1 Pressure relief pilot valve, code PVAC1P... defines the compensating pressure of the pump.
When the A solenoid (B-side) of the DCV is energized
The pressure relief pilot valve code PVAC1P... is opti- only the A-side cartridge is connected; the (higher)
mally tuned for the requirements of the compensator pressure adjusted there defines the compensating
valves of the series PV. It has a mounting interface pressure.
NG6 according to DIN 24340 and can be mounted
directly on top of all compensator valves with the When solenoid B is energized the valve spool con-
topside mounting interface. nects all four ports. Then the spring chamber of the
compensator valve is directly relieved to the case drain
Such a valve is only necessary for the compensators of the pump, the pump compensates at minimum
with elbow manifold (...MT1 and ...UPR) and for the compensating pressure (stand-by).
versions without integrated pressure pilot cartridge
(compensator code ends with..Z). Al other versions The directional control valve series D1VW has spool
include an integrated pilot valve. code 55. This spool code is used to avoid a blocked
spool position during transient.
lock nut This version is recommended, when during a ma-
chine cycle the pressure is to be switched between
set screw high and low.
For code PVAC2M... also a dual solenoid valve is
used. In neutral position all four ports are connected.
The compensator spring chamber is releived to case
drain, the pump is compensating at min. compensat-
ing pressure (stand-by).
After loosening the lock nut SW13 an adjustment of When energizing solenoid A (B-side) the spring
the compensating pressure for the pump is possible chamber is connected to the A-side pilot cartridge;
in a range of approx. 20 bar up to 350 bar. the pressure adjusted here controls the pump.
The pressure pilot valve is also available with a DIN When solenoid B is energized the spring chamber
lock. of the compensator is connected to pilot cartridge B;
then the pressure adjusted on this cartridge defines
10.2 Multiple pressure pilots PVAC1E..., the pump compensating pressure. The DCV of series
PVAC2P..., PVAC2E... und PVAC2M... D1VW has spool code 2.
For multiple pressure pilots, codes PVAC2P..., This version should be used, when stand-by operation
PVAC2E... and PVAC2M... a sandwich valve with should be the default situation.
two direct-action pressure cartridge valves is used Code PVAC1E... is similar to code PVAC2P..., with the
to pilot the pump. exception, that only one pilot cartridge is installed. In
neutral position of the D1VW the stand-by pressure
is selected.
Additional information can be found in:
compensator spare parts manual PVI-PVC-UK-
45 compensator accessories spare parts manual
PVI-PVAC-UK
pumps spare parts manuals PVI-***-UK-45 with *** =
For code PVAC2P... a single solenoid directional BG1 to BG5 according to pump frame size.
control valve is included for pressure selection. The p1 (>p2)
valve switches between low pressure setting and p1 p1
high pressure setting. During low pressure both pilot
cartridges are connected to the compensator, in the
high pressure setting (solenoid energized) only the p2 p2
A-side cartridge is connected. Therefore the B-side
pilot needs to be set for lower pressure. The directional
control valve series D1VW has spool code 6. A B A B A B
11 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
12 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Bulletin HY30-3245-INST/UK Axial Piston Pump
Installation Manual Series PV, series 44 and higher
13 Parker Hannifin
Pump and Motor Division
Chemnitz, Germany
Position notification regarding Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG:
Products made by the Pump and Motor Division (PMD) of Parker Hannifin are excluded
from the scope of the machinery directive following the “Cetop” Position Paper on the
implementation of the Machinery Directive 2006/ 42/ EC in the Fluid Power Industry.
All PMD products are designed and manufactured considering the basic as well as the
proven safety principles according to:
• SSENISO13849-2:2008-09,C.2andC.3and,
• SSEN982+A1:2008,
so that the machines in which the products are incorporated meet the essential health and
safety requirements.
Offer of Sale
Please contact your Parker representation for a detailed ”Offer of Sale”.
Copyright 2010
by Parker Hannifin GmbH & Co KG
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 1
CUSTOMER SERVICE............................................................ 3
OTHER CONFIGURATIONS.................................................. 3
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .................................................. 4
MOUNTING ............................................................................. 4
PROCESS CONNECTIONS .................................................... 5
PROCESS MEDIA ................................................................... 6
POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
(HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS) ................................................ 6
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ............................................. 7
CHAPTER 3 ADJUSTMENTS AFTER INSTALLATION ....... 8
SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... 8
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................ 9
CHAPTER 5 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 11
STANDARD ........................................................................... 11
OPTIONS ................................................................................ 14
WARRANTY INFORMATION ................................................. 15
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
MODEL 162P
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES;
I N ST ALLAT I ON AN D
OPERAT I ON M AN U AL
PN 610-0016 Rev D
Manual No. 610-0016 Rev D
Neo-Dyn
28150 Industry Drive
Valencia, CA 91355
Tel: (661) 295-4000
Fax: (661) 294-1750
World Wide Web: www.neodyn.com
Copyright 2002
ITT Industries
1
INTRO DUC TIO N
OTHER CONFIGURATIONS
WARNING The models described in this manual are also available in special
and factory-set configurations. For these units, follow the
installation and operating instructions herein, except adhere to
the pressure and electrical limits marked on the units.
2
INSTA LLA TIO N
MOUNTING
The Pressure Switch can be mounted directly to the process
connections if there is no significant vibration and the fluid lines
are capable of supporting the weight. It can also be attached to a
flat surface, such as a wall or panel, using ¼-20 UNC screws into
the mounting holes shown in Figure 1. The holes are .25 inches
deep. Do not over tighten the screws.
18 AWG free leads 18 in (46 cm) long are standard, with a green
wire grounded to the case. 72 inch (183 cm) leads are available as
R Option, and other lead lengths may be ordered as special
configurations. The leads are intended for installation in conduit
capable of withstanding possible explosion pressures, and the
leads are factory sealed.
WARNING All field wiring must comply with requirements of the NEC or
applicable local or national electrical codes, including wire
gauges and insulation temperature ratings. Conduit seals may
be required.
3
A DJUSTM ENTS A FTER
SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT
Disconnect the electrical power. Check for multiple circuits.
1. Check the setpoints per paragraphs 3 and 4 below for precise
adjustments.
2. The adjustment nut (See Figure 1)can be rotated with an
open-end wrench or similar tool.
3. To check the increasing setpoint of these switches, connect a
pressure source and a calibrated differential pressure gauge or
transducer to the pressure ports and apply the system pressure
to both sides. Slowly apply increasing pressure to the “high
side” port until the switch actuates. Actuation can be noted by
listening to the audible snap of the Belleville spring, or with
an ohmmeter across the appropriate free leads.
4. To check the decreasing setpoint, follow step 3 above, then
slowly lower the pressure on the high side and note the value
at which the audible snap or an ohmmeter indicates
deactuation. Deadband may be calculated if desired by
subtracting the decreasing setpoint reading from the
increasing setpoint reading.
4
TRO UBLESHO O TING
5
SPEC IFIC A TIO NS
162P 1 2 CC 6 BN
Model Series Options
Wetted Material Explosion-Proof Elec.
Range Number Elec. Form (C or CC)
Figure 3. Part Number Breakdown
NOTE Part number format varies for specials.
Wetted Materials
Table 1
No Description
1 Aluminum alloy port, teflon-coated polyimide (Kapton)
diaphragm and nitrile O-ring, CRES and zinc plated steel
music wire springs
4 UNS S31600 CRES port, teflon coated polyimide diaphragm and
nitrile O-ring and CRES springs
Pressure Ratings
Table 2
Option Description
A Epoxy-painted exterior
B Viton O-Ring - Refer to Wetted Materials
C EPR O-Ring - Refer to Wetted Materials
H Stainless Steel housing (standard with
Wetted material 4)
M Gold Electrical Contacts For Extremely Low
Current Applications
N CE mark
R 72 inch (183 cm) leads
®
Neo-Dyn Series 162P Differential Pressure Switch
Adjustable high pressure differential switch. Rugged construction with efficient Nega-Rate® Belleville disc spring sensing
mechanism. Maintains set point at high system pressure. Available in all stainless steel construction with hermetically
sealed electrical assembly for corrosive atmospheres.
Standard Specifications Ordering Sequence — Select desired option for each category
Electrical OPTIONS
Snap action electrical switch assembly
listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., Wetted Material
Factory Mutual and CSA International 1 Aluminum port, Teflon coated polyimide diaphragm, steel, and Buna-N O-Ring
Electrical Connection 4 Stainless steel ports, Teflon coated polyimide diaphragm and Buna-N O-Ring
1/2 NPT male conduit connection with Adjustable Range
PVC insulated 18 AWG, 2 1 psid dec. to 50 psid inc. (0.1 bar dec. to 3.4 bar inc.)
18" long leads 4 10 psid dec. to 90 psid inc. (0.7 bar dec. to 6.2 bar inc.)
Pressure Connections 6 10 psid dec. to 200 psid inc. (0.7 bar dec. to 13.8 bar inc.)
1/4 NPT Female 8 150 psid dec. to 350 psid inc. (10.3 bar dec. to 24.1 bar inc.)
Temperature Range* 9 225 psid dec. to 1000 psid inc. (15.5 bar dec. to 69.0 bar inc.)
Ambient: - 40°F to + 180°F Electrical Form
(- 40°C to + 82°C) C 11 amp, 1/4 hp at 125 or 250 VAC; 5 amp resistive, 3 amp inductive at 28 VDC;
Media: - 40°F to + 300°F .5 amp resistive at 125 VDC
(- 40°C to + 149°C) CC 11 amp, 1/4 hp at 125 or 250 VAC; 5 amp resistive, 3 amp inductive at 28 VDC;
.5 amp resistive at 125 VDC
*Temperature limits change with
O-Ring selection. See Electrical Enclosure
Assembly specification sheet for 6 Explosion proof, hermetically-sealed electrical assembly, EX d IIC.
Temperature Class Ratings. Part Numbers 057-0770 & 057-0772 (Form C) and 057-0771 & 057-0773 (Form CC).
Agency listings include Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., CSA International, Factory Mutual,
Adjustment and Inmetro. Division 1 and 2, Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G.
External 1/2" hex head NEMA 4X, 7, and 9; IP66. Leads are factory sealed and Pressure Switches are Dual Seal Certified.
Note: Turn clockwise to increase
set point; approximately Miscellaneous
24 turns through range A Epoxy paint exterior — extra protection for severe environments
Shipping Weight B Viton O-Ring
Aluminum: Approximately 3 lbs C EPR O-Ring
Stainless Steel: Approximately 7 lbs D SIL approval and marking, per IEC61508 (includes FMEA report)
I 3/4 NPT conduit box with terminal strip (Groups C & D only, not available with N option)
M Gold electrical contacts for extremely low current applications
Order Miscellaneous N ATEX and IECEx with CE Mark
Option “D” R 72" Electrical free leads
Special (Consult representative or factory)
• Non-catalog adjustable range and/or set point, deadband a nd proof pressure
• Chemical seals installed
3.25
Conduit
4.25 Connection 2.25
¹⁄₂ NPT
1.12
2.13
External Adjustment 1.12
¹⁄₂" Hex
2.25
Low Pressure Port
¹⁄₄ NPT High Pressure Port
¹⁄₄ NPT
1.75
.87
2.25
Electrical Form
Neo-Dyn®
28150 Industry Drive
Valencia, CA 91355
tel: 661 295-4000
fax: 661 294-1750 AER0935_37 7/13
www.neodyn.com Specifications and dimensions subject to change.
9.13 SCHEDA TECNICA PK3
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Valves that are destined for use within the European Economic Area are 3. Installation notes
CLASSIÚEDINCATEGORIES)TO)))INACCORDANCEWITHINCREASINGPOTENTIAL
HAZARD Prior to installation checks must be carried out to test whether the ball
4HENOMINALDIAMETERPRESSUREANDÛUIDGROUPHAZARDOUSORNON
valve design corresponds to the required design and is suitable for the
HAZARDOUSÛUIDS ARETAKENINTOACCOUNTFORTHECLASSIÚCATION intended use. The installation of ball valves may only be carried out by
QUALIÚEDPERSONNELANDWHILETHEBALLVALVEANDPIPESYSTEMAREUNPRES
&LUIDGROUPINCLUDESHAZARDOUSÛUIDSINACCORDANCEWITH!RTICLEOF SURIZED4HEPIPELINESMUSTBEINTRODUCEDTOTHEÚTTINGSWITHOUTTENSION
Directive 97/23/EG. The valve valves must be inspected for damage and contamination before
installation. Damaged ball valves must not be installed.
p0OTENTIALLYEXPLOSIVE All the pipelines must be rinsed before the ball valves are installed.
p%XTREMELYÛAMMABLE Residue in the pipelines can damage internal parts and this can result in
p(IGHLYÛAMMABLE malfunction or complete failure of the ball valve.
p&LAMMABLEIFTHEMAXPERMITTEDTEMPERATUREISABOVETHEÛASHPOINT
p 4OXIC Please ensure during installation of the ball valves that no external tensi-
p/XIDIZING ons or vibrations are transferred to the ball valve.
When the piping is screwed in the screw on the ball valve must be held
&LUIDGROUPINCLUDESALLÛUIDSTHATDONOTHAVEANYOFTHECHARACTERISTICS with a suitable tool. The ball valve connections must not be subjected
INÛUIDGROUP to any additional torsional moment that would change their installation
position and thus prevent provision of function.
"ALLVALVESWITHANOMINALDIAMETEROFMORETHAN$.FORÛUIDGROUP Overheating of the seals must be prevented on ball valves with welded
MUSTBELABELEDAS#%"ALLVALVESFORÛUIDSINÛUIDGROUPARENOT ends by using suitable measures. When welding is carried out it must also
labeled with a CE mark. The buyer is obliged to inform the manufacturer/ be ensured that no welding particles enter the internal space. Welding
SUPPLIERIFBALLVALVESAREDESTINEDFORAPPLICATIONINÛUIDGROUP)FNO residue must be removed.
INFORMATIONISPROVIDEDONTHEMEDIUMFORUSEITISASSUMEDTHATÛUIDS "ALLVALVESWITHÛANGECONNECTIONSMUSTBECENTEREDBYSCREWINGTHE
FROMÛUIDGROUPWILLBEUSED COUNTERÛANGEBEFOREALLTHESCREWSONTHEÛANGECONNECTIONARETIGHTENED
CROSSWISE!NUNDAMAGEDSEALMUSTBEUSEDBETWEENTHEÛANGESAS
The ball valve and seal materials are selected by the manufacturer in prescribed in the norm. The spacer bolts or connecting screws must be
accordance with customer information such as medium, pressure, tempe- SELECTEDINACCORDANCEWITHTHEÛANGETYPES7ITHTHREADHOLESITMUSTBE
RATUREANDOTHERUSE
SPECIÚCREQUIREMENTS)FTHECONDITIONSOFUSEVARY ensured that the maximum screwing depth is not exceeded.
from the information provided then the lifespan of the ball valve may be
reduced or the ball valve may malfunction. The material combinations and Switching must be carried out as a function test after the ball valve has
CONDITIONSFORUSETHATARESPECIÚEDBASEDONTHEDESIGNCANBEFOUNDIN been installed. No parts of the ball valve (e.g. cover, connecting piece)
the following labeling on the ball valve. MAYBERELEASEDORSCREWEDDOWN)NTHECASEOFMEDIATHATAREHAZAR
DOUSTOHEALTHÛAMMABLEOREXPLOSIVEITMUSTBEENSUREDTHATTHEPIPE
1st Line: Germany x-y country of manufacture, x = calendar system and ball valve are completely emptied.
week, y = year
7ATCHOUTFORANYRESIDUEÛOWINGTHROUGH!PPROPRIATEPROTECTIVE
2nd Line: MHA manufacturer CLOTHINGMUSTBEWORN4HEÚTTINGMAYNEEDTOBEPLACEDINTHEPIPING
using lifting gear.
3rd Line: BKH-DN13-G1/2 valve type, nominal diameter, connection
TYPESIZE Please observe the switch position of the ball valve according to the
4th Line: PN500 - 1123 nominal pressure, MHA material combi- piping plan. Pressure stage, connection and construction length of the
nation piping system must correspond to the ball valve. The operating instruc-
tions of the relevant manufacturer must be taken into account with regard
to system parts.
(For more information on MHA material combinations, please see p. 242.)
4. Initial operation
2. General
All operating instructions must be read and observed prior to initial
"ALLVALVESAREPRESSURIZEDFORTHETRANSPORTATIONSHUTTINGOFFORREDIREC
operation and assembly work must be inspected. Initial operation of a
TIONOFMEDIAÛOW(AZARDSAREPRESENTEDBYÚTTINGSINTHEHIGH
PRESSURE SYSTEMMAYONLYBECARRIEDOUTBYQUALIÚEDPERSONNEL4HEPIPINGSYSTEM
area if there is a case of improper or incorrect use or if the safety notes in must be bled prior to initial operation. Air bubbles in the piping system
these operating instructions are not observed. can cause explosions in the event of a sudden increase of pressure. This is
why the operating pressure should be increased in stages.
The customer must take the operating pressures (pressure surges/impulse If the ball valve is stored for a long period, or if it is at a standstill for a
pressures) into account during the planning and design of ball valves. longer period in one switch position, then the torsional moment for the
Pressure information in the catalog refers to static loads. The correspon- ÚRSTSWITCHINGPROCESSISSUBSTANTIALLYABOVETHEACTUALTORSIONALMOMENT
ding pressure reductions must be taken into account for pulsating or (pull-off moment).
changing loads.
)FBALLVALVESAREINSTALLEDINTHEPIPINGSYSTEMASENDÚTTINGSTHEREIS
Ball valves are only suitable for installation in piping systems with con- particular risk of death from parts sheering off. Professional execution is
nections at the same pressure load and corresponding connections or bet- absolutely essential in this case.
WEENÛANGESOFTHESAMEPRESSURELOADANDTHESAMEÛANGECONNECTION
Two-way ball valves open and close by turning the selector shaft by 90°.
!ÛOWDISPLAYSHOWSTHEPOSITIONTHEBALLVALVEISSWITCHEDTO4HEBALL
270 10.04.2015
Operating manual for ball valves
In accordance with Directive 97/23/EC
5. Maintenance / Inspection #AUTION$ANGERTOHUMANLIFEØ
3PECIÚCWARNINGNOTESEGREGARDINGTHEWEARINGOFGLOVESFORSWITCHING
When the piping system is drained the ball valves must be drained via a must be heeded (the ball valves take on the temperature of the medium).
switch position of 45°. Ball valves may only be dismantled and maintained !NYSTRUCTURALMODIÚCATIONTOTHEBALLVALVEPARTICULARLYTHEADDITIONOF
by trained, specialist personnel. No makeshift seals of any kind are permit- drill holes and the welding on of objects (plates, mounts etc.) is strictly
ted. Ball valves must be inspected at regular intervals for leaks, malfunc- prohibited.
tion and damage. The maintenance intervals depend on the conditions of )NTHEEVENTOFMALFUNCTIONSTHEBALLVALVEMUSTBEEXCHANGEDBYQUALIÚED
USEOFTHEÚTTING PERSONNELWITHTHEPIPESYSTEMINANUNPRESSURIZEDANDDRAINEDCONDI
tion. Systems must be switched off before the ball valve is dismantled.
In order to retain functionality the ball valve must be switched at least eve-
ry six months in the event of longer standstill periods. If discrepancies to Only the manufacturer is permitted to carry out repairs. If the ball valve
the desired status are discovered during this maintenance work, measures ISDISMANTLEDWITHOUTPERMISSIONANDBYUNQUALIÚEDPERSONNELTHISWILL
must be undertaken immediately to ensure safe operating conditions render any warranty or damage claim made against the manufacturer null
(exchange or repair). and void. National regulations on accident prevention and the local safety
regulations of the operator are not replaced by these operating instruc-
tions and must always be regarded as overriding.
7. Warning notes
Please take note of these operating instructions. The manufacturer of the
ball valves does not accept any liability if these operating instructions are
not heeded.
Ball valves must only be used for the purpose stated by the manufacturer.
The manufacturer will also not accept liability in the event of damage
caused by the incorrect installation and use of ball valves or by incorrect
USEBYUNQUALIÚEDPERSONNEL Lock valve adapter during No welding, boring or other
Ball valves must always be switched fully in principle. They may only be pipe installation! MODIÚCATIONATTHEVALVEØ
used in the switch positions fully closed or fully open.
"ALLVALVESARENOTSUITABLEFORTHERESTRICTIONORREGULATIONOFÛOWQUANTI
ties and are not approved for this use. Indifferent switching positions lead
to damage to the seals in the ball area, which result in leaks or altered
torsional moments that can be accompanied by temperature rises at the
surface.
Tools (e.g. pliers, hammers, open-end wrenches, extensions etc.) may not
bar
be used to switch the ball valves. The use of such tools can lead to damage
to switching elements and casings. Ball valves may not be switched by
force.
Ball valves must be stored in a dry and clean condition as delivered. Pro-
tective caps must only be removed just before actual installation.
18.12.2015 271
Selector ball valve for manifold mounting PK3
Stainless Steel
K
SW1
H2
H1
H
LW
h
m
l
SW2
B
AVAILABLE SIZES
Manifold
L l7
DN6 - DN50 (1/4“ to 2“)
! Pressure inlet only from center port (port 2)!
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
PK3-DN32 75 165 11 100 121 100 54,5 16,5 17 70 320 30 130 - Al 11,00
PK3-DN40 84,5 200 17 130 131 110 57 16,5 17 80 320 38 140 - Al 18,70
PK3-DN50 106 240 15 150 150 129 71 16,5 17 90 320 48 159 - Al 28,80
130 10.04.2015
Selector ball valve for manifold mounting PK3
Stainless Steel
CONNECTION
d4/xt
d3
d5 (DN40)
3 2 1
b
d1
h1
l4 l6
d2
o-rings belong
O-rings
to delivery l5
included l1 l3 l3
l2
Manifold
ORDER CODE PER MA-
CONNECTION DIMENSIONS TERIAL COMBINATION
PK3-DN6 8,5 35 - 8,5 35 17,5 27 6 11,8 1,9 6,5 10,5 6,8 - 4 x M6x40 - 12.9 14 7x2,5 500 31909 38376
PK3-DN10 7,5 55 - 10 44 19 40 9,5 14,9 1,9 8,4 13,5 8,5 - 4 x M8x50 - 12.9 35 10x2,5 500 31914 38377
PK3-DN13 7,5 83 41,5 16 58 26,5 45 13 24,9 1,9 8,4 13,5 7 - 6 x M8x60 - 12.9 35 20x2,5 420 38370 38378
PK3-DN20 10 97 48,5 20 69 31 51 20 29 2 10,5 16,5 10,5 - 6 x M10x80 - 12.9 70 23,47x2,62 420 38371 38379
PK3-DN25 10 115 57,5 24 81 38 60 25 34,9 2,3 10,5 16,5 10,5 - 6 x M10x90 - 12.9 70 29x3 420 38372 38380
PK3-DN32 12 136 68 29 96 46 78 32 40 2 13 19 12 - 6 x M12x110 - 12.9 110 34,59x2,62 420 59605 59606
PK3-DN40 28,5 112 56 28,5 112 56 95 38 47,7 2,3 16,5 25 19 36 6 x M16x120 - 12.9 300 42x3 420 38374 38382
PK3-DN50 38 136 68 38 136 68 112 48 59,8 2,3 21 31 21,5 - 6 x M20x140 - 12.9 600 54x3 420 38375 38383
(1)
Fixing screws not included.
We recommend screws as per ISO4762 (DIN 912). FLOW CHARACTERISTICS PK3
The indicated property classes and torques represent our ∆p‐Q characteris5cs
recommended guidelines at a friction coeficient of 14%. PK3
DN50
1000
DN40
DN32
DN25
DN20
DN16/12
100
PORTING PATTERNS
DN10
Q(l/min)
Q [l/min]
DN6
LLu SB58
10
10.04.2015 131
9.14 MANUALE RELIEF VALVE HAWE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
pressione di esercizio pmax = 450 bar Per la valvola di sicurezza certificata tipo CMVX 2.. vedere D 7710 TÜV
portata Qmax = 100 l/min
Come valvole di sicurezza per recipienti a pressione in impianti oleodinamici tenendo conto dei seguenti regolamenti:
o direttiva 97/23 CE sui dispositivi in pressione
o regolamento sulla sicurezza del funzionamento del 27.09.2002 / Direttiva sull’uso delle attrezzature di lavoro 2009/104/CE
o regole tecniche „A/D Regelwerk“ 2000, foglio di istruzioni A2, ultima edizione
1. Generalità
Sono disponibili tre grandezze costruttive in tre
diverse varianti di esecuzione che si distinguono per
la forma del corpo. La scelta conformemente alle
tabelle nei paragrafi 2.1, 2.2 e 2.3 avviene entro i
campi di volta in volta ammissibili pmin ... pmax
secondo il valore della pressione p (bar), al quale la
valvola deve reagire e a seconda della portata della
pompa Qpompa (l/min) che alimenta il circuito
idraulico (Qpompa $ Qammiss ).
La pressione impostata desiderata (inizio della
manovra) va indicata insieme alla sigla di ordina-
zione. La valvola viene impostata su questo valore Valvola ad Valvola di Valvola per Valvola da
e piombata, la pressione è indicata per ultima nella angolo per mon- passaggio per montaggio a avvitare
sigla stampigliata sull‘elemento. taggio su tubi montaggio su piastra (pagina 2)
(pagina 1) tubi (pagina 2) (pagina 2)
MVSX 63 E MVX 63 E
TÜV.SV.13 - 709.6.F.30.p 30 100 ... 140
MVSX 64 E MVX 64 E
MVSX 63 E MVX 63 E MVSX 63 e
TÜV.SV.13 - 709.6.F.60.p 60 141 ... 160
MVSX 64 E MVX 64 E MVX 63
6 = G 1/2
MVSX 63 D MVX 63 D
MVSX 64 D MVX 64 D 80 161 ... 210
TÜV.SV.13 - 709.6.F.80.p MVSX 64 e
MVSX 63 C MVX 63 C MVX 64
MVSX 64 C MVX 64 C 80 211 ... 315 = G 3/4
MVSX 63 B MVX 63 B
TÜV.SV.13 - 709.5.F.60.p 5 60 316 ... 450
MVSX 64 B MVX 64 B
HAWE HYDRAULIK SE
STREITFELDSTR. 25 • 81673 MÜNCHEN D 7000 TÜV
© 1983 by HAWE Hydraulik Agosto 2013-01
D 7000 TÜV Pagina 2
Tabella 1
3. Altri parametri
Denominazione e versione valvola di sicurezza ad azione diretta a sede conica
Posizione di montaggio a piacere
Senso di flusso PdR, P = attacco sul lato di mandataß; R = ritorno (senza pressione)
Fluidi in pressione olio idraulico secondo DIN 51524 parti 1 - 3: ISO VG 10 - 68 secondo DIN 51519.
Adatta anche per fluidi biodegradabili di tipo HEPG (glicole polialchilenico) e HEES (esteri sintetici)
a temperature di esercizio fino a ca. +70°C
Viscosità di esercizio ca. 12 ... 230 mm2/s
Classe di purezza 21/18/15 secondo ISO 4406
Temperatura ambiente: ca. -40 ... +80°C
olio: -20 ... +80°C; badare al campo di viscosità! Vedere anche D 5488/1 posizione 3.
Fluidi in pressione biodegradabili: osservare le indicazioni dei produttori. Non oltre +70°C per
riguardo verso la compatibilità del liquido con le guarnizioni.
Sovraccaricabilità statica 2 x pmax
D 7000 TÜV Pagina 4
Tipo MVSX .. e MVX .. Tipo SVX .. Tipo MVPX .. È rappresentata la grandezza costruttiva 4;
per le grandezze costruttive 5 e 6
vedere tipo MVEX
SW
foro di posizionamento
per la spina elastica
SW #3 mm
Tipo a b b1 c d e e1 g
MVPX 4.. 7 28 35 8 6 14 22 M8
MVPX 5.. 8 32 40 8 9 18 27 M8
foro di
Tipo Anello di O-ring Anello di Massa
attacco:
tenuta NBR 90 Sh sostegno (peso)
Numero di ca. (kg)
disegno
A 22x27x1,5
MVEX 4.. 12,37x2,62 5660 002 0,2
DIN 7603-St
A 28x34x2
MVEX 5.. 20,29x2,62 3771 003 0,3
DIN 7603-Cu
A 30x36x2
MVEX 6.. 20,29x2,62 3771 003 0,4
DIN 7603-Cu
D 7000 TÜV Pagina 5
P, R S M
- 3/4 A G 3/4 G 1/2 G 1/4
- 1/2 A G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/4
Momenti di serraggio delle viti di fissaggio o della valvola a frutto (vedere pagina 4)
Per proteggere la valvola da danneggiamenti esterni, badare che la posizione di montaggio sia sicura o predisporre un dispositivo
di protezione.
Durante il montaggio e l‘esercizio, nella valvola di sicurezza non devono entrare particelle di sporco.
Rispettare la classe di purezza richiesta nel paragrafo 3 „Ulteriori parametri“!
D 7000 TÜV Pagina 6
o
CERTIFICATE
w
Industrie Service
TfiV~
The Certification Body of
TOV SUD Industrie Service GmbH,
a Notified Body of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED),
Z E R TIFIKAT
certifies that
CERTIFICA TE
(Konformltiltsbtschelnlgutlll) 1 ~ol canrormrty)
EG-Il<~umullilerprufuno
~c tyPN<><omiMIJC>n
nuh RlehUinle !J71231EG l o<è<>Jd;ng to dir...llriS•712lii!!C
HAWE Hydraulik SE larti!ikat.f<lr. IC..rtiflic• ~.; 07 2:02 11).42 Z 046'211310
StreitfeldstraRe 25 Namo unc:l An-• ch•fft do& i'le~ller~S HAWE Hydraullk SE
81673 Miinchen, Germany t<amo ond • - ol ~~Oli Sttoitfol<hi!tallii l !l
m•nqf"""'-' 0·81673 Mllnohen
with the production plani
85356 Frelslng, KulturstraBe 44, Germany
Hiermit wird bexhelrligt, dass das lil'lle!'l gerl!lnnte E:G-EI<o~.rnu$1or alo A11forde1ungen der
Ridrtlii'IOA! 971231EG erfull. '1/o< ru...~Y OOf1lt; lllotlho 1)'11'> .,.....,ouon
m.ernlone<J ll<ll~ Mfill!: ""' roqulrernam.
<lf-"'•9712:l.EC,
implemented, operates and maintains a quality
assurance system as described in the Pressure Equipment
Directive (97/23/EC) Annex Ili, Modula D Gepraft naeh Aìchtlinie 97JZ,IIEG EG,I;Iaumu51orpnlhmg (Modui iB )
T&it&d li00Drl1.~ 10 97J2.1JEC .EC ~...,• ...,,• .,.oo (wo<Mo 8)
for the scope of
P<llf!)enclli-Nr ·11..., ror.on No,: 1042 p 046211 aiO
production of directly acting spring loaded safety valves ~eohrèibvng des Ba~mustel6 Slehornilit~Wondl
for hydraulic fluids (Otl\.d(gerllt). <11m.1 "llt.<n<J. rO<Jo-.let
~""'ol~ll>rooatKo ""'""<"'""): lypon t.IVX, ~M')!. I.!VEX ....t MVSX lo dto tlo~l!iom <, ~ u'ldil
ace. to EC Type-Examlnatlons ~o!l..,,...mcnm.... Plar.onault>a"' Ocler EM!W>,.ut»o!Lll.
TemFJ4!'!11'""" "'!ochan - 20"C ,.,d 80 •c
fQr Hl'<h.ulil<ll~.jjll~ ~!mi>ll H.,..1...,rang.obe
The audi! with the report number IS·DDB· MUC-Q-031-1 3 proves that the Elnoie]ljrbdi:o zwtO<hen BIO ~n<l ~:;o b<or
quality assurance system fulfils the PED requirements. Fertigy~sstatte/~>iaoo or '"•I>Uiadul<t: HA,Wt: Hydr;~M!ik SE,
Strelt:fe1d~ln.l'>e 25; 0 · 81673 Miinchan
GO:ltlg b!sllf81d unu 01.10.2022
The manufacturer is authorized to previde the pressure equipment
produced within the scope of the assessed quality assurance system with
the following Notified Body number:
l~;rt,;!.~~
valid until August 11111 , 2016
lUV"'
TÙV SOD lndustry Services PED-QA-Certificatioo Body · 68167 Mannheim · Germany ,i-
<.
:
D 7000 TÜV Pagina 7
Industrie Service
ZERTIFIKAT
Certificate
EG-Baumusterprufung (Modul B) nach Richtlinie 97/23/EG
EC Type-examlnatlon (Module B) according to Oirective 97/23/EC
Zertifikat-Nr.: IS-DDB-MAN-05-05-9992-002
Certificate No.:
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daB das unten genannte EG-Baumuster die Anforde-
rungen der Richtlinie 97/23/EG erfOIIt.
We herewith certify that the fype mentioned below meets the requirements of the Directive 97123/EC.
TOV Industrie Service GmbH Tel.: (06 21) 395-257 Mitglied der
TOV SOD Gruppe Fax: (06 21) 395-594 CONFéOERATION EUROPÉEN
Abteilung Druckbehalter www.tuev-sued.de
DudenstraBe 28
D-68167 Mannheim
C§V
O"ORGANISMES DE CONTRO~E
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
'lf
280
6" Trafilamento max. (cm '/min.) 25
"- 140 Massa (kg) 0.180
L_ <l
Dimensioni
IN OX 28
~sr~~N~
47
pA~il
""1
27 Ch. 13 8 co
~
x
N
v N
_c "'
u 1 "" ""
\ .......
~ ...,
o 1'-
2 N
"" l ""
'? '
\Coppia di serraggio 50-60 Nm
LP l 30/D~N~INOX
-, ......
LP l 30 ~
Tipo valvola Codici gruppi completi:
Molle standard
Tipo Campo di taratura Taratura test Set guarnizioni esterne 90 620 103
Q ~
105 ... 420 bar 315 bar Le valvole LPI 30 possono essere
montate sui corpi serie 30-LO, per
dimensioni vedere catalogo 16.01 O
Tipo di regolazione
N = Regolazione standard @:
INOX ~ Parti esterne
9.16 SCHEDA TECNICA RITEGNO FLUCOM
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
12
35 eSt a 50 ·c / Mollo tipo 5
Pressione di apertura (bar) 0.35-3.5-5-8
9
L--- / Molla tipo M
(est)
L.--::::: :,.....---
L
o Mollo tipo P
Campo di viscosita' del fluido 2.8 - 380
.o
1--4/Ò--2 6
::.-
Q_
<l 3
/ Campo temperatura del fluido ('C) -20 +80
!---'" Massa (kg) 0.230
o
o 35 70 105 140 Fluido idraulico; olio minerale HM e HV sec. ISO 6074
Q (l/min.) Filtraggio richiesto; 19/15 ISO 4466 (25 l" assoluti)
Dimensioni
13 39
5 38
go N
x
n
aJ n
N
B 2
l
H c
ao
~~
c 2 n
B
N
'"
B
c
'
)=l
.1 /
\ Coppia di serraggio 100-120 Nm
CAE 50 --
p
CAE 50 ~
Tipo valvola Codici gruppi completi:
CAE 50/P 52 DII 100
IDI CAE
CAE
CAE
50/M
50/5
50/Z
52 DII 101
s 12001
52 DII 116
p ~
0.35 bar
Le valvole CAE 50 possono essere
M ~
3.5 bar
montate sui corpi serie 50-LO, per
5 ~
5 bar dimensioni vedere catalogo 16.010
z ~
8 bar
9.17 SCHEDA TECNICA RITEGNO TOGNELLA
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
VALVOLE
UNIDIREZIONALI
IN LINEA
(A PISTONCINO)
Vengono inserite in rami del circuito ove si voglia realizzare libera circolazione di
flusso in un verso e impedire il passaggio in quello opposto.
Una duratura ed ermetica tenuta è assicurata dall’otturatore conico, il quale
costituisce una soluzione meccanica di totale affidabilità.
La molla di contrasto, in materiale ad alta resistenza, viene alloggiata in condizio-
ne da non chiudersi a pacco in fase di apertura. La configurazione esterna del
corpo facilita la presa durante le operazioni di montaggio.
Sono fornibili con diverse tarature della pressione di apertura
(0,5 standard e 2-4-6-8-10 bar).
A richiesta
• Filettature NPT
38 3/8”G
1/2”G
12,5
15,5
68
80,5
27
32
0,260
0,415
21
12
34 3/4”G 17 99,5 36 0,605
dati tecnici
Pressione Min. press. Temperatura Grado di
Tipo
esercizio bar scoppio bar esercizio °C filtrazione µm
18 400 1600 -20° / +130°C 25
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
20
15 -18/6
-18/4 -18/8
10
bar
FT 2257/6 - 14
12 -14/8
10
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
8 -14/6
6 -14/4
4 -14/0,35
-14/2
2 Olio 3,9°E ÷ 50°C
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
l/min
PORTATA Q
bar
FT 2257/6 - 38
10
-38/8
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
8
-38/6
6
-38/4
4
-38/2 -38/0,35
2
Olio 3,9°E ÷ 50°C
0 10 20 30 40 50
l/min
PORTATA Q
bar
FT 2257/6 - 12
10 -12/8
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
8 -12/6
-12/4
4
-12/2
-12/0,35
2
Olio 3,9°E ÷ 50°C
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
l/min
PORTATA Q
bar
FT 2257/6 - 34
10 -34/8
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
8 -34/6
6
-34/4
4
-34/2
2 -34/0,35
-100/8
Olio 3,9°E ÷ 50°C
10
-100/6
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
6 -100/4
-100/2
2
-100/0,35
0 20 40 60 80 100
l/min
PORTATA Q
bar
FT 2257/6 - 114
10
-114/8
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
8
-114/6
6
-114/4
4
-114/2
2
-114/0,35
Olio 3,9°E ÷ 50°C
10
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
4
23
2
Olio 4°E ÷ 50°C
6
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE ∆p
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Te c h n i c a l d a t a
Filter housing (Materials)
• Filter body: Aluminium: FRI 255
Anodized Aluminium: FRI 025-040-100-250-630 Filter housings Δp pressure drop
Phosphated Steel: FRI 850
The curves are plotted utilising mineral oil
• Cover: Nylon (only for: FRI 255)
with density of 0,86 kg/dm3 to ISO 3968.
Anodized Aluminium (all the other
• Valve: Nylon - Steel Δp varies proportionally with density.
Pressure
• Working pressure: 20 bar (2 MPa)
Temperature
FRI 025 - 040 - 100
• From -25°C to +110°C 0,6
1/2”
Bypass valve
• Opening pressure 2,4 bar ±10%
3/4”
0,4
Δp bar
Δp Elements type
• Microfibre filter elements series N: 10 bar 1”
0,2
• Fluid flow through the filter element from OUT to IN.
Seals
• Standard NBR series A
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
• Optional FPM series V
Flow rate l/min
FRI FILTERS ARE PROVIDED FOR VERTICAL MOUNTING
Weights (kg)
Length 1 FRI 250 - 255 - 630
• FRI 025 1,0 0,6
• FRI 040 2,0 1 1/2”
• FRI 100 3,8
0,4
Δp bar
Volumes (dm3) 0
Length 1
0 200 400 600 800 1000
• FRI 025 0,28
Flow rate l/min
• FRI 040 0,70
• FRI 100 1,09
• FRI 250 2,60 FRI 850
• FRI 255 3,2
0,6
• FRI 630 7,05
RETURN FILTER
3 1/2”
0,2
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Flow rate l/min
108
Valves
Bypass valve pressure drop
4 4
Δp bar
Δp bar
2 2
0 0
0 18 36 54 75 90 0 60 120 180 250 300
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
4 4
Δp bar
Δp bar
2 2
0 0
0 30 60 90 120 150 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 P10 P25 M25-M60-M90
FRI 025 1 6 10 16 19 43 43 47 50*
Flow rate l/min
Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 P10 P25 M25-M60-M90
FRI 040 1 18 22 42 44 80 80 80 80*
Flow rate l/min
Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 P10 P25 M25-M60-M90
FRI 100 1 32 33 88 91 140 140 140 140*
Flow rate l/min
Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 P10 P25 M25-M60-M90
FRI 250 - 255 1 143 178 270 300 350 350 350 350*
Flow rate l/min
Filtration
RETURN FILTER
Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 P10 P25 M25-M60-M90 *
FRI 850 1 440 540 970 1140 1600 1600 1600 1600* Maximum
Flow rate l/min flow reccommended
109
FRI 025 - 040
Indicator port
T2 Plug - A/F 30
Optional E
H6
8
H2
H4
H1
H3
H5
Flat seal
Ø D1
1,5
A
Plug
A
3
ØD
Ø D2
Ø D4
45°
RETURN FILTER
Thread connections
A Filter H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 E F
Type Length mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
FRI 025 FRI 040
G1 G 1/2” G 3/4”
FRI 025 140 73 6,5 21 62,5 115 83,5 89 84,5 95 M5 44 46
G2 1/2” NPT 3/4” NPT
FRI 040 180 86 10 38 105 135 121 132 122 138 M6 57 60
G3 SAE 8 - 3/4” - 16 UNF SAE 12 - 1 1/16” - 12 UN
110
FRI 100 - 250 - 630
Indicator port
T2 Plug - A/F 30
Optional E
H6
8
H2
A
Flange connections
H4
H3
Flat seal
H5
H1
Ø D1
A
1,5
Blind flange
A
F2
A
Plug
F1
3
ØD
Ø D2
Ø D4
45°
G1 G 1” G 1 1/2” G 2 1/2” F1 1” SAE 3000 psi/M 1 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/M 2 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/M
G2 1” NPT 1 1/2” NPT 2 1/2” NPT F2 1” SAE 3000 psi/UNC 1 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/UNC 2 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/UNC
G3 SAE 16 - 1 5/16” - 12 UN SAE 24 - 1 7/8” - 12 UN SAE 32 - 2 1/2” - 12 UN
*Connections table “DN/SAE flange” see page 39
Filter H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 E F1 F2
Length mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
FRI 100 245 106 12 51 140 175 135 146 136 154 M6 67 73 90
FRI 250 335 129 14 59 177 265 162 174 163 180 M8 82 86 108
FRI 630 391 166 16 80 218 300 237 253 238 275 M10 116 122 143
111
FRI 255 FRI 850
Indicator port
T2 Plug - A/F 30
T
280
Optional
Indicator port 88
550
178
8
123
240
A
A
43
130
10
Seal
331
Ø 162
12
O-Ring
Flat seal
Ø 237
1,5
677
A
45°
63 39
Ø1 Ø2
45°
45°
Ø 180 Ø 275
Ø 300
Ø 174
RETURN FILTER
FRI 255 - Thread connections FRI 255 - Flange connections* FRI 850 - Flange connections*
Type A T Type A T Type A
G1 F1 1 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/M G 1/8” F1 3 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/M
G 1 1/2” G 1/8”
G2 F2 1 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/UNC G 1/8” F2 3 1/2” SAE 3000 psi/UNC
1 1/2” NPT G 1/8”
G3 SAE 24 - 1 7/8” - 12 UN G 1/8”
G4 G 1 1/4” G 1/8” *Connections table *Connections table
G5 1 1/4” NPT
“DN - SAE flange” see page 39 “DN - SAE flange” see page 39
G 1/8”
G6 SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN G 1/8”
112
Spar e par ts
3a
1 3c
3d
3e 3b
FILTER Series
Item Description Q.ty FRI 025 FRI 040
113
Spar e par ts
3a 3a
1 3c 1 3c
2 2
3d 3d
3f 3b 3e 3b
FILTER Series
Item Description Q.ty FRI 100 FRI 250 FRI 630
114
Spar e par ts
1 3a
3c
3d
3b
3e
FILTER Series
Item Description Q.ty FRI 850
Ø 85,32 x 3,53
O-R 4337
3b Filter element bottom seal 1
Ø 85,32 x 3,53
O-R 233
3c Cover seal 1
Ø 181,00 x 6,99
3d Head seal 1 01026320 01026326
3e Plug seal 1 01017055
115
Spar e par ts
3c
1 3a
3d
3b
FILTER Series
Item Description Q.ty FRI 255
O-R Metric
3b Filter element bottom seal 1
Ø 50 x 4
O-R Metric
3c Cover seal 1
Ø 113 x 4
O-R 4650
3d Head seal 1
Ø 164,70 x 3,53
Contamination retainer
4 binder 1 01060301
116
Or dering information FRI
Filter assembly 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
FRI
Example: FRI 040 B A G1 A10 N P01
Filter element 1 5 7 8
CU
Example: CU 040 A10 N P01
4 - Connections
MP Filtri - The filter functions as described in this bulletin are valid exclusively for original MP Filtri
filter elements and replacement parts. All rights reserved.
The data in this publication are purely guideline. MP Filtri reserves the right to make changes to the models described herein at any time it deems fit in relation to technical or commercial requirements.
The colours of the products shown on the cover are purely guideline. Copyright. All rights reserved.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Te c h n i c a l d a t a
Filter housing (Materials)
• Head: Cast iron (chemical heat treatment)
• Housing: Steel (chemical heat treatment)
Filter housings Δp pressure drop
• Bypass valve: Steel
The curves are plotted utilising mineral oil
• Check valve: Steel
with density of 0,86 kg/dm3 to ISO 3968.
Pressure
Δp varies proportionally with density.
• Working pressure: 320 bar (32 MPa)
• Test pressure: 480 bar (48 MPa)
• Burst pressure: 960 bar (96 MPa)
• Pulse pressure fatigue test: 1.000.000 cycles FHB 050 - 065
0,90
with pressure from 0 to 320 bar (32 MPa)
Check Valve
Temperature
• From -25°C to +110°C
0,60
Δp bar
Bypass valve
• Opening pressure 6 bar ±10% 0,30
• Other opening pressures on request.
Volumes (dm3)
Length 1 2 3 4 5 FHB 320
• FHB050 0,21 0,30 0,40 0,52 0,81 0,90
• FHB065 0,20 0,27 0,49 - - Check Valve
PRESSURE FILTER
Connections
0,30
• FHB: Manifold mounting
0,00
0 75 150 225 300 375
Flow rate l/min
170
Valves
Bypass valve pressure drop
10 10
Δp bar
Δp bar
5 5
0 0
0 12 24 36 48 60 0 50 100 150 200 250
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
FHB 135
15
10
Δp bar
0
0 18 36 54 72 90
Flow rate l/min
Filtration Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 M25 Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25
FHB 050 1 42 44 78 80 100 130 FHB 050 1 30 40 58 60 74
2 53 58 83 93 112 132 2 46 50 75 85 107
3 65 69 93 100 118 133 3 59 62 87 95 115
4 82 86 105 108 122 134 4 74 79 100 102 118
5 102 104 119 122 127 136 5 90 92 105 112 125
Serie N - Flow rate l/min Serie H - Flow rate l/min
Filtration Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 M25 Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25
FHB 065 1 25 32 55 62 87 90 FHB 065 1 23 25 49 57 80
2 33 50 70 76 100 105 2 32 38 66 75 94
3 60 70 96 103 117 120 3 59 68 95 100 115
Serie N - Flow rate l/min Serie H - Flow rate l/min
Filtration Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 M25 Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25
FHB 135 1 67 72 119 129 176 200 FHB 135 1 48 55 97 100 159
2 109 116 152 154 224 230 2 90 110 137 140 182
3 153 155 200 205 226 235 3 126 141 175 187 206
Serie N - Flow rate l/min Serie H - Flow rate l/min
PRESSURE FILTER
Filtration Filtration
Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25 M25 Length A03 A06 A10 A16 A25
FHB 320 1 130 143 238 285 340 440 FHB 320 1 110 117 191 200 300
2 259 282 390 408 450 465 2 200 230 318 325 390
3 330 368 440 450 460 475 3 268 312 379 387 430
4 367 390 445 463 480 485 4 310 332 387 392 435
Serie N - Flow rate l/min Serie H - Flow rate l/min
171
FHB 050 - 065 FHB 135
110
85 72
58 Ø 18
Ø 10,5
Ø 20 Nr. 4 holes
Ø 16 Nr. 2 holes
22
OUT
74
55
26
35
30
17
20
IN
H
Ø 68
Ø 77
A/F 30
100
A/F 30
125
93 104
44 50
15 Indicator port 22
T2 Plug - A/F 30 Indicator port
Optional T2 Plug - A/F 30
Optional
OUT OUT
IN IN
Bypass plug
Bypass plug A/F 30
A/F 30
PRESSURE FILTER
172
FHB 320
26
58
52
28
A/F 3
Ø 125
H
A/F 30
550 mm
150 mm
Oil drain plug
P02
P01
Ø 101
G 3/8” - A/F 8
Style P01
Standard maintenance from head.
Style P02
Maintenance option from housing base.
A/F 30
150
157
65
34 Indicator port
T2 Plug - A/F 30
Optional
OUT
IN
Bypass plug
A/F 46
PRESSURE FILTER
FHB 320
Length H
Filter mm
1 301
2 424
3 556
4 709
173
Spar e par ts 3m 3h
4
5
3d
3e
6
3m 3h
3g
3n
3a
3b
3c
3f
FILTER Series
Item Description Q.ty FHB 050 FHB 065 FHB 135 FHB 320
4 Indicator connection plug 1 T2H T2V T2H T2V T2H T2V T2H T2V
5 Bypass assembly 1 02001312 02001385 02001312 02001385 02001312 02001385 02001381 02001382
6 Non-bypass assembly 1 02001314 02001386 02001314 02001386 02001314 02001386 02001383 02001384
174
Or dering information FHB
Filter assembly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7a
FHB F1
Example: FHB 065 2 B A F1 A10 N P01
Filter element 1 2 5 4 6 7b
HP
Example: HP 065 2 A10 A N P01
2 - Filter length
050 1 2 3 4 5 6 - Max filter element differential pressure
065 1 2 3 N Δp 20 bar
135 1 2 3 H Δp 210 bar (only for FHB 065 - 135 - 320)
320 1 2 3 4 S Δp 210 bar (only for FHB 050)
7 - Option
3 - Valves
a - Filter
S Without bypass
P01 MP Filtri standard
B With bypass
Maintenance from base of housing
T Without bypass + check valve* P02 (only FHB 320 length 4)
D With bypass + check valve*
Pxx Customer request
*Reduced cross-section oilways
b - Filter element
P01 MP Filtri standard
4 - Filter seals Pxx Customer request
A NBR
V FPM
Indicator plug:
Phosphated Steel plug T2 has
to be ordered separately.
Code
T2H Seal NBR
T2V Seal FPM
PRESSURE FILTER
MP Filtri - The filter functions as described in this bulletin are valid exclusively for original MP Filtri
filter elements and replacement parts. All rights reserved.
The data in this publication are purely guideline. MP Filtri reserves the right to make changes to the models described herein at any time it deems fit in relation to technical or commercial requirements.
The colours of the products shown on the cover are purely guideline. Copyright. All rights reserved.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
50
3
45,4 (OPEN)
CLOSE)
1
38,4
Torque 60Nm
3
2
1
0 19.02.16 FIRST Nardone
REV. DATA DESCRIZIONE MODIFICA DISEGNATO CONTROLLATO
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
ESCLUSORI
PER MANOMETRO
A SPILLO
- IN LINEA -
Gli esclusori a spillo FT 2290 (in linea) vengono normalmente utilizzati a protezione
del manometro in quanto assolvono la duplice funzione di attutire lo shock della
pressione, in fase di apertura, e di isolare lo stesso dalla linea in pressione. Sottoposti
a severi controlli offrono sicurezza di affidabilità e di durata. Particolare attenzione
merita l’adozione di un dado girevole che consente all’utilizzatore di allacciare il
manometro, orientato nella posizione a lui più consona, con una singola operazione
di bloccaggio. La guarnizione, fornita di serie, e inserita nel dado stesso, impedisce
qualsiasi trafilamento tra il raccordo e il manometro. Idonei per pressioni fino a 400
bar e temperature da -20° / +130°C possono essere montati a pannello mediante l’in-
serimento di apposite ghiere (G) fornibili a richiesta.
A richiesta
• Completi di ghiere (G) indicare se KM o esagonali
• Filettature NPT
dimensioni
Tipo A1 UNI A2 B ØC D E ØF G H L M N P S OR ES Peso kg
338 UNI 339
Manopola Nylon 66
istruzioni di montaggio
77
2
montaggio a pannello
1° Svitare la vite (1) Spessore pannello A max Foro pannello ØB
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
General instruction
for installation, maintenance
and safety information
for instrumentation valve
and manifold needle type
• Instrumentation Valve
• Instrumentation Manifold
• Instrumentation Monolange
1.1 Ogni intervento di installazione e manutenzione 1.1 Qualiied personnel only can be authorized to 3.5 Per le valvole con opzione “montaggio a pannello” 3.5 For valve with “panel mounting” option will
sulle valvole/manifold deve essere eseguito da perform installation and maintenance of the val- sarà necessario procedere come segue: proceed as follows:
personale qualiicato e con circuito completa- ve/manifold supplied and any intervention must • Rimuovere la vite o il dado di bloccaggio del • Remove the screw or the nut of the Tee-bar or
mente depressurizzato (la pressione nel circuito be carried out with completely depressurized volantino o “T–bar” Knob
deve essere = zero). circuit (pressure in the circuit must be = zero). • Rimuovere il volantino o “T–bar” • Remove Tee-bar or Knob
• Inserire la valvola nel foro praticato nel pannello • Insert the valve through the hole on the panel
1.2 La rimozione della valvola/manifold e/o di tappi 1.2 Removal of the valve/manifold from its installation • Assemblare i componenti rimossi in precedenza • Re-assemble Tee-bar or Knob as in origin
posti sugli siati deve essere eseguita solo con and/or dismounting plugs on the drain ports must
circuito completamente depressurizzato (la pres- be carried out with completely depressurized cir-
sione nel circuito deve essere = zero). cuit (pressure in the circuit must be = zero).
AVVERTENZA WARNING
1.3 I “bonnet” e le “spine di blocco antisvitamento del 1.3 “Bonnet” and “Bonnet locking pin” cannot be re-
bonnet” non devono essere rimossi dalla loro sede moved from its seats from the valve body. Prima di collegare un qualsiasi strumento di misu- Line circuit must be drained and keep clean from
sul corpo valvola. ra e/o controllo è indispensabile eseguire lo spur- residual before connecting of any measurement
go della linea al fine di eliminare eventuali residui or controls instrumentation through the valve/
1.4 La coppia massima di torsione per l’azionamento 1.4 Max torque for operating of the valve/manifold di lavorazioni meccaniche o altro che, se presenti, manifold. Contaminating parts in the circuits
del bonnet è di 0,8 Nm (0,6 LB•ft). bonnets is 0,8 Nm (0,6 LB•ft). potrebbero interferire con il corretto funzionamen- may interfere with the correct operation of
to dello strumento a valle, oltre a causare possi- the valve/manifold, unless for possible major
1.5 Evitare urti o colpi sulle valvole superiori a 40 Nm 1.5 Strokes and impacts higher than 40 Nm (30 LB•ft) bili maggiori danni dovuti alla presenza di residui damage caused by the presence of residuals in
(30 LB•ft). must be avoided to the valve/manifold bodies. contaminanti. Si consiglia quindi di pressurizzare the line pressure. It is advisable therefore to drain
e spurgare il circuito alcune volte prima e dopo the circuit before and after the valve/manifold
1.6 I dati tecnici riportati sulla valvola/manifold devono 1.6 Marking of the technical data’s on the body valve/
l’installazione della valvola/manifold stessa. In installation by pressurization and draining of
essere sempre leggibili. Verniciature o quant’altro manifold must be always legible. Painting or else
particolare, in presenza di fluidi di processo con the circuit. Especially in presence of particular
possa impedire l’identiicazione dei dati tecnici resulting in hiding of the technical data’s, must be
particelle contaminanti, è indispensabile collocare type of media containing contaminating parts
deve essere evitato. avoided.
dei filtri a monte della valvola. Soltanto dopo aver it is advisable to interpose filters on the valve/
2.0 Istruzioni di Funzionamento 2.0 Operating Instruction completato tali operazioni sarà possibile installare manifold inlet. Then measurement or controls
la prevista strumentazione di misura e controllo. instrumentation can be safely installed.
2.1 Ruotando il volantino (T-bar) o la maniglia in senso 2.1 By rotating bonnet Tee-bar or knob clockwi-
orario, l’otturatore del bonnet chiude il passaggio se the valve close the flow pattern (around 5
(occorrono circa 5 rotazioni complete per la chiu- complete turns stop flow pattern completely).
sura del passaggio). I bonnet provvisti di cap- Bonnets provided with stainless steel dust 4.0 Istruzione di Manutenzione 4.0 Maintenance Instruction
puccio antipolvere in acciaio inox permettono di cap allow visual status of the bonnet (open or
Le valvole ed i manifold sono progettati e costruiti per Indra Valve and manifold are designed and manufac-
visualizzare lo stato del bonnet (aperto o chiuso). closed).
un esercizio continuo con minima o totale assenza di tured for continuous operation, with minimum and/or
3.0 Istruzione di Installazione 3.0 Installation Instruction manutenzione. zero maintenance.
Tuttavia le istruzioni che seguono sono utili al man- Nevertheless, the instruction given with the present ma-
3.1 Ogni intervento di installazione delle valvole deve 3.1 Qualiied personnel only can be authorized to per- tenimento dell’eficienza delle valvole/manifold fornite nual should be intended for the preservation of the efi-
essere eseguito da personale qualiicato. form installation of the valve/manifold supplied. alla nostra clientela: ciency of the valve and manifold supplied to customers:
3.2 L’installazione dovrà essere effettuata in modo 3.2 Installation must be carried out caring that the 4.1 Veriicare l’eficienza delle tenute periodicamente 4.1 Check periodically seal eficiency by absence of
tale da mantenere visibili le informazioni marcate marking and all technical data’s marked on the (assenza di perdite). leakages.
sul corpo della valvola: valve/manifold body will remain visible as:
• Nome del costruttore (Indra) • Manufacturer name (Indra) 4.2 Eliminazione delle perdite con circuito in pressione: 4.2 Leakages elimination while circuit pressurized:
• Codice prodotto • Product code - Aprire completamente la valvola ruotando il vo- - Open valve completely, by rotating Tee-bar or
• Rating • Rating lantino in senso antiorario (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) Knob anticlockwise (Fig. ”A” pos. 1)
• Materiale di costruzione • Material - Rimuovere il dado/vite di serraggio del volantino - Remove Tee-bar locking screw (Fig. ”A”
• Lotto di rintracciabilità • Lot of production for traceability (Fig. ”A” pos. 11) pos. 11)
• Marcature aggiuntive se richieste • Additional marking as it might be requested - Rimuovere il volantino (Fig.”A” pos. 1) - Remove Tee-bar (Fig. ”A” pos. 1)
- Rimuovere il cappuccio antipolvere (Fig. ”A” pos. 2) - Remove Tee-bar dust cap (Fig. ”A” pos. 2)
3.3 Le valvole NON devono essere utilizzate come 3.3 Valve and manifold cannot be used and/or inten- - Allentare e svitare di 2-3 iletti il dado di bloccag- - Lose and unscrew by two/three threads the
supporto per altre apparecchiature. ded as support of other installed equipments. gio (Fig. ”A” pos. 4) locking nut (Fig. ”A” pos. 4)
2 3
- Serrare gradualmente il dado di compressione, - Gradually tighten the compression nut by 1-2
evitando avanzamenti eccessivi, 1-2 mm max, mm turns, avoiding strong sudden tightening, AVVERTENZA WARNING
ino ad eliminazione totale della perdita (Fig. “A” till leakages elimination (Fig. ”A” pos. 3 - see Il serraggio del dado di compressione (Fig.”A” pos. Tightening of the compression nut must be carried
pos. 3 - vedere tabella coppie di torsione in fondo) also torque table at the bottom) 3) deve essere effettuato con avanzamenti gradua- out smoothly, with 2-3 mm turns, avoiding strong
- dopo l’eliminazione della perdita serrare nuo- li di 2-3 mm per volta, evitando serraggi repentini sudden tightening, till leakages elimination. After
- After elimination of the leakages retighten the
vamente il dado di bloccaggio (Fig. “A” pos. 4) fino ad eliminazione delle perdite. Azionare una o tightening operation completed the bonnet must
locking nut (Fig. ”A” pos. 4)
- Riposizionare il cappuccio antipolvere (Fig. “A” più volte il bonnet per l’assestamento delle tenute be actioned one or more time for settlements of
pos. 2) - Re-assemble dust cap (Fig. ”A” pos. 2) interne. the internal seals and checks of eventual leakages.
- Riposizionare il volantino (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) - Re-assemble Tee-bar (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) Eventuali perdite saranno eliminate secondo le Leakages, if any, can be eliminated by applying to
- Riavvitare il dado/vite di serraggio del volantino istruzioni del punto 4.2. the procedure as per above point 4.2.
- Screw-in Tee-bar locking screw (Fig. ”A” pos. 11)
(Fig. “A” pos. 11)
- Veriicare l’eliminazione della perdita - Check for positive elimination of the leakages
4.4 Veriicare periodicamente l’apertura e la chiu- 4.4 Check periodically smooth opening/closing of the
sura della valvola, in particolare se inattiva per valve, especially when not actioned for a long pe-
lunghi periodi. Se lo sforzo risultasse eccessivo, riod of time. If the torque would be in excess of e.g.
AVVERTENZA WARNING ad esempio 1 Nm (0,74 LB •ft), provvedere alla 1 Nm (0,74 LB•ft), replacement of the full bonnet
Qualora la perdita persista con il dado di com- If leakages still occur while the compression sostituzione del bonnet (vedi paragrafo 4.5). would be recommended (see following para 4.5).
pressione completamente serrato, si dovrà prov- nut has been totally tightened replacement of
vedere alla sostituzione degli anelli di tenuta (vedi the bonnet internal seal might be necessary, 4.5 Rimozione e sostituzione del bonnet. 4.5 Removal and replacement of the bonnet.
paragrafo 4.3). (see para 4.3).
AVVERTENZA WARNING
Ogni intervento sulle valvole deve essere effettua- Operation on the valve must be carried out by
4.3 Eliminazione delle perdite con circuito depres- 4.3 Leakages elimination with depressurized circuit to da personale qualificato. Prima di procedere qualified personnel. Before proceeding to bon-
surizzato: (P=0): alla sostituzione del bonnet il circuito deve essere net replacement the line must be completely
- Aprire completamente la valvola ruotando il - Open valve completely, by rotating Tee-bar or tassativamente depressurizzato (la pressione nel depressurized (pressure in the circuit must be
volantino in senso antiorario (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) Knob anticlockwise (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) circuito deve essere = zero). = zero).
- Rimuovere il dado/vite di serraggio del volan- - Remove Tee-bar locking screw (Fig. ”A” pos. 11)
tino (Fig. ”A” pos. 11)
- Remove Tee-bar (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) - Aprire la valvola completamente con rotazione - Open valve completely by rotating Tee-bar or
- Rimuovere il volantino (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) antioraria del bonnet (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) Knob anticlockwise (Fig. ”A” pos. 1)
- Rimuovere il cappuccio antipolvere (Fig. ”A” - Remove Tee-bar dust cap (Fig. ”A” pos. 2) - Rimuovere la spina di blocco del bonnet - Remove bonnet locking pin from the valve body
pos. 2) - Lose and unscrew the locking nut (Fig. ”A” - Rimuovere il “bonnet” dal corpo valvola svitan- - Remove the bonnet from the valve body by me-
- Allentare il dado di bloccaggio (Fig. ”A” pos. 4) pos. 4) dolo dalla base esagonale tramite l’utilizzo di ans of a suitable wrench holding it from the hex
- Rimuovere il dado di compressione, svitando un’apposita chiave (Fig. ”A” pos. 6) base (Fig. ”A” pos. 6)
- Unscrew completely and remove the com- - Disporre del bonnet di ricambio e collocare la sua - Obtain the spare bonnet and place it in a vice
in senso antiorario (Fig. ”A” pos. 3) pression nut (Fig. ”A” pos. 3) base esagonale in una morsa (Fig. ”A” pos. 6) from its hex base (Fig. ”A” pos. 6)
- Rimuovere l’anello di compressione interno
- Remove the compression ring located inside - “Aprire” il bonnet di ricambio ruotando il suo vo- - Turn spare bonnet Tee bar in open position by
(Fig. ”A” pos. 8)
the bonnet body (Fig. ”A” pos. 8) lantino in senso antiorario (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) rotating Tee-bar or Knob anticlockwise till it stops
- Rimuovere gli anelli di tenuta interni con l’au- - Ripulire la sede ed i iletti del corpo valvola da (Fig. ”A” pos. 1)
silio di un attrezzo a punta (es. cacciavite) - Remove the Ptfe or Graphite sealing ring lo-
eventuali depositi - Clean body threads and seat from eventual detri-
(Fig. ”A” pos. 9) cated inside the bonnet body by means of a
- Predisporre del sigillante e/o anti grippante sulla mental deposits
- Sostituire gli anelli di tenuta interni (Fig. ”A” suitable tool, e.g. screwdriver (Fig. ”A” pos. 9) ilettatura maschio del bonnet di ricambio (Fig. - Provide sealant for anti-gripping for spare bonnet
pos. 9) - Replace Ptfe or Graphite sealing ring with new ”A” pos. 5) male thread (Fig. ”A” pos. 5)
- Reinserire all’interno l’anello di compressio- rings supplied meantime (Fig. ”A” pos. 9) - Avvitare il bonnet a mano sul corpo valvola ino a - Hand screw spare bonnet to the valve body till it
ne (Fig. ”A” pos. 8) incontrare resistenza stops
- Re-locate the compression ring inside the
- Serrare gradualmente il dado di compressio- - Serrare il bonnet dalla sua base esagonale (Fig. - Tighten spare bonnet from hex base (Fig. ”A”
bonnet body (Fig. ”A” pos. 8)
ne (Fig. ”A” pos. 3 - vedere tabella coppie di ”A” pos. 6) con apposita chiave pos. 6) by means of a suitable wrench
torsione in fondo) - Screw-in and gradually tighten the compres- - Reinserire la spina di blocco - Insert the locking pin in its hole on the valve
sion nut (Fig. ”A” pos. 3 - see also torque ta- - Effettuare 5-10 manovre complete di apertura/ body
- Serrare nuovamente il dado di bloccaggio
ble at the bottom) chiusura del bonnet - Operate the new bonnet for 5-10 opening/closing
(Fig. ”A” pos. 4)
- Pressurizzare il circuito per veriicare l’esistenza full turns
- Riposizionare il cappuccio antipolvere (Fig. - Re-tighten the locking nut (Fig. ”A” pos. 4)
di eventuali perdite - Circuit pressurization for leakage check
”A” pos. 2) - Re-assemble dust cap (Fig. ”A” pos. 2)
- Riposizionare il volantino (Fig. ”A” pos. 1)
- Re-assemble Tee-bar (Fig. ”A” pos. 1) AVVERTENZA WARNING
- Riposizionare il dado/vite di serraggio del vo-
lantino (Fig. ”A” pos. 11) - Screw-in Tee-bar locking screw (Fig. ”A” pos. 11) Eventuali perdite saranno eliminate secondo le Leakages, if any, can be eliminated by applying
istruzioni del punto 4.2. to the procedure as per above point 4.2.
- Pressurizzare il circuito - Circuit pressurization for leakage check
4 5
COPPIA DI TORSIONE PER AZIONAMENTO BONNET GRAFICO PRESSIONE / TEMPERATURA
BONNET TORQUE PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE GRAPH
Fig. A
6 7
INDRA srl
l
Ufici/Ofices: Via Novara, 10/B-C - 20013 Magenta (MI) - Italy
Tel. +39 02 972 986 63 - Fax +39 02 972 918 55
e-mail: indra@indra.it - Web site: www.indra.it
8
Valvole a Sede Morbida - Femmina/Femmina
Soft Seat Needle Valves - Female/Female
Mod. 060 - 062
Applicazioni Applications
Intercettazione di strumenti di pressione Pressure instruments isolation
(manometri, pressostati, trasmettitori, ecc.) (gauges, switches, transmitters, etc.)
Connessioni Connections
Filettate secondo ANSI-ASME B1.20.1 Threaded to ANSI-ASME B1.20.1
ISO 228 - ISO 7/1 ISO 228 - ISO 7/1
Rating Rating
Standard: 6000 PSI (420 bar) Standard: 6000 PSI (420 bar)
Tenute Seals
Standard: PTFE (T ≤ 200° C) Standard: PTFE (T ≤ 200° C)
Peculiarità Features
Otturatore svincolato dallo stelo Not rotating trim
Spina di blocco del bonnet Bonnet locking pin
Protezione antipolvere Dust cup
Facile manovrabilità Easy operation
Come ordinare
Ordering Information
Modello / Model - FxF * Connessioni OUT Materiale Tenuta
Connections OUT Seal material
060 Montaggio standard / Standard mounting
C 3/8” NPT-F
D 1/2” NPT-F
E 3/4” NPT-F
F 1” NPT-F
060 B B L T * * *
M Monel 400
X A richiesta / On demand
OUT
IN
IN
H
W L W L
Dimensioni L W H M
Dimensions
B 1/4’’ 60 32 29,5 94
Mod. 060-062 • Rev. 0
C 3/8’’ 60 32 29,5 94
D 1/2’’ 65 32 29,5 94
E 3/4’’ 71 35 32,5 97
F 1’’ 80 44 40 106
Le dimensioni, espresse in “mm”, sono indicative e possono subire variazioni senza preavviso. / Dimensions are in “mm” for reference only, and may be changed without notice.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Valves that are destined for use within the European Economic Area are 3. Installation notes
CLASSIÚEDINCATEGORIES)TO)))INACCORDANCEWITHINCREASINGPOTENTIAL
HAZARD Prior to installation checks must be carried out to test whether the ball
4HENOMINALDIAMETERPRESSUREANDÛUIDGROUPHAZARDOUSORNON
valve design corresponds to the required design and is suitable for the
HAZARDOUSÛUIDS ARETAKENINTOACCOUNTFORTHECLASSIÚCATION intended use. The installation of ball valves may only be carried out by
QUALIÚEDPERSONNELANDWHILETHEBALLVALVEANDPIPESYSTEMAREUNPRES
&LUIDGROUPINCLUDESHAZARDOUSÛUIDSINACCORDANCEWITH!RTICLEOF SURIZED4HEPIPELINESMUSTBEINTRODUCEDTOTHEÚTTINGSWITHOUTTENSION
Directive 97/23/EG. The valve valves must be inspected for damage and contamination before
installation. Damaged ball valves must not be installed.
p0OTENTIALLYEXPLOSIVE All the pipelines must be rinsed before the ball valves are installed.
p%XTREMELYÛAMMABLE Residue in the pipelines can damage internal parts and this can result in
p(IGHLYÛAMMABLE malfunction or complete failure of the ball valve.
p&LAMMABLEIFTHEMAXPERMITTEDTEMPERATUREISABOVETHEÛASHPOINT
p 4OXIC Please ensure during installation of the ball valves that no external tensi-
p/XIDIZING ons or vibrations are transferred to the ball valve.
When the piping is screwed in the screw on the ball valve must be held
&LUIDGROUPINCLUDESALLÛUIDSTHATDONOTHAVEANYOFTHECHARACTERISTICS with a suitable tool. The ball valve connections must not be subjected
INÛUIDGROUP to any additional torsional moment that would change their installation
position and thus prevent provision of function.
"ALLVALVESWITHANOMINALDIAMETEROFMORETHAN$.FORÛUIDGROUP Overheating of the seals must be prevented on ball valves with welded
MUSTBELABELEDAS#%"ALLVALVESFORÛUIDSINÛUIDGROUPARENOT ends by using suitable measures. When welding is carried out it must also
labeled with a CE mark. The buyer is obliged to inform the manufacturer/ be ensured that no welding particles enter the internal space. Welding
SUPPLIERIFBALLVALVESAREDESTINEDFORAPPLICATIONINÛUIDGROUP)FNO residue must be removed.
INFORMATIONISPROVIDEDONTHEMEDIUMFORUSEITISASSUMEDTHATÛUIDS "ALLVALVESWITHÛANGECONNECTIONSMUSTBECENTEREDBYSCREWINGTHE
FROMÛUIDGROUPWILLBEUSED COUNTERÛANGEBEFOREALLTHESCREWSONTHEÛANGECONNECTIONARETIGHTENED
CROSSWISE!NUNDAMAGEDSEALMUSTBEUSEDBETWEENTHEÛANGESAS
The ball valve and seal materials are selected by the manufacturer in prescribed in the norm. The spacer bolts or connecting screws must be
accordance with customer information such as medium, pressure, tempe- SELECTEDINACCORDANCEWITHTHEÛANGETYPES7ITHTHREADHOLESITMUSTBE
RATUREANDOTHERUSE
SPECIÚCREQUIREMENTS)FTHECONDITIONSOFUSEVARY ensured that the maximum screwing depth is not exceeded.
from the information provided then the lifespan of the ball valve may be
reduced or the ball valve may malfunction. The material combinations and Switching must be carried out as a function test after the ball valve has
CONDITIONSFORUSETHATARESPECIÚEDBASEDONTHEDESIGNCANBEFOUNDIN been installed. No parts of the ball valve (e.g. cover, connecting piece)
the following labeling on the ball valve. MAYBERELEASEDORSCREWEDDOWN)NTHECASEOFMEDIATHATAREHAZAR
DOUSTOHEALTHÛAMMABLEOREXPLOSIVEITMUSTBEENSUREDTHATTHEPIPE
1st Line: Germany x-y country of manufacture, x = calendar system and ball valve are completely emptied.
week, y = year
7ATCHOUTFORANYRESIDUEÛOWINGTHROUGH!PPROPRIATEPROTECTIVE
2nd Line: MHA manufacturer CLOTHINGMUSTBEWORN4HEÚTTINGMAYNEEDTOBEPLACEDINTHEPIPING
using lifting gear.
3rd Line: BKH-DN13-G1/2 valve type, nominal diameter, connection
TYPESIZE Please observe the switch position of the ball valve according to the
4th Line: PN500 - 1123 nominal pressure, MHA material combi- piping plan. Pressure stage, connection and construction length of the
nation piping system must correspond to the ball valve. The operating instruc-
tions of the relevant manufacturer must be taken into account with regard
to system parts.
(For more information on MHA material combinations, please see p. 242.)
4. Initial operation
2. General
All operating instructions must be read and observed prior to initial
"ALLVALVESAREPRESSURIZEDFORTHETRANSPORTATIONSHUTTINGOFFORREDIREC
operation and assembly work must be inspected. Initial operation of a
TIONOFMEDIAÛOW(AZARDSAREPRESENTEDBYÚTTINGSINTHEHIGH
PRESSURE SYSTEMMAYONLYBECARRIEDOUTBYQUALIÚEDPERSONNEL4HEPIPINGSYSTEM
area if there is a case of improper or incorrect use or if the safety notes in must be bled prior to initial operation. Air bubbles in the piping system
these operating instructions are not observed. can cause explosions in the event of a sudden increase of pressure. This is
why the operating pressure should be increased in stages.
The customer must take the operating pressures (pressure surges/impulse If the ball valve is stored for a long period, or if it is at a standstill for a
pressures) into account during the planning and design of ball valves. longer period in one switch position, then the torsional moment for the
Pressure information in the catalog refers to static loads. The correspon- ÚRSTSWITCHINGPROCESSISSUBSTANTIALLYABOVETHEACTUALTORSIONALMOMENT
ding pressure reductions must be taken into account for pulsating or (pull-off moment).
changing loads.
)FBALLVALVESAREINSTALLEDINTHEPIPINGSYSTEMASENDÚTTINGSTHEREIS
Ball valves are only suitable for installation in piping systems with con- particular risk of death from parts sheering off. Professional execution is
nections at the same pressure load and corresponding connections or bet- absolutely essential in this case.
WEENÛANGESOFTHESAMEPRESSURELOADANDTHESAMEÛANGECONNECTION
Two-way ball valves open and close by turning the selector shaft by 90°.
!ÛOWDISPLAYSHOWSTHEPOSITIONTHEBALLVALVEISSWITCHEDTO4HEBALL
270 10.04.2015
Operating manual for ball valves
In accordance with Directive 97/23/EC
5. Maintenance / Inspection #AUTION$ANGERTOHUMANLIFEØ
3PECIÚCWARNINGNOTESEGREGARDINGTHEWEARINGOFGLOVESFORSWITCHING
When the piping system is drained the ball valves must be drained via a must be heeded (the ball valves take on the temperature of the medium).
switch position of 45°. Ball valves may only be dismantled and maintained !NYSTRUCTURALMODIÚCATIONTOTHEBALLVALVEPARTICULARLYTHEADDITIONOF
by trained, specialist personnel. No makeshift seals of any kind are permit- drill holes and the welding on of objects (plates, mounts etc.) is strictly
ted. Ball valves must be inspected at regular intervals for leaks, malfunc- prohibited.
tion and damage. The maintenance intervals depend on the conditions of )NTHEEVENTOFMALFUNCTIONSTHEBALLVALVEMUSTBEEXCHANGEDBYQUALIÚED
USEOFTHEÚTTING PERSONNELWITHTHEPIPESYSTEMINANUNPRESSURIZEDANDDRAINEDCONDI
tion. Systems must be switched off before the ball valve is dismantled.
In order to retain functionality the ball valve must be switched at least eve-
ry six months in the event of longer standstill periods. If discrepancies to Only the manufacturer is permitted to carry out repairs. If the ball valve
the desired status are discovered during this maintenance work, measures ISDISMANTLEDWITHOUTPERMISSIONANDBYUNQUALIÚEDPERSONNELTHISWILL
must be undertaken immediately to ensure safe operating conditions render any warranty or damage claim made against the manufacturer null
(exchange or repair). and void. National regulations on accident prevention and the local safety
regulations of the operator are not replaced by these operating instruc-
tions and must always be regarded as overriding.
7. Warning notes
Please take note of these operating instructions. The manufacturer of the
ball valves does not accept any liability if these operating instructions are
not heeded.
Ball valves must only be used for the purpose stated by the manufacturer.
The manufacturer will also not accept liability in the event of damage
caused by the incorrect installation and use of ball valves or by incorrect
USEBYUNQUALIÚEDPERSONNEL Lock valve adapter during No welding, boring or other
Ball valves must always be switched fully in principle. They may only be pipe installation! MODIÚCATIONATTHEVALVEØ
used in the switch positions fully closed or fully open.
"ALLVALVESARENOTSUITABLEFORTHERESTRICTIONORREGULATIONOFÛOWQUANTI
ties and are not approved for this use. Indifferent switching positions lead
to damage to the seals in the ball area, which result in leaks or altered
torsional moments that can be accompanied by temperature rises at the
surface.
Tools (e.g. pliers, hammers, open-end wrenches, extensions etc.) may not
bar
be used to switch the ball valves. The use of such tools can lead to damage
to switching elements and casings. Ball valves may not be switched by
force.
Ball valves must be stored in a dry and clean condition as delivered. Pro-
tective caps must only be removed just before actual installation.
18.12.2015 271
Ball valve for manifold mounting PKH
Stainless Steel
K
SW1
H2
H1
H
LW
h
m
l
SW2
B
AVAILABLE SIZES
Manifold
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
126 10.04.2015
Ball valve for manifold mounting PKH
Stainless Steel
CONNECTION
d4/xt
d3
d5 (DN40)
b
d1
h1
l4
d2
o-rings belong
O-rings
to delivery l5
included l1 l3 l3
l2
Manifold
ORDER CODE PER MA-
CONNECTION DIMENSIONS TERIAL COMBINATION
PKH-DN6 8,5 35 - 8,5 35 27 6 11,8 1,9 6,5 10,5 6,8 - 4 x M6x40 - 12.9 14 7x2,5 500 21337 28244
PKH-DN10 7,5 55 - 10 44 40 9,5 14,9 1,9 8,4 13,5 8,5 - 4 x M8x50 - 12.9 35 10x2,5 500 10053 29747
PKH-DN13 7,5 83 41,5 16 58 45 13 24,9 1,9 8,4 13,5 7 - 6 x M8x60 - 12.9 35 20x2,5 420 25439 18041
PKH-DN20 10 97 48,5 20 69 51 20 29 2 10,5 16,5 10,5 - 6 x M10x80 - 12.9 70 23,47x2,62 420 28598 38365
PKH-DN25 10 115 57,5 24 81 60 25 34,9 2,3 10,5 16,5 10,5 - 6 x M10x90 - 12.9 70 29x3 420 33708 32060
PKH-DN32 12 136 68 29 96 78 32 40 2 13 19 12 - 6 x M12x110 - 12.9 110 34,59 x 2,62 420 59601 59602
PKH-DN40 28,5 112 56 28,5 112 95 38 47,7 2,3 16,5 25 19 36 6 x M16x120 - 12.9 300 42x3 420 36117 38367
PKH-DN50 38 136 68 38 136 112 48 59,8 2,3 21 31 21,5 - 6 x M20x140 - 12.9 600 54x3 420 38368 38369
(1)
Fixing screws not included.
We recommend screws as per ISO4762 (DIN 912). FLOW CHARACTERISTICS PKH
The indicated property classes and torques represent our ∆p‐Q characteris5cs
recommended guidelines at a friction coeficient of 14%. PKH
DN50
1000
DN40
DN32
DN25
DN20
DN16/12
100
DN10
Q(l/min)
Q [l/min]
DN6
10
1
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4
∆p∆p [bar]
(bar)
10.04.2015 127
9.24 SCHEDA TECNICA STOP VALVE EFFEBI
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
* su richiesta
• ESECUZIONE COSTRUTTIVA: AISI 316L. VALVOLA di Intercettazione (ON-OFF) per: Impianti industriali ad
• PRESCRIZIONI GENERALI: BS EN ISO 17292:2004. alta pressione e temperatura, per impianti chimici e petrolchimici,
• CERTIFICAZIONI: FIRE SAFE secondo BS 6755 - API 6 FA - API 607 per impianti idraulici e pneumatici, per vapore ino a 195°C.
(solo PTFE+CRB). Per utilizzi speciali veriicare la compatibilità con le caratteristiche
• A RICHIESTA: FIRE SAFE ANSI/API STD. 607 ISO 10497:2010 del processo e la resistenza alla corrosione anche mediante la
Nace MR 0.175 (non disponibile su bulloneria). apposita tabella.
• ATTACCHI: F/F Rp UNI ISO 7/1 (UNI EN 10226)
DIN2999 ilettatura cilindrica ESECUZIONI SPECIALI:
SW ANSI B16.11 a saldare di tasca
BW ANSI B16.25 a saldare di testa. • ATTACCHI: F/F NPT ANSI B1.20.1.
S.800-1500 sch.80 std. • VALVOLE SGRASSATE: per ossigeno Max 20 bar.
S.3000-S.6000 sch.160 std. • Foratura di equilibrio sulla sfera.
• PRESSIONI: • Peek per alte temperature ino a +280°C - (ino al 2").
SERIE 800: PN64 1/4” - 4” PTFE. • A richiesta sch. diverse dallo standard indicato.
SERIE 1500: PN100 1/4” - 2” PTFE. • Dispositivo di bloccaggio (aperto/chiuso).
PN 160/120/64: PN160 1/4” - 1” CARBOGRAFITE • Volantino ovale ino a 1"
PN120 1”1/4 - 2” CARBOGRAFITE • Per ulteriori richieste speciali consultare il nostro servizio
PN64 2”1/2 - 4” CARBOGRAFITE. tecnico/commerciale.
SERIE 3000: PN210 1/4” - 4” DELRIN (max 70°C).
• LIMITI DI TEMPERATURA:
-20°C / +180°C - PTFE
ino +200°C - PTFE+CARBOGRAFITE
(condizione ottimale da 60°C a 200°C).
-20° / +70°C - DELRIN.
• STELO: antiscoppio e con dispositivo antistatico.
• ORGANO DI MANOVRA: leva. Colori disponibili nero, rosso.
SEZIONATO
ATTACCHI SW
ATTACCHI BW
VALVOLE INDUSTRIALI
SIZE A B D E L LBW M N S R WEIGHT g. GAS WEIGHT g. SW WEIGHT g. BW Kv
1/4" 72 10 42 148 67 95 11 14,3 9,53 13,7 610 610 630 11
3/8" 72 10 42 148 67 95 11,4 17,8 9,53 17,2 615 615 650 11
1/2" 75 15 50 148 75 105 15 22 9,53 21,3 930 930 1050 20
3/4" 85 20 60 180 90 125 16,3 27,3 12,7 26,7 1550 1550 1600 60
1" 95 25 68 180 105 140 19,1 34 12,7 33,4 2265 2265 2350 100
1"1/4 100 30 81 240 120 160 21,4 42,8 12,7 42,2 3300 3300 3400 130
1"1/2 105 38 94 240 135 180 21,4 48,9 12,7 48,3 4850 4850 5400 170
2" 115 48 105 280 155 220 25,7 61,4 15,88 60,3 6490 6490 6800 280
2"1/2 130 65 130 380 190 250 30,2 73,81 15,22 73,1 13000 13000 13400 510
3" 145 73 150 380 205 280 33,3 90 15,88 88,9 17000 17000 17500 770
4" 200 94 185 470 230 330 39,3 115,7 19,1 114,3 24000 24000 24500 1200
COPPIE DI SPUNTO (BREAKAWAY) in Nm DIAGRAMMA PRESSIONE / TEMPERATURA
DN 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 (Bar)
size 1/4" - 3/8" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"1/4 1"1/2 2" 2"1/2 3" 4"
0 10 12 16 21 54 65 86 140 183 270
PN - bar
233
9.25 SCHEDA TECNICA VALVOLA PROTEZIONE SERBATOIO
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
BODY INOX-AISI316L
Technical features
Temperature range ( C) -55 +60
Pressure craking (BAR) 0,15
Mass (Kg) 1,4
Dimension 60
80
4,5
M5
30
DRILLING SURFACE:
N 4 HOLES M5 ON 50
N 1 HOLES 30
50
9.26 DOCUMENTAZIONE TUBI FLESSIBILI
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
492
Elite No-Skive Compact
EN 857 1SC – ISO 11237 Type 1SC
Pressure Rating
NBY min.
1BSU/VNCFS Hose Hose working burst min. bend
weight
I.D. O.D. pressure pressure radius
492 <tab>Hose
DN
DN Inch
Zoll Size
size mm
mm mm
OD MPa
MPa1 psi
psi1 MPa
MPa2 psi
psi2 mm
Bend kg
weight
492-4 6 1/4 -4 6.4 11.5 28.0 4060 112.0 16240 75 0.18
492-5 8 5/16 -5 7.9 13.6 25.0 3625 100.0 14500 85 0.21
492-6 10 3/8 -6 9.5 15.5 22.5 3260 90.0 13050 90 0.25
492-8 12 1/2 -8 12.7 18.9 19.0 2755 76.0 11020 130 0.33
492-10 16 5/8 -10 15.9 22.2 15.0 2175 60.0 8700 150 0.41
492-12 19 3/4 -12 19.1 26.0 15.0 2175 60.0 8700 180 0.56
492-16 25 1 -16 25.4 33.3 11.0 1595 44.0 6380 230 0.75
492-20-WR 31 1 1/4 -20 31.8 40.0 7.5 1085 30.0 4350 335 0.93
Part Number without a suffix: the hose cover has a smooth appearance. Part Number with a suffix (WR): the hose cover has a wrapped appearance.
The combination of high temperature and high pressure could reduce the hose life.
Also available in reels up to size -16 under part number 492-xx-RL
811
No-Skive Suction and Return Line
SAE 100R4
Type Approvals
Details please find on pages Ab-16 to Ab-19
Hose
Pressure Rating
NBY min.
1BSU/VNCFS Hose Hose working burst min. bend
7BDDVN weight
I.D. O.D. pressure pressure radius
811 <tab>Hose_vac
DN
DN Inch
Zoll Size
size mm
mm mm
OD MPa
MPa1 psi
psi1 MPa
MPa2 psi
psi2 kPa
VAC mm
Bend kg
weight
811-12 19 3/4 -12 19.1 30.0 2.1 300 8.3 1200 85 65 0.63
811-16 25 1 -16 25.4 38.0 1.7 250 6.9 1000 85 75 0.96
811-20 31 1 1/4 -20 31.8 45.0 1.4 200 5.5 800 85 100 1.22
811-24 38 1 1/2 -24 38.1 52.0 1.0 150 4.1 600 85 130 1.55
811-32 51 2 -32 50.8 64.0 0.7 100 2.8 400 85 150 1.87
811-40 63 2 1/2 -40 63.5 75.0 0.4 62 1.6 248 85 180 2.45
811-48 76 3 -48 76.2 90.0 0.4 62 1.6 248 85 230 3.20
*1 = the vacuum values listed in the table are vacuum pressure values in kPa. For an absolute value subtract the table value from 101 kPa.
** size -12 and size -16 = on Parkrimp 2 crimping press or adjustable crimpers only.
The combination of high temperature and high pressure could reduce the hose life.
462
Elite No-Skive Compact
Exceeds EN 857-2SC – ISO 11237 Type 2SC
NBY min.
1BSU/VNCFS Hose Hose working burst min. bend
weight
I.D. O.D. pressure pressure radius
462 <tab>Hose
DN
DN Inch
Zoll Size
size mm
mm mm
OD MPa
MPa1 psi
psi1 MPa
MPa2 psi
psi2 mm
Bend kg
weight
462-4 6 1/4 -4 6.4 13.4 42.5 6160 170.0 24640 75 0.30
462-5 8 5/16 -5 7.9 15.0 40.0 5800 160.0 23200 85 0.35
462-6 10 3/8 -6 9.5 17.2 35.0 5075 140.0 20300 90 0.42
462-8 12 1/2 -8 12.7 20.4 31.0 4495 124.0 17980 130 0.52
462-10 16 5/8 -10 15.9 23.9 28.0 4060 112.0 16240 160 0.66
462-12 19 3/4 -12 19.1 27.7 28.0 4060 112.0 16240 195 0.86
462-16 25 1 -16 25.4 35.4 21.0 3045 84.0 12180 250 1.17
462-20-WR * 31 1 1/4 -20 31.8 45.1 17.2 2495 68.8 9980 335 1.80
462-20 ** 31 1 1/4 -20 31.8 45.1 17.2 2495 68.8 9980 335 1.80
The combination of high temperature and high pressure could reduce the hose life.
From size -4 to -16, smooth cover, both 462-20-WR and 462-20 wrapped cover
Also available in reels up to size -12 under part number 462-xx-RL
* 462-20-WR only with fitting series 46
** 462-20 only with fitting series 48
Artículo DN R1 L L1 L2 HEX 1 ØC
La información recogida en esta ficha (Catálogo) es de carácter orientativo y puede ser modificada sin previo aviso. DICSA no se hace responsable de una incorrecta utilización
del producto, salvo las referentes a defectos de fabricación.
Artículo DN R1 L L1 HEX 1 ØC
La información recogida en esta ficha (Catálogo) es de carácter orientativo y puede ser modificada sin previo aviso. DICSA no se hace responsable de una incorrecta utilización
del producto, salvo las referentes a defectos de fabricación.
Artículo DN R1 L L1 HEX 1 ØC
La información recogida en esta ficha (Catálogo) es de carácter orientativo y puede ser modificada sin previo aviso. DICSA no se hace responsable de una incorrecta utilización
del producto, salvo las referentes a defectos de fabricación.
23$-"(4#"%&,+50$(24)4(6789: +.+
,3456%'( 71 083&8 9 :, :! :7 :;
!"#$%&'()"*$+%#(,*'-$."#,%#,/0"#&$*1"#23"045'-'6#,/#.,#*"(4*0,(#'($,%0"0$7'#8#9:,.,#/,(#)'.$&$*"."#/$%#9(,7$'#"7$/';#<=3>?#%'#/,#1"*,#(,/9'%/"@5,#.,#:%"#$%*'((,*0"#:0$5$A"*$+%
.,5#9('.:*0'B#/"57'#5"/#(,&,(,%0,/#"#.,&,*0'/#.,#&"@($*"*$+%;
4H1-$'"($0I(C@;C@;?C78(+(0+'(7AIEA
PI 1.110
Abnahme / Approval
Die Speicher dieser Serie sind grundsätzlich nach der Europäischen
Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG hergestellt, geprüft und dokumentiert.
Andere Abnahmen auf Anfrage.
All accumulators of this range are manufactured, approved and certified according Directive
97/23/EC of the European Parliament. Other approvals on request.
Fertigungstoleranzen sind nicht berücksichtigt / Manufacturing tolerances are not considered. Stand 11/11
PI 1.110
Position
3 Körper Shell
4 Blase komplett ød* Bladder assembly
5 Blase Bladder
13 Haltemutter Lock nut
14 Gasfüllventil komplett Gas valve assembly
15 Körper Gasfüllventil Gas valve body
16 Gasventileinsatz Gas valve core
17 O-Ring O-ring
18 O-Ring O-ring
19 Hutmutter Cap
24 Schutzkappe Protective cap
25 Ölventil komplett Oil port assembly
Ölventilkörper m. Oil port body with poppet
26
Ventilteller valve
33 Geteilter Ring Anti extrusion ring
37 O-Ring O-ring
38 Stützring Back-up-ring
39 Distanzring Washer
40 Nutmutter Locking ring
46 Firmenschild Name plate
50 O-Ring O-ring
Beispiel Example
d = ø16 mm EHV 0.5
d = ø22 mm EHV 2.5
Fertigungstoleranzen sind nicht berücksichtigt / Manufacturing tolerances are not considered. Stand 11/11
Product Data Sheet
October 2013
00813-0100-4690, Rev NB
Protocols available include 4-20 mA HART® and 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power
Contents
Rosemount 2088 In-line Pressure Transmitter . . . page 3 Product Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 11
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 14
2 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
Additional Information
Specifications : page 8
Product Certifications : page 11
Dimensional Drawings : page 14
Ordering Information
Table 1. Rosemount 2088 Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is manufactured after receipt of order and is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model Product description
Standard Standard
2088 Pressure Transmitter ★
Code Measurement Type
Standard Standard
A Absolute ★
G Gage ★
Code Pressure Ranges
Standard Standard
2088G 2088A
1 -14.7 to 30 psi /(-1,01 to 2,1 bar) 0 to 30 psi (0 to 2,1 bar) ★
2 -14.7 to 150 psi (-1,01 to 10,3 bar) 0 to 150 psi (0 to 10,3 bar) ★
3 -14.7 to 800 psi (-1,01 to 55,2 bar) 0 to 800 psi (0 to 55,2 bar) ★
4 -14.7 to 4,000 psi (-1,01 to 275,8 bar) 0 to 4,000 psi (0 to 275,8 bar) ★
Code Transmitter Output
Standard Standard
S (1) 4–20 mA dc/Digital HART® Protocol ★
N(1) 1-5 Vdc Low Power/ Digital HART protocol ★
www.rosemount.com 3
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Expanded
C(3)(4) RC ½ Female
Code Conduit Entry
Standard Standard
1 ½–14 NPT ★
Expanded
4(3) G½
4 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
NK IECEx Dust ★
Shipboard Approvals
Standard Standard
SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval ★
SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval ★
SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval ★
SLL Lloyd's Register (LR) Type Approval ★
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1 Hydrostatic testing
Terminal Blocks
Standard Standard
T1 Transient protection ★
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2 Cleaning for special service
Calibration Certificate
Standard Standard
Q4 Calibration certificate ★
www.rosemount.com 5
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
C5 (8)(9) Custom alarm and saturation levels, high alarm, (Requires C9 and Configuration Data Sheet) ★
★
C7(8)(9) Custom alarm and saturation levels, low alarm (Requires C9 and Configuration Data Sheet)
C8(9) Low alarm (Standard Rosemount Alarm and Saturation Levels) ★
Configuration
Standard Standard
C9 Software configuration ★
Manifold Assemblies
Standard Standard
(5)(6) Assemble to Rosemount 306 integral manifold ★
S5
Calibration Accuracy
Standard Standard
P8(10) 0.065% accuracy to 10:1 turndown ★
Water Approval
Standard Standard
DW(11) NSF drinking water approval ★
Surface Finish
Standard Standard
Q16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals ★
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard Standard
QZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★
HART Revision Configuration
Standard Standard
(9)(12) Configured for HART Revision 5 ★
HR 5
★
HR7 (9)(13) Configured for HART Revision 7
Typical Model Number: 2088 G 2 S 22 A 1 B4 M5
(1) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The 2088 with selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory
configured, add option code HR7.
6 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
(2) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(4) Not available with Alloy C-276, Material of Construction code 33.
(6) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(8) Only available with 4-20 mA HART Output (Output Code A).
(9) Select Configuration Buttons (option code D4 or DZ) or Local Operator Interface (option code M4) if local configuration buttons are required.
(10) Requires Transmitter Output code S with either Materials of Construction code 22 or 23.
(12) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(13) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
www.rosemount.com 7
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Specifications
Performance Specifications Functional Specifications
For zero-based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, 316L
Table 2. 2088 Range Values
SST isolating diaphragm.
Minimum Upper Lower Lower(1)
Reference Accuracy Range
Span (URL) (LRL) (LRL) (Gage)
±0.075% of calibrated span. Includes combined effects of
0.60 psi 30.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability 1
(41,37 mbar) (2,07 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
±0.065% of calibrated span (high accuracy option - P8)
3.00 psi 150.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy = 2
(206,85 mbar) (10,34 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
16.00 psi 800.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
± 0.009 ------------- % of Span
URL 3
Span (1,11 bar) (55,16 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
80.00 psi 4000.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
4
Ambient Temperature Effect (5,52 bar) (275,79 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
Expressed as a total effect per 50 °F (28 °C)
(1) Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.70 psia (1,01 bar-a).
Total effect includes zero and span effects.
± (0.15% URL + 0.15% of span)
Output
Stability Code S: 4–20 mA
Ranges 2-4: ±0.10% of URL for 3 years Code N: 1-5 Vdc, low power
Range 1: ±0.10% of URL for 1 year (Outputs are directly proportional to the input pressure)
Less than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt change in voltage Service
at the transmitter terminals. Liquid, gas, and vapor applications
General Specifications
Tested to IEC 801-3
8 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
1000
Silicone fill sensor: –40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
Inert fill sensor: –22 to 250 °F (–30 to 121 °C)(2)
500 Operating
Region Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the
ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio. For example, for process
0
temperature of 195 °F (91 °C), new ambient temperature limit is
10.5 20 30 42.4 equal to 170 °F (77 °C). This can be determined as follows: (195
Voltage (Vdc) °F - 185 °F) x 1.5 = 15 °F, 185 °F - 15 °F = 170 °F
The Field communicator requires a minimum loop resistance of
250W for communication. Humidity Limits
0–100% relative humidity
Indication Volumetric Displacement
Optional two line LCD/LOI Display. Less than 0.0005 in3 (0,008 cm3)
Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements Damping
Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range
Analog output response time to a step change is user-selectable
limits stated in Table 2 on page 8. Span must be greater than
from 0 to 60 seconds for one time constant. Software damping
or equal to the minimum span stated in Table 2 on page 8.
is in addition to sensor module response time.
Local Operator Interface
Turn-on Time
The LOI utilizes a 2 button menu with internal and external
2.0 seconds, no warm-up required
configuration buttons. Internal buttons are always configured
for Local Operator Interface. External Buttons can be configured Transmitter Security
for either LOI, (option code M4), Analog Zero and Span (option Activating the transmitter security function prevents changes to
code D4) or Digital Zero Trim (option code DZ) for LOI the transmitter configuration, including local zero and span
configuration menu. adjustments. Security is activated by an internal switch.
Current Draw Failure Mode Alarm
Output Code N: 3 mA. If self-diagnostics detect a sensor or microprocessor failure, the
Overpressure Limits analog signal will be driven either high or low to alert the user.
High or low failure mode is user-selectable with a jumper on the
Range 1: 120 psig max
transmitter. The values to which the transmitter drives its
All other ranges: two times the URL
output in failure mode depend on whether it is
Burst Pressure factory-configured to standard or NAMUR-compliant operation.
11,000 psi for all ranges The values for each are as follows:
Standard Operation
Zero Elevation and Suppression
Zero can be suppressed between atmosphere for gage Output Code Linear Output Fail High Fail Low
transmitters or 0 psia for absolute transmitters and upper range S 3.9 I 20.8 I 21.75 mA I 3.75 mA
limit, provided the calibrated span is equal to or greater than the N 0.97 V 5.2 V 5.4 V V 0.95 V
minimum span, and the upper range value does not exceed the
NAMUR-Compliant Operation
upper range limit.
Output Code Linear Output Fail High Fail Low
Dynamic Performance
S 3.8 I 20.5 I 22.5 mA I 3.6 mA
Total Response Time: 145 milliseconds
Update rate: 20 times per second minimum
(2) 220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures
below 0.5 psia.
www.rosemount.com 9
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Physical Specifications
Electrical Connections
/ –14 NPT, M20 1.5 (CM20), or
1 2
Process Connections
1
/2–14 NPT female, DIN 16288 G 1/2 male, RC 1/2 female
(PT 1/2 female), M20 1.5 (CM20) male
Process-Wetted Parts
Isolating Diaphragm
316L SST (UNS S31603), Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276)
Process Connector
316L stainless steel CF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST, material
per ASTM_A743) or Alloy C-276
Non-Wetted Parts
Electronics Housing
Low-copper aluminum, NEMA 4X, IP65, IP67,
CSA enclosure Type 4X
Paint for Aluminum Housing
Polyurethane
Cover O-rings
Buna-N
Fill Fluid
Silicone or inert fill
Weight
Output Code S and N: Approximately 2.44 lb (1, 11 kg)
10 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
Product Certifications
Approved Manufacturing Locations Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Rosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota, USA All CSA hazardous approved transmitters are certified per
Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co. — Wessling, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01-2003.
Germany
C6 Explosion-Proof, Intrinsically Safe, Dust Ignition-Proof and
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific
Class I Division 2
Private Limited — Singapore
Applicable Standards: CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 0-M91, CSA
Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, China
Std. C22.2 No. 25 - 1966, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 30 - M1986,
European Directive Information CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 94 - M91, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 142
- M1987, CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 157-92, CSA Std. C22.2
The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European
No. 213 - M1987, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01-2003.
directives for this product can be found at
Markings: Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B,
www.rosemount.com. A hard copy may be obtained by
C, and D.
contacting an Emerson Process Management representative.
Dust-Ignition-Proof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G,
ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) Class III.
Emerson Process Management complies with the ATEX Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Directive. Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and
D. Temperature Code: T3C.
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Enclosure Type 4X. Factory sealed. Single Seal. See control
2088/2090 Pressure Transmitters drawing 02088-1024.
— Sound Engineering Practice European Certifications
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (2004/108/EC) ED ATEX Flameproof
EN 61326-1:2006 Certification No.: KEMA97ATEX2378X
Applicable Standards: EN60079-0:2006, EN60079-1:2007,
EN60079-26:2007
Hazardous Locations Certifications
Markings: II 1/2 G
North American Certifications Ex d IIC T6 (-40 °C Tamb 40 °C); T4 (-40 °C Tamb 80 °C)
FM Approvals 1180
Vmax = 36 (with Output Code S)
E5 Explosion-proof and Dust Ignition Proof Vmax = 14 (with Output Code N)
Certificate No.: 1V2A8.AE
Special Conditions for Safe Use (x):
Applicable Standards: FM Class 3600 - 1998,
FM Class 3615 - 1989, FM Class 3810 - 1989 1. The cable and conduit entry devices shall be of a certified
Markings: Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, flameproof type Ex d, suitable for the conditions of use and
C, and D. Dust Ignition-Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, correctly installed.
Groups E, F and G. 2. With the use of conduit entries a sealing device shall be
Temperature Code: T5 (Ta = -40 °C to + 85 °C) Factory provided immediately on the entrance thereto.
Sealed, Enclosure Type 4X. 3. Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable Ex d
For input parameters see control drawing 02088-1018. certified blanking elements.
4. Suitable heat-resisting cables shall be used when the
I5 Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive ambient temperature at the cable or conduit entries
Certificate No.: 0V9A7.AX exceed 65 °C.
Applicable Standards: FM Class 3600 - 1998, FM Class 3610 5. This device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation,
- 2010, FM Class 3811 - 2004, FM Class 3810 - 1989. maintenance, and use shall take into account the
Markings: Intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be
Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation
and Class III, Division 1 and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure
Temperature Code: T4 (Ta = 70 °C) in accordance with safety during its expected lifetime.
Rosemount drawing 02088-1018. 6. For information on the dimensions of the flameproof joints
Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. the manufacturer shall be contacted.
Temperature Code: T4 (Ta = 85 °C), Enclosure Type 4X.
For input parameters see control drawing 02088-1018.
www.rosemount.com 11
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Special Conditions For Safe Use (x): K1 I1, N1, ED, and ND combination
1. When fitted with a transient suppression terminal block, K2 I2 and E2 combination
the model 2088 is incapable of passing the 500V isolation
test. This must be taken into account during installation. K5 E5 and I5 combination
2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a K6 C6, I1, and ED combination
protective polyurethane paint finish; however, care should
be taken to protect it from impact or abrasion if located in K7 I7, N7, E7, and NK combination
a zone 0 environment.
KB K5 and C6 combination
E2 INMETRO Flameproof (2088 Series only)
Certification No.: CEPEL 97.0076 KH K5, ED, and I1 combination
Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5 Gb
T6 (-20 °C Tamb +40 °C); T5 (-20 °C Tamb +60 °C)
China Certifications
I3 China Intrinsic Safety
Certification No.: GYJ111063X (2088 Series); GYJ111065X
(2090 Series)
Applicable Standards: GB3836.1-2000, GB3836.4-2000
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4/T5
T4 (-55 °C Tamb +70 °C);T5 (-55 °C Tamb +40 °C)
Table 5. Input Parameters
Ui = 30 V
Ii= 200 mA
Pi= 0.9 W
Ci = 0.012 F
www.rosemount.com 13
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Dimensional Drawings
Rosemount 2088
0.75 (20)
5.13 (130) Certifications
Clearance for
Cover 4.29 (109) Optional Tag
Display Cover 3.85 (98)
Removal
2 ½–14 NPT(1)
Conduit
Connection
Transmitter 4.68
Terminal Circuitry (118)
Connections
5.87
(149)
2 ¼–20 UNC-2B
Mounting Holes
(1)
M20 1.5 Female (CM20), PG 13.5, and G 1/2 Female (PF 1/2 Female)
also available as options.
½–14 NPT Female
Process Connection
(See Ordering Table for other options.)
3.95 (100)
6.15
(156)
2.81
(71)
2.81 (71) 5
/16× 1½ Bolts
for panel mounting
(not supplied)
1/ × 11/ Bolts 1/4× 11/4 Bolts
4 4
for transmitter mounting for transmitter mounting
(not supplied) (not supplied)
1.42 (36)
1.42 (36)
14 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
www.rosemount.com 15
Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-4690, Rev NB October 2013
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
371 spina per innesto rapido
8WLOL]]DUH VHPSUH SHU ILOD FRQWLQXD FRQ FDYR R FRQ WXER DJJLXQJHQGR
O
DFFHVVRULR3UHVVDFDYRFRQFDYRG
LQJUHVVRPLQGLDPHWURPD[GLDP
Download
DXF 2D
G[I
3URGRWWL
+\GUR7FRQQHWWRUH
+\GUR7(/ +\GURFRQQHWWRUHVSLQD +\GUR7
(FKRPRQRODPSDGD/(' (FKRELODPSDGD/('
(FKRELODPSDGD/(' (FKRPRQRODPSDGD/('
+LJK3HUIRUPDQFH HQHUJ\3/86
Contattare il Centro di Consulenza e progettazione per qualsiasi informazione illuminotecnica. PAG 1 - ITA
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per HPU
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for HPU
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di qualsiasi macchina o impianto oleoidraulico e rapportata alla qualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità el i uito. No va di e ti ato he è lo stesso
fluido a p ovvede e alla lu ifi azio e dei o po e ti dell’i pianto.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i dicatore di intasamento posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 10 -/69
DISCHARGE BALL VALVE S800/ 1500 ½”GAS MONOBLOCK
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 11 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 12 -/69
TANK PROTECTION VALVE 19.102.830
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 13 -/69
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 14 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 15 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 16 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 17 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 18 -/69
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 19 -/69
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14 MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 20 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 21 -/69
NEEDLE VALVE 49.020.247
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 22 -/69
HYDRAULIC FILTER FR1.02.396
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 23 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 24 -/69
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.2.B.F.F1.A10.N.P01
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 25 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 26 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 27 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 28 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 29 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 30 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 31 -/69
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR 49.020.239 (SET 97BARG↑)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 32 -/69
CHECK VALVE CAE30/ P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 33 -/69
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 34 -/69
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 35 -/69
RELIEF VALVE LPA30/D–N INOX
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 36 -/69
RELIEF VALVE MVPX4C SET 207 BAR HAWE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 37 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 38 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 39 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 40 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 41 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 42 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 43 -/69
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 44 -/69
3/2 HAND ACTUATED VALVE PK3-S-DN10-448A-SB57(-40°C)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 45 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 46 -/69
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITCH PCS2-GH-40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 47 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 48 -/69
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.245
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 49 -/69
HAND PUMP 19.102.828
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 50 -/69
HYDRAULIC ROTATING PUMP R2,5
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 51 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 52 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 53 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 54 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 55 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 56 -/69
ELECTRIC TEMPERATURE SWITCH TCS2-CH-40/100
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 57 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 58 -/69
LEVEL GAUGE 19.102.605/200/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 59 -/69
OIL POURING PLUG WITH FILTER TA70B10AAP03
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 60 -/69
ELECTRIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER LCT.S52.05/270/350.S.50.GS.E1.L
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 61 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 62 -/69
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50DN63-1/4G-RADIAL BAR/PSI SAFETY GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 63 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 64 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 65 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 66 -/69
ELECTRIC MOTOR M3AA 90LD4 B5 1KW ABB
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 67 -/69
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 68 -/69
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14480 Pages - 69 -/69
(REVA DWG. 19.021.261)
286A BOLT EYES M16 FOR LIFTING 519B 519C OUTLET MANIFOLD
1880,5
558
424C
352C
19 428
M8 33A
528
985
540 413
39B
561 460 39A 352E 379A
559
6
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY 1390 MANIFOLD PUMP/ACCUMULATOR
N 2 HOLES 41
195 1000 195 519A
N 1 HOLE 33 621A
N 1 HOLE 21 800 33B
N 4 HOLES 26 352A 621B
395A
395D
21
195
352B
HYDRAULIC CONNECTION: 379E
A,B=3/4"NPT 352D
371
MASS (WITHOUT OIL)= ~520Kg 359 395B
750
850
1140
MAX OIL LEVEL
3 REVISED CAD ONLY
(WITH EMPTY ACCUMULATOR)=56lt
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
MIN OIL LEVEL=26lt
1 20.05.16 NV REVISED POS. 19 AND OIL TANK
Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
Drawing Number
SPRING TO OPEN
195
2112750010
ELECTRO HYDRAULIC scale date
ACTUATOR 1:15 04.03.16
N 4 SLOTS 18x35 ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
drm chkd
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- Nardone
HI-BAR MJ18
96 Boss Mount Safety Screen
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
jpqkl m n o
Ô¿¿ú¿Ù¿Ù¿Ù
rstuvwxyqzu{|xxwtrw}~{|wxy||{wst}
ÌÍο¿
Ï¿
eeee ¡d¢£¤¥¦g§¦¨g§©¨ªd Ðfd®e«f¶ ¡d¢£¤¥¦g§¦¨g§©¨ªd
ded«d¬d® ̄ ¡d¢£°¨±¡e£eee ÑdÅee«¬e®«Ò ̄ ¡d¢£°¨±Å¡e£fd®e«f¶
²dff®fed¡¡d ¡d¢£³´g¤ À¡eeªf¶d®e ¡d¢£³´g¤
µ¡fd®¶deee ·¥¨¸¹gº¤¦¨¸¹¬¡fd®eªe¡® Ðfd®e«®¡fd®¶ ·¥¨¸¹gº¤¦¨¸¹¬¹¡fd®eªÓe®Ë
®¡fd®¶d¡¡ ®Ë®¡fd®¶d¡e®®
dddd¯ Ů˪d¯
»®d««e e®d¼®ed »¶®e« Ëe®d¼®edÓe®Ë«d¼d¼
¼d¼d«de¼®d¼½d® ¶fÓd
¾¿¿ Ô¿¿
¹®¶ef dededdªe »d®edÅªÒ dª®
dedee¢ÀÁcÁ¤´Ã¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄ ®de®ÀÁcÁ¤´Ã¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄
dede¶f¢Ä¦¤¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄ ¶f¢®Ä¦¤¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄
cdd Ŷe Õd de«®Å¶e
Æd¼dd®®d«d ¦gÇÈÉÊļe¤ Ñd®e¼d¼ ¦gÇÈÉÊļe¤
Æeed®¶d Åd®e¶««e de®e« d®e·¶®fe¡¬Òdª®¯
¬fdededdªe¯ µ® Ö¶®
¹d¶ deËe®d #
!"
K<íK<íOî<;
"
()*+,-.// 0*123, 456-.7 ()*+,-.//456-.7 0*123,
/)..- /)..- /)..- /)..- /)..-
89
;<= AB OIIé;
O ab M aK A
8:9
;< = AB;B AêëêMê J
>?@ ?CDEFCG ì Y*663Q3-5ïQð35)3,Qñ*6ò., ??
21Q8RS6 S68 TV6
68
S8 UWVX93Y ZT77T[6 6W7X]9^ T_
`6 VT TT` V[U6
21QT T888 TV6
68
S8 UWVX93Y ZT77T[6 6W7X]9^
T8 `6 VT TT` 6
21QTR6 T688 TV6
68
S8 UWVX93Y ZT77T[6 6W7X]9^
_
`6 VT TT`Q `[S`
$
21QU U888 TV6
68
S8 UWVX93Y UWVXQ\1( 6W7X]9^ V76 `6 VT TT` T8[6
21QV V888 TV6
68
S8 TX93Y UWVXQ\1( 6W7X]9^ US8 _8 `8 T`7R6 TV[6
21Q6 6888 TV6
68
S8 TX93Y UWVXQ\1( 6W7X]9^ V
8 _8 `8 T`7R6 T6[6
8:9
;<= AB MI;
9;BP A '
8:9
;<= KB;IL N;<OIJ; O ab M aK HIJ
ùQ03-5û.Q,3û+,*-.QQ93û+,*-Qü3-5û.QQ93û+,*-Q03-5û.,
MIBI<îíó9B9BIíM9ôIBIJíõBPóIJö ^+ïRQ0 &
89 óII
89 óII
óB;BP %
8:9 bB 8:9 bB LL
÷ ø ÷ ø
21Q8RS6 Z5Z218S6ù 01234567890
01234567 21QU Z5Z21Uù01234567890
01234567
21QT Z5Z218S6ù 01234567890
01234567 21QV Z5Z21Vù01234567890
01234567 314T`73Y^5
21QTR6 Z5Z21TR6ù 01234567890
01234567 21Q6 Z5Z216ù01234567890
01234567 314T`73Y^5
8:9
8:9
õIJ11
8:9 b 8:9 b KIJ; ^+ïRQ0
ùQ(.ý3,þ3Qò-5+þ3QQ1ýý31þ+,ïQ)3Qò-5+þQQ(.-3,Qò-5+þ.QQ9*ýÿQZ.þ+5û
¾¾Ùä ×ØÙÌÚ
åææ Ï
Î
e¼e ¡d¢£¤¥¦g§¦¨g§©¨ªd Õ®eª¶Û ¡d¢£¤¥¦g§¦¨g§©¨ªd
ÑÅd«¬¶eÖ¶¡®d® ̄ ¡d¢£°¨±dfe ÑdÅܶ« ¡d¢£°¨±¼¡¡e£Õ®eª¶Û
¼eeÅçe¶ ¬À¶ËeÝeËc®eÛ®ÅÅ̄
²dff®fed¡eeª ¡d¢£³´g¤ Þ¶«dß¶Û¼Ë ¡d¢£³´g¤
µ¡fd®¶¼e ·¥¨¸¹gº¤¦¨¸¹¬¹¡fd®eªd¼ Õ®eª®¡fd®¶ªeË ·¥¨¸¹gº¤¦¨¸¹¬Û¡fd®eª¡e®
®¡fçd®¶d¡ef¶ ÅÜeÕd¶«d
d¼e¯ µ¡fd®¶¯
»®d« eeÅÅç®Ëe®d¶¼®ed »®d« ªeªe«àdd«Ë®cÛË®
d¼d¡®«d ¡e®Ñd¼®ed˪
¼¶
å澿¿ Ô¿¿áØØ
¹f dedèdªÅ«ç ÑËⶠcË¡e®dË
dee¢edªÀÁcÁ¤´Ã¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄ ã®dËÀÁcÁ¤´Ã¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄
¶f¢deĦ¤¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄ ߶f¢c®dËĦ¤¬Äe«£ÁÁ̄
Æe Ŷe Õd dË»e¶¡
Æd¼«Åd« ¦gÇÈÉÊĢ綮e¤ Ñdd˶ ¦gÇÈÉÊÄÆded®¤
®®e fe¡d®e·¶e¬¶¡® ÃdÛe¶« ²®Ë¶®¬decË¡e®d˯
dedèdªÅ«ç¯ ÀªdË¡ À¶ÅÀÅd«
²çf®e ¶¡d
cdefghi
PI 1.110
Abnahme / Approval
Die Speicher dieser Serie sind grundsätzlich nach der Europäischen
Druckgeräterichtlinie 97/23/EG hergestellt, geprüft und dokumentiert.
Andere Abnahmen auf Anfrage.
All accumulators of this range are manufactured, approved and certified according Directive
97/23/EC of the European Parliament. Other approvals on request.
Fertigungstoleranzen sind nicht berücksichtigt / Manufacturing tolerances are not considered. Stand 11/11
PI 1.110
Position
3 Körper Shell
4 Blase komplett ød* Bladder assembly
5 Blase Bladder
13 Haltemutter Lock nut
14 Gasfüllventil komplett Gas valve assembly
15 Körper Gasfüllventil Gas valve body
16 Gasventileinsatz Gas valve core
17 O-Ring O-ring
18 O-Ring O-ring
19 Hutmutter Cap
24 Schutzkappe Protective cap
25 Ölventil komplett Oil port assembly
Ölventilkörper m. Oil port body with poppet
26
Ventilteller valve
33 Geteilter Ring Anti extrusion ring
37 O-Ring O-ring
38 Stützring Back-up-ring
39 Distanzring Washer
40 Nutmutter Locking ring
46 Firmenschild Name plate
50 O-Ring O-ring
Beispiel Example
d = ø16 mm EHV 0.5
d = ø22 mm EHV 2.5
Fertigungstoleranzen sind nicht berücksichtigt / Manufacturing tolerances are not considered. Stand 11/11
Product Data Sheet
October 2013
00813-0100-4690, Rev NB
Protocols available include 4-20 mA HART® and 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power
Contents
Rosemount 2088 In-line Pressure Transmitter . . . page 3 Product Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 11
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 14
2 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
Additional Information
Specifications : page 8
Product Certifications : page 11
Dimensional Drawings : page 14
Ordering Information
Table 1. Rosemount 2088 Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
★ The Standard offering represents the most common options. The starred options (★) should be selected for best delivery.
__The Expanded offering is manufactured after receipt of order and is subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model Product description
Standard Standard
2088 Pressure Transmitter ★
Code Measurement Type
Standard Standard
A Absolute ★
G Gage ★
Code Pressure Ranges
Standard Standard
2088G 2088A
1 -14.7 to 30 psi /(-1,01 to 2,1 bar) 0 to 30 psi (0 to 2,1 bar) ★
2 -14.7 to 150 psi (-1,01 to 10,3 bar) 0 to 150 psi (0 to 10,3 bar) ★
3 -14.7 to 800 psi (-1,01 to 55,2 bar) 0 to 800 psi (0 to 55,2 bar) ★
4 -14.7 to 4,000 psi (-1,01 to 275,8 bar) 0 to 4,000 psi (0 to 275,8 bar) ★
Code Transmitter Output
Standard Standard
S (1) 4–20 mA dc/Digital HART® Protocol ★
N(1) 1-5 Vdc Low Power/ Digital HART protocol ★
www.rosemount.com 3
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Expanded
C(3)(4) RC ½ Female
Code Conduit Entry
Standard Standard
1 ½–14 NPT ★
Expanded
4(3) G½
4 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
NK IECEx Dust ★
Shipboard Approvals
Standard Standard
SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval ★
SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval ★
SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval ★
SLL Lloyd's Register (LR) Type Approval ★
Pressure Testing
Expanded
P1 Hydrostatic testing
Terminal Blocks
Standard Standard
T1 Transient protection ★
Special Cleaning
Expanded
P2 Cleaning for special service
Calibration Certificate
Standard Standard
Q4 Calibration certificate ★
www.rosemount.com 5
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
C5 (8)(9) Custom alarm and saturation levels, high alarm, (Requires C9 and Configuration Data Sheet) ★
★
C7(8)(9) Custom alarm and saturation levels, low alarm (Requires C9 and Configuration Data Sheet)
C8(9) Low alarm (Standard Rosemount Alarm and Saturation Levels) ★
Configuration
Standard Standard
C9 Software configuration ★
Manifold Assemblies
Standard Standard
(5)(6) Assemble to Rosemount 306 integral manifold ★
S5
Calibration Accuracy
Standard Standard
P8(10) 0.065% accuracy to 10:1 turndown ★
Water Approval
Standard Standard
DW(11) NSF drinking water approval ★
Surface Finish
Standard Standard
Q16 Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals ★
Toolkit Total System Performance Reports
Standard Standard
QZ Remote Seal System Performance Calculation Report ★
HART Revision Configuration
Standard Standard
(9)(12) Configured for HART Revision 5 ★
HR 5
★
HR7 (9)(13) Configured for HART Revision 7
Typical Model Number: 2088 G 2 S 22 A 1 B4 M5
(1) HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The 2088 with selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory
configured, add option code HR7.
6 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
(2) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
(4) Not available with Alloy C-276, Material of Construction code 33.
(6) “Assemble-to” items are specified separately and require a completed model number.
(8) Only available with 4-20 mA HART Output (Output Code A).
(9) Select Configuration Buttons (option code D4 or DZ) or Local Operator Interface (option code M4) if local configuration buttons are required.
(10) Requires Transmitter Output code S with either Materials of Construction code 22 or 23.
(12) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 if needed.
(13) Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if needed.
www.rosemount.com 7
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Specifications
Performance Specifications Functional Specifications
For zero-based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, 316L
Table 2. 2088 Range Values
SST isolating diaphragm.
Minimum Upper Lower Lower(1)
Reference Accuracy Range
Span (URL) (LRL) (LRL) (Gage)
±0.075% of calibrated span. Includes combined effects of
0.60 psi 30.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability 1
(41,37 mbar) (2,07 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
±0.065% of calibrated span (high accuracy option - P8)
3.00 psi 150.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
For spans less than 10:1, accuracy = 2
(206,85 mbar) (10,34 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
16.00 psi 800.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
± 0.009 ------------- % of Span
URL 3
Span (1,11 bar) (55,16 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
80.00 psi 4000.00 psi 0 psia –14.70 psig
4
Ambient Temperature Effect (5,52 bar) (275,79 bar) (0 bar) (–1,01 bar)
Expressed as a total effect per 50 °F (28 °C)
(1) Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.70 psia (1,01 bar-a).
Total effect includes zero and span effects.
± (0.15% URL + 0.15% of span)
Output
Stability Code S: 4–20 mA
Ranges 2-4: ±0.10% of URL for 3 years Code N: 1-5 Vdc, low power
Range 1: ±0.10% of URL for 1 year (Outputs are directly proportional to the input pressure)
Less than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt change in voltage Service
at the transmitter terminals. Liquid, gas, and vapor applications
General Specifications
Tested to IEC 801-3
8 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
1000
Silicone fill sensor: –40 to 250 °F (–40 to 121 °C)(2)
Inert fill sensor: –22 to 250 °F (–30 to 121 °C)(2)
500 Operating
Region Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the
ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio. For example, for process
0
temperature of 195 °F (91 °C), new ambient temperature limit is
10.5 20 30 42.4 equal to 170 °F (77 °C). This can be determined as follows: (195
Voltage (Vdc) °F - 185 °F) x 1.5 = 15 °F, 185 °F - 15 °F = 170 °F
The Field communicator requires a minimum loop resistance of
250W for communication. Humidity Limits
0–100% relative humidity
Indication Volumetric Displacement
Optional two line LCD/LOI Display. Less than 0.0005 in3 (0,008 cm3)
Zero and Span Adjustment Requirements Damping
Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range
Analog output response time to a step change is user-selectable
limits stated in Table 2 on page 8. Span must be greater than
from 0 to 60 seconds for one time constant. Software damping
or equal to the minimum span stated in Table 2 on page 8.
is in addition to sensor module response time.
Local Operator Interface
Turn-on Time
The LOI utilizes a 2 button menu with internal and external
2.0 seconds, no warm-up required
configuration buttons. Internal buttons are always configured
for Local Operator Interface. External Buttons can be configured Transmitter Security
for either LOI, (option code M4), Analog Zero and Span (option Activating the transmitter security function prevents changes to
code D4) or Digital Zero Trim (option code DZ) for LOI the transmitter configuration, including local zero and span
configuration menu. adjustments. Security is activated by an internal switch.
Current Draw Failure Mode Alarm
Output Code N: 3 mA. If self-diagnostics detect a sensor or microprocessor failure, the
Overpressure Limits analog signal will be driven either high or low to alert the user.
High or low failure mode is user-selectable with a jumper on the
Range 1: 120 psig max
transmitter. The values to which the transmitter drives its
All other ranges: two times the URL
output in failure mode depend on whether it is
Burst Pressure factory-configured to standard or NAMUR-compliant operation.
11,000 psi for all ranges The values for each are as follows:
Standard Operation
Zero Elevation and Suppression
Zero can be suppressed between atmosphere for gage Output Code Linear Output Fail High Fail Low
transmitters or 0 psia for absolute transmitters and upper range S 3.9 I 20.8 I 21.75 mA I 3.75 mA
limit, provided the calibrated span is equal to or greater than the N 0.97 V 5.2 V 5.4 V V 0.95 V
minimum span, and the upper range value does not exceed the
NAMUR-Compliant Operation
upper range limit.
Output Code Linear Output Fail High Fail Low
Dynamic Performance
S 3.8 I 20.5 I 22.5 mA I 3.6 mA
Total Response Time: 145 milliseconds
Update rate: 20 times per second minimum
(2) 220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures
below 0.5 psia.
www.rosemount.com 9
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Physical Specifications
Electrical Connections
/ –14 NPT, M20 1.5 (CM20), or
1 2
Process Connections
1
/2–14 NPT female, DIN 16288 G 1/2 male, RC 1/2 female
(PT 1/2 female), M20 1.5 (CM20) male
Process-Wetted Parts
Isolating Diaphragm
316L SST (UNS S31603), Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276)
Process Connector
316L stainless steel CF-3M (Cast version of 316L SST, material
per ASTM_A743) or Alloy C-276
Non-Wetted Parts
Electronics Housing
Low-copper aluminum, NEMA 4X, IP65, IP67,
CSA enclosure Type 4X
Paint for Aluminum Housing
Polyurethane
Cover O-rings
Buna-N
Fill Fluid
Silicone or inert fill
Weight
Output Code S and N: Approximately 2.44 lb (1, 11 kg)
10 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
Product Certifications
Approved Manufacturing Locations Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Rosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota, USA All CSA hazardous approved transmitters are certified per
Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co. — Wessling, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01-2003.
Germany
C6 Explosion-Proof, Intrinsically Safe, Dust Ignition-Proof and
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific
Class I Division 2
Private Limited — Singapore
Applicable Standards: CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 0-M91, CSA
Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, China
Std. C22.2 No. 25 - 1966, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 30 - M1986,
European Directive Information CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 94 - M91, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 142
- M1987, CAN/CSA Std. C22.2 No. 157-92, CSA Std. C22.2
The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European
No. 213 - M1987, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01-2003.
directives for this product can be found at
Markings: Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B,
www.rosemount.com. A hard copy may be obtained by
C, and D.
contacting an Emerson Process Management representative.
Dust-Ignition-Proof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G,
ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) Class III.
Emerson Process Management complies with the ATEX Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Directive. Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and
D. Temperature Code: T3C.
European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) Enclosure Type 4X. Factory sealed. Single Seal. See control
2088/2090 Pressure Transmitters drawing 02088-1024.
— Sound Engineering Practice European Certifications
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (2004/108/EC) ED ATEX Flameproof
EN 61326-1:2006 Certification No.: KEMA97ATEX2378X
Applicable Standards: EN60079-0:2006, EN60079-1:2007,
EN60079-26:2007
Hazardous Locations Certifications
Markings: II 1/2 G
North American Certifications Ex d IIC T6 (-40 °C Tamb 40 °C); T4 (-40 °C Tamb 80 °C)
FM Approvals 1180
Vmax = 36 (with Output Code S)
E5 Explosion-proof and Dust Ignition Proof Vmax = 14 (with Output Code N)
Certificate No.: 1V2A8.AE
Special Conditions for Safe Use (x):
Applicable Standards: FM Class 3600 - 1998,
FM Class 3615 - 1989, FM Class 3810 - 1989 1. The cable and conduit entry devices shall be of a certified
Markings: Explosion-proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, flameproof type Ex d, suitable for the conditions of use and
C, and D. Dust Ignition-Proof for Class II/III, Division 1, correctly installed.
Groups E, F and G. 2. With the use of conduit entries a sealing device shall be
Temperature Code: T5 (Ta = -40 °C to + 85 °C) Factory provided immediately on the entrance thereto.
Sealed, Enclosure Type 4X. 3. Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable Ex d
For input parameters see control drawing 02088-1018. certified blanking elements.
4. Suitable heat-resisting cables shall be used when the
I5 Intrinsically Safe and Non-Incendive ambient temperature at the cable or conduit entries
Certificate No.: 0V9A7.AX exceed 65 °C.
Applicable Standards: FM Class 3600 - 1998, FM Class 3610 5. This device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation,
- 2010, FM Class 3811 - 2004, FM Class 3810 - 1989. maintenance, and use shall take into account the
Markings: Intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be
Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation
and Class III, Division 1 and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure
Temperature Code: T4 (Ta = 70 °C) in accordance with safety during its expected lifetime.
Rosemount drawing 02088-1018. 6. For information on the dimensions of the flameproof joints
Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. the manufacturer shall be contacted.
Temperature Code: T4 (Ta = 85 °C), Enclosure Type 4X.
For input parameters see control drawing 02088-1018.
www.rosemount.com 11
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Special Conditions For Safe Use (x): K1 I1, N1, ED, and ND combination
1. When fitted with a transient suppression terminal block, K2 I2 and E2 combination
the model 2088 is incapable of passing the 500V isolation
test. This must be taken into account during installation. K5 E5 and I5 combination
2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a K6 C6, I1, and ED combination
protective polyurethane paint finish; however, care should
be taken to protect it from impact or abrasion if located in K7 I7, N7, E7, and NK combination
a zone 0 environment.
KB K5 and C6 combination
E2 INMETRO Flameproof (2088 Series only)
Certification No.: CEPEL 97.0076 KH K5, ED, and I1 combination
Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5 Gb
T6 (-20 °C Tamb +40 °C); T5 (-20 °C Tamb +60 °C)
China Certifications
I3 China Intrinsic Safety
Certification No.: GYJ111063X (2088 Series); GYJ111065X
(2090 Series)
Applicable Standards: GB3836.1-2000, GB3836.4-2000
Markings: Ex ia IIC T4/T5
T4 (-55 °C Tamb +70 °C);T5 (-55 °C Tamb +40 °C)
Table 5. Input Parameters
Ui = 30 V
Ii= 200 mA
Pi= 0.9 W
Ci = 0.012 F
www.rosemount.com 13
Rosemount 2088 October 2013
Dimensional Drawings
Rosemount 2088
0.75 (20)
5.13 (130) Certifications
Clearance for
Cover 4.29 (109) Optional Tag
Display Cover 3.85 (98)
Removal
2 ½–14 NPT(1)
Conduit
Connection
Transmitter 4.68
Terminal Circuitry (118)
Connections
5.87
(149)
2 ¼–20 UNC-2B
Mounting Holes
(1)
M20 1.5 Female (CM20), PG 13.5, and G 1/2 Female (PF 1/2 Female)
also available as options.
½–14 NPT Female
Process Connection
(See Ordering Table for other options.)
3.95 (100)
6.15
(156)
2.81
(71)
2.81 (71) 5
/16× 1½ Bolts
for panel mounting
(not supplied)
1/ × 11/ Bolts 1/4× 11/4 Bolts
4 4
for transmitter mounting for transmitter mounting
(not supplied) (not supplied)
1.42 (36)
1.42 (36)
14 www.rosemount.com
October 2013 Rosemount 2088
www.rosemount.com 15
Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet
00813-0100-4690, Rev NB October 2013
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per CABINE
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for CABINET
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di ualsiasi a hi a o i pia to oleoid auli o e appo tata alla ualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità nel circuito. Non va dimenticato che è lo stesso
fluido a p ovvede e alla lu ifi azio e dei o po e ti dell’i pia to.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i di ato e di i tasa e to posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 9 -/55
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 10 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 11 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 12 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 13 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 14 -/55
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 15 -/55
STOP VALVE PKH-DN10-442A
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 16 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 17 -/55
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 18 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 19 -/55
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.2.B.F.F1.A10.N
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 20 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 21 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 22 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 23 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 24 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 25 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 26 -/55
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR HG031/210/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 27 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 28 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 29 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 30 -/55
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 31 -/55
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 32 -/55
RELIEF VALVE LPA30/D–N INOX
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 33 -/55
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 34 -/55
3/2NC POPPET TYPE SOLENOID VALVE DLEH–3A–X125DC/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 35 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 36 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 37 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 38 -/55
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITH PCS2–GH–40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 39 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 40 -/55
BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.244
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 41 -/55
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.243
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 42 -/55
SOL.VALVE WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONICS DHZO–TEB–SN-NP–071 –L5/F/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 43 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 44 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 45 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 46 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 47 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 48 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 49 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 50 -/55
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50 DN63 1/ 4G RADIAL 0/160BARG/PSI SAF. GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 51 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 52 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 53 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 54 -/55
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021255 Pages - 55 -/55
(REVA DWG. 19.021.255) SEZ:A-A
OIL RETURN LINE 1"SAE3000
B 3/4"NPT
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY
M8
N 2 HOLES 41
N 3 HOLES 26
N 1 HOLE 33 286
N 1 HOLE 21 A 3/4"NPT
OIL SUPPLY LINE 1"SAE3000
BOLT-EYES M10 FOR LIFTING
B SEZ:B-B
ECU
22 519A 519B
621A
383
970
379
39A
424B 424A
352A
1718
621B 424C
359 352B 23
351B
748
351A
A A
8
400 B 770
(N 4 HOLE 15)
460
820
528 MASS: 240Kg
1140
413
395
850
356
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
1
428 Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
Drawing Number
SINGLE ACTING HYDR AULICACTUATOR
FOR REGULATING SERVICE
2112750020
scale date
+OPENING FAIL SAFE ACTION 1:17 04.03.16
585 24 372 526A 526B drm chkd
ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- NV
HI-BAR MJ18
96 Boss Mount Safety Screen
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
CMP PRODUCTS CABLE GLAND CATALOGUE CMP
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per CABINE
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for CABINET
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di ualsiasi a hi a o i pia to oleoid auli o e appo tata alla ualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità el i uito. No va di e ti ato he è lo stesso
fluido a provvedere alla lubrificazione dei compone ti dell’i pia to.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i di ato e di i tasa e to posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 9 -/55
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 10 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 11 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 12 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 13 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 14 -/55
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 15 -/55
STOP VALVE PKH-DN10-442A (-40°C)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 16 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 17 -/55
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 18 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 19 -/55
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.3.B.F.F1.A10.N
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 20 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 21 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 22 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 23 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 24 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 25 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 26 -/55
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR KG031/210/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 27 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 28 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 29 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 30 -/55
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 31 -/55
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 32 -/55
RELIEF VALVE 49.020.238
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 33 -/55
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 34 -/55
3/2NC POPPET TYPE SOLENOID VALVE DLEH–3A–X125DC/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 35 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 36 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 37 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 38 -/55
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITH PCS2–GH–40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 39 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 40 -/55
BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.246
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 41 -/55
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.245
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 42 -/55
SOL.VALVE WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONICS DKZOR–TEB–SN-NP–171 –L5/F/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 43 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 44 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 45 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 46 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 47 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 48 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 49 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 50 -/55
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50 DN63 1/4G RADIAL 0/160BARG/PSI SAF. GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 51 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 52 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 53 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 54 -/55
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021256 Pages - 55 -/55
(REVA DWG. 19.021.256) SEZ:A-A
OIL RETURN LINE 1 1/4"SAE3000
B 1"NPT
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY
M8
N 2 HOLES 41
N 3 HOLES 26
N 1 HOLE 33 286
N 1 HOLE 21 A 1"NPT
OIL SUPPLY LINE 1 1/4"SAE3000
BOLT-EYES M10 FOR LIFTING
B SEZ:B-B
ECU
22 519A 519B
621A
383
970
379
39A
424B 424A
352A
1718
621B 424C
359 352B
23
748
351A 351B
A A
8
400 770
(N 4 HOLE 15)
460
820
1140 MASS: 240Kg
528
413
395
3 REVISED CAD ONLY
850
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
356 1
Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
SINGLE ACTING HYDR AULICACTUATOR Drawing Number
428 2112750030
FOR REGULATING SERVICE
scale date
+OPENING/CLOSING FAIL SAFE ACTION 1:17 04.03.16
585 24 372 526B 526A drm chkd
ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- NV
HI-BAR MJ18
96 Boss Mount Safety Screen
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
CMP PRODUCTS CABLE GLAND CATALOGUE CMP
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per CABINE
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for CABINET
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di ualsiasi a hi a o i pia to oleoid auli o e appo tata alla ualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità el i uito. No va di e ti ato he è lo stesso
fluido a provvedere alla lubrificazione dei compone ti dell’i pia to.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i di ato e di i tasa e to posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 9 -/55
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 10 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 11 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 12 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 13 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 14 -/55
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 15 -/55
STOP VALVE PKH-DN10-442A (-40°C)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 16 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 17 -/55
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 18 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 19 -/55
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.3.B.F.F1.A10.N
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 20 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 21 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 22 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 23 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 24 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 25 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 26 -/55
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR KG031/210/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 27 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 28 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 29 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 30 -/55
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 31 -/55
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 32 -/55
RELIEF VALVE 49.020.238
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 33 -/55
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 34 -/55
3/2NC POPPET TYPE SOLENOID VALVE DLEH–3A–X125DC/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 35 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 36 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 37 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 38 -/55
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITH PCS2–GH–40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 39 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 40 -/55
BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.246
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 41 -/55
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.245
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 42 -/55
SOL.VALVE WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONICS DKZOR–TEB–SN-NP–171 –L5/F/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 43 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 44 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 45 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 46 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 47 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 48 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 49 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 50 -/55
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50 DN63 1/4G RADIAL 0/160BARG/PSI SAF. GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 51 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 52 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 53 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 54 -/55
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021257 Pages - 55 -/55
(REVA DWG. 19.021.257) SEZ:A-A
OIL RETURN LINE 1 1/4"SAE3000
B 1"NPT
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY
M8
N 2 HOLES 41
N 3 HOLES 26
N 1 HOLE 33 286
N 1 HOLE 21 A 1"NPT
OIL SUPPLY LINE 1 1/4"SAE3000
BOLT-EYES M10 FOR LIFTING
B SEZ:B-B
ECU
22 519A 519B
621A
383
970
379
39A
424B 424A
352A
1718
621B 424C
359 352B
23
748
351A 351B
A A
8
400 770
(N 4 HOLE 15)
460
820
1140 MASS: 240Kg
528
413
395
3 REVISED CAD ONLY
850
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
356 1
Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
Drawing Number
428 SINGLE ACTING HYDR AULICACTUATOR
FOR REGULATING SERVICE
2112750040
scale date
+OPENING FAIL SAFE ACTION 1:17 04.03.16
585 24 372 526B 526A drm chkd
ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- NV
HI-BAR MJ18
96 Boss Mount Safety Screen
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
CMP PRODUCTS CABLE GLAND CATALOGUE CMP
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per CABINE
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for CABINET
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di ualsiasi a hi a o i pia to oleoid auli o e appo tata alla ualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità el i uito. No va di e ti ato he è lo stesso
fluido a provvedere alla lubrificazione dei compone ti dell’i pia to.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i di ato e di i tasa e to posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 9 -/55
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 10 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 11 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 12 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 13 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 14 -/55
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 15 -/55
STOP VALVE PKH-DN10-442A (-40°C)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 16 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 17 -/55
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 18 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 19 -/55
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.2.B.F.F1.A10.N
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 20 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 21 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 22 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 23 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 24 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 25 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 26 -/55
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR HG031/210/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 27 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 28 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 29 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 30 -/55
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 31 -/55
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 32 -/55
RELIEF VALVE LPA30/D–N INOX
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 33 -/55
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 34 -/55
3/2NC POPPET TYPE SOLENOID VALVE DLEH–3A–X125DC/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 35 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 36 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 37 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 38 -/55
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITH PCS2–GH–40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 39 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 40 -/55
BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.244
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 41 -/55
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.243
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 42 -/55
SOL.VALVE WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONICS DHZO–TEB–SN-NP–071 –L1/F/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 43 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 44 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 45 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 46 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 47 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 48 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 49 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 50 -/55
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50 DN63 1/ 4G RADIAL 0/160BARG/PSI SAF. GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 51 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 52 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 53 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 54 -/55
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021258 Pages - 55 -/55
(REVA DWG. 19.021.258) SEZ:A-A
OIL RETURN LINE 1"SAE3000
B 3/4"NPT
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY
M8
N 2 HOLES 41
N 3 HOLES 26
N 1 HOLE 33 286
N 1 HOLE 21 A 3/4"NPT
OIL SUPPLY LINE 1"SAE3000
BOLT-EYES M10 FOR LIFTING
B SEZ:B-B
ECU
22 519A 519B
621A
383
970
379
39A
424B 424A
352A
1718
621B 424C
359 352B
23
351B
748
351A
A A
8
400 770
(N 4 HOLE 15)
460
820
528 MASS: 240Kg
1140
413
395
850
356
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
1
428 Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
Drawing Number
SINGLE ACTING HYDR AULICACTUATOR
FOR REGULATING SERVICE
2112750050
scale date
+CLOSING FAIL SAFE ACTION 1:17 04.03.16
585 24 372 526A 526B drm chkd
ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- NV
HI-BAR MJ18
96 Boss Mount Safety Screen
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
CMP PRODUCTS CABLE GLAND CATALOGUE CMP
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per CABINE
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for CABINET
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di ualsiasi a hi a o i pia to oleoid auli o e appo tata alla ualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità el i uito. No va di e ti ato he è lo stesso
fluido a provvedere alla lubrificazione dei compone ti dell’i pia to.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i di ato e di i tasa e to posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 9 -/55
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 10 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 11 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 12 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 13 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 14 -/55
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 15 -/55
STOP VALVE PKH-DN10-442A (-40°C)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 16 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 17 -/55
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 18 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 19 -/55
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.2.B.F.F1.A10.N
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 20 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 21 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 22 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 23 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 24 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 25 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 26 -/55
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR HG031/210/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 27 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 28 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 29 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 30 -/55
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 31 -/55
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 32 -/55
RELIEF VALVE LPA30/D–N INOX
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 33 -/55
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 34 -/55
3/2NC POPPET TYPE SOLENOID VALVE DLEH–3A–X125DC/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 35 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 36 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 37 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 38 -/55
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITH PCS2–GH–40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 39 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 40 -/55
BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.244
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 41 -/55
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.243
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 42 -/55
SOL.VALVE WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONICS DHZO–TEB–SN-NP–071 –L3/F/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 43 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 44 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 45 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 46 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 47 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 48 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 49 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 50 -/55
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50 DN63 1/ 4G RADIAL 0/160BARG/PSI SAF. GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 51 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 52 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 53 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 54 -/55
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021259 Pages - 55 -/55
(REVA DWG. 19.021.259) SEZ:A-A
OIL RETURN LINE 1"SAE3000
B 3/4"NPT
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY
M8
N 2 HOLES 41
N 3 HOLES 26
N 1 HOLE 33 286
N 1 HOLE 21 A 3/4"NPT
OIL SUPPLY LINE 1"SAE3000
BOLT-EYES M10 FOR LIFTING
B SEZ:B-B
ECU
22 519A 519B
621A
383
970
379
39A
424B 424A
352A
1718
621B 424C
359 352B 23
351B
748
351A
A A
8
400 770
(N 4 HOLE 15)
460
820
528 MASS: 240Kg
1140
413
395
850
356
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
1
428 Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
SINGLE ACTING HYDR AULICACTUATOR Drawing Number
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
CMP PRODUCTS CABLE GLAND CATALOGUE CMP
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
LIBRETTO USO E MANUTENZIONE per CABINE
MAINTENANCE USE HANDBOOK for CABINET
Cliente/Customer:
BIFFI ITALIA S.R.L.
PROGETTO/PROJECT:
ENEL CILE – CERRO PABELLON
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
L’affida ilità di ualsiasi a hi a o i pia to oleoid auli o e appo tata alla ualità ed allo stato
del fluido di t as issio e ed all’asse za di i pu ità el i uito. No va di e ti ato he è lo stesso
fluido a provvedere alla lubrificazione dei compone ti dell’i pia to.
A questo scopo i manifold sono stati sottoposti ad opportuno lavaggio con olio minerale di qualità,
con particolare attenzione alla pulizia delle cartucce filtro.
Eseguito il totale svuotamento del fluido dalle apparecchiature, le bocche di collegamento sono
state chiuse con tappi di protezione che non vanno tolti se non al momento del collegamento
all’attuato e.
The reliability of any hydraulic component or system depends to a significant degree on the quality
and condition of the fluid utilized and the exclusion of contaminants from the hydraulic circuit.
It must also be remembered that the various components of the system are also lubricated by this
same hydraulic fluid.
To this end, the manifold has been flushed with a superior quality mineral oil following works
assembly, special care being taken to ensure that the filter elements are completely clean.
With all traces of the flushing oil drained from the components, the work ports are sealed off with
protective caps that should not be removed until the moment of connection to the service.
MANUTENZIONE / MAINTENANCE
PREMESSA / PREFACE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
When a hydraulic system stops or breaks down, the cause more often than not is that components
have caused to operate as the result of seizure or mechanical failure. Trouble of this nature occurs
when a hydraulic fluid is overused and becomes spent, losing its original chemical and physical
properties. In effect, the presence of particles and microscopic particulate matter entrained in the
fluid must inevitably lead to wear. Left to circulate in the system, such particles will act ultimately
as an abrasive compound, scoring the surfaces with which the fluid is permanently in contact and
generating additional contaminants as a result; and the more sophisticated and complex the
equipment installed, needless to say, the greater the damage. Once the system has been
commissioned, maintenance will consist essentially in a series of minor operations (mainly
inspections and checks) which must be performed on a regular basis if maximum benefit is to be
gained. Accordingly, it is extremely important that such operations are scheduled and recorded on
a chart, and that a separate chart is kept for each power unit. The following schedule is
recommended.
Regular cleaning will facilitate the discovery and early repair of any leaks that may develop.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
E' difficile stabilire a priori la durata media di tali componenti, oltre la quale ritenere economica
la loro sostituzione.
Non potendo programmare dei collaudi a scadenze prestabilite, per ovvie ragioni di operatività
degli attuatori, si dovranno registrare le eventuali variazioni nel tempo delle caratteristiche
tecniche di progetto e/o di collaudo. Queste variazioni possono consistere nell'allungamento dei
tempi di apertura/chiusura delle valvole e di diminuzione della pressione di esercizio.
La loro sostituzione diventa quindi programmabile nel momento in cui si presentano le prime
variazioni.
It is difficult to forecast the average lifetime of these components, in terms of a balance between
economy and the need for replacement.
As tests obviously cannot be conducted to a predetermined schedule, given the dissimilar
conditions under which different actuators operate, a record should be kept of any departures
from nominal design and/or test parameters observed over time, typically slower opening/closing
movements in the case of the valves, and lower operating pressure.
The initial appearance of a drift from nominal parameters will provide an indicator to the
appropriate time of replacement.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
PREMESSA / PREFACE
I dispositivi di si u ezza dell’i pia to so o app ese tati, dall’i di ato e di i tasa e to posto sui
filtri.
E’ e essa io, o f e ue za e sile, o t olla e uesti dispositivi pe evita e da i se si ili a
tutto l’i pia to.
The safety devices incorporated into the system include, the filter blockage indicator.
These devices should be checked once a month to ensure that any faults or malfunctions are
discovered early, thereby preventing extensive and costly damage to the system as a whole.
A indicator associated with the filters indicates the degree to which impurities have accumulated
in the element.
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
11) Pressione d'esercizio elevata - Sforzi anormali sugli alberi e sugli steli
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 9 -/55
MICRO SWITCH ZCKJ18H29 + ZCKE056 + ZCKY13
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 10 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 11 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 12 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 13 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 14 -/55
DUST ESCLUDER SFEX ½”
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 15 -/55
STOP VALVE PKH-DN10-442A (-40°C)
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 16 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 17 -/55
NEEDLE VALVE FT 2290-14/MFQ
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 18 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 19 -/55
HYDRAULIC FILTER FHB065.2.B.F.F1.A10.N
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 20 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 21 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 22 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 23 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 24 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 25 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 26 -/55
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE REGULATOR HG031/210/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 27 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 28 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 29 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 30 -/55
CHECK VALVE CAE20/P
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 31 -/55
SHUTTLE VALVE CCI20
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 32 -/55
RELIEF VALVE LPA30/D–N INOX
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 33 -/55
HYDRAULIC PILOT/SPRING POPPET TYPE VALVE 49.020.132
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 34 -/55
3/2NC POPPET TYPE SOLENOID VALVE DLEH–3A–X125DC/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 35 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 36 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 37 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 38 -/55
ELECTRIC PRESSURE SWITH PCS2–GH–40/250
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 39 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 40 -/55
BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.244
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 41 -/55
UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOW REGULATOR 49.020.243
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 42 -/55
SOL.VALVE WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONICS DHZO–TEB–SN-NP–071 –L1/F/BT
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 43 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 44 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 45 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 46 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 47 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 48 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 49 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 50 -/55
PRESSURE GAUGE 233.50 DN63 1/ 4G RADIAL 0/160BARG/PSI SAF. GLASS GLYCERINE
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 51 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 52 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 53 -/55
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 54 -/55
SCHEMA IDRAULICO - DISEGNO D’ASSIME
OPERATING DIAGRAM – LAYOUT DRAWING
Via Isacchi, 3 - 42124 Reggio Emilia (Italy) - Tel. (0522) 305902 - 381830 Fax (0522) 381831 e-mail: oleoreva@oleoreva.it
CAPITALE SOCIALE € 0.9 0,00 i.v. R.E.A. N. 145768 ISCR.REG.IMPR. DI RE, CODICE FISCALE E PARTITA IVA n. 00642890354
IOM_14481 _19021260 Pages - 55 -/55
(REVA DWG. 19.021.260) SEZ:A-A
OIL RETURN LINE 1"SAE3000
B 3/4"NPT
ELECTRIC CABLE ENTRY
M8
N 2 HOLES 41
N 3 HOLES 26
N 1 HOLE 33 286
N 1 HOLE 21 A 3/4"NPT
OIL SUPPLY LINE 1"SAE3000
BOLT-EYES M10 FOR LIFTING
B SEZ:B-B
ECU
22 519A 519B
621A
383
970
379
39A
424B 424A
352A
1718
621B 424C
359 352B 23
351B
748
351A
A A
8
400 770
(N 4 HOLE 15)
460
820
528 MASS: 240Kg
1140
413
395
850
356
2 MODIFICARE SOLO CON CAD
1
428 Rev. Date Drm Chkd Description
Drawing Number
SINGLE ACTING HYDR AULICACTUATOR
FOR REGULATING SERVICE
2112750070
scale date
+OPENING FAIL SAFE ACTION 1:17 04.03.16
585 24 372 526A 526B drm chkd
ATTUATORI E SISTEMI DI CONTROLLO
VALVE ACTUATORS AND CONTROL SYSTEM -OVERAL DIMENSION- NV
HI-BAR MJ18
96 Boss Mount Safety Screen
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB1803110M 6 520 22
FSHB1803115M 6 520 47
H
FSHB1803120M
FSHB1803140M
6
6
520
520
88
527
FSHB1803150M 6 520 1208
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB1803110M 0.004 100 170 860 20 970
FSHB1803115M 0.006 150 170 860 9 320
FSHB1803120M 0.008 200 170 860 5 245
FSHB1803140M 0.015 380 206 860 1 810
FSHB1803150M 0.020 500 206 860 1 015
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
HI-BAR MJ20
Boss Mount Safety Screen 97
PERFORMANCE
LEE LOHM BURST / COLLAPSE
ROB
PART RATE PRESSURE
NUMBER
NUMBER (nom.) bar (min.)
FSHB2003115M 5 520 64
FSHB2003120M 5 520 120
FSHB2003140M 5 520 718 H
FSHB2003150M 5 520 1642
SPECIFICATIONS (nom.)
LEE HOLE HOLE OPEN TOTAL NUMBER
PART SIZE SIZE AREA AREA OF
NUMBER in µm mm2 mm2 HOLES
FSHB2003115M 0.006 150 230 1160 12 610
FSHB2003120M 0.008 200 230 1160 7 095
FSHB2003140M 0.015 380 280 1160 2 470
FSHB2003150M 0.020 500 280 1160 1 380
MATERIAL
PART MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FINISH
Screen 15-5PH CRES AMS 5659 Passivate
CMP PRODUCTS CABLE GLAND CATALOGUE CMP
A2 Single Seal Industrial Cable Gland Mechanical Classifications* Impact = Level 8, Retention = Class D
For all types of Unarmoured & Braid Armoured Enclosure Protection IK10 to IEC 62262 (20 joules) Brass & Stainless Steel only
Cables
CSA Certificate 1211841
Cable Gland Material Brass, Electroless Nickel Plated Brass, Stainless Steel, Aluminium
Note : * Mechanical & Electrical Classifications applied as per IEC 62444 & EN 62444
Note : ** Refer to page 7 or www.cmp-products.com for further information on Ingress Protection Ratings
It should be noted that although the addition of a shroud may aid the process of keeping the surface of the cable gland free from the build up
of dust or dirt, this does not necessarily improve the Ingress Protection rating of the installed cable gland. Generally cable glands are tested
for ingress protection without a shroud being present. In certain conditions the addition of a shroud or other form of external covering may
retain unwanted moisture creating a greater threat of penetration than that which it is intended to prevent. In such cases a CMP Deluge
Proof cable gland is recommended which negates the need for the use of a shroud and protects the critical migration paths into the interior
of the cable gland.
Alternative colours including Red, Blue and White are available to suit a wide variety of customer requirements, other colours are available
on request.
The table below details the specific CMP cable gland types and their associated groups
It should be noted that some of the cable gland types shown in the table above may have been withdrawn but are included for historical
reference purposes as these may still be circulating through the supply chain.
1 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
Cable Glands, Connectors and Accessories Exd/Exe For Worldwide Ap... http://www.cmp-products.com/Shrouds
CABLE GLANDS
CABLE CLEATS
2 di 3 01/02/2016 16:29
“OLGAS-H-MHP + CONTROL CABINET”
M9899 Technical documentation
© Copyright by BIFFI Italia srl. All right reserved. BIFFI Acknow. 15/1981